← All chapters

§12 Syntax

Syntax encompasses the rules of Pine at the phrase level. This section describes how phrases are organised, the function of the nominal case system, verbal moods, word order, relative clauses, conjunctions, indirect and direct interrogatives, modality, topic marking, concord and negation and more.

§12.1 Grammatical Cases & Their Use

Nouns, adjectives, pronouns and numerals assume different forms depending on their grammatical function in the phrase, which is indicated by the use of grammatical cases. The Pine case alignment system is called diplologous, or active-accusative, characterised by having two distinct subject cases but only one object case.

diplologous case alignment
subjectobject
agentivityagentiveunagentiveØ
caseactivepatientiveaccusative
formasematicsematic

Alternatively, the alignment of Pine subject and object cases can be explained as a function of function, agentivity and form:

subject/objectagentivitycaseformfunction
subjectagentiveactiveasematicagentive subject
subjectunagentivepatientivesematicunagentive subject
objectaccusativesematicobject

Pine distinguishes nine different cases, which are the active, patientive, accusative, genitive, inessive, illative, elative, comitative and the essive case. However, three of these nine cases are distinguished only in function and not in form – the patientive, the accusative and the genitive cases all have the same form. Certain nouns have special genitive forms, mostly human possessors. Because these three cases share a single form, they are often referred to as the sematic form, while the active case is often called the asematic (or unmarked) form. Moreover, the essive case is generally grouped with the asematic as it is not affected by diaphony or apophony. The inessive, illative, elative and comitative are grouped together as locative cases (even though the comitative very often does not have a purely locative meaning), and both sematic and locative form groups are jointly referred to as oblique cases.

caseform group and functiongeneral function
activeasematicsubject casesagentive subject
patientivesematicunagentive subject
accusativeobject caseobject
genitiveoblique casespossessor
inessivelocativestatic location
illativemovement to, on
elativemovement from, off
comitativeaccompaniment, movement along
essiveasematicstate, function

Each case has a singular and a plural form. This means that for each declinable word, be it a noun, an adjective, a pronoun or a numeral, there will be 14 different forms, although in some cases two forms may be identitcal, namely the sematic and comitative singular.

§12.1.1 The Active Case

The active case is the default citation case. It is also called the asematic form, as it is unmarked. Beyond being the reference form, it serves as the case for agentive subjects of verbs. Generally, agentive subjects have some degree of volition, control, will or consciousness when acting. Some verbs have obligate agentive subjects, such as the copula (both the predicate and the subject), all adjectival predicative verbs, and a great number of other verbs, especially so with animate subjects. The asematic form of words ends in either a consonant (-n, -t, -ts, -k, -ḳ, -s, -ṡ, -l, or -r) or a tense vowel (-i, -u, -a or -y), although a small number of nouns in -ů do exist as alternative forms to nouns in -y, and a handful of monosyllabic nouns end in -uo, for example bįuo ‘little boy’.

Examples of the active case are given below:

(1)laįįut ṃiġtoset ƛủlat mi ỉskegi nỉ
Tuulat mi iiski-gi nii
[ˈlajːʊt ˈm̥ɪxːtɔːsɛt ˈt͡ɬuːlat mɪ ˈiːsːkɛːgɪ niː]
laįįut ṃiġta-set t-lủl-at mi ỉski-Ø-gi nỉ
quite loud-adv 3a.ag-speak-nloc.prs.pl det woman-act-pl pron.3a.pl
‘the women are talking quite loudly’
(2)kinullut tammegami mi kekƛinget ṇuokku na
kinullut tammi-gami mi ki-kTiN-i-t n-aa-kku na
[ˈkɪːnʊlːʊt ˈtamːɛgɑːmɪ mɪ ˈkɛkːt͡ɬɪŋːɛt ˈn̥ʊu̯ʰkʊ nɑː]
kinul=lut Ø-tammeg-ami mi kekƛinget ṇuokku-Ø na
unusually 3i.ag-be.big-3i.prs det gnarled tree-act pron.3i
‘this gnarled tree is unusually big’
(3)nả oįįa mittsunnit mitṇut buknu na
naa u-jja mic-cunnit mit-n-ut p-uknu na
[næː ˈɔjːɑ ˈmɪt͡sːʊnːɪt ˈmɪtːn̥ʊt ˈbʊʔkŋʊ nɑː]
nả o=įįa mitts-unnit mitṇ=ut buknu-Ø na
cop.nloc.prs there.iness.dist one-com more stain-act pron.3i
‘there is one more stain over there’
ỉ ṇigaulkava mi na-t de‘this was my village’
nả vỏskveha roggot mi kaltṡin įo‘a kaltṡin is a male moose’
migvyt beykit nukkis ṇibỉṡkevagi‘my children don’t eat mushrooms’
ƛisƛaƛƛan mi gvaiƛisƛi įo‘the starling is singing’
agilỏmat giḷḷit hikva bįuḷḷogi‘good boys go to sleep early’

§12.1.2 The Patientive Case

The patientive case is in the sematic form, along with the accusative and most genitive forms, and its function is to mark the unagentive subject of a verb. Unagentive subjects usually have a lack of control, volition, will or consciousness or may be the recipient of a sensory experience, or otherwise function as an experiencer rather than an actor. Even though the patientive case is a subject case, it is never the citation or reference form of a word, but rather the marked form. All translative verbs have unagentive subjects, as well as a large number of obligately unagentive verbs, and a significant number of verbs whose meaning can either lend itself to both agentive or unagentive subjects, or have a different meaning depending of the agentivity of its subject.

Although the patientive case can have many endings, it is safe to assume that any declinable word ending in a lax vowel will be in the sematic form.

Below are examples of the patientive case:

(4)tunnoset sƛỏmat sissen mi įaktsut ỉ
tunnu-si-t sTu-u-mat sissi-n mi jakc-ut ii/
[ˈtʊnːɔːsɛt ˈst͡ɬoːmat ˈsɪsːɛn mɪ ˈjakːt͡sʊh iː]
tunnu-set s-lỏm-at siss=en mi įakts-ut ỉ
heavy-adv 3a.unag-sleep-nloc.prs.pl upstairs det woman-pat.pl pron.3a.pl
‘the women are fast asleep upstairs’
(5)kirpṃisƛummi mi kalttṡema įo
kir-p-misTummi mi kalc-ci-ma ju-
[ˈkɪr̥ːpm̥ɪsːt͡ɬʊmːɪ mɪ ˈkalːt͡ʃɛːmɑ jɔː]
Ø-kirpṃisƛuθ-vi mi kalttṡe-ma įo
3a.unag.pst-go.into.rut-nloc.pst det male.moose-pat pron.3a
‘the male moose went into rut’
(6)kemmiḳ sokṃeunnit sủkutummi mi ninnerit gvaiƛisƛemma įo
ki-mmikf su-kp-mi-unnit suukutummi mi ninni-rit gfaiTisTi-mma ju-
[ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈsɔkːpm̥ɛu̯nːɪt ˈsuːkʊtʊmːɪ mɪ ˈnɪnːɛːrɪt ˈgᶣæɪ̯t͡ɬɪsːt͡ɬɛmːɑ jɔː]
kemmiḳ sokṃ-eunnit Ø-sủk-ϕutuθ-vi mi ninnerit gvai=ƛisƛ-emma įo
large seagull-elat 3a.unag.pst-kill-pass-nloc.pst det juvenile starling-pat pron.3a
‘the juvenile starling was killed by a large seagull’
hellami mi ṇůeyki na‘the tree is growing’
ṇỉggi mi vuogve įo‘the bird died’
gidalgvami oįįủn mįa boagve na‘one house is visible over there’
ỉṛevvi ṇigaylkeva‘my village burnt down’
ginttat sủsat ṇibįaktṡudda ‘my children don’t understand’
alỏman giḷḷit hikva bįůeƛƛit‘good boys fall asleep early’

§12.1.3 The Accusative Case

The accusative case is one of the three sematic cases, whose main function is to mark the object of a verb. Both the fix word order and obviation serve to differentiate the object from the subject, such that even if they both have a sematic form, it is always possible to tell one from the other:

migveikvin sṇeuƛut mi puohe na

‘light attracts butterflies’

Here, both the subject (puohe ‘light’) and the object (sṇeuƛut ‘butterflies’) are in the sematic form, but the subject is in the patientive case while the object is in the accusative case. The word order here precludes any other reading than that which is given above, which is reinforced by the presence of a subject determiner phrase, which is required when an object and subject nominal phrase are adjacent, regardless of whether the subject is semantically determined or not.

While indirect objects of ditransitive verbs are treated differently (indirectively) than objects of transitive verbs within the polypersonal verb – ditransitive polypersonal agreement within the verb is indirective, the case of the corresponding nominal argument is illative (or elative in some cases) irrespective of the type of ditransitivity. When a ditransitive verb’s direct object is dropped, its verbal indirect object is promoted to direct object (called the antergate) within the verb, such that the verb becomes hemiditransitive and therefore exhibits anti-ergativity, whereby the indirect object is treated like a direct object of a transitive verb. Pine does not allow antergates outside of verbs, such that hemiditransitive verbs become transitive with an illative or elative indirect argument and an obligate direct object if the antergate appears as an independent pronoun or noun.

However, an antergate outside the verb is unchanged and remains in the illative (or elative) case rather than the accusative. In other words, for hemiditransitive verbs, the antergate object is the direct object within the verb, but remains an indirect object outside the verb if present. One exception to this is that in non-restrictive relative clauses, the antergate can be relativised in the accusative in more formal registers, for example:

nennen, nama~namet nannit ipeġuttakkassian nikkin įo

‘a friend whom I told’.

syntactic rolefunction of verbal argument nominal argument case
transitive objectobjectaccusative
ditransitive direct objectdirect object
ditransitive indirect objectobjectillative
hemiditransitive indirect objectanti-ergative object (antergate)Ø

Compare the following three examples

ga-neg-i‘I see her/him’(ga-Ø-i : 1⟫3a, 3a is obj)
ga-peġuss-et hįỉƛo‘I tell the story’(ga-Ø-et, 1⟫3i, 3i is obj)
g-im-alk-et-tit‘I give it to her/him’(ga-im-Ø-et-tit : 1⟫3i, 3a is io)
g-im-alk-i-vat‘I give her/him to someone’(g-im-Ø-i-vat : 1⟫3a, 4 is io)
ga-neg-i naukva‘I see the dog’(naukva is obj in acc)
g-i-peġuss-i‘I tell her/him’(verbal antergate)
ga-peġuss-et mỉnttot‘I tell the girl about it’(mỉnttot is io, ga-Ø-et : 1⟫3i)
g-alk-et naukvot mỉkvoga ‘I give food to the dog’(naukvot is io in ill)
g-im-alk-et-tit‘I gave it to him/her’(verbal io and do)
g-im-alk-et-tit mỉkvoga‘I gave food to him/her’(verbal io, do in acc)

The accusative case is also commonly found in various time expressions and sometimes also serves an adverb-like function. The accusative is thus used to indicate when something happens, either a determinated or indeterminate point in time, a past of future positive duration (negative duration, or the time for which something has not happened, is typically expressed with the illative). Note that many nouns relating to time have irregular forms for determinate and indeterminate time expressions, which are remanents of an old accusative case form which is no longer productive and was replaced the sematic form of the patientive and genitive. For example, ‘this morning’, a determinate time expression, is hauddot (an old accusative form) and ‘in the morning’, an indeterminate time expression, is hautut (also an old accusative form but in the plural). Many words related to time or periods of time have a normal accusative plural and a special plural for indeterminate time expressions, for example lunnen haytit ‘previous mornings’ but haytyt ‘in the morning’, or mintten hevvit ‘(for) the coming nights’ but hevvyt ‘at night, in the night’. However, other time expressions using haudda conform to the normal accusative form, such as lunnen hayti ‘last morning, the previous morning’, kủt ůḷů haytit ỉ ‘two mornings in a row’ or miṡivvas hayti ‘stay for the morning’. The postposition dảlįen ‘during, while’ is in fact the accusative form of dallįi ‘time’.

Below are examples of time expressions using the accusative:

siskiṡivvuṡ kvayvi ‘I will stay here for the summer
geggiṡivin gvai kvayvi na‘I stayed there every summer
sinįiktaƛƛat gahalva iḍįit‘I usually harvest bark in the spring
na tsabidnuṡ ke tsỉnut kủt piġvuit ỉ?‘will you only return for two weeks?
gakkuṡon ƛuo goakse na deįįa‘we will be here all month
pirkkat voaḥḥįu hevvyt nutġats!‘never whistle at night!’
gassin mitṇa hevvit ỉ sảktsen ṇỉ‘I stayed awake for many nights
gamma hevvi dảlįen sảktsen‘I am awake during the night

The other secondary role of the accusative case is adverb-like in nature, and often appears as a predicate. For example, taigga sảktsen ‘I am wake’ uses the accusative predicate form of saska ‘wakefulness’, or taigga vỉskon ‘I’m sorry’, where vỉskon is the accusative form of vitsku ‘regret’. To make such expressions translative, the verb aḷḷ- ‘to change’ can be used with agentive pronouns, exceptionally, for example kỉlảḷḷỉn gỉḷo gvaiggas ‘everything returned to normal, to how it used to be’.

nả nảġġả‘exists’naġava‘existence’
nả aįįeƛa‘is of the essence’aįįil‘core’
nả ảngen‘is of use’akna‘use’
nả oaḷḷen‘is different’aḷa‘change’
nả nannet alko(n) ‘owes her/him’alkut‘debt’
nả ảrġen‘there is enough time for’arġġa‘time for’
nả ảṇṇen‘is available, within reach’atṇa‘hand’
nả baylṿi‘is on the move, travelling’bauḷva‘journey’
nả buolppủ‘is happening, is going on’bulbuġma‘bustling, action’
nả d(v)uonkve‘is thick, filled (with +elat)’tunkvi‘thick’
nả ai gảḍi‘is worth it’gaḍḍa‘worth’
nả gảlppi‘is dead, has passed’galba‘ground’
nả gỉḷo‘is unchanged’giḷḷu‘before’
nả nannet ỉddon‘is thanks to it’itta‘thank’
nả nakkut kemỉlįon‘is related to’kemillįa‘relation’
nả leůmmi‘is asleep’lỏbma‘sleep’
nả ḷinkka‘is out fishing on a boat’ḷinkkas ‘boat’
nả ƛảlen‘is unfolded, along its length’ƛalla‘long’
nả mỉto‘is common knowledge, known’midda‘knowledge’
nả mỉlįu‘is lying sideways’millįi‘side’
nả mỉtṇo‘is typical, common’miṇṇu‘people’
nả miuḍḍo‘is (still) alive’miuha‘breath’
nả moadne‘is on the way’moni‘path’
nả pakko(ma)‘is in pain, aching’paggun‘pain’
nả pỉmu‘is wrong’pỉbmi‘back’
nả pủge‘can afford’puggi‘margin, allowance, extra’
nả rảnnen‘is over’radna‘end’
nả sảktsen‘is awake’saska ‘waking, wakefulness’
nả sảsen‘is unfinished, ongoing’sassa‘inbetween’
nả skvůeƛƛen‘is producing milk’skuḷḷu‘milk’
nả spỉkno‘is scattered around’spinga‘spot, freckle’
nả sullo(n)‘is menstruating’sullut‘blood in the body’
nả toaḷḷan‘has a shaved head’taƛƛami‘skull’
nả nannit vỉskon‘is sorry about it’vitsku‘regret’
nả pỉmu kiṡki?‘what is wrong?’
nả gỉḷo na gaulka-t de‘this village is unchanged, as it used to be’
nả oaḷḷen naġan bakven nẻ na‘being home is different’
na įau-t ken ảngen noarƛa?‘would an axe be of use?’
na haḷain ken ảngen noarƛa?‘would an axe become of use?’
nả ảṇṇen mi radna na‘the end is within reach, is nigh’
ỉ piġůt ỉddon įa gemỉndvin‘it’s thank to you that I came’
nả-t ga mỉto įa tikṇen deįįa‘it’s common knowledge that s/he lives here’
taigga bakven ai dảlįen va niįįen ḷinkka‘I’m home while s/he’s out on the boat’
na tsamma-t ke sảktsen?‘are you awake?’
na nả-t ken nảġġả ollut halda?‘does such a place exist?’
na nả-t ke pủge angat minin?‘can you afford to help?’

Other adverb-like accusative forms include:

kvỉggu‘feeling’
siḷḷuttat kvikon ai nẻ na‘to do it through intuiton or without formal training’
tavvan‘foot’
ilgat tavama nẻ na‘to go by foot’
tṇủḳ‘surface’
mindvi tṇủkva įaġa paitṇit tủvumin‘s/he came this close to falling’
ṇukva‘head’
spaitṇi ṇůegvi sƛỉggot‘s/he fell head first into the mud’

§12.1.4 The Genitive Case

The genitive case is one of the three sematic cases whose main function is to indicate the possession of an object, or may simply relate an object to a head noun. Words in the genitive precede that which is possessed. In most cases, the genitive does not differ from the accusative or the patientive, but in the case of nouns whose sematic form ends in a tense vowel, it may become lax in the genitive, especially when the genitive noun is a person. For example, bỉṡki ‘child’ has the sematic form bįaktṡu, but can sometimes appear in a special genitive form as bįaktṡo, as in bįaktṡo summaġan ‘the boy’s mother’. Likewise, some bisyllabic nouns in -n whose sematic form is in -ma may have a special genitive form in -n. The genitive is commonly used for actual possession, to indicate a part of something, an essential relation or quality,

bįaktṡo summaġan‘the child’s mother’
boagve bemmi‘the roof of the house’
ṡimma algna‘the bottom of the lake’
seuvu ṇukvusta‘the mouth of the river’
ỉlppon sṇana‘the petal of the flower’
hįỉḷo temit‘the origin of the story’
įaktson stulbu‘the woman’s dress’
sagven~sagvema nennen‘the man’s friend’
mi mảven haḍnemi a‘the rest of the meat’
gảlppi ƛuoƛƛohet‘the entirety of the land’
kvayvi radna‘the end of the summer’
dảƛƛen sakvin‘a man of good health’
įerƛƛon ỉlaltsingi‘the effects of stress’
raykvi geummut ỉski‘a woman of strong opinions’
ảįįỉs skaiįi‘a stream of drinkable water’
kỉƛu hỉdna‘a pile of wood’

Some genitive phrases can instead be expressed by compound nouns, for example kỉƛu hỉdna ‘a pile of wood’ contrasts with kiƛƛehỉdna ‘a pile of wood’. Both words have more or less the same meaning, but kỉƛu hỉdna may be understood to be a pile of wood, as opposed to a pile of something else, consisting of (previously mentioned) wood, or it can also stand with some descriptive specific to the wood, for example tṡoaḷḷu kỉƛu hỉdna ‘a pile of dry wood’, while kiƛƛehỉdna is simply pile of wood as a single concept, or a known pile of wood, which has already been established or is understood to be specific or determined in nature.

immugiggeddanin kỉƛu hįannot boaġut‘s/he gathered branches into a pile of wood’
immugiggeddanin kiƛƛehįannot boaġut‘s/he gathered branches into the pile of wood’

A restrictive relative clause can also be found surrounding the genitive noun:

immugiggeddan mi ruoḍḍutummỏ kỉƛu na hįannot boaġut

‘s/he gathered branches into a pile of wood to be burnt

The genitive is also the case which nearly every postposition governs. A postposition cannot appear after a noun in its asematic form, and with only a handful of exceptions, such as uġġit ‘without (+com)’, ỉtsa ‘through (+iness/+illat)’, lidno ‘according to (+com)’ and aukka ‘except (+elat)’ all postpositions are found after a genitive form. When postpositions modify an independent pronoun however, they appear in their possessed form.

kuokkit keįįet‘(going) with/amongst the others’
kủt toįįit ỉ sasset‘inbetween two rocks’
boagve nanna‘inside the house’
seuvu gallįen‘on the other side of the river’
ṇůeyki pitṇen‘leaning against the tree’

§12.1.5 The Inessive Case

The inessive case is one of the four locative cases and indicates a static position at, in or on a location, or in some cases in time. In the singular, the inessive case ending is -imut/-imyt/-umit/-amit/-ymit or -(i)mmut/-(i)mmyt/-(u)mmit/-(a)mmit/-(y)mmit. Forms in -imyt/-immyt/-(i)mmyt are found when no back vowels (excluding a, but not oa) are in the stem. A number of words, mostly adverbs derived from indefinite pronouns, postpositions and in certain fixed cases have an inessive in -ia. The plural inessive case markers are -isit/-usut/-ysyt. Although the inessive case does not distinguish position in from position on something, both can be specified with postpositions, for example nanna ‘inside’ and hilla ‘above, on’. The inessive case is also found in some infinitival clauses to indicate an ongoing action, for example gamma migvat nin nammut ‘I am currently eating’. When the inessive is used in temporal expressions, it indicates the total duration of an event, or how much time it takes or lasts, for example gesiḷḷummet kủt keukvusut ỉ ‘I did it in three days’. , The postposition dallįein indicates in how much time something happens, or after how much time something will happen, for example kủt keukvut ỉ dallįein ‘in three days’ or ‘in three days’ time’. As with all locative phrases, words in the inessive tend to be found after the verb, but may be preceded by adverbs.

A great deal of postpositional adverbs have an inessive form, although many such forms lack the typical inessive case marker, but are nonetheless inessive forms by meaning. In a few cases, postpositional adverbs may have an inessive meaning but a comitative ending, or an ending in -n.

Examples of the inessive case:

nảt kỉkumit mitṇa niḷḷįogi nỉ‘there are many silver birch trees in the forest
sƛỏman tseiƛkumit‘s/he sleeps in the tent
nảt gaulppummut ƛuollat niṡkegi nỉ‘there are all kinds of people in the world
tvalbat tsảƛimyt mi soaƛƛegi nỉ‘the fish are swimming in the water
tṡivvan sṃỉḍnumin‘s/he is staying at her/his cabin
ỉgetsůḷvet tġeůts goaksisit ỉ gami‘I finished it in three months

Some examples of postpositional adverbs with an inessive meaning include:

ṇuomen‘out on the water’
pitṇen‘leaning forward, in a leaning position, askew’
gảḍmyt‘on the left’
tsỉddyt‘on the right’
keggegummut‘later during the day’
seḥįa‘stuck’
bakven‘at home’

§12.1.6 The Illative Case

The illative case is one of the four locative cases and broadly indicates movement to, into or onto something. It is also the case of the indirect object of ditransitive verbs when the indirect object is a noun, adjective or numeral, and in the case of anthemiditransitive verbs, the illative indicates to or for whom the action or quality is. This is also true of other types of expression, where the illative marks the benefactor, recipient or experiencer of an experience, for example gesiḷḷummet nannet ‘I did it for her/him’. The illative case ending is -et/-ot/-ůt in the singular and -ittit/-uttut/-yttyt in the plural. It can also be found in infinitival clauses to indicate something which is about to happen, for example ikken lỏmisƛuttat nỉn nannet ‘I was (just) about to fall asleep’. Unlike postpositional adverbs with an inessive meaning, all such adverbs with an illative meaning have illative case endings.

The illative is also used in time expressions to show a negative duration, or for how long something has not occurred, for example nekkyt mitṇa tyvittit ỉ nủkungi ‘I have not seen her/him for many years’. In positive clauses, the illative is used to show when something will happen, for example: gamindvuṡ kủt keukvuttut ỉ ‘I will come in three days’. The postposition dảlįet indicates for how much time something will last, for example kủt keukvut ỉ dảlįet ‘for three days’.

Locative cases of movement, such as the illative and elative, may trigger the appearance of a cislocative marker with many verbs of movement. The cislocative si(s)- often occurs with the illative, as it indicates movement towards some point, although gi-/geg- also commonly occurs if the movement towards something is seen as being a departure from a location or away from the speaker or the deictic centre of the utterance. For example, lulli ‘s/he left’ but gi-lulli kỉkot ‘s/he left for the forest’.

gemiggin kỉkot‘I went into the forest
malkvatetin spỉktṡodan bỉlįut (oḥ)ummaġan‘the mother gave her child berries’
aggilỏmmi tseiƛkot‘s/he went to sleep in the tent
sinįallanin ṇůeykittit kỉġtit įo‘s/he hanged bones in the trees
siġvirri tsảƛet mi bįuḷḷu įo‘the boy jumped into the water
sisilginen sṃỉḍnodan ‘we travelled to his cabin
ikkin ipeġuttat gamavi nỉn nannet‘I was about to tell her/him about it’
gitṡaiġƛemmi skvůakṃet‘s/he disappeared into the fog
beyƛissakimmut sauƛittit daidni tsaƛƛa‘clean water is important to fish
ủt deįįa ari mitṇa goaksittit ỉ kukkuna‘I haven’t been here for very many months
hykƛisƛuttomi sảsỉn mįa goakset a‘fall will arrive in about a month’

Some examples of postpositional adverbs with an illative meaning include:

ṇuomet‘out onto the water’
pitṇet‘leaning forward, into a leaning position, askew’
gảḍmet‘to the left’
tsỉddet‘to the right’
ƛiggogoget‘further along the path’
seḥįet‘(into a) stuck (position)’
bakvet‘(to) home’

§12.1.7 The Elative Case

The elative contrasts with the illative case in showing movement from or out of something. The singular elative case endings are -innit/-unnit/-ynnit and the plural case endings are -ingit/-ungit/-yngit. The elative is also commonly used with partitive constructions, to indicate part of something, in which case the elative clause usually precedes the head noun, such as sagvemungit misku ‘one of the men’, nỉktṡungit nannaski ‘many of the people’, ỉngit kukva ‘two of them’, tsatsintva ṇeungit niƛƛa ‘you drink the least out of us’. Such elative partitive constructions are not usually found within determiner clauses other than numeral determiner clauses, for example ỏha ṇivit ỉ sineskat tsindva 'you can ask any of us’, although one could equally say ṇeungit ỏhadadda sineskat tsindva. When the elative indicates movement from, it commonly triggers a kinetic preverb on verbs of movement.

With some ditransitive verbs, the nominal indirect object may appear in the elative if instead of being the recipient of a direct object, the direct object is removed or taken away from the indirect object, for example gảnįỉkvet bįůeƛƛỉn ‘I took it from the boy’.

The elative can be found in infinitival clauses to indicate the reason, explanation for an action, for example ṇiskukkisƛussin lembat auna nannit gami ‘I became tired from working’.

The elative is found in temporal constructions to indicate from what time or since what time something has happened.

gemindin kỉkunnit‘I came from the forest
nįikvanin spỉktṡunnidan bỉlįut (į)ummaġan‘the mother took the berries from her child
gimindvi tseikƛunnit lỏmat auna nannit įe įo‘s/he came out of the tent from having slept
ginįikvanin ṇůeykingit kỉġtit įo‘s/he took down bones from the trees
giġvirri tsảƛinnit mi bįuḷḷu įo‘the boy jumped out of the water
gegilginen sṃỉḍnunnidan ‘we travelled from his cabin
uġun deįįa bỉktṡeƛemunnit nukkunga‘I haven’t been here since childhood
gỉlas ỉ nỉktṡungi-t de nadnit ‘I know many of these people
gebaḍvetin tṇaġa ỉ sauƛungi-t de ỉ kvỉgvit‘I caught three of these five fishes

Some examples of postpositional adverbs with an illative meaning include:

ṇuomet‘out onto the water’
pitṇet‘leaning forward, into a leaning position, askew’
gảḍmet‘to the left’
tsỉddet‘to the right’
ƛiggogoget‘further along the path’
seḥįet‘(into a) stuck (position)’
bakvet‘(to) home’

§12.1.8 The Comitative Case

The comitative case is the last of the locative cases and serves many purposes in Pine. The comitative singular case endings are -igut/-ugit/-ygit, -ikkut/-ukkit/-ykkit or -CCit/-CCut, and in the plural they are -ein/-uin/-ůin. Its primary role is to mark with what or whom something is done, which is not a truly locative function. The comitative serves a number of purposes beyond accompaniment. It is used to form many adverbial forms of adjectives (functioning like an adverbial case), it can indicate location, and it can have a purely instrumental meaning. Its secondary and truly locative function is that of the perlative case, indicating movement along a path, across a location or a radius or area (of a surface).

An older set of case endings that has been called the old comitative or the instrumental had endings in -(v)en/-(v)on/-(v)ůn, and many expressions, postpositions and adverbs still use them. It is also the bases for the abessive -(v)uġġit, which is a no longer productive case.

The comitative form of many postpositional adverbs are nearly exclusively perlative in meaning, though this may be less obvious in some cases, as with ḷoḷven ‘against the wind’, or more literally ‘along the opposite flow of the wind’. Locative adverbs on the other hand have a general or areal meaning, for example deissit ‘around here’, but gaṡkein ‘along the south(ern side)’. A number of verbs govern the comitative, as well as the postposition uġġit.

Time expressions with the comitative indicate that an event follows or occurs along or at some point during a longer period of time, for example tṃinduṡ kvayvigyt ‘s/he will come (sometime) during the summer’, or tṡůivehami hevvikkyt ‘it get colds as the night wore on’. Note that the combination of nannit and a time expression in the comitative means ‘starting’, for example nannit skeukvukkit ‘starting today’.

The comitative in infintival clauses indicates how something occurs, for example gaiṡkva piskat nin nakkut ‘I learn by listening’.

gaḷủlla ṇiġảġġakkidda‘I am speaking with my brother
ṇuṡkvutummi nokussit‘s/he was murdered with a stick
minan kảmmigyt‘s/he walks with a walking stick/cane
gipiuvvi ṡimmugit‘it came swooping down (grazing/along) the lake
pakkami ṇůelkkikkyt‘it hurts (along/on) the skin
tikṇan nįeįįein‘s/he lives around there
ḷoḷḷikkut sihuollat tsƛukkotṡin‘we must row against the wind
batsġvas boagve uṃṃikkut‘look alongside the back of the house’
minni ṛvůekki gakkikkut‘s/he was walking around the fire’
gaįalttva ṇileimppugidda‘I am proud of my work
ůḷḷůgaminna dả sagvinnu-t de‘I am related to this man
kvẻkvi gaylgimyt nỉktṡuin‘the village was bustling with people
gaṡillalkva aikkyt‘I struggle with it
gemiggin pikkyt uġġit‘I went without you’
gakakvuṡ nannit a goaksigu-t de‘I will stop starting this month
ṇįiḷḷan kỉltsiḷḷussildat nin aikkyt‘one learns by repitition

§12.1.9 The Essive Case

The essive case differs from sematic cases in that it is formed on the basis of the asematic form, and has for function to indicate a state (either a transient state or the state resulting from a change), or the capacity in which something is acting, including resultative predicates, for example gendots helvi ‘it grew tall’. The essive often occurs where a simple predicate is found in English, for example nả keƛkảts ġveni ‘the wind was a problem (lit. the wind was as a problem), as the wind functions or is temporarily in the state of being a problem, as the copula does not describe the general nature of what wind is. The essive singular ending is -ts and the plural case endings are -tset/-tsot/-tsůt. Essive nouns tend to come before the verb when they indicate the state of the subject, although they can also be found after the verb. The essive can appear both with subjects and objects. A number of verbs govern an essive argument.

The essive is used in infinitival clauses to indicate an even either synchronous to the main verb or completed at the time of the main verb, for example migvat nuna nats ‘having eaten, after eating’. Likewise, a few expressions use the essive to indicate a temporary time period, for example siġvảts ‘in the rain, while there is rain’, uṛṛủts ‘while there is mist, in the mist’, daldoṛilguts ‘in the sunshine, while the sun is shining’, hauddoats ‘while it is (still) morning’. This is also true of the postposition dảllįỉts ‘while, during, as it is (still)’.

ỉ nįokvỉts aṡtat ai nỉ nathe goal was to stop her/him’
nả laittảts siḷḷuttat ai nẻ nathe intent is to do it’
ỉ keƛkảts vabnuvu‘the low visibility weather was a problem
ƛuoƛƛohủts keuninttutummi‘it was considered as a whole
gamma aįįikkỉts deįįa ‘I am here as a teacher
galembon saƛƛỉttset‘we work as fishermen’
ṃuoįįủts haḍnami‘it stays warm
ṃuoįįủts taḍnoget ‘s/he keeps it warm
ṃuoįįủts haḷḷi‘it turned/became warm
gebindin iṡṡỉts‘I ended up as/came to be a parent
tsabįellemmats hikva nennentset‘I consider you good friends
ỉlganindet migỉts‘I estimate it (to be) correct
tsetủllanin kuokkits‘I took you for someone else
siskibidnin lullat nỉ nats įe įo‘I arrived as s/he was leaving
geṃairrin negat ai nuna natshaving seen it, I laughed’
silullat galukva hauddoats‘I must leave while it is (still) morning
minni daldoṛilguts‘s/he was walking in the sunshine
migvat ṃủ dảllįỉts nattset‘eat it while it is still warm

§12.1.10 Other Cases

Throughout previous stages of the language, other case endings were more common and some of these have survived into modern Pine. Some of the endings have been re-analyzed as postpositions, or vice-versa.

§12.1.10.1 The Terminative & Egressive Case

At an earlier stage of the language, the postpositions (a)gỉt ‘until’ used to govern the illative case instead of the genitive case in modern Pine, such that the endings -t gỉt coalesced to form a terminative case ending in -ggỉt in the singular and -begỉt in the plural. Likewise, the postposition (a)gỉn ‘since’ used to govern the elative, resulting in a fusional egressive case ending in -ngỉn in the singular and -ngiggỉn in the plural. Such endings are still used is some fixed expressions:

terminative case

eįįogỉt~deįįogỉt‘until now’
iįįogỉt~nįiįįogỉt‘until then’
oįįogỉt‘until then, until such a time that’
gvaįįogỉt‘for ever’
rảnneggỉt‘until the end’
nįakkoggỉt‘until death’
nįuḷḷuggỉt‘at most’
niƛƛyggỉt‘at least’
aįįeggỉt‘up to’
ƛuoƛƛeggỉt‘completely, maximally’
Ø oaṇṇegỉt‘for the rest of’
ỏtủgỉt‘forever, for life’
vuggỉt‘let alone’
ůegỉt~ỷgỉt‘still, still now, even (more), what’s more’

egressive case

eįįogỉn~deįįogỉn‘from now on’
iįįogỉn~nįiįįogỉn‘since then’
oįįogỉn‘since then, since such a time that’
vaḥḥįogỉn‘never ever, not ever’
ảlknỉngỉn‘since the beginning’
biktṡeƛemủngỉn‘since childhood’
nảgvỉngỉn‘since birth’
niƛƛỷngit~niƛƛyggỉn‘at least’
byntsỷngỉn‘(from) as little as, not so much as’
aįįỉngỉn‘starting from, since’
ƛuoƛƛeggỉt‘completely, maximally’
§12.1.10.2 The Abessive Case

The postposition uġġit governs the comitative in modern Pine, but in older stages of the language there was an abessive case with the ending -(v)eġġit/-(v)oġġit/-(v)ůġġit, or alternatively -auġġit with verb stems. These endings still survive in a few terms, most of them adverbs or postpositions, although many can be used attributively or predicatively as well, for example leůmmeġġit sakvin ‘a sleepless man, a man unable to sleep’, sảḷḷi geummoġġit ‘s/he lost consciousness’. Some speakers even use such terms as adjectives or verbal adjectives, for example įalįoġġeggi ‘s/he was lifeless’

alttsemmoġġit‘without reason, for no reason’
ỉlukkauġġit‘without success, in vain’
ỉtsůḷḷauġġit‘incompletely’
ai giḍḍauġġit‘without forgetting, last but not least’
lỉdnoġġit‘in silence, without using words’
oaḷḷeġġit‘constantly, invariably’
aįįet ỉddoġġit‘not thanks to, with no help from’
ai mỉtoġġit‘unbeknownst to her/him’
rảnneġġit‘incessantly, constantly, completely’
keilkoġġit‘without incidents, without any problems’
vỉskoġġit‘unscrupulously’
leůmmeġġit‘sleepless, insomniac, without sleep’
aṡtauġġit‘without hindrance, unhindered’
kakkauġġit‘relentlessly’
seiġƛoġġit‘without shelter, unprotected’
įakkoġġit‘exhausted, without energy, unable to proceed’
geummoġġit‘unconscious’
ḷủloġġit‘unable to speak, stunned, mute’
ỉlįoġġit‘lifeless, dead’
įiakvauġġit‘helpless, unable to survive’
§12.1.10.3 The Ornative Case

The ornative case is a semi-productive, somewhat irregular case that has a limited use to indicate that something has the noun (or adjective) as a physical characteristic, often ‘(go/move) looking like Ø’ or ‘with Ø’. Its endings are -issit or -ussit.

The ornative case is unique in that it does not trigger apophony but triggers diaphony in non-consonantal nouns. It often mirrors the comitative, especially consonantal forms in -ssit/-ttit/-kkit or -ssut/-ttut/-kkut, but they are exclusively found in -ussit/-issit: tavvan ‘foot’ ⟫ tavunnit ‘foot (com)’ ⟫ tavussit ‘with such and such feet’, or skorruk ‘hunchback’ ⟫ skorrukkit ‘hunchback (com)’ ⟫ skorrussit ‘with a hunched back’. Ornative nouns can be made into verbs through the ornative medial -issin-/-ussin-. For example, from the adjective artṡunget ‘hunched over’, one can derive the verbal form inugartṡussinni ‘s/he was going around all hunched over’. Many of these forms have fixed attributive forms that do not distinguish animacy, for example moiggussinnen~moiggussit sakven ‘big bellied man’, tsigvussinnen~tsigvussit ỉski ‘white-wearing woman’, humussinnen~humussit kigga ‘dark forest, forest that appears or is dark’ or boaƛṃissinnen~boaƛṃissit bỉṡki ‘child wearing loose clothes’ while some are used as a nominal expression using determiner clauses, for example mi bevissinnen~bevissit įo ‘a Pine person wearing traditional regalia’, from bevissin- ‘be or go somewhere dressed in bevveġi, traditional Pine regalia’. A number of attributive ornative forms in -neġussit based on verbs in -neġ- exist, such as -unneġussit ‘with a big’, -inneġussit ‘with a small’, -nanneġussit ‘with many’, -panneġussit ‘with few’, -nįukkuneġussit ‘with a lot of’, for example tammiṇįirrineġussit or ṇįirrunneġussit ‘with a big nose’, tammatṇaneġussit ‘with big hands’.

ornative forms

tsigvussit‘wear white, be or appear white, be or go somewhere dressed in white’
humussit‘wear black, be or appear black, be or go somewhere dressed in dark’
moiggussit‘have a belly, be or go somewhere with a belly’
artṡussit‘appear, be, go somewhere hunched over’
auntsġussit‘appear, be, go somewhere rigid and stiff’
bevissit‘wear, be or go somewhere dressed in bevveġi
korissit‘have, be or go somewhere with long hair’
elissit‘wear, be or go somewhere wearing an elleġi
boaƛṃissit‘wear, be or go somewhere wearing loose clothes’
tṡitṇussit‘wear, be or go somewhere wearing ill-fitting clothes’
ṡpůkkissit‘appear, be, go somewhere looking plump, chubby, fat’
hiṡkuppissit‘appear, be or go somewhere with wet hair’
tuƛṃuppissit‘wear, be or go somewhere wearing wet clothes’
siḷḷussit‘be or go somewhere smelling of something’
utṇussit‘be or go somewhere looking like something’
tavussit‘with (such and such) feet, legs’
hiktṡussit‘with (such and such) hair’
tulpṃussit‘with (such and such) clothes’
(7)iguminni lůrrůt hiktṡussit mi ỉski įo
iguminni lu--rru--t hikc--cussit mi iiski ju-
[ɪːgʊˈmɪnːɪ ˈlœrːœt ˈhɪkːt͡ʃʊsːɪt mɪ ˈiːsːkɪ jɔː]
igu-Ø-min-vi lůrrůt hiktṡ-ussit mi ỉski-Ø įo
around-3a.ag.pst-walk-nloc.pst dirty hair-orn det woman-act pron.3a
‘the woman was walking around with dirty looking hair

(the woman was in a state where her hair was dirty)

(8)ỉ oaįįut niṡkullenutṇussit mi ṇimilįenan minin sakvin įo
ii/ u-ajjut nickulli-nut-n-ussit mi n-imiL-i-nan minin sakfin ju-
[iː ˈɑːjʊt ˈnɪʃkʊlːɛnˈʊtːn̥ʊsːɪt mi n̥ɪmɪːʎɛnan ˈmɪːnɪn ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː]
ỉ oa=įįut niṡkullen=utṇ-ussit mi ṇi-milįen-an Ø-min-in sakvin-Ø įo
cop.nloc.pst clearly Pine.look-orn det poss.1-by-poss.loc 3a.ag.pst-walk-nloc.hyp.pst man-act pron.3a
‘the man who walked passed us was obviously Pine-looking’

(the man appeared to be pine)

tanni ỉlpput siḷḷussit hỉƛṃumit mi tselga įo

‘the young woman stood in a field with the smell of flowers’

(the field happened to smell of flowers when she stood in it)

Ornative expressions are usually descriptive adjuncts, or non-restrictive in nature, while corresponding adjectival or restrictive relative clauses are more restrictive, and describe a more unalienable characteristic of the head noun.

geneggin lůrrůthiṡkoha įaktṡon

‘I saw a dirty-haired woman’

(having dirty hair is what characterises the woman)

gemininen oaįįut niṡkullenutṇoha sagvema milįen

‘we passed an/the obviously pine-looking man’

(the appearance of being pine is characteristic of the man)

beuhots hiḷvemi ilbi

‘a sweet smelling flower’

(the fact of smelling sweet characterises the flower)

§12.1.10.4 The Distributive & Universal-Distributive Case

The distributive case only occurs in a handful of words and is derived from the illative singular and the addition of -nuḳ, such that it has the forms -ennuḳ/-onnuḳ/-ůnnůḳ. The distributive indicates distribution by piece, for example nỉktṡonnuḳ ‘per person’ or mỉntset tyvennuḳ ‘once a year’. The most common nouns found in the distributive are:

sagvemonnuḳ‘per man’
įaktṡonnuḳ‘per woman’
nỉktṡonnuḳ‘per person’
keukvonnuḳ‘per day’
goaksennuḳ‘per month’
tyvůnnůḳ‘per year’
hevvůnnůḳ‘per night’
boagvennuḳ‘per house(hold)’
ilįomonnuḳ‘per family’

Similar in meaning is the universal-distributive case which is added to the asematic ending of words (causing relaxation), and which has the ending -deddet and forms temporal adverbs denoting a reocurrance at every instance of the head word, for example heydeddet ‘every night’. It is related to the adverb dette ‘every’, as in dette dảlįen va ‘every time, when ever’.

keggededdet‘every day, daily’
heydeddet‘every night’
udnįodeddet‘every evening’
hauddodeddet‘every month’
piįįodeddet‘every day at dawn’
telmededdet‘every day at dusk’
gassededdet‘every month, monthly’
tuvvodeddet‘every year’
piġvoddeddet‘every week’
heįįodeddet‘every winter’
iḍḍįodeddet‘every spring’
kvoavvodeddet‘every summer’
ykƛededdet‘every fall’
dalįodeddet‘every time’
§12.1.10.5 The Temporal Case

The temporal case is a case form based on the inessive singular which indicates time. The ending -ts is added unto the inessive endings -mit/-mut/-mut ⟫ -mits/-muts. The form -myt becomes -mits with the temporal ending -it (*-myts is not found). The temporal case is nearly exclusively found on numerals to tell time. Numerals normally only have plural sematic forms, but with the temporal case, the singular endings are used.

§12.1.10.5.1 The Temporal Case & Time Expressions

The temporal case is found in numerals in combination with other words to indicate time:

misku‘one’mittsammuts‘at one o’clock’
kukva‘two’kukimmuts‘at two o’clock’
tġůttsat‘three’tġůtsimmits‘at three o’clock’
nakkukva‘twelve’nakkukimmuts‘at twelve o’clock’

To indicate how much time is left until a specific time, one uses the temporal case preceded by a word typically found in the illative, for example tavỉmet ‘quarter to’, kukỉmet ‘half to’, tṇaġġuttut ‘five to’. Likewise, the elative is used to express time past a specific time, for example tṇaġġingit ‘five past’, tġeůt nakki tġůtsyngit ‘33 minutes past’.

nả kukỉmet kukimmuts‘it is 1:30 o’clock’
nả tavỉminnit piġimuts‘it is 7:15 o’clock’
ỉ mattsinnit tṡutṡammuts‘it was 8:01 o’clock’

§12.2 Mood

Pine has 5 moods – the indicative, dubitative, optative, conditional and potential mood. Their use and function is described in this section.

§12.2.1 Indicative

The indicative mood is the default mood in Pine. It is neutral with regard to evidentiality, although it can also be said to be assertive (in contrast with the evidential moods, the dubitative and optative). The indicative is one of the three realis moods along with the dubitative and optative.

§12.2.2 Dubitative

The dubitative mood is functions as the inferential version of the indicative mood. It has a range of function in both autonomous and hyponomous phrases. The future tense is considered part of the dubitative. The dubitative also has a pluperfect mood which is absent in the indicative mood – it is only found in the dubitative and optative, and does not exist at all in the autonomous order.

The dubitative and pluperfect tenses are included in the dubitative mood set for mostly historical reasons. In the case of the future tense, archaic forms more readily explain this classification. For example, ‘I will eat’ is gamigvuṡ (cf. gamigvỏs in the dubitative present) but archaic forms in įỏ gamigvỏṡ ‘that I (apparently) eat’ used to be common. Likewise, the pluperfect form įu gemigvivvun ‘when I had eaten’ (cf. įỏ gemigvun ‘that I (apparently) ate’) was once įu gemigvevun ‘when I had eaten’ in the dubitative past).

indicativedubitative
įu tseneggadditįu tsenegitṇit
‘when I saw you’‘when I had seen you’

The future and pluperfect are clearly derived from dubitative forms, and therefore considered dubitative tenses.

Fundamentally, the dubitative indicates that the information given by the verb is of a lower certainty than that of the indicative mood. The dubitative mood is triggered in seven broad cases:

future and pluperfect dubitative

Syntactically infinitive future and pluperfect

sensory dubitative

Certain verbs of sensory experiences indicating a lower confidence in the factuality of the information.

reportative dubitative

Reported, assumed or otherwise unconfirmed innformation

quotative dubitative

Information given as a quote coming from someone else than the speaker

unrealised dubitative

Actions not yet or only potentially realised

subordinated dubitative

Verbs governing a dubitative dependent verb

§12.2.2.1 Future & Pluperfect Dubitative

A verb which would normally stand in the indicative mood must be dubitative if it appears in the future tense. Or rather, the future tense is part of the dubitative mood.

Likewise, a syntactically indicative pluperfect verb appears in the dubitative. Pine only allows pluperfect forms in hyponomous orders. The pluperfect requires a past reference point before which the pluperfect action occurs. This reference point is always put in the autonomous in Pine, and the pluperfect therefore only appears in the hyponomous phrase. This is often opposite to how English formulates pluperfect phrases. For example, ‘you had already left when I arrived’ has a simple past verb (‘arrived’) in the subordinated clause (‘when I arrived’) but a pluperfect verb (‘had left’) in the main clause. Pine only allows the opposite, that is to say ‘I arrived when you had already left’: gemikvevin įu edda tselůellivvůn.

indicativefuturepluperfect
ṇohakkesetṇohakkissitṡįu ṇohakkintsuts
‘it annoys me’‘it will annoy me’‘when it had annoyed me’
tsameḍkettsameḍkitṡįu tsemeḍkissunuts
‘you organise it’‘you will organise it’‘when you had organised it’
sƛįỉhansƛįỉhuṡįu sƛįỉhidnun
‘s/he slips’‘s/he will slip’‘when s/he had slipped’
§12.2.2.1.1 Past Future Dubitative

The future tense of the dubitative mood can be used to indicate a future time frame anchored in a past reference point, for example 'I know s/he would do that'. Such future-in-the-past expressions are often introduced by the dubitative complementiser įon/įỏ rather than the neutral complementiser įa or the future complementiser įuṡ.

gemidin, įỏ mi ai-ni tsiḷḷusseutṡ

'I knew that s/he would do that'

(lit. I knew that s/he will do that)

§12.2.2.2 Sensory Dubitative

Certain verbs depicting sensory experiences sometimes require the dubitative mood. English expresses this nuance in some cases, for example ‘I see that you are angry’ and ‘it seems to me that you are angry’ – the second phrase emphasises a sensory experience which is out of the experiencer’s control. Pine does something similar by using the dubitative (and unagentive pronouns) with certain verbs. The indicative form of such verbs often imply a certain epistemic ability to perform them, for example ganegga ‘I see’ can also be translated to ‘I can see (that…)’, whereas ṇenegỏ ‘I see’ emphasises the inferential and subjective sensory experience and can best be translated as ‘it seems to me’. Due to their inferential nature, complementised phrases of sensory dubitative verbs are generally introduced using the dubitative complementiser and therefore are themselves in the dubitative form.

indicativesensory dubitative
ganegga‘I (can) see’ṇenegỏ‘it seems to me, I believe I see’
gapiskvaa‘I (can) hear’ṇepiskỏ‘I believe I hear’
gagindva‘I (can) understand’ṇegindỏ‘it is my understanding’
gakvỉvva‘I (can) sense’ṇekvỉvỏ‘it seems, feels to me’
gasilket‘I (can) smell it’ṇesilkit‘I (can) smell it, it smells (to me)’
sƛỏmmen gapiski ‘I (can) hear her/him sleeping’
sƛỏmỏmi ṇepiske‘I (believe I) hear her/him sleeping’
ganegga, įa tsṇunnuḥia‘I (can) see that you are angry’
ṇenegỏ, įỏ tsṇunnogu‘it seems to me that you are angry’
gasilket tṡẻlġġukvemi mảvi‘I (can) smell the meat cooking’
ṇesilkỏ, įỏ tṡẻlġġaƛven ummu‘I can smell that mom is cooking’
§12.2.2.3 Reportative Dubitative

One of the core functions of the dubitative is to indicate that information is reported, not first-hand. The dubitative functions as a confidence reducing mood when compared to the indicative. There is a number of speech particles that further specify the nature of this lowered confidence. Reportative dubitative can also stand without any particle.

-t diIndicates that the phrase is framed as possible, probably but not guaranteed

‘probably, likely’

įỏ-t di skekvot naḷḷįi‘there will probably be a thunderstorm tomorrow’
tsṇegimmu-t di udnįummut‘I will probably see you later this evening’
migomi di mi na-t de‘this is probably true’
-n důtIndicates that the speaker wishes to distance themselves or warn that the information is not known for certain to be true, or that the speaker does not assume responsibility that the statement is accurate.

‘apparently, it is said, I heard, they say’

tsiḷḷutto-n důt skekvot‘s/he will apparently do it tomorrow’
palġe-n důt sallįen ḷinkka, a Eįįak daEįįak is apparently making a boat down by the shore’
edda-n důt gilullanon‘s/he has apparently already left’
-t visIndicates that the speaker is quite certain or predicts that an action is true. It can be found with the indicative or the future.

‘I bet, I predict’

aįįuo-t vis skekvot hikva vaihegi‘the weather will be good tomorrow (someone said)’
sƛỏmuṡ vis tỏkan milįa, ollat va gveiddit‘s/he’s sleeping by the oven like I always, I bet’
nesky-t vis tsủtseṡ‘I bet you won’t ask her/him’
tsiḷḷutto-t vis skekvot‘s/he will do it tomorrow, I bet’

§12.2.3 Optative

The optative mood expresses desires, wishes or hopes, and it may also function as an inchoative with translative verbs. In autonomous clauses, the optative mood has a direct desiderative meaning – an autonomous verb in the optative generally indicates a direct desire, wish or hope, for example gamindusut ‘I want to go’. This is called the direct (desiderative) optative. In hyponomous clauses and with copular infinitives, the optative is often required by a main clause verb of desire, wish, hope or command, and therefore functions to indicate an indirect desire. Such indirect optative forms are very common with copular infinitives, and are more akin to subjunctive or conditional clauses in European languages. For example, ang- ‘help’ requires the optative in the infinitive clause it governs: ai sisiḷḷuttat tsangemat ‘I help you do it’ (lit. I help you that you do (opt) it). The verb ang- necessarily governs an unrealised infinitive clause, as helping must come before the actual accomplishment of the secondary verb. By that logic, Pine speakers use the optative rather than the dubitative (although it’s unlikely to be considered ungrammatical to use the dubitative here) as there is some sort of wish or volition involved with the act of helping someone to do it (or alternatively necessity, which the optative may also be said to encompass to some degree).

The optative is used in the following complementised constructions:

įus...that...(want/obligation/requirement/wish)anaphoric optative
įus įa...that...(ought/should)deontic optative
§12.2.3.1 Direct Optative

The direct desiderative optative mood is found in autonomous clauses and as the name implies, indicates a true, direct wish or desire of the subject to perform the action. In addition to a direct desiderative meaning, with certain unagentive verbs, the direct optative mood may instead indicate a necessity or need, then called the direct deontic optative. For example, gamindusut ‘I want to go’ but ṇemindusut ‘I need to go (pee)’. Although some common verbs also have desiderative medial forms, such as gamigvusut ‘I want to me’ and ṇemigvisigga ‘I want to eat, I feel like eating, I’m hungry’, there is usually a nuance in meaning in using the optative mood, which is usually a more literal desire or more direct wanting, whereas the desiderative medial may be more akin to a feeling or sensation. A number of verbs that have a syntactically inverse alignment, such as ṇetaḍḍogeset ‘I am interest in it (lit. it interests me)’ also commonly have optative forms, for example ṇetaḍḍogissuts, which often emphasise an opinionative reading of the verb, such that ṇetaḍḍogissuts is more of a statement of opinion (‘I find it interesting)’ than ṇetaḍḍogeset (‘it interests me’) which is more neutral, perhaps a little more detached. There are a handful of such verbs where the optative has a more opinionative meaning, and they are invariably verbs that have separate transitive (often causatives in -(e/o)d-) and intransitive forms

Using the direct optative necessarily precludes the verb from being in another mood, for example the conditional or the potential, which can be circumvented by using the copula in that mood and an optative complementiser (įus) to form a complementised optative phrase, for example įaįįa įus gamigvussin ‘I could eat, it could be that I would want to eat’.

There are therefore two types of direct optative verbs: direct desiderative and direct deontic optative verbs.

direct desiderative optative

gamidusut‘I want to know’
gaḷủlusut dakkut‘I want to speak with her/him’
na tsṃigvusu-t ke?‘do you want to eat?’
tsagindimmuts‘I want to understand you’

direct deontic optative

ṇelỏm(isƛutt)usut‘I am sleepy, I want/need to sleep’
ṇeṃairrůsůt‘I want/need to laugh’
ṇeṃairgůssits‘it makes me want/need to laugh, I find it funny’
ṇỏġnogissuts‘it makes me want/need to yawn, I find it boring’
ṇesiįusut‘I am curious, I want/need to know’
ṇesiġtissuts‘it makes me want/need to know, I find it interesting’
ṇetaḍḍogissuts‘I find it interesting’
ṇetsintusut‘I am thirsty, I want/need to drink’
ṇetsistaġtissuts‘I find it exciting’
ṇetṡarvusut‘I worry (lit. I need to worry)’
ṇetṡardussits‘it worries me, I find it worrying’
ṇetṡidnusut‘I want/need to cry’
ṇetṡidnegussits‘it makes me want/need to cry, I find it sad’
§12.2.3.2 Indirect Optative

The indirect optative is one of the functions of the optative mood, whereby a subordinated verb or copula is found in the optative due a requirement of the subordinating verb. Instead of indicating that the subject of a verb desires, wishes or hopes to perform the action, the indirect optative instead functions to mark that the verb is subordinated to some expression of desire, wish or hope. The indirect optative may also function in a subordinated clause to indicate that the action should be done in some prescribed or accepted way, for example with mid- ‘know (how to)’, especially for example in indirect interrogatives as in mittyt mi ai de silidnat nỉset nus ai nủka ‘I don’t know how to say this’, where the restrictive indirect interrogative contains the optative copula nummin. The same can be expressed with a relative indirect interrogative: mittat nukka, nỉset mi ai-t de silidnat nus The optative is also found in dependent imperatives. Permissive causative verbs in -elt- and persuasive verbs in -agag- also generally govern the optative, for example neitṇelt- ‘invite to sit down’ or tintselt- ‘invite to drink’, lukkagag- ‘urge to’. A significant number of verbs and constructions require this, some of which are given here:

verbs governing indirect optative with si-

aidd-‘advise’
ang-‘help’
meg-ank-‘demand’
balt-uttug-‘accept’
peġuθ-‘tell’
bįelg-‘trust to, entrust’
bįelgagag-‘convince (to believe)’
biltsġ-‘command, order’
doidd-‘propose, suggest’
gaḍḍagag-‘convince’
gattsand-‘suffice to’
haḍg-‘promise to’
pỏvagag-‘encourage’
iltsġ-‘force to’
ind-‘may, be allowed to, can’
intt-ussivuθ-‘be possible’
ỉkagag-‘motivate, empower to’
ỉṡƛ-‘invite to’
kist-‘hurry to’
lag-‘intend, want to’
ỉƛigged-‘decide’
mah-‘like to, want to’
mindelt-‘invite (in, to come)’
mitṡagag-‘convince (to try)’
myngyθ-‘get ready to’
mynged-‘prepare’
neitṇelt-‘invite (to sit down)’
ỏḥ-‘need, must’
skan-‘want, desire to’
ỉlteṃṃis-‘look forward to’
ten-‘look to, intend to’
tsabb-‘hope’
tung-‘should, ought to’
tṡibm-‘wish’

verbs governing indirect optative with gi-

eṡkv-‘refuse’
gaiḥḥ-‘need to’
kaikỉn-‘be careful to’
mieg-‘inform to, instruct to’
miaġl-‘struggle to’
sakṡ-‘warn to, from’
tents-‘long for, miss’
tserġġisteg-‘motivate, incite, encourage’
tyġ-‘prohibit from, ban from’

other indirect optative governing expressions

įus įa, įuska įa‘ought, should (predictive)’
al, allįu‘let (me), allow (me)’
appi įus‘please…’
i…(-t) gi‘if only…, hopefully…’
i įus gi, įuski…‘I wish…’
i…(-t) pỉ‘if only…’
i įus pỉ…‘if only…’
ippỉ įa/įus…‘if only’
(nả) lugu įus‘it is required that…’
-t dỏ‘come on, please’
§12.2.3.2.1 Dependent Imperative Optative

Dependent imperatives are imperative forms that are subordinate to a main verb, and cannot bear true imperative markers, for example gipỉddeggin įuġus siḷḷupput nuttohuhin ‘I asked her/him not to do it’. The optative serves as a sort of reportative or indirect imperative. This use of the optative is rare in spoken language. Often, speakers will prefer to use a regular imperative form of the verb, followed by a reportative particle such as -t ƛi:

gipỉddeggin įuġus siḷḷupput nuttsohe-t ƛi

'I asked her/him not to do it'

(lit. I asked him 'don't do it')

§12.2.4 Conditional

The conditional mood is one of two irrealis moods in Pine. Conditional clauses indicate an action that is not actualised but instead belong to a projected, hypothetical or contingent reality. The conditional mood has two main functions in Pine. It is used with hypothetical predictions and counterfactual situations, but unlike English, reported or prospective events framed from a past perspective are generally expressed using the dubitative future tense, which functions as a future-in-the-past tense.

The conditional mood is used with the following constructions:

įu...'if'
įuḥḥot...'if not'
iḳ...'lest'
...hỉt'in order to'
įai...(predictive protasis)
įaįįa...(counterfactual protasis)
§12.2.4.1 Conditional Protasis & Apodosis

The conditional mood in Pine is used in hypothetical predictions, which generally contain a protasis (if-clause) and its ensuing result, or apodosis. Both protatic and apodotic clauses are found in the conditional in Pine. The protasis is introduced by įu for positive clauses and įuḥḥi for negative clauses, and it is hyponomous to the apodosis. The apodosis is nearly always found preceding the protasis:

[apodosis], įu [protasis]

siskiminttutṡut, įu gemittuttṡin

'if I had known, I would have come'

However, should the protasis come first, the subordinating conjunction įu will come in second position, directly following the first word (or rather the first phrase) of the protasis:

gemittuttṡin įu, siskimintutṡut

'if I had known, I would have come'

§12.2.5 Potential

The potential mood in Pine marks events or states that are presented as possible but not entailed – situations that the speaker views as lying within the range of ability, capacity or circumstantial possibility, without asserting them as actual. Because it belongs to the irrealis mood set like the conditional, the potential may entail a conditional protasis. The potential is used to indicate:

1) ability or inherent possibility

siskiminttilit, įu gemiḍḍuttṡisin

'I could have come, if I had wanted to'

2) circumstantial possibility

gasiḷḷuppuḷḷet, įu siskiminttattṡin

'I could do it if I came'

3) epistemic possibility

įul įa siskiminttuḷḷin

'I may come, it could be that I come'

The potential mood is found with a variety of constructions, such as:

įul įa...'maybe'
na Ø-t ke'might...?'
na įul ke'I wonder...'
na įu-t ke'I wonder....'
i įu-t gi įa'hopefully....'

§12.3 Order, Constituent Ordering

The word order, or constituent ordering (to distinguish it from order), in Pine depends on the order of the verb, that is whether the verb is in the autonomous or hyponomous order, and the specific type of clause. Pine distinguishes two major classes of clause: independent and dependent. The basic word order for independent clauses in Pine is VOS, or verb-initial, and SOV for dependent clauses, or verb-final. Each of the 24 subtypes of clauses has one or more possible word order. However, verb-initial and verb-final are the two main contrasting types.

An independent clause can be autonomous or conjunctive hyponomous clauses (although they can also appear in the dependent order, more or less in free variation). Independent clauses in the autonomous order are the default, citation type clauses. For example, tsiggan vỉḷvut mi minda įo ‘the girl hears birds’ is an example of an independent autonomous clause with an VOS order. It can be made into a conjunctive clause, with no effect on constituent ordering other than the predicative phrase preceding the verb (OVS), by introducing it with a conjunction and changing the order from the autonomous to the hyponomous: įu vuogvut tsikkutan mi minda įo ‘when the girl hears birds’, or vuogvut įu tsikkutan mi minda įo, with the conjunction in second position.

A dependent clause is always found in the hyponomous order. Dependent clauses include relative clauses, infinitive clauses and indirect interrogative clauses. The default word order for dependent clauses is OVS, although relative clauses sometimes require SOV(A), where the relativised antecedent must be found clause finally:

mi sakvin įo, nami deįįa tikṇen įoOVS

'the man who lives here'

mi nennen įo, nama mi sakvin go įo beuįikkiddun įoSOV

'the friend whom the man introduced'

The order is OVS when the subject appears as the relative pronoun (in the example above, nami ‘who’) and is therefore the head of the relative clause. The dependent order is SOV when a nominal or pronominal subject not be the head of the dependent clause – in such cases, it appears directly following the relative pronoun separated from the rest of the clause by the focus particle įo.

The constituent order of polar indirect interrogative clauses is the only subtype of dependent clauses that has the VOS word order. Polar indirect interrogatives behave like an independent tag interrogative (although it is hyponomous) with an in-situ interrogative phrase.

Although constituent ordering at the phrase level is dependent on order and the type of clause, the constituent of phrases other than the verb phrase is mostly unchanged. For this reason, constituent ordering of phrases other than the verb phrase will be described before going into the ordering of constituents at the sentence level and the verb phrase.

The table below summarises the various types of clauses and their general order. For clarity, [H] indicates the head of a relative clause, as its role as object or subject may cause changes in the constituent ordering.

orderclause typeconstituent orderexample
autonomousmain clauseVOSƛủbma Niṡkuƛit mi sakvin įo
‘the man speaks Pine’
hyponomouscomplementised clauseOVS
or
VOS
gamidda, įa Niṡkuƛit ƛủbmut mi sakvin įo
‘I know that this man speaks Pine’
conjunctive clauselủbmun įu Niṡkuƛit mi sakvin įo
Niṡkuƛit įu lủbmun mi sakvin įo
‘when the man spoke Pine’
restrictive relative clausessubject restrictive(S/O)V[H]mi Niṡkuƛit ƛủbmut sakvin įo
‘the man who speaks Pine’
object restrictivemi sakvin įo ƛủbmut ḷủlut na
‘the language the man speaks’
genitive object restrictivemi daġa sƛủlon galủbmisit sakvin įo
‘the man whose language I speak’
indirect ditransitive restrictivemi ḷủlo gimaįikkisinnit sakvin įo
‘the man that I taught the language to’
direct ditransitive restrictivemi sagvemot gimaįikkisin ḷủlut na
‘the language that I taught the man'
mit- restrictivemikkudit mi sakvin įo ƛủbmut ḷủlut na
‘the language the man speaks in’
indirect interrogative restrictivemittyt mi sakvin įo ƛủbmut niṡ ḷủlo na ai nủka
‘I don't know what language the man speaks’
non-restrictive relative clausessubject non-restrictive(S/O)V[H]mi ḷủlut na, nami ohat meurvemi na
‘the language, which is very difficult’
object non-restrictivemi ḷủlut na, nama mi sakvin įo ikkủ ƛủbmut a
‘the language, which the man speaks well'
genitive object non-restrictivemi sakvin įo, nama ai sƛủlon galủbmisit a
‘the man, whose language I speak’
indirect object non-restrictivemi sakvin įo, namet ḷủlo gimaįikkisin a
‘the man, to whom I taught the language’
direct object non-restrictivemi ḷủlut na, nama sagvemot gimaįikkisin a
‘the language, which I taught to the man'
oblique and fusional non-restrictivemi keggi, naggiḷḷu bidni mi sakvin įo
‘the day, after which the man arrived’
adverbial non-restrictiveoįįu tselullin, naįįot gebidnin
‘you left when I arrived’
indirect interrogative clausesrestrictive relative interrogativeSOVmittyt mi sakvin įo naṡ ḷủlo na ƛủbmut ai nủka
‘I don't know what language the man speaks’
extractive interrogative[H](O)V(S)mittat nukka, naįįu Niṡkuƛit aiṡkůn mi sakvin įo
'I don't know when the man learned Pine'
polar interrogativeVOSmittat nukka, na ƛủbmu-t ke naṡ ḷủlut na mi sakvin įo
'I don't know what language the man speaks'
dependent interrogativeOVSmittat nukka, Niṡkuƛit aiṡkůn naįįu mi sakvin įo
'I don't know when the man learned Pine'
hyponomous copulainfinitive clausescopular infinitivesVOCopaįegat ḷủlo nẻ na
‘to teach the language’
Ødependent infinitivesOVai misiḷḷuttat giṡnuṡ
‘I will start doing it’
hyponomoussemifinitivesnakkut sagvema sisangattsimmit gepiddikkin
‘…which I asked the man to help you with’

§12.3.1 The Noun Phrase

A noun phrase has as its head a noun. Pine noun phrases generally have a head-last directionality, meaning the head of the phrase tends to appear last, only followed by independent pronouns in the case of noun phrases, with the exception of noun phrases which contain an indefinite or determiner pronoun (which are collectively called dependent pronouns), in which case an independent pronoun will follow the head of the noun phrase. The constituents of the noun phrase are the attributive adjective phrase, noun adjunct phrase, dependent pronoun phrase and the postposition phrase.

attributive adjective phrase

Attributive adjective phrases (adjp) are found directly preceding the head noun. The adjective phrase can contain other dependents, most commonly adverbs, but occasionally noun adjuncts.

adjp ⟫ n

kảḷḷi ṇuokku‘a tall tree’
onnava tselga‘a beautiful woman’
kủt keukvut ỉ ƛalla ilkka‘a two day (long) journey’
tammet ṇįirra‘a big nose’
ƛuoįįu nunnot bỉṡki‘a child that is always angry’
kuįįot tsukṇi‘a sharp knife’
ari kuįįot tsukṇi‘a very sharp knife’

noun adjunct phrase

Noun adjunct phrases (na) contain nouns, pronouns, adnominal adverbs, infinitive clauses or non-restrictive relative clauses, which function in a similar way to adjectives in that they qualify the head noun – they are adjunct to the noun, but do not necessarily only contain nouns. Nominal noun adjuncts are found in the genitive in Pine. They are found preceding attributive adjectives. They often co-occur with determiners, which themselves co-occur with an independent pronoun following the head noun. In some cases, the determiner pronoun phrase can be understood to be part of the adjunct phrase, and in other cases it can be understood to be part of the noun phrase, with slightly different reading depending on the association of the determiner. Should more than one noun adjunct occur, their internal order is pronounnounadnominal adverbinfinitive clause ⟫ non-restrictive relative clause.

(det) ⟫ na ⟫ adjp ⟫ n ⟫ (ind.pron)

mi sagvema kuįįot tsukṇi na‘the man’s sharp knife’ or ‘a/the sharp man’s knife’
ormi sagvema įo kuįįot tsukṇi ‘the man’s sharp knife (belonging to the man)’
mi deįįa kuįįot tsukṇi na‘the sharp knife here’
mi kỉkumit ƛalla ṇuokkogi nỉ ‘the tall trees in the forest’
sagvema iḷḷyt nennen‘man’s best friend’
daġa hikva nennen‘her/his good friend’
kủt keukvut ỉ ṃiġta lemppa‘two days’ hard work’
kủt ari ƛalla keukvut ỉ ṃiġta lemppa‘two very long days’ hard work’
ỉ kủt ari ƛalla keukvu-t de ỉ ṃiġta lemppa‘these two very long days’ hard work’
ga-t angat nin ai ỏḍknot tenttsa na‘some strange desire to help’
kuolaƛƛat nin nannet raykvi gaiḥy ‘a powerful need to suckle’
bįaktṡo kuolaƛƛat nin nannet raykvi gaiḥy‘the baby’s powerful need to suckle’

kủt bįaktṡut ỉ kuolaƛƛat nin nannet raykvi gaiḥy

‘the two babies’ powerful need to suckle’

Non-restrictive relative clauses adjunctive to a noun phrase are nearly always introduced by a definite determiner, but are part of the noun adjunct phrase.

mi kįasƛet heḷvemi kảḷḷi ṇuokku na‘the rapidly growing tall tree’
mi sagvema kįasƛet heḷvemi kảḷḷi ṇuokku na‘the man’s rapidly growing tall tree’
ỉ kủt kįasƛet heḷvas kảḷḷi ṇuokkogi-t de nỉ‘these two rapidly growing trees’

kủt bįaktṡut ỉ kuolaƛƛat nin nannet kįasƛet heḷvemi raykvi gaiḥy

‘the two babies’ rapidly growing powerful need to suckle’

Definite genitive noun phrases are often excluded from the adjunct clause if it is already filled, but are included if they are not definite, or if they are definite but the independent pronoun instead refers to the head noun.

mi sagvema įo kuoka angat nin ai ỏdknot tenttsa na

‘the man’s other strange desire to help’

mi sagvema įo kủt deįįa kuįįot tsukṇegi nỉ

‘the man’s two sharp knives here’

but

mi kuoka sagvema angat nin ai ỏdknot tenttsa na

‘the man’s other strange desire to help’

dependent pronoun phrase

Dependent pronouns collectively refers to indefinite (indef) and determiner pronouns (det), as they cannot appear without an independent pronoun following the head noun. Dependent pronoun phrases precede the head noun, which must then be followed by an independent pronoun, a third-person pronoun in that agrees in animacy and number with the head noun. Multiple dependent pronouns can occur, but only one independent pronoun follows the head noun. The usual order of dependent pronouns is demonstrative ⟫ indefinite. If two or more indefinite pronouns or determiners co-occur, their order may vary depending on which is more emphasised, which will then be closer to the head noun.

[det ⟫ indef] ⟫ (na) ⟫ (adjp) ⟫ n ⟫ pron

mi kảḷḷi ṇuokku na‘the tall tree’
na kảḷḷi ṇuokku-t de‘this tall tree’
ỉ kủt kảḷḷi ṇuokkogi-t de nỉ‘these two tall trees’
gait kủt ṇụokkogi nỉ‘any two trees’
na kủt keukvut ỉ ṃiġta lemppa-t de‘this two days’ hard work’
kủt tyvi mỉgỉn gassegi nỉ ‘the year’s two first months’
kủt sagvema kuįįot tsukṇegi nỉ‘the man’s two sharp knives’

postposition phrase

Postpositions (postp), as the name implies, follow the noun and are an exception to the general head directionality trend of the noun phrase, along with independent pronouns of dependent pronouns. Most commonly postpositions appear both following the head noun and any independent pronouns required by dependent determiners:

(det ⟫ indef) ⟫ (na) ⟫ (adjp) ⟫ n ⟫ (pron) ⟫ postp

boagve upṃia‘behind the house’
tammet boagve upṃia‘behind the big house’
kủt keukvut ỉ eġot‘after two days’
na kủt keukvut ỉ ṃiġta leimpo-t de hỉn‘because of this two days’ hard work’
kủt sagvema iḷḷyt nemmit ỉ keįįa‘together with the man’s two best friends’
ỉ kủt ƛalla ṇůeyki-t de nỉ sảsi‘(somewhere) between these two tall trees’

§12.3.2 The Adjective Phrase

The adjective phrase (adjp) has as its head an adjective, and has head-final directionality. Only attributive adjectives are considered as part of the adjective phrase, as attributive adjectives in Pine function as verbs, with the exception of resultative adjective predicates, which themselves behave like adverbs. The dependents of the adjective phrase are the adverb phrase, adjective adjunct phrase and the dependent pronoun phrase.

More than one adjective can be found describing the same head. The order of adjectives can be described as abstract qualities first (age and appearance) and less abstract qualities second (category and material). Participle-like verb (called here predicate) forms always come directly before the head noun.

ageappearance [evaluativesizecolour ⟪⟫ shape] ⟫ categorymaterialpredicatenoun

luṡkot onnava bintṡet bakvi‘beautiful little old house’
luṡkot pỉƛƛa kiƛullut bakvi‘little old red wooden house’
§12.3.2.1 Adverb Phrase

Adjectives can be found with adverbs or an adverb phrase (advp) which directly precedes the head of the adjective phrase. Some adverbs only appear when with adjectives that have a degree of comparison, for example ihhủt ‘much (+comp)’. The adverb phrase can contain more than one adverb, in which case it is an adverbial phrase. The internal ordering of the adverbial phrase is generally evaluative ⟫ temporal ⟫ locative ⟫ manner ⟫ degree, although it is possible to find one of the adverbs after the head should there be many in a row, especially locative adverbs.

advpadj

ari hikva‘very good’
ihe tammet‘quite big’
ihhủt tammekkut‘much bigger’
kủgỉt kįasƛi‘extremely rapid’
pukkut ṃiġta‘too loud, heavy’
ninut meurra‘a little difficult’
beukkut meurra‘less difficult’
ḷủ įoaįit deįįa ỏḍknosset pitṡku ‘currently certainly unusually quiet in here’
orḷủ įoaįit ỏḍknosset pitṡku deįįa‘currently certainly unusually quiet in here’
§12.3.2.2 Adjective Adjunct Phrase

The adjective adjunct phrase (aa) can contain a noun or a noun phrase, tġeůts keukvut ỉ ƛalla ‘three day long’, a conjunction, innit ƛalla ‘tall nontheless’ or gami va ƛallogut ‘taller than me’, an infinitive clause, siƛukƛat nummin nannet edda pukkut ƛalla ‘still too tall to fit’ or siƛukƛimi edda pukkut ƛalla. More than one adjective adjunct can occur, in which case they have the following order: infinitiveconjunctionnoun. With noun phrases used in comparatives, the noun usually appears in the comitative, for example tġeůts keukvut ỉ ƛalla ‘three day long’ but tġeůts keukvuin ỉ ƛallogut ‘three days longer’.

aaadvpadj

innittsůn ari hikva‘very good nontheless’
tsami va ihhủt tammekkut‘much bigger than you’
peůna hảrtsi ari gaḍḍa‘otherwise very much worth the struggle’
siḷḷuttat ai nannet peůna ari gaḍḍa‘otherwise very much worth doing it’
ai hikƛa sakvints ari roktunget‘very good looking for a man in addition’
§12.3.2.3 Dependent Pronoun Phrase

As with nouns, adjective phrases can be found with dependent pronouns as dependents, in which case they behave identically, and adjectives fulfil the syntactic role of a noun, and are declined as such without a head noun.

[det ⟫ indef] ⟫ (aa) ⟫ (advp) ⟫ adj ⟫ pron

mi kảḷḷi na‘the tall one’
na kảḷḷi-t de‘this tall one’
ỉ kủt kảḷḷegi-t de nỉ‘these two tall ones’
gait kủt kảḷḷegi nỉ‘any two tall ones’
dait sakvints ari roktunget įo‘any one very good looking for a man’
mỉgvai peůna hảrtsi ari gaḍḍa na‘each one otherwise very much worth the struggle’
įo tsami va kủt oantsein ỉ kảḷḷegy-t de‘this one two metre taller than you’

§12.3.3 The Adverb Phrase

The adverb phrase (advp) has as its head an adverb, but in certain cases a noun can serve as the head, in which case the phrase is an adverbial phrase, for example when using the special adverbial accusative form of lakka ‘way’ adverbially, aįi laggi ‘in a clear way, clearly’. Adverb phrases can only appear with adverb adjunct dependents.

§12.3.3.1 Adverb Adjunct Phrase

The adverb adjunct phrase (aadvp) can contain another adverb which describes the head adverb. The internal ordering of adverb adjuncts is evaluative ⟫ temporal ⟫ locative ⟫ manner ⟫ degree.

aadvpadv

ari kįasƛet‘very rapidly’
issigegůįįůkkattit ihhủt kįasket‘remarkably more rapidly’
girƛuġtennattit įoaįit kįasƛet‘currently shockingly rapidly’
taġġ(uss)ivuttattit nįukkut‘noticeably much’
taġġ(uss)ivuttattit ihhủt nįustut‘noticeably a lot more’

§12.3.4 The Independent Verb Phrase

The independent verb phrase (vp) has as its head a verb and may contain various arguments, namely complement phrases and adjunct phrases. The independent verb phrase is found in autonomous clauses and certain hyponomous clauses, such as coordinate hyponomous clauses. Unlike most other types of phrases, the independent verb phrase has head-first directionality in most cases, although adverb adjuncts may precede it. The constituents of the independent verb phrase are adjuncts, complements and the auxiliary verb phrase.

§12.3.4.1 Verb Adjunct Phrase

The verb adjunct phrase (av) most commonly has an adverb or adverbial of place, time or manner, subject or object adjuncts, usually in the essive or in the form of a hyponomous object adjunct phrase. Verb adjuncts may appear directly before or after the verb. Of adjuncts that are found preceding the verb, temporal adjunctive adverbs, essive subject adjuncts, hyponomous object adjuncts and dependent syllogous adjuncts are the most common, while locative adjunctive adverbs and adjunctive adverbs of manner and adverbials follow it, with locative adjunctive adverbs generally preceding adjunctive adverbs of manner. The same is true of place and manner adverbs – they may migrate before the verb if adverbials are found after the verb. Verb adjuncts are more commonly found after the verb, but both positions are accepted for adverbs. Object essive adjuncts can be found both before or after the verb, such that speiknets pỉƛƛảts boagve and pỉƛƛảts speiknets boagve ‘they painted the house red’ are both common, where pỉƛƛảts is an object adjunct. The internal order of the verb adjunct phrase is usually:

[temp.adv / subj/obj.adjunct]vadverbial ⟫ [temp.adv ⟫ loc.adv ⟫ manner.adv] ⟫ infinitive ⟫

adverb, essive, subject and object adjuncts

avv

gikekvot siskibidnin‘I arrived yesterday’
skikkot mibidni‘s/he arrived suddenly’
įoa nả sảktsen įo‘s/he is now awake’
pỉįit galulluṡon‘we will leave at dawn’
giḷḷit gesảskin‘I woke up early’
lullin geneggin‘I saw her/him leaving’
nunnots gesảskin‘I woke up angry’
ari helvi‘it grew a lot’
ṇiṇįeḷḷadda gelidnattagin‘I said I was sick’
pỉƛƛảts speknets boagve‘they painted the house red’

essive object adjuncts, adjunctive adverbs and adverbials

vav

siskibidnin gikekvot‘I arrived yesterday’
hautut minan lỏset sủmaġan laggi ‘s/he walks slowly in the morning like her/his mother’
gikṇa deįįa‘I live here’
ƛủbman ari pỉtṡkoset‘s/he speaks very quietly’
speknets pỉƛƛảts boagve‘they painted the house red’

gikekvot siskibidnin ilgat nįottset nats

‘I arrived yesterday, having travelled for a long time’

gikekvot siskibidnin giḷḷit deįįet lullat nats

‘I arrived here early yesterday when you had left’

aleybmi sỉkaġan laggi lỏset ỉlisat au nuna

‘s/he starting speaking slowly like his/her father after having met him’

In dependent clauses, the entire adjunct phrase precedes the verb:

[temp.adv / subj/obj.adjunct]adverbial ⟫ [temp.adv ⟫ loc.adv ⟫ manner.adv] ⟫ infinitive ⟫ v

...įu gikekvot skikkot siskibidnin

'...when I suddenly arrived yesterday'

§12.3.4.2 Verb Complement Phrase

The verb complement phrase (cp) houses the grammatically required objects of polyvalent verbs, or the predicate or subject complement of monovalent verbs, and typically comes following the verb and the adjunct phrase. Subject complement phrases however may precede the verb and any preverbal adjunct phrase. The complement phrase also hyponomous object complements.

monovalent verbs

Monovalent verbs may have as the head of their complement phrase either a predicate, usually in the form of an accusative copular predicate, nả ảṇṇen ‘is available’, or a subject complement ‘. Predicate complements can themselves have adjuncts, which precede the head of the complement phrase, for example nả vỉskon ‘is sorry’ and nả nannit vỉskon ‘is sorry about it’. Certain monovalent verbs may have oblique complements, which appear after the verb. Copular complements usually govern plurality of the copula.

predicate and oblique complements

(av) ⟫ v ⟫ (av) ⟫ cp

gamma įoa sảktsen‘I am now awake’
ỉ innik gỉḷo mi bakvi na‘the house was still unchanged’
na tsamma-t ke saƛvemi?‘are you a fisherman?’
nả miuho įo‘s/he is still alive’
na nả-t ke keƛkảts mi na-t de?‘is this a problem?’
na įoa nả-t ke keƛkảts mi na-t de?‘is this now a problem?’
nỉ nannet ỉddon a, įa…‘it was thanks to her/him/it, that…’
gasiḷḷumma ḷinkkussit‘I’m working on a boat’
guįįavvuṡ naįįet‘I will adapt to it’
nảt iṡi ṇuokkogi mi na-t de‘these are old trees (lit. this are…)’

subject complement

cp ⟫ (av) ⟫ v ⟫ (av)

hikvảts hutṇami‘it seems good’
kảḷḷỉts helvi‘it grew tall’
bakvi va kảḷḷỉts helvi‘it grew taller than the house’
kảḷḷỉts tuovo helvi‘it grew tall last year’
kảḷḷỉts tuovo helvi kảtski laggi‘it grew tall like grass last year’
bįunnủts haḷḷi‘it turned into a joke’
bįunnủts kįasƛet haḷḷi‘it quickly turned into a joke’
na hikva saƛvemỉts uṃṃỉn tsaḷin ke?‘did you finally become a good fisherman?’

transitive verbs

Transitive verbs have a nominal object as the head of their complement phrase. When the complement phrase of a transitive verb appears directly before a nominal subject phrase, the nominal subject phrase usually appears with a definite determiner, unless the complement phrase contains a dependent pronoun. Predicative object complements are usually adjectives in the essive or a hyponomous verbal phrase. Adjective predicative object complements are most commonly followed by an independent pronoun should the object not be a noun, but if the pronoun is absent, which may happen, then the object complement usually precedes the verb.

object complement

(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v ⟫ (av) ⟫ cp

ganegi sagvema‘I see the/a man’
tṇeget įaktṡon mi sakvin įo‘the man sees the woman’
tỉlet įo įaktṡon de sakvin‘the knows sees this woman’
usket ganegi sagvema‘I often see the/a man’
lủbman migỉts ai‘s/he said it (to be) right’
migỉts lủbman‘s/he said it (to be) right’
hikvảts gỏket‘I consider it good’
gỏki nỉgunnen ai‘I consider her/him dead’
ṇeveski ṇủmava‘I am mourning my mother’
raugvot tsevaydnet soalkken‘you closed the door hard’
ỉllủbmets onỉgunnen au‘they declared him dead’

skikkot gehįiḷvet negat ṇủmava kaunkkia hįỉḷo

‘I suddenly remembered the story having seen my mother’

As with the adjunct phrase, the complement phrase also precedes the verb in dependent clauses:

(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v

...įu įaktṡon tṇegiddat mi sakvin įo

'...when the man sees the woman'

§12.3.4.3 Auxiliary Phrase

The auxiliary phrase (auxp) has as its head the negative auxiliary verb for independent verb phrases. The negative auxiliary verb requires the head verb to be in a connegative form, which is -(v)at for monovalent autonomous verbs, -(v)it for monovalent hyponomous verbs and -(v)ut/-(v)yt for polyvalent verbs. It is common for the negative auxiliary verb to be in either the normal position or final position, but the initial position of the connegated verb is the standard. Generally, the connegative form preceding the auxiliary (vauxp) is more emphatic than the ‘normal’ order (conjugated verb appearing clause initially, auxp ⟫ v).

(cp) ⟫ (av) ⟫ v ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ auxp

(cp) ⟫ (av) ⟫ auxp ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v

uġun sảktsen kukka‘I am not awake’
hikvảts utṇat ủįa(mi)‘it does not seem good’
kảḷḷỉts ủ(įi)n ellat ṇuokku‘the tree did not grow tall’
nekkyt sagvema nủki‘I don’t see the man’
pỉįit lullat nủkuṡon‘we will not leave at dawn’

gikekvot nủkin ilgat nįottset kaunkka nats bidnit

‘I did not arrive yesterday, having travelled for a long time’

skikkot nukket negat ṇủmava kaunkka hįỉḷo hįiḷḷyt

‘I suddenly did not remember the story having seen my mother’

§12.4 The Dependent Verb Phrase

The dependent verb phrase is a construction found in non-restrictive and restrictive relative clauses, indirect interrogatives and in verbal complements. In other words, verb phrases that are subordinate to a predicate head or a main verb fall under the category of dependent verb phrases (depvp). Dependent verb phrases do not have the typical autonomous VOS word order, but rather OVS, and they are left-branching, or head-final.

(av) (cp) ⟫ v

In other words, the dependent verb phrase is mirrored when compared to the independent verb phrase – constituent precedes the head. In relative clauses where the subject of the verb is not relativised, the subject phrase appears at the start of the verbal phrase, often separated by the focus particle įo, or alternatively clipped to the end of the clause by topic markers.

nả kuokullit mi [ṇitaveva įo] daįįet osseldattagin sakvin įo

'the man my daughter married is a foreigner'

nả kuokullit mi sakvin įo, namet osseldattagin, [a ṇitaveva-t da]

nả kuokullit mi sakvin įo, namet [ṇitaveva įo] osseldattagin įo

'the man, whom my daughter married, is a foreigner'

§12.5 Relative Clauses

Relative clauses in Pine can be remarkably complex when compared to English. Pine differentiates two major types of relative clauses; restrictive and non-restrictive relative clauses. These two types of relative clauses differ greatly from each other. Restrictive relative clauses are those which give essential or defining information about its head, for example ‘the knife that I sharpened’, where the knife is defined by the fact that I sharpened it. In English, restrictive relative clauses are commonly introduced by that. Non-restrictive relative clauses on the other hand introduce non-defining, non-essential information or additional information about its head, for example ‘the knife, which I sharpened, is on the table’, where ‘which I sharpened’ doesn’t identify the knife specifically.

Morphosyntactically, restrictive relative clauses are closer to normal, independent clauses in Pine. The word order and the verb order differ, and they are most commonly introduced by a determiner such as mi, although they can and often do stand without any determiner.

(9)restrictive
ḥįůįįami ṡilttṡummit mi gekuįįuttisin tsukṇi na h--ju--jjami cilc--cummit mi gi-kujjuttisin c-ukN-i na
[ˈʔjœjːɑːmɪ ˈʃɪlːt͡ʃʊmːɪt mɪ gɛˈkʊjːʊʰtɪːsɪn ˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɪ nɑː]
ḥ-įůįį-ami ṡilttṡ-ummit mi ge-kuįįod-ϕisin tsukṇi-Ø na
3i.ag-lie-3i.prs table-iness det 1.ag.pst-sharpen-3˚.hyp.pst knife-act pron.3i
‘the knife that I sharpened is on the table’
(10)non-restrictive
ḥįůįįami ṡilttṡummit mi tsukṇi na, nama gekuįįuttisin a h--ju--jjami cilc--cummit mi cukN-i na, nama gi-kujjuttisin a/
[ˈʔjœjːɑːmɪ ˈʃɪlːt͡ʃʊmːɪt mɪ ˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɪ nɑː ˈnɑːmɑ gɛˈkʊjːʊʰtɪːsɪn ɑː]
ḥ-įůįį-ami ṡilttṡ-ummit mi tsukṇi-Ø na nam-a ge-kuįįod-ϕisin a
3i.ag-lie-3i.prs table-iness det knife-act pron.3i which-acc 1.ag.pst-sharpen-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the knife, which I sharpened, is on the table’
(11)kuįįogami mi tsukṇi na, nami ṡilttṡummit nin a
kujju-gami mi cukN-i na, nami cilc--cummit nin a/
[ˈkʊjːɔgɑːmɪ mɪ ˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɪ nɑː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈʃɪlːt͡ʃʊmːɪt nɪːn ɑː]
Ø-kuįįog-ami mi tsukṇi-Ø na nam-i ṡilttṡ-ummit nin a
3i.ag-be.sharp-3i.prs det knife-act pron.3i which-act table-iness cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘the knife, which is on the table, is sharp’

kuįįogami mi tsukṇi na, nama ṇummava įo algủts malkkutṇut a

kujju-gami mi cukN-i na, nama n-ummafa ju- malguuc- malkkut-n-ut a/

[ˈkʊjːɔgɑːmɪ mɪ ˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɪ nɑː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈalːguːt͡s mˈalːkʊtːn̥ʊh ɑː]

Ø-kuįįog-ami mi tsukṇi-Ø na nam-a ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo alg-ủts Ø-im-alk-ϕun-tṇut a

3i.ag-be.sharp-3i.prs det knife-act pron.3i which-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc gift-ess

3a.ag.pst-kin-give-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io pron.3i

‘the knife, which my mother gifted me, is sharp’

The restrictive relative clause is contained within the determiner phrase (mi…na) and its found in the hyponomous (gekuįįuttisin ‘I sharpened it’). In the non-restrictive relative clause, the entire relative clause is separated from the main clause with a comma, and is introduced by the relative pronoun phrase nami…įo/na ‘which’. The word order in non-restrictive relative clause is SOV rather than the VOS normally seen elsewhere in Pine.

§12.5.1 The Relative Verb Phrase: Restrictive Relative Clauses

Relative clauses contain restrictive relative clauses and are nearly universally introduced by a dependent pronoun. The head of a restrictive relative clause is either a noun or a pronoun. Noun-headed relative clauses are said to be bound, while pronoun-headed relative clauses are said to be free, where the noun phrase is empty. Bound relative clauses introduced by dependent pronouns are concluded by an independent pronoun that agrees in animacy and number with the head noun but which is not declined for case, while free relative clauses have declinable independent pronouns.

(12)bound
mi deįįa tikṇen niṡki įo mi t-i-jja tikN-i-n nicki ju-
[mɪ ˈdɛjːɑ ˈtɪkːŋ̊ɛn ˈnɪʃːkɪ jɔː]
mi de=įįa t-ikṇ-ven niṡki-Ø įo
det here.iness 3a-live-nloc.hyp person-act 3a.pron
‘the person that lives here’
(13)free
mi deįįa tikṇen įo mi t-i-jja tikN-i-n ju-
[mɪ ˈdɛjːɑ ˈtɪkːŋ̊ɛn jɔː]
mi de=įįa t-ikṇ-ven įo
det here.iness 3a.ag-live-nloc.hyp pron.3a.act
‘s/he that lives here’

The verb phrase of relative clauses differs from the verb phrase of independent clauses in that the verb must be in the hyponomous order and must come directly before the head of the relative clause, which means that all post-verb dependents must be shifted to a position before the head of the restrictive relative clause. Moreover, should there be a nominal subject to the verb phrase which is not the head of the restrictive relative clause, it is introduced before the verb phrase and followed by the focus particle įo~įe. The verb phrase is always in the hyponomous.

vp in independent clausevp in restrictive relative clause
(av) ⟫ v ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp)(sp + įo) ⟫ [(cp) ⟫ (av) ⟫ v]

bound

[[det ⟫ indef] ⟫ (na) ⟫ (adjp) ⟫ (vp) ⟫ n ⟫ (pron)] ⟫ (postp)

mi deįįa nin iṡi sakvin įo‘the old man who is here’
mi mi na-t de įo nin iṡi sakvin įo‘the old man who this is’
mi bįůeƛƛi tṡuttṡuḳ nin iṡi sakvin įo‘the old man who is the boy’s grandfather’
mi ỉski įo tỉliddat ari iṡi sakvin įo‘the very old man that the woman knows’
mi ỉski įo hisket tỉliddat sakvin įo‘the old man that the woman knows well’
mi ỉski įo gikekvot neggiddat sakvin įo‘the old man that the woman saw yesterday’
mi ỉski įo gikekvot neggiddat sagvemot įo‘to the old man that the woman saw yesterday’

mi ỉski įo gikekvot neggiddat boagvimut oaįut ṇikkava va ihhủt iṡegyt sagvemot įo

‘to the old man in the house obviously much older than my father that the woman saw yesterday’

free

[[det ⟫ indef] ⟫ (na) ⟫ (adjp) ⟫ (vp) ⟫ Ø ⟫ pron] ⟫ (postp)

mi deįįa ni(mme)n mana‘something that is here’
mi ỉski įo gikekvot nekkin mana‘something the lady saw yesterday’
mi ỉski įo voaḥḥįu naġan tuįįingen mani‘somewhere the lady has never been to’
mi voaḥḥįu lủbmit tuįįen įo‘someone who never speaks’

Restrictive relative clauses define the referent in the same way that attributive adjectives describe their noun. The difference between restrictive and non-restrictive relative clauses is that non-restrictive relative clauses add information about the referent, while restrictive relative clauses describe it in such a way that removing it may completely change the meaning of the phrase:

non-restrictive

(14)ṇikkut siḷủlat simindvi ṇiboagvedan mi sakvin įo, nama sỉṃṃonan įo sṇỉkkimin go
n-ikkut siLuulat simintf-i n-ip-u-agfi-t-an mi sakfin ju-, nama siim-mu-nan ju- st-n-iikkimin gu-
[ˈn̥ɪʰkʊt sɪˈɬuːlat sɪˈmɪnːdᶣɪ n̥ɪˈbɑːkᶣːɛːdanmɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈsiːm̥ːɔːnan jɔ ˈstn̥iːʰkɪːmɪn gɔ]
ṇi=kkut si-ḷủl-at si-Ø-mind-vi ṇi-boagv-et-an mi sakvin-Ø įo, nam-a s-ỉṃṃ-on-an įo s-nỉg-ϕimin go
1.pron.com cis-speak-dep cis-3a.ag.pst-come-nloc.pst poss.1-house-illat-poss.loc det man-act pron.3a which-gen poss.3a-wife-pat-poss.nloc foc 3a.unag.pst-die-3o.hyp.pst pron.3o
‘the man, who’s wife died, came to my house to speak with me’

restrictive

(15)geḷủlin migit ỉṃṃon įo sṇỉkkimin sagvinnut įo
gi-Luulin migit iim-mu-n ju- st-n-iikkimin sagfinnut ju-
[gɛˈɬuːlɪn mɪːgɪh ˈiːm̥ːɔn jɔ ˈstn̥iːʰkɪːmɪn ˈsakᶣːɪnːʊt jɔː]
ge-ḷủl-in mi=git ỉṃṃ-on įo s-nỉg-ϕimin sagv-innut įo
1.ag.pst-speak-loc.pst that.gen wife-pat foc 3a.unag.pst-die.3o.nloc.hyp.pst man-com pron.3a
‘I spoke with the man whose wife died’

Although the presence of the determiner mi is most often understood to cause the argument to be determined (‘the’), it can also correspond to undetermined nouns in English. Likewise, its absence can be read as an undetermined argument, or an oblique or unagentive partitive.

mi Øani.sg įo‘the Ø that Øs’
mi Øina.sg (n)a‘the Ø that Øs’
mi Øpl (n)ỉ‘the Ø that Ø’
Øsg įo/(n)a‘(a/some) Ø that Ø’
Øpl (n)ỉ‘(some) Ø that Ø’
(16)tikṇan [nįiįįa mittsun sỉṃṃukkỉn va tṇaġa spỉktṡuinan bintṡet mỉḍnumit] mi sakvin įo
tikN-an n--ijja mic-cun siim-mukkiin fa t-n-ag-a spiikc--uinan p-in-c--i-t miit--numit mi sakfin ju-
[ˈtɪkːŋ̊an ˈɲɪjːɑ ˈmɪt͡sːʊn ˈsiːm̥ːʊʰkiːn wɑ ˈtn̥ɑːɣɑ ˈspiːkːt͡ʃʊɪ̯nan ˈbɪn̥ːt͡ʃɛt ˈmiːðːnʊːmɪt mɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː]
t-iḳn-an nįi=įįa mitts=un s-ỉṃṃ-ukkit-an va tṇaġa s-bỉktṡ-uin-an bintṡet mỉḍn-umit mi sakvin-Ø įo
3a.ag-live-nloc.prs there.iness together.with poss.3a-wife-com-poss.nloc and five.det poss.3a-child-com.pl-poss.nloc small cabin-iness det man-act pron.3a
‘the man lives [there with his wife and his five children in a small cabin]’
(17)mi [nįiįįa mittsun sỉṃṃukkỉn va tṇaġa spỉktṡuinan bintṡet mỉḍnumit] tikṇen sakvin įo
mi n--ijja mic-cun siim-mukkiin fa t-n-ag-a spiikc--uinan p-in-c--i-t miit--numit tikN-i-n sakfin ju-
[mɪ ˈɲɪjːɑ ˈmɪt͡sːʊn ˈsiːm̥ːʊʰkiːn wɑ ˈtn̥ɑːɣɑ ˈspiːkːt͡ʃʊɪ̯nan ˈbɪn̥ːt͡ʃɛt ˈmiːðːnʊːmɪt ˈtɪkːŋ̊ɛn ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː]
mi nįi=įįa mitts=un s-ỉṃṃ-ukkit-an va tṇaġa s-bỉktṡ-uin-an bintṡet mỉḍn-umit t-iḳn-ven sakvin-Ø įo
det there.iness together.with poss.3a-wife-com-poss.nloc and five.det poss.3a-child-com.pl-poss.nloc small cabin-iness 3a.ag-live-nloc.hyp.prs man-act pron.3a
‘the man that lives [there with his wife and his five children in a small cabin]’

Indefinite pronouns generally lack a determiner and are fully declined, but attributive determiners of indefinite pronouns do not appear with determiners are all, but they are found with independent pronouns like the determiner.

pronounattributiveindependent singularindependent plural
some, a certain (animate, known)da-t Ø įo/(n)ỉ
‘some Ø, that…’
Ø daddas
‘someone, that…’
Ø daddaski~daddi
‘some people, that…’
some, a certain (inanimate, known)ga-t Ø (n)a/(n)ỉ
‘some Ø, that…’
Ø gaggas
‘something Ø, that…’
mi Ø gaggaski~gaggi nỉ
‘some things, that…’
some (animate, unknown)ỏhakiṡ Ø įo/(n)ỉ
‘some Ø, that…’
Ø ỏhakammi
‘someone, that…’
Ø ỏhakammet
‘some people, that…’
some (inanimate, unknown)Ø ỏhakiṡki
‘something, that…’
mi Ø kiṡkagi nỉ
‘some things, that…’
any (animate)ỏha(da)-t Ø įo/(n)ỉ
‘any Ø, that…’
Ø ỏha(da)ddas
‘anyone~thing, that…’
Ø ỏha(da)ddaski~ỏha(da)ddi
‘any of them, that…’
any (inanimate)ỏha(ga)-t Ø įo/(n)ỉ
‘any Ø, that…’
Ø ỏha(ga)ggas
‘anyone~thing, that…’
Ø ỏha(ga)ggaski~ỏha(ga)ggi
‘any of them, that…’
no, none (animate)vaḥḥa~vuodda-t~vuogga-t Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘no Ø, that…’
Ø vuoddas
‘none, that…’
Ø vuoddaski~vuoddi
‘none, that…’
no, none (inanimate)Ø vuoggas
‘none, that…’
Ø vuoggasgi~vuoggi
‘none, that…’
both (animate)kuįįu Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘both Ø, that…’
Ø kủƛƛas
‘both, that…’
Ø kủƛƛaski~kủƛƛi
‘both, that…’
both (inanimate)Ø kủįįas
‘both, that…’
Ø kủįįaski~kủįįi
‘both, that…’
every, all (animate)gvai Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘every Ø, that…’
Ø gvaiddas
‘everyone, that…’
Ø gvaiddasi~gaiddi
‘everyone/all, that…’
every, all (inanimate)Ø gvaiggas
‘everything, that…’
Ø gvaiggaski~gvaiggi
‘all, that…’
everything, the wholeƛuo Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘all, the whole Ø, that…’
Ø ƛuoƛƛas
‘all, that…’
manymitṇa Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘many Ø, that…’
Ø nannas
‘many, that…’
Ø nannaski~nanni
‘many, that…’
moremitṇut Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘more Ø, that…’
Ø nakkut
‘more, that…’
Ø nakkukki
‘many, that…’
mostminƛyt Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘most Ø, that…’
Ø naƛƛut
‘most, that…’
Ø naƛƛukki
‘most, that…’
fewpavi Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘few Ø, that…’
Ø pavvas
‘few, that…’
Ø pavvaski
‘few, that…’
fewerpavut Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘fewer Ø, that…’
Ø pakkut
‘fewer, that…’
Ø pakkukki
‘few, that…’
fewestpauƛut Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘fewest Ø, that…’
Ø paƛƛut
‘fewest, that…’
Ø paƛƛukki
‘fewest, that…’
much, a lotnįukku Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘a lot of Ø, that…’
Ø nįukkis
‘much, that…’
morenįustu Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘more Ø, that…’
Ø nįustut
‘more, that…’
mostnįuḷḷu Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘most Ø, that…’
Ø nįuḷḷut
‘most, that…’
a littleninu Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘a little Ø, that…’
Ø ninas
‘little, that…’
lessnittu Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘less Ø, that…’
Ø nittut
‘less, that…’
leastniƛƛy Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘least Ø, that…’
Ø niƛƛyt
‘least, that…’
(the) otherkuoka~iḷḷul Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘other Ø, that…’
Ø kuokkas~iḷḷulas
‘other, that…’
Ø kuokkaski~kuokki~iḷḷulaski
‘others, that…’
(the) samegitṇa Ø įo/(n)a/(n)ỉ
‘same Ø, that…’
Ø giggas
‘same, that…’
Ø giggaski~giggi
‘same, that…’

attributive

(18)gỉli gvai tsỉllit mỉntto įo gami
giili gfai c-iillit miinttu- ju- gami
[ˈgiːlɪ ˈgᶣæɪ̯ ˈt͡siːlːɪt ˈmiːnːtɔ jɔː ˈgɑːmɪ]
g-ỉl-i gvai ts-ỉl-ϕit mỉntt-o įo gami
1.ag-know-1˚.prs every.det 2.ag-know-1˚.hyp.prs girl-acc pron.3a pron.1.act
‘I know every girl you know’
(19)ỉllyt vaḥḥa tsỉllit mỉntto įo nủki
iilla-t fah--ha c-iillit miinttu- ju- nuuki
[ˈiːlːʏt ˈwaʔːɑ ˈt͡siːlːɪt ˈmiːnːtɔ jɔː ˈnuːkɪ]
ỉl-ϕyt vaḥḥa ts-ỉl-ϕit mỉntt-o įo n=ủ=k-i
know-conneg.tr no.det 2.ag-know-1˚.hyp.prs girl-acc pron.3a 1.ag.neg.aux-1˚.prs
‘I know none of the girl you know’
(20)gemigvet nįukku getṡẻlġġisin sauƛen a gami
gi-migfi-t n--ukku gi-c--i-i-lg-isin sauTi-n a/ gami
[gɛˈmɪkᶣːɛt ˈɲʊʰkʊ gɛˈt͡ʃeːlːɣɪːsɪn ˈsɑu̯t͡ɬɛn ɑː ˈgɑːmɪ]
ge-migv-vet nįukku ge-tṡẻlġġ-ϕisin sauƛ-en a gami
1.ag.pst-eat-3˚.pst much.det 1.ag.pst-cook-3˚.hyp.pst fish-acc pron.3i pron.1.act
‘I ate a lot of the fish I cooked’
(21)tsemigvet nittu getṡẻlġġisin sauƛen a vu gami
c-i-migfi-t nittu gi-c--i-i-lg-gisin sauTi-n a/ fu gami
[t͡sɛˈmɪkᶣːɛt ˈnɪʰtʊ gɛˈt͡ʃeːlːɣɪːsɪn ˈsɑu̯t͡ɬɛn ɑː wʊ ˈgɑːmɪ]
tse-migv-vet nittu ge-tṡẻlġġ-ϕisin sauƛ-en a vu gami
2.ag.pst-eat-3˚.pst less.det 1.ag.pst-cook-3˚.hyp.pst fish-acc pron.3i than.neg pron.1.act
‘you ate less of the fish I cooked than me’
(22)tseneggintṡagi mitṇa nỉt sỉlnudat gamittisian vuogvut ỉ tṡattṡin
c-i-ni-ggin-c--agi mit-n-a niit siilnut-at gamittisian faa-gfut ii/ c--ac--cin
[t͡sɛˈnɛkːɪn̥ːt͡ʃɑːgɪ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ hiːt ˈsiːlːnʊːdat gɑˈmɪʰtɪsːsɪ̯an ˈwuʊ̯kʷːʊh iː ˈt͡ʃat͡ʃːɪn]
tse-neg-vin-tṡa=gi mitṇa nỉt s-ỉln-ut-at ga-mid-ϕisit-an vuogv-ut ỉ tṡattṡin
2.ag.pst-see-1˚.pst-pl.incl.ambi many.det pron.3i.gen.pl 1.ag-know-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.infr bird-acc.pl pron.3a.pl pron.2.pl.incl-act
‘we saw many birds whose names I know’

independent

(23)gỉla tsỉllut gvaiddi
giila c-iillut gfait-ti
[ˈgiːlɑ ˈt͡siːlːʊt ˈgᶣæɪ̯tːɪ]
g-ỉl-a ts-ỉl-ϕut gvai=dd-i
1.ag-know-2˚.prs 2.ag-know-2˚.hyp.prs everyone-acc
‘I know everyone you know’
(24)ỉllyt tsỉllutan vuoddit nủkan
iilla-t c-iillutan faa-t-tit nuukan
[ˈiːlːʏt ˈt͡siːlːʊːtan ˈwuʊ̯tːɪt ˈnuːkan]
ỉl-ϕyt ts-ỉl-ϕut-an vuodd-it n=ủ=k-a-n
know-conneg.tr 2.ag-know-2˚.hyp.prs-pl.infr no.one-acc.pl 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs-pl.infr
‘I know none (of the people) you know’
(25)piskyt tselidnun vuogga nukkan
f-iska-t c-i-lit-nun faa-gga nukkan
[ˈpɪsːkʏt t͡sɛˈlɪʔtnʊn ˈwuʊ̯kːɑ ˈnʊʰkan]
pisk-ϕyt tse-lidn-ϕun vuogg-a n=u=k-van
hear-conneg.tr 2.ag.pst-say-2˚.hyp.pst nothing-acc 1.ag.pst.neg.aux.pst-2˚.pst
‘I heard nothing of what you said’
(26)geneggan gỉliskun dadda
gi-ni-ggan giiliskun t-at-ta
[gɛˈnɛkːan gˈiːlɪsːkʊn ˈdatːɑ]
ge-neg-van ge-ỉl=isk-ϕun dadd-a
1.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst 1.ag.pst-recognise-2˚.hyp.pst someone-acc
‘I saw someone I recognised’
(27)gemigvan getṡẻlġġun nįukka
gi-migfan gi-c--i-i-lg-gun n--ukka
[gɛˈmɪkʷːan gɛˈt͡ʃeːlːɣʊt ˈɲʊʰkɑ]
ge-migv-van ge-tṡẻlġġ-ϕun nįukk-a
1.ag.pst-eat-2˚.pst 1.ag.pst-cook-2˚.hyp.pst much-acc
‘I ate a lot of what I cooked’
(28)tsemigvan getṡẻlġġun nitta va gami
c-i-migfan gi-c--i-i-lg-gun nitta fa gami
[t͡sɛˈmɪkʷːan gɛˈt͡ʃeːlːɣʊt ˈnɪʰtːɑ wɑ ˈgɑːmɪ]
tse-migv-van ge-tṡẻlġġ-ϕun nitt-a va gami
2.ag.pst-eat-2˚.pst 1.ag.pst-cook-2˚.hyp.pst less-acc than pron.1.act
‘you ate less of what I cooked than me’
(29)tseneggantṡigi nỉt sỉlnudat gamittisian nadnit tṡattṡin
c-i-ni-ggan-c--igi niit siilnut-at gamittisian nat-nit c--ac--cin
[t͡sɛˈnɛkːan̥ːt͡ʃɪːgɪ niːt ˈsiːlːnʊːdat gɑˈmɪʰtɪːsɪ̯an ˈnaʔtnɪt ˈt͡ʃat͡ʃːɪn]
tse-neg-van-tṡa=gi nỉt s-ỉln-ut-at ga-mid-ϕisit-an nadn-it tṡattṡin-Ø
2.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst-pl.incl.ambi.pst pron.3a.gen.pl poss.3a-name-acc.pl-poss.nloc.pl 1.ag-know-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.infr many- acc.pl pron.1.pl.incl-act
‘we saw many (people) whose names I know’

There are seven different types of restrictive Relative Clauses, depending on the role of the head within the relative clause. In subject restrictive relative clauses, the head is the subject. In direct object restrictive relative clauses, the head is the direct object, and so on.

subject restrictive relative clauses

(30)ṇįalami keuƛṃunnit mi ikkinnit hiḷvemi ỉlppon a
Nalami ki-uTpmunnit mi ikkinnit hiLfi-mi iilppu-n a/
[ˈɲ̊ɑːlɑmɪ ˈkɛu̯t͡ɬːm̥ʊnːɪt mɪ ˈɪʰkːɪnːɪt ˈhɪɬːfɛːmɪ ˈiːlːpɔn ɑː]
h-nįal-ami keuƛṃ-unnit mi ikkỉn h-siḷḷ-vemi ỉlpp-on a
3i.unag-hang-3i.prs ceiling-elat det good-elat 3i.unag-smell-3i.hyp.prs flower-pat pron.3i
‘the flower that smells good is hanging from the ceiling’

direct object restrictive relative clauses

(31)tṡoaḷḷoat įoa mi tuovvo gepuiįįisinin ilbegi nỉ
c--u-aLLu-at ju-a mi taa-ffu- gi-puijjisinin ilp-i-gi nii
[ˈt͡ʃɑːɬːɑːt jɑː mɪ ˈtuʊ̯ʋːɔ gɛˈpʊɪ̯jːɪsɪːnɪn ˈɪlːbɛːgɪ niː]
Ø-tṡoaḷḷ-oat įoa mi tuovvo ge-puiįį-ϕisin-in ilbi-Ø-gi nỉ
3i.ag-be.dry-3i.pl.prs now det last.year 1.ag.pst-pick-3˚.hyp.pst-pl.infr.pst flower-act-pl pron.3i.pl
‘the flowers I picked last year are now dry’

genitive object restrictive relative clauses

(32)tṇunnogan mi daġa satsuoġnen ṇinaktisin sakvin įo
t-n-unnu-gan mi t-ag-a sac-aa-g-ni-n n-inaktisin sakfin ju-
[ˈtn̥ʊnːɔːgan mɪ ˈdɑːɣɑ sɑˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛn n̥ɪˈnakːtɪːsɪn ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː]
t-nunnog-an mi daġa sa-tsuoġn-e-n ṇi-nakt-ϕisin sakvin-Ø įo
3a.ag-be.angry-nloc.prs det pron.3a.gen poss.3a-knife-acc-poss.nloc 1.unag.pst-break-3˚.hyp.pst man-act pron.3a
‘the man whose knife I broke is angry’

indirect ditransitive restrictive relative clauses

(33)spỉƛƛiġƛummi mi ỉlppon gimalkkisinnit mỉntto įo
spiiTTihf-Tummi mi iilppu-n gimalkkisinnit miinttu- ju-
[ˈspiːt͡ɬːɪxːt͡ɬʊmːɪ mɪ ˈiːlːpɔn gɪmˈalːkɪsɪnːɪt ˈmiːnːtɔ jɔː]
s-pỉƛƛ=iġƛuθ-vi mi ỉlpp-on g-im-alk-ϕisin-nit mỉntt-o įo
3a.unag.pst-blush-nloc.pst det flower-acc 1.ag.pst-kin-give.-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit girl-pat pron.3a
‘the girl I gave a flower to blushed’

direct ditransitive restrictive relative clauses

(34)tṡoaḷḷami mi mỉnttot gimalkkisin ilbi na
c--u-aLLami mi miinttu-t gimalkkisin ilp-i na
[ˈt͡ʃɑːɬːɑːmɪ mɪ ˈmiːnːtɔt gɪmˈalːkɪːsɪn ˈɪːlːbɪ nɑː]
Ø-tṡoaḷḷ-ami mi mỉntt-ot g-im-alk-ϕisin ilbi-Ø na
3i.ag-be.dry-3i.prs det girl-illat 1.ag.pst-kin-give-3˚.hyp.pst flower-act pron.3i
‘the flower I gave to the girl is dry’

indirect interrogative restrictive relative clauses

(35)mittyt [mi [mỉnttot gimalkkisinnit ilbi na] [įo] niįįe naįįa ai]] nủka
mitta-t mi miinttu-t gimalkisinnit ilp-i na ju- nijji- najja ai nuuka
[ˈmɪʰtʏt mɪ ˈmiːnːtɔt gɪmˈalːkɪsɪnːɪh ˈɪlːbɪ nɑː jɔ ˈnɪjːɛ ˈnajːɑ æɪ̯ ˈnuːkɑ]
mid-ϕyt mi mỉntt-ot g-im-alk-ϕisin-nit ilbi-Ø na įo ni=įįe na=įįa ai nủ=k-a
know-conneg.tr det girl-illat 1.ag.pst-kin-give-3˚.hyp.pst-2.io flower-act pron.3i foc cop.3i.hyp.prs where.rel.iness pron.3i.acc 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs
‘I don’t know where the flower I gave to the girl is’
(36)gamida [mi [aikṇat [mikkudit mảven gamarƛƛisit tsuoġne na] naṡƛa nusin ai] gami
gamit-a mi aikN-at mikkut-it maafi-n gamarTTisit c-aa-g-ni- na nacTa nusin ai gami
[gɑˈmɪːdɑ mɪ ˈæɪ̯kːŋ̊at ˈmɪʰkʊːdɪt ˈmæːɥɛn gɑˈmarːt͡ɬɪːsɪt ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː ˈnaʃːt͡ɬa nʊːsɪn æɪ̯ ˈgɑːmɪ]
ga-mid-a mi aikṇ-at m=ikkut=it mảv-en ga-marƛ-ϕisit tsuoġn-e na naṡƛa nusin ai gami
1.ag-know-2˚.prs det repair-dep det that.com.3i meat-acc 1.ag-cut-3˚.hyp.prs knife-acc pron.3i how.rel cop.hyp.opt pron.3i.acc pron.1.act
‘I know how to repair the knife that I cut meat with’

mit- restrictive relative clauses

(37)gikṇa miįįat ṇikkava va įo ikṇin boagvimut a
gikN-a mijjat n-ikkafa fa ju- ikN-in p-u-agfimut a/
[ˈgɪkːŋ̊ɑ ˈmɪjːat ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ wɑ jɔ ˈɪkŋ̊ɪn ˈbɑkᶣːɪːmʊh ɑː]
g-ikṇ-va m=iįįa=t ṇ-ikka-Ø-va va įo Ø-ikṇ-ϕin boagv-imut a
1.ag-live-loc.prs that.iness.3i poss.1-father-act-poss.loc also foc 3a.ag.pst-live-nloc.hyp.pst house-iness pron.3i
‘I live in the house my father also lived in’
(38)ṇinakṇet mikkudit mảven gamarƛƛisit tsuoġne na
n-inakN-i-t mikkut-it maafi-n gamarTTisit c-aa-g-ni- na
[n̥ɪˈnakːŋ̊ɛt ˈmɪʰkʊːdɪt ˈmæːɥɛn gɑˈmarːt͡ɬɪːsɪt ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː]
ṇi-nakṇ-vet m=ikkut=it mảv-en ga-marƛ-ϕisit tsuoġn-e na
1.unag.pst-break-3˚.pst that.com.3i meat-acc 1.ag-cut-3˚.hyp.prs knife-acc pron.3i
‘I broke the knife that I cut meat with’
(39)ginttyt mikkudit galủbma ḷủlon a tuįįit
gintta-t mikkut-it galuup-ma Luulu-n a/ tujjit
[ˈgɪnːtʏt ˈmɪʰkʊːdɪt gɑˈluːʔpmɑ ˈɬuːlɔn ɑː ˈtʊjːɪt]
gind-ϕyt m=ikkut=it ga-lủbm-a ḷủlo-n a t-u=įį-vit
understand-conneg.tr that.com.3i 1.ag-speak-loc.hyp.prs language-acc pron.3i 3a.ag.pst-neg.aux.pst-nloc.pl.pst
‘they did not understand the language I speak’
(40)ůḷḷỉlaskut miįįỉnit tsƛủlatṡit hảlli na tuįįas ỉ kuokkillukki-t de
u--LLiilaskut mijjiinit c-Tuulac--it haalli na tujjas ii kaa-kkillukki_0 t-i-
[œɬːˈiːlasːkʊt ˈmɪjːiːnɪt ˈt͡st͡ɬuːlɑːt͡ʃɪt ˈhæːlːɪ nɑː ˈtʊjːas iː ˈkʊu̯ʰkɪlːʊʰkɪd ͜ dɛ]
ůḷḷ=ỉlask-ϕut m=iįįỉn=it ts-ḷủl-a=tṡit hảll-i na t-uįį=v-as ỉ kuokkillut-Ø-ki–t de
be.familiar-conneg.tr that.iness.3i 2.ag-talk-loc.hyp.prs.pl.incl custom-acc pron.3i 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.prs.pl pron.3a.pl foreigner-act-pl dem.prox
‘these foreigners aren’t familiar with the custom we’re talking about’
(41)minkkvanin mỉgỉnit gilga ƛykkyt ỉ ṇikkava
minkkfanin miigiinit gilga Ta-kka-t ii/ n-ikkafa
[ˈmɪŋːkʷɑːnɪn ˈmiːgiːnɪt ˈgɪlːgɑ ˈt͡ɬʏʰkʏt iː ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ]
Ø-minkk-van-in m=ỉgỉn=it g-ilg-a ƛykk-yt ỉ ṇ-ikk-Ø-va
3a.ag.pst-fix-2˚.pst-pl.infr.pl that.com.3i.pl 1.ag-go-hyp.prs ski-acc.pl pron.3i.pl poss.1-father-act-poss.loc
‘my father fixed the skis I get around with’

Relative clauses, restrictive and non-restrictive, can be mutually recursive, meaning a relative clause can itself contain another relative clause. Because infinite recursivity would mean an infinite number of determiners at the beginning of the primary restrictive relative clause, only a single determiner phrase, usually mi, is used to introduce the primary restrictive relative clause and all subsequent secondary relative clauses – embedded relative clauses lack mi and an independent pronoun. Restrictive relative clauses can also have embedded inside of them a non-restrictive relative clause.

(42)telkkututtami Niṡkuƛingit [mi [ỉllyt nuttsut] mỉnttot galkkisin ảltten a]
ti-lkkututtami nickuTiN-it mi iilla-t nuc-cut miinttu-t galkkisin aaltti-n a/
[ˈtɛlːkʊtʊʰtɑːmɪ ˈnɪʃːkʊt͡ɬɪŋːɪt mɪ ˈmiːnːtɔh ˈiːlːʏt ˈnʊt͡sːʊt gˈalːkɪːsɪn ˈæːlːtɛn ɑː]
Ø-telk-vututt-ami Niṡkuƛ-ingit mi ỉl-ϕyt n=u=ts-ϕut mỉntt-ot g-alk-ϕisin ảltt-en a
3i.unag-write-pass-3i.prs Pine-elat.pl det know-conneg.itr 2a.ag-neg.aux-1˚.hyp.prs girl-illat 1.ag.pst- give-3˚.hyp.pst book-pat pron.3i
‘the book I gave the girl you don’t know is written in Pine’

(never *telkukvi Niṡkuƛingit [mi [mi ỉllyt nuttsut mỉnttot įo] gimalkkisinnit ảltten a])

Some speakers may seek to avoid such recursive restrictive relative clauses by making the secondary relative clause non-restrictive:

(43)telkkututtami Niṡkuƛingit mi mỉnttot gimalkkisinnit ảltten a, numa ỉllyt nuttsut įo
ti-lkkututtami nickuTiN-it mi miinttu-t gimalkkisinnit aaltti-n a, numa iilla-t nuc-cut ju-
[ˈtɛlːkʊtʊʰtɑːmɪ ˈnɪʃːkʊt͡ɬɪŋːɪt mɪ ˈmiːnːtɔh gɪmˈalːkɪsɪnːɪh ˈæːlːtɛn ɑː ˈnʊːmɑ ˈiːlːʏt ˈnʊt͡sːʊt jɔː]
Ø-telk-vututt-ami Niṡkuƛ-ingit mi mỉntt-ot g-im-alk-ϕisin-nit ảltt-en a num-a ỉl-ϕyt n=u=ts-ϕut įo
3i.unag-write-pass-3i.prs Pine-elat.pl det girl-illat 1.ag.pst-kin-give-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit book-pat pron.3i which.neg-acc know-conneg.itr 2a.ag-neg.aux-1˚.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘the book I gave the girl you don’t know is written in Pine’

It is not uncommon that the determiner mi is repeated in such cases, both before the argument of the non-restrictive clause (mi mỉnttot, numa…) and the restrictive clause (mi gimalkinat…), especially in more colloquial speech, but this may be regarded as improper or incorrect by some:

(44)telkkututtami Niṡkuƛingit mi mỉnttot, numa ỉllyt nuttsut įo, mi gimalkkisin(nit) ảltten a
ti-lkkututtami nickuTiN-it mi miinttu-t, numa iilla-t nuc-cut ju-, mi gimalkkisinnit aaltti-n a/
[ˈtɛlːkʊtʊʰtɑːmɪ ˈnɪʃːkʊt͡ɬɪŋːɪt mɪ ˈmiːnːtɔh ˈnʊːmɑ ˈiːlːʏt ˈnʊt͡sːʊt jɔː mɪ gɪmˈalːkɪsɪnːɪh ˈæːlːtɛn ɑː]
Ø-telk-vututt-ami Niṡkuƛ-ingit mi mỉntt-ot num-a ỉl-ϕyt n=u=ts-ϕut įo mi g-im-alk-ϕisin-nit ảltt-en a
3i.unag-write-pass-3i.prs Pine-elat.pl det girl-illat which.neg-acc know-conneg.itr 2a.ag-neg.aux-1˚.hyp.prs pron.3a det 1.ag.pst-kin-give-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit book-pat pron.3i
‘the book I gave the girl you don’t know was written in Pine’
§12.5.1.1 Subject Restrictive Relative Clauses

Subject restrictive relative clauses whose head noun is the subject the clause into which the relative clause is embedded. Pine uses such relative clauses extensively, and they fulfill the role of attributive participal constructions in English (a running man, the falling rain, a broken branch). Pine lacks true participals, and instead favours the use of the restrictive relative clauses. For syllogous restrictive clauses that have a participial-like meaning, the third person animate, inanimate and obviate lack pronominal prefixes. Combining these two phrases below yields a subject restrictive relative clauses:

belkkussivuttan nennen‘a friend is trust worthy’
uṡƛủbmat tủįun nennen‘a friend does not lie’
(45)uṡƛủbmat tủįun mi belkk(uss)ivummen nennen įo
ucTuup-mat tuujun mi p-i-lkkussifummi-n ni-nni-n ju-
[ʊʃˈt͡ɬuːʔpmat ˈtuːjʊn mɪ ˈspɛlːk(ʊsː)ɪwʊmːɛn ˈnɛnːɛn jɔː]
uṡ=lủbm-ϕat t-ủį-un mi belg-ϕ(uss)ivuθ-ven nennen-Ø įo
lie-conneg.itr 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.dub.prs det believe-habil-pass-nloc.hyp.prs friend-act pron.3a
‘a trustworthy friend does not lie’

Attributive past participles can be found in the past, though the singular often has a shirt form in -in instead of -imi with inanimate nouns – attributive form generally lack the third-person inanimate final -mi. The difference between the past and the perfect in both subject and object relative clauses is mostly that the perfect form emphasises that the action was (already) completed, often in reference to some previously established time.

ṇaknenuƛin boġġi na‘a broken branch’
orṇakninuƛunne boġġi na‘a broken (the one that has broken) branch’
hattṡi mi ṇỉgin ṇůeyki na‘the dead tree fell’
hattṡi mi ṇỉgunne ṇůeyki na‘the dead (the one that has died) tree fell’

Below are more examples of subject restrictive relative clauses:

(46)ṛỉlkumit keukvon kukit sitṡoaƛṇuƛat lukkoat mi įỉḷot siṇįeggutussis skoldogi nỉ
r-iiLkumit ki-ukfu-n kuukit sic--u-aTt-nuTat lukku-at mi jiiLu-t siNi-ggutussis sku-lt-u-gi nii
[ˈr̥iːɬːkʊːmɪt ˈkɛu̯ʰkʷɔn ˈkʊːkɪt sɪˈt͡ʃɑːt͡ɬːn̥ʊːt͡ɬatˈlʊʰkɑːt mɪ ˈjiːɬɔt sɪˈɲ̊ɛkːʊtʊsːɪs ˈskɔlːdɔːgɪ niː]
ṛỉlk-umit keukv-on kuk-it si-tṡoaƛṇuƛ-at Ø-lukk-oat mi įỉḷ-ot si-h-nįegg-vutuss-is skoldu-Ø-gi nỉ
sunshine-iness day-acc two-acc.pl cis-dry-dep 3i.ag-must-3i.prs.pl det drying.rack-illat cis-3i.unag.pst- stretch-pass-3i.hyp.pst.pl skin-act-pl pron.3i.pl
‘skins stretched onto a rack must dry for a day or two in the sunshine’
(47)sṇỉggi lunnen hevvi mi bỉṡkỉts sisaƛƛaƛƛat gaįįeggimman sagvema įo
st-n-iiggi lunni-n hi-ffi mi p-iickiic- sisaTTaTTat gajji-ggimman sagfi-ma ju-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ ˈlʊnːɛn ˈhɛʋːɪ mɪ ˈbiːʃːkiːt͡s sɪˈsat͡ɬːat͡ɬːat ˈgajːɛkːɪmːan ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː]
s-nỉg-vi lunnen he-vvi mi bỉṡki-ts si-saƛƛ-aƛƛ-at g-aįįeg-vimman sagve-ma įo
3a.unag.pst-die-nloc.pst passed night-acc det child-ess cis-fish-freq-dep 1.ag.pst-teach-1˚.ret.hyp.pst man-pat pron.3a
‘the man who taught me to fish as a child died last night’
(48)ikṇit kuoka gaulppummut a mi peutṡet giḷḷu nis ỉ
ikN-it kaa-ka gaulppummut a/ mi pi-uc--i-t giLLu nis ii/
[ˈɪkːŋ̊ɪt ˈkuʊ̯kɑ ˈgɑu̯lːpʊmːʊh ɑː mɪ ˈpɛu̯t͡ʃɛt ˈgɪɬːʊ nɪːs iː]
Ø-ikṇ-vit kuoka gaulpp-ummut na mi peu=tṡet giḷḷu ni=s ỉ
3a.ag.pst-live-nloc.pst.pl other world-iness pron.3i det pron.1.gen.pl.incl before cop.3.hyp.pst.pl pron.3a.pl
‘those who came before us lived in a different world’
§12.5.1.2 Object Restrictive Relative Clauses

Subject and object restrictive relative clauses are very similar in function and form, with the exception of case marking on the object, which must be in the sematic form. The head of the relative clause is the object of the main clause. When a restrictive relative clause as a whole functions as the object of a verb, it commonly has a fourth-person referent in the verb, despite the fact that the head of the relative clause is a third-person inanimate pronoun. The most common construction where a determiner phrase is treated as a fourth-person object are indirect interrogatives.

(49)getekvan tsỉllut dadda
gi-ti-kfan c-iillut t-at-ta
[gɛˈtɛʰkʷan ˈt͡siːlːʊt ˈdatːɑ]
ge-tekk-van ts-ỉl-ϕut dadd-a
1.ag.pst-meet-2˚.pst 2.ag-know-2˚.hyp.prs someone-acc
‘I met someone you know’
(50)getekvan ỉllyt nuttsut dadda
gi-ti-kfan iillu-t nuc-cut t-at-ta
[gɛˈtɛʰkʷan ˈiːlːʏt ˈnʊt͡sːʊt ˈdatːɑ]
ge-tekk-van ỉl-ϕyt n=u=ts-ϕut dadd-a
1.ag.pst-meet-2˚.pst know-conneg.tr 2.ag.neg.aux-2˚.hyp.prs someone-acc
‘I met someone you don’t know’
(51)mittyt mi tsetekkun kakken ai nủka
mitta-t mi c-i-ti-kfun kakki-n ai nuuka
[ˈmɪʰtʏt mɪ t͡sɛˈtɛʰkːʊn ˈkaʰkɛn æɪ̯ ˈnuːkɑ]
mid-ϕyt mi tse-tekk-ϕun kakk=en ai n=ủ=k-a
know-conneg.tr det 2.ag.pst-meet-2˚.hyp.pst who.acc pron.3i.acc 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs
‘I don’t know who you met’
(52)mi sakvin įo įo puiįįevanin mi malkkimmipput ỉlppit ỉ
mi sakfin ju- ju- puijji-fanin mi malkkimmipput iilppit ii/
[mɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː jɔ ˈpʊɪ̯jːɛwɑːnɪn mɪ mˈalːkɪmːɪʰpʊh ˈiːlːpɪh iː]
mi sakvin-Ø įo įo Ø-puiįį=e-van-in mi ḥ-im-alk-ϕimmin-pput ỉlpp-it ỉ
det man-act pron.3a foc 3a.pst-pick-2˚.pst-pl.infr.pst det 3i-kin-give-1˚.ret.hyp.prs-2.io flower-acc.pl pron.3i.pl
‘it’s the man (and not someone else) who picked the flower that s/he2 gave you’
(53)gikaṡkvepput ṇukvopagit paknit lỉƛon
gikackfi-pput n-ukfu-pagit paknit liiTu-n
[gɪˈkaʃːkᶣɛʰpʊt ˈn̥ʊʰkʷɔˈpɑːgɪt ˈpaʔŋɪt ˈliːt͡ɬɔn]
g-i-kaṡk-vet-pput ṇukvo=pag-it Ø-pakn-ϕit lỉƛ-on
1.ag.pst-kin-prepare-3˚.pst-2.io head.ache-acc.pl 3i.unag-soothe-3i.hyp.prs tea-acc
‘I made you tea that soothes headaches’
(54)gesigvin sṇauskin bįaktṡu
gi-sigfin st-n-auskin p-jakc--u
[gɛˈsɪkᶣːɪn ˈstn̥ɑu̯sːkɪn ˈbjakːt͡ʃʊ]
ge-sigg-vin s-nausk-in bįaktṡ-u
1.ag.pst-hear-1˚.pst 3a.unag.pst-cry-nloc.hyp.pst child-acc
‘I heard a/the baby crying’

One difference is that in such cases where the object referent would appear in the final position of the phrase as an object in the main clause (that is to say, the referent is the object in both clauses), where a local subject is encoded into the main clause verb, the local subject is generally repeated at the end of the phrase, which is not necessary without a relative clause. This is done because Pine disfavours clause final objects followed by the independent pronouns įo, (n)a and (n)ỉ with a local subject and instead requires a subject pronoun. Non-local subjects are not allowed directly following the relative clause independent pronoun, as that would result in the illegal sequence of two consecutive third-person independent pronouns (*įo įo/na/nỉ, *(n)a įo/na/nỉ or *(g)ỉ įo/na/nỉ). This is termed clause final independent pronoun avoidance. To avoid this, įo can be inserted between the independent pronoun of the relative clause and the subject pronoun, or the subject pronoun can be dropped.

(55)gepalġġet tsuoġne
gi-palg-gi-t c-aa-g-ni-
[gɛˈpalːɣɛt ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ]
ge-palġ-vet tsuoġn-e
1.ag.pst-make-3˚.pst knife-acc
‘I made a knife’
(56)gepalġġet mi pinaktisin tsuoġne na
gi-palg-gi-t mi pinaktisin c-aa-g-ni- na
[gɛˈpalːɣɛt mɪ pɪˈnakːtɪːsɪn ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː]
ge-palġ-vet mi pi-nakt-ϕisin tsuoġn-e na gami
1.ag.pst-make-3˚.pst det 2.unag.pst-break-3˚.hyp.pst knife-acc pron.3i
‘I made the knife that you broke’

but

(57)palġġan mi pinaktisin tsuoġne na
palg-gan mi pinaktisin c-aa-g-ni- na
[ˈpalːɣan mɪ pɪˈnakːtɪːsɪn ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː]
Ø-palġ-van mi pi-nakṇ-ϕisin tsuoġn-e na
3a.ag.pst-make-2˚.pst det 2.unag.pst-break-3˚.hyp.pst knife-acc pron.3i
‘s/he made the knife that you broke’

or

(58)palġġan mi pinaktisin tsuoġne na įe įo
palg-gan mi pinaktisin c-aa-g-ni- na ji- ju-
[ˈpalːɣan mɪ pɪˈnakːtɪːsɪn ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː jɛ jɔː]
Ø-palġ-van mi pi-nakṇ-ϕisin tsuoġn-e na įe įo-Ø
3a.ag.pst-make-2˚.pst det 2.unag.pst-break-3˚.hyp.pst knife-acc pron.3i foc pron.3a-act
‘s/he made the knife that you broke’
§12.5.1.3 Genitive Restrictive Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses that refer to the genitive of an argument in the main clause are called genitive restrictive relative clauses. The possessor is an argument in the main clause, and the possessed argument is the head of the relative clause. The possessed argument is shown with possessive affixation and the possessor is also often included. The same can also be expressed without the possessor independent pronoun by using the genitive form of the mit- restrictive relative pronoun, migit/mỉdit.

(59)edda ḥonnattami mi ai sṇảdnydami įo gegatṡis ilbi na
i-t-ta h--u-nnattami mi ai st-n-aat-na-t-ami ju- gi-gac--is ilp-i na
[ɛtːɑ ˈʔɔnːaʰtɑːmɪ mɪ æɪ̯ ˈstn̥æːʔtnʏdɑːmɪ jɔ gɛgˈɑːt͡ʃɪːs ˈɪlːbɪ nɑː]
edda ḥ-onnaθ-ami mi ai Ø-sṇảdn-yt-ami įo geg-Ø-atṡ-is ilbi-Ø na
still 3i.ag-be.beautiful-3i.prs det pron.3i.gen poss.3i-petal-pat.pl-poss.3i foc transl-3i.unag.pst-fall-nloc.hyp.pst.pl flower-act pron.3i
‘the flower whose petals fell off is still beautiful’
(60)gebaḍvin mi daġa saskeůlttỷnan baƛṃoġvit gedulppisinin ṛuoƛƛỏ įo gami
gi-p-atf--in mi t-ag-a saski-u--ltta-a-nan p-aTp-mu-hfit gi-t-ulppisinin r-aa-TTu-u- ju- gami
[gɛˈbaðᶣːɪn mɪ ˈdɑːɣɑ sɑˈskøːlːtyːnan ˈbat͡ɬːm̥ɔɣᶣːɪt gɛˈdulːpɪsɪːnɪn ˈr̥ʊu̯t͡ɬːoː jɔː ˈgɑːmɪ]
ge-baḍv-vin mi daġa sa-skeůltt-ỷn-an baƛṃu-ġva ge-dulb-ϕisin-in ṛuo-ƛƛỏ įo gami
1.ag.pst-catch-1˚.pst det pron.3a.gen poss.3a-fur-elat-poss.nloc baby.shoe-acc.pl 1.ag.pst-sew-3˚.hyp.pst- pl.infr.pst female.stoat-acc pron.3a pron.1-acc
‘I caught a female stoats from whose fur I made baby shoes’
(61)galkvet migit ỉṃṃon įo sṇįeḷvemin sagvemot įo mỉktṡo
gaLkfi-t migit iim-mu-n ju- st-n-ji-Lfi-min sagfi-mu-t ju- miikc--u-
[gˈaɬːkᶣɛt mɪːgɪh ˈiːm̥ːɔn jɔ ˈstɲ̊ɛɬːfɛːmɪn ˈsakᶣːɛːmɔt jɔː ˈmiːkːt͡ʃɔ]
gi-alk-vet mi=git ỉṃṃ-on įo s-ṇįeḷḷ-ve=min sagvem-ot įo mỉktṡ-o
1.ag.pst-give-3˚.pst that.gen wife-pat foc 3a.unag-be.sick-3o.hyp.prs man-illat pron.3a medicine-acc
‘I gave medicine to the man whose wife is sick’
(62)minkkvangi mỉdit ỉseġva įo tulpṇuƛin gykkemit ỉ
miN-kkfaN-i miit-it iisi-hfa ju- tuLpt-n-uTin ga-kki-mit ii/
[ˈmɪŋːkʷaŋːɪ ˈmiːdɪh ˈiːsɛɣːʷɑ jɔ ˈtʊɬːpn̥ʊːt͡ɬɪn ˈgʏʰkɛːmɪh iː]
Ø-minkk-van-gi m=ỉdit ỉse-ġva įo Ø-tulpṇuƛ-in gykk-emit ỉ
3a.ag.pst-repare-2˚.pst-pl.ambi.pst that.gen.pl frame-pat foc 3i.unag.pst-crack-3i.hyp.pst snowshoes-acc.pl pron.3i.pl
‘they repared the snowshoes whose frame cracked’
(63)tsetṡadnetṡis mi ai hoįįomi a įo ẻts hỉįįukset ḷaldin įaƛƛon a tṡattṡin
c-i-c--at-ni-c--is mi ai hu-jju-mi a/ ju- i-i-c- hiijjuksi-t Lalt-in jaTTu-n a/ c--ac--cin
[t͡sɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛːt͡ʃɪs mɪ æɪ̯ ˈhɔjːɔːmɪ ɑː jɔ ˈeːt͡s ˈhiːjːʊkːsɛt ˈɬalːdɪn ˈjat͡ɬːɔn ɑː ˈt͡ʃat͡ʃːɪn]
tse-tṡadn-vet-tṡi-s mi ai hoįį-o-mi a įo ẻts hỉįįuk=set h-lald-in įaƛƛ-on a tṡattṡin-Ø
2.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst-pl.supr.incl-pl.infr.pst det pron.3i.gen embers-pat-poss.3i pron.3i foc still faintly 3i.unag.pst- glow-3i.hyp.pst fire-acc pron.3i pron.1.incl.pl-act
‘we found a fire whose embers still glowed faintly’
(64)na į-agettsimilgin ke migit naukva įo hakvemi sagvema įo sƛủllomedan?
na j_agi-c-cimilgin ki- migit naukfa ju- hakfi-mi sagfi-ma ju- sTuullu-mi-t-an?
[nɑ jɑːgɛt͡sːɪˈmɪlːgɪn kɛ ˈmɪːgɪt ˈnɑu̯ʰkʷɑ jɔ ˈhaʰkᶣɛːmɪ ˈsagᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː. ˈst͡ɬuːlːɔmɛːdan]
na į–a-ge-ts-im-ilg-in ke m=igit naukv-a įo h-sakk-ven sagve-ma įo s-ḷủllom-et-an
interr incho-transl-2.ag.pst-kin-go-loc.pst interr that.gen dog-pat foc 3i.unag-be.missing-3i.hyp.prs man-gen pron.3a poss.3a-speaking-illat-poss.nloc
‘did you go speak with the man whose dog is missing?’

na į-agettsiḷủlin ke mi daġa sṇaukvan įo hakvemi sagvinnut įo?

na j_agi-c-ciLuulin ki- migit t-ag-a st-n-aukfan ju- hakfi-mi sagfinnut ju-?

[nɑ jɑːgɛt͡sːɪˈɬuːlɪn kɛ mɪ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈstn̥ɑu̯ʰkʷan jɔ ˈhaʰkᶣɛːmɪ ˈsakᶣːɪnːʊt jɔː]

na į–a-get-ts-i-ḷủl-in ke mi daġa s-ṇaukv-a-n įo h-sakk-vemi sagv-innut įo

interr incho-transl-2.ag.pst-kin-speak-loc.pst interr det pron.3a.gen poss.3a-dog-pat-poss.nloc foc 3i.unag-be.missing-3i.hyp.prs man-com pron.3a

also: ‘did you go speak with the man whose dog is missing?’

§12.5.1.4 Ditransitive Indirect & Direct Restrictive Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses whose main clause argument is the indirect object of a ditransitive verb in the relative clause are indicated by having the ditransitive indirect verb in the hyponomous without further changes. This is because the pronominal indirect object of a ditransitive verb is anti-ergative, meaning it is treated in the same way as the direct object of a transitive verb, and as such these constructions are fully analogous to direct object restrictive relative clauses. When a direct object is relativised, the ditransitive verb is not usually hemiditransitive as the direct object is not seen as being part of the relative clause itself. Likewise, if the indirect object is relativised, the verb will lack any ditransitive markers. The same is not true of the indirect object being the head of a restrictive relative clause, in which case ditransitive paragogic finals do appear. In other words, if the indirect object is found in the illative as a relative pronoun or a noun inside the relative phrase, kinetic preverbs and ditransitive paragogic finals are not found, but if the relative phrase does not contain an independent pronoun or noun in the illative, the verb must be ditransitive. The direct object alone does not affect ditransitive markers in such cases, only the indirect object.

indirect object

mi oalkkoga gimalkkisinnit nennen įo‘the friend that I gave a gift to’
mi gimalkkisinnit nennen įo‘the friend that I gave it to’
…miįįedit oalkkoga galkkisin nennen įo‘…the friend that I gave a gift to’
…miįįedit galkkisin nennen įo‘…the friend that I gave it to’
…, namet oalkkoga gimalkkisin įo‘to whom I gave a gift’
…, namet gimalkkisin įo‘to whom I gave it’

direct object

mi gimalkkisittit algu na‘the gift I gave her/him’
mi nemmot galkkisin algu na‘the gift I gave a friend’
…, nama nemmot gimalkkisin įo‘which I gave to a friend’
…, nama gimalkkisinnit įo‘which I gave to her/him’
…, nama nannet gimalkkisin įo‘which I gave to her/him’

Restrictive relative clauses may be introduced by the determiner mi, but the reference to the indirect object may also be encoded into a mit- restrictive relative pronoun in the illative, for example miįįedit.

indirect object relative clause

(65)ỉllyt mi ṇummava įo stvůelppen ittulppimmukinnat tseilkkon įo nủki
iilla-t mi n-ummafa ju- stfu--i-lppi-n ittulppimmukinnat c-i-ilkku-n ju- nuuki
[ˈiːlːʏt mɪ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈstᶣyœ̯lːpɛn ɪʰˈtʊlːpɪmːʊkɪnːat ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɔn jɔː ˈnuːkɪ]
ỉl-ϕyt mi ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo stvůelpp-en Ø-iϕ-dulb-ϕimmun-kin-nat tseilkk-on įo nủ=k-i
know-conneg.tr det poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc dress-acc 3i.ag.pst-kin-sew-1˚.ret.hyp.pst-ret.dit-2˚.dit young.woman-acc pron.3a 1.ag.neg.aux-1˚.prs
‘I don’t know the young woman my mother sewed a dress for’
(66)hallekƛemmi ai tenittsůn mi ƛỉggo gimaittisinnit ilįoma įo
halli-kTi-mmi ai ti-nic-cu--n mi Tiiggu- gimaittisinnit iL-u-ma ju-
[ˈhalːɛkːt͡ɬɛmːɪ æɪ̯ ˈtɛːnɪt͡sːœn mɪ ˈt͡ɬiːkːɔ gɪmˈæɪ̯ʰtɪːsɪnːɪh ˈɪːʎɔmɑ jɔː]
Ø-hall=ekƛem-vi ai_teni-ttsůn mi ƛỉgg-o g-im-aidd-ϕisin-nit ilįo-ma įo
3a.unag-get.lost-nloc.pst anyways-also det path-acc 1.ag.pst-kin-show-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit family-pat pron.3a
‘the family we showed the way to got lost anyways’
(67)miḍḍyt miįįedit gảmpi getỏkkisin bįuḷḷu įo voivu tuįįan
mit-ta-t mijji-t-it gaam-pi gi-tu-u-kkisin p-juLLu ju- fu-aifu tujjan
[ˈmɪðːʏt ˈmɪjːɛːdɪt ˈgæːm̥ːpɪ gɛˈtoːʰkɪːsɪn ˈbjʊɬːʊ jɔː ˈwɑɪ̯wʊ ˈtʊjːan]
miḍ-ϕyt m=iįįet=it gảmp-i ge-tỏgg-ϕisin bįuḷḷu-Ø įo voivu t-u=įį-van
like-conneg.tr that.3a.illat cake-acc 1.ag.pst-bake-3˚.hyp.pst- boy-act pron.3a not.even 3a.ag.pst- neg.aux-2˚.pst
‘the boy I baked a cake for didn’t even like it’
(68)ipeġumminin gvaiddyttyt mi niṡpotsảlen gipeġuppisinnit nennen įo
ipi-g-umminin gfait-ta-tta-t mi nicpu-c-aali-n gipi-g-uppisinnit ni-nni-n ju-
[ɪˈpːɛt͡ɬᶣːɪnɪn ˈgᶣæɪ̯tːʏʰtʏt mɪ ˈnɪʃːpɔˈt͡sæːlɛn gɪˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪsɪnːɪt ˈnɛnːɛn jɔː]
Ø-i-peġuθ-vin-in gvaidd-yttyt mi niṡpo=tsảl-en g-i-peġuθ-ϕisin-nit nennen-Ø įo
3a.ag.pst-kin-tell-1˚.pst-pl.infr.pst everyone-illat.pl det secret-acc 1.ag.pst-kin-tell-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit friend- act pron.3a
‘the friend I told a secret to told everyone’
(69)halkkvan miįįedit ṇinįayrƛƛenna gaṇṇỉdnisin ai
halkkfan mijji-t-it n-in--aa--rTTi-nna gan-niit-nisin ai
[ˈhalːkʷan ˈmɪjːɛːdɪt n̥ɪˈɲæy̯rːt͡ɬɛnːɑ gˈan̥ːiːʔtnɪːsɪn æɪ̯]
Ø-halkk-van m=iįįet=it ṇi-nįayrƛƛ-en-va g-aṇṇỉn-ϕisin ai
3a.unag.pst-lose-2˚.pst that.3a.illat poss.1-axe-acc-poss.loc 1.ag.pst-kin-lend-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3a.pat
‘the person I lended my axe to lost it’

direct object relative clause

(70)nekkyt mi ṇummava įo įe tseilkkot dulppisin stvůelppen a nukket
ni-kka-t mi n-ummafa ju- ji- c-i-ilkku-t t-ulppisin stfu--i-lppi-n a/ nukki-t
[ˈnɛʰkʏt mɪ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔː jɛ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɔt ˈdʊlːpɪːsɪn ˈstᶣyœ̯lːpɛn ɑː ˈnʊʰkɛt]
neg-ϕyt mi ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo įe tseilkk-ot Ø-dulb-ϕisin stvůelpp-en a n=u=kk-vet
see-conneg.tr det poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc pron.3a foc young.woman-illat 3a.ag.pst-sew-3˚.hyp.pst dress-acc pron.3i 1.ag.pst-neg.aux.pst-3˚.pst
‘I didn’t see the dress my mother sewed for the young woman’
(71)ḥilkkutoġummi mi hallungussin ilįomet a (mi) gaittisis ƛỉggo na
h--ilkkutu-g-ummi mi halluN-ussin iL-u-mi-t a/ mi gaittisic- Tiiggu- na
[ˈʔɪlːkʊtɔɣʊmːɪ mɪ ˈhalːʊŋːʊsːɪn ˈɪːʎɔmɛh ɑː (mɪ) gˈæɪ̯ʰtɪːsɪs ˈt͡ɬiːgːɔ nɑː]
ḥ-ilg=vutoġum-vi mi Ø-hall=unguθ-in ilįom-et a (mi) g-aidd-ϕisin-s ƛỉgg-o na
3i.ag.pst-be.impassable-3i.pst det 3a.unag.pst-get.lost-nloc.hyp.pst family-illat pron.3i (det) 1.ag.pst- show-3˚.hyp.pst-pl.supr path.pat pron.3i
‘the way we showed the family who got lost was impassable’
(72)simivvat mi bįůeƛƛet getỏkkisin gảmpi na voivu nuįįi
simiffat mi p-ju--i-TTi-t gi-tu-u-kkisin gaam-pi fu-aifu nujji
[sɪmˈɪʋːat mɪ ˈbjʏy̯t͡ɬːɛt gɛˈtoːʰkɪːsɪn ˈgæːm̥ːpɪ nɑː ˈwɑɪ̯wʊ ˈnʊjːɪ]
s-im-ivv-ϕat mi bįůeƛƛ-et ge-tỏgg-ϕisin gảmp-i na voivu n=u=įį-vi
cis-kin-rise-conneg.itr det boy-illat 1.ag.pst-bake-3˚.hyp.pst cake-pat pron.3i not.even 3i.unag.pst- neg.aux.pst-3i.pst
‘the cake I baked the boy didn’t even rise’
(73)uġun peuġodda nuįįi mi ṇinemmodda gepeġuppisin niṡpotsalla na
ug-un pi-ug-u-t-ta nujji mi n-ini-mmu-t-ta gi-pi-g-uppisin nicpu-c-alla na
[ˈʊːɣʊn ˈpɛu̯ɣɔtːɑ ˈnʊjːɪ mɪ n̥ɪˈnɛmːɔtːɑ gɛˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪːsɪn ˈnɪʃːpɔˈt͡salːɑ nɑː ˈuːn]
uġun p-euġot-va n=u=įį-vi mi ṇi-nemm-ot-va ge-peġuθ-ϕisin niṡpo=tsalla-Ø na ủ=n
cop.conneg poss.2-about-poss.loc 3i.neg.aux-nloc.pst det poss.1-friend-illat-poss.loc 1.ag.pst-tell-3˚.hyp.pst secret-act pron.3i
‘the secret I told my friend was not about you’
(74)ari kuįįogami mi gimaṇṇỉdnisinnit nįoarƛa na
ari kujju-gami mi giman-niit-nisinnit n--u-ar-Ta na
[ˈɑːrɪ ˈkʊjːɔgɑːmɪ mɪ gɪmˈan̥ːiːʔtnɪsɪnːɪt ˈɲɑːr̥ːt͡ɬɑ nɑː]
ari Ø-kuįįog-ami mi g-im-aṇṇỉn-ϕisin-nit nįoarƛa-Ø na
very 3i.ag-be.sharp-3i.prs det 1.ag.pst-kin-lend-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit axe-act pron.3i
‘the axe I lended to her/him is very sharp’’
§12.5.1.5 mit- Restrictive Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses which require an oblique case or the essive, such as the genitive, elative or the comitative cases, are expressed by using so-called mit- restrictive relative clauses. Such clauses have an antecedent, which is referred to using relative forms of the third or fourth-person independent pronouns, which are modified versions of the non-local independent pronouns, where m(i)-Ø-(i)t has been prefixed, deleting any -a- found int the pronoun. The animacy of the referent is conserved, and obviation is possible. The fourth-person serves as an indeterminate relative pronoun. Note that words which normally precede the non-relative pronouns generally appear directly after the mit- relative pronouns, for example mittsun mikkudit ‘together it her/him/it’ becomes mikkudit mittsun ‘together with whom/which’ (or mimittsun(n)it) – the mit- relative pronoun is found clause initially.

Restrictive relative clauses that use mit- pronouns do not start with a determiner, as it is already implied in the mit- pronouns, as the prefix m(i)- is transparently derived from the determiner.

case3a3i3o3a.pl/3i.pl4
genitivemi(gi)tmu(gu)tmỉditmeįįat
mei(gi)t
inessivemiįįatmiįįat~miḥiatmuįįatmỉsỉtmeįįat
mimmuditmimmudit
illativemiįįeditmiįįedit~miḥeditmuįįoditmỉdủtmeįįedit
elativemiįįỉnitmiįįỉnit~miḥỉnitmuįįủnitmỉngiditmeįįỉnit
comitativemikkuditmukkiditmỉgỉnitmikkudit
essivemi(gi)tsmugutsmi(gi)ttsetmeįįats~meigits

In some cases, mit- pronouns have alternative or shorter forms, such as mits for migits or meigit instead of meįįat. Generally, shorter forms are typically found in colloquial contexts. The fourth-person genitive forms are equally common and not associated with any register. The third-person inanimate has alternative forms that distinguish it from the third-person animate, but these forms are either formal or used to clarify that the referent is inanimate. If it is clear from context, the forms identical to the third-person animate pronouns are often preferred.

§12.5.1.5.1 mit- Genitive Restrictive Relative Clauses

Genitive restrictive relative clauses using mi require the possessed relativised noun to be marked with possessive affixes preceded by the referent’s genitive pronoun, but using mit- pronouns this is not necessary:

mi s-ỉlnon-an‘whose name’
migit ỉlnon ‘whose name’

Using a determiner genitive restrictive relative clause results in a double genitive marking, and such relative clauses cannot relativise words which cannot be possessed, namely (possessive) pronouns, and must therefore use mit- pronouns. Such clauses are not possible or awkward in English (‘whose "it" it is’) if translated literally, but Pine allows them with the mit- genitive restrictive relative clauses. They relativise belonging or possession, such that ‘whose it it is’ can be better translated as ‘which belongs to’. If the referent is singular, the relative pronoun is mi(gi)t regardless of animacy, and if it is plural, mỉdit is used instead. In such phrases, migit really means ‘which is his/hers’ and mỉdit ‘which is theirs’ . The use of the obviate or fourth person is rare.

(75)nả migit nẻ bakvi na mi na-t de
naa migit ni-i- p-akfi na mi na_0 t-i-
[næː ˈmɪːgɪt neː ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ]
nả m=igit bakvi-Ø nẻ na mi na-Ø–t de
cop.3i.prs that.3a.gen cop.3i.hyp.prs house-act pron.3i det pron.3i-act dem.prox
‘this is the house which belongs to her/him’

(lit. this is the house that is his/hers)

(76)ṇinakṇet migit nỉn tsuoġne na gami
n-inakN-i-t migit niin c-aa-g-ni- na gami
[n̥ɪˈnakːŋ̊ɛt ˈmɪːgɪt niːn ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː ˈgɑːmɪ]
ṇi-nakṇ-vet m=igit nỉn tsuoġn-e na gami
1.unag.pst-break-3˚.pst that.3a.gen cop.3i.hyp.pst knife-acc pron.3i pron.1.act
‘I broke the knife which belonged to her/him’
(77)tsikṇon mỉdit nin gảlppimyt a
c-ikN-u-n miit-it nin gaalppima-t a/
[ˈt͡sɪkːŋ̊ɔn ˈmiːdɪt ˈnɪːn ˈgæːlːpɪːmʏh ɑː]
ts-ikṇ-on m=ỉdit nin gảlpp-imyt a
2.ag-live-loc.prs.pl that.3a.gen.pl cop.3i.hyp.prs land-ines pron.3i
‘you are living on land that is theirs’
(78)mi sakvin įo įo palġġan mugut nin tsuoġne na
mi sakfin ju- ju- palg-gan mugut nin c-aa-g-ni- na
[mɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː jɔ ˈpalːɣan ˈmʊːgʊt nɪːn ˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛ nɑː]
mi sakvin-Ø įo įo Ø-palġ-van m=ugut nin tsuoġn-e na
det man-act pron.3a foc 3a.ag.pst-make-2˚.pst that.3o.gen cop.3i.hyp.prs knife-acc
‘The man is the one who made the knife that belongs to her/him2’ (lit. which is her/him2)

If the mit- genitive clause is a free relative clause, such that it has no nominal head, the head pronoun is in the fourth person.

free relative

(79)nus įa tsṇįikkutsan meigit uġun muġġis ei
nus ja c-t-n-jikkuic-an mi-igit ug-un mug-gis i-i/
[ˈnʊːs jɑ ˈt͡sɲ̊ɪʰkʊːt͡san ˈmɛɪ̯gɪh ˈʊːɣʊn ˈmʊɣːɪs ˈɛɪ̯]
nus_įa ts-nįikk-ϕuts-an m=eigit uġun m-uġġ=-ϕis ei
should 2.ag-take-2˚.hyp.opt.pst-pl.infr that.4.gen cop.conneg 4.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-nloc.hyp.pst.pl pron.4.acc
‘you should only take things that weren’t hers/his’

(object is relative clause, mi…..įei ‘the things which’)

bound relative

(80)nus įa tsṇįikkisitsan mỉdit uġun nuġġis tsảlit ỉ
njus ja c-t-n-jikkisic-an miit-it ug-un nug-gis c-aalit ii/
[ˈnʊːs jɑ ˈt͡sɲ̊ɪʰkɪsɪːt͡san ˈmiːdɪh ˈʊːɣʊn ˈnʊɣːɪs ˈtsæːlɪh iː]
nus_įa ts-nįikk-ϕisits-an m=ỉdit uġun n=u=ġġ-ϕis tsảlit ỉ
should 2.ag-take-3˚.hyp.opt.pst-pl.infr that.3i.gen.pl cop.conneg 3i.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-nloc.hyp.pst.pl thing.act.pl pron.3i.pl
‘you should only take things that weren’t hers/his’

(object is mi…tsảlit ỉ ‘the things which’)

In other words, the genitive restrictive relative clause relativises an attributive genitive construction (‘X’s Y’ relativised to ‘whose Y’), while the mit- genitive restrictive hyponomous relative clause relativises an predicative genitive construction (‘is X’s’ to ‘which is X’s’). The former is vastly more common, while the latter has a much more restricted use, essentially only used to relativised copular phrases of possession. Genitive non-restrictive constructions are also made with a similar mit- relative pronoun, but non-restrictive constructions use a dependent copula verb and these should not be confused with restrictive relative clauses:

restrictive predicative genitive relative clause

migit/mugut nin X

‘X, which is Y’s’

mỉdit Y nẻs X

‘X, which are Y’s’

§12.5.1.5.2 mit- Postpositional Restrictive Relative Clauses

As the genitive is the most common case that postposition govern, restrictive relative clauses whose head is also the head of a postpositional (genitive) phrase appear with the genitive relative pronouns. In more formal languages, postpositions may be found with so-called restrictive relative affixes, which are simply m(i)-Ø-(i)t.

In the east, such forms are still common, but in western dialects, they are not heard outside of formal registers. The independent pronoun head of the restrictive relative clause may be an adverb such as įu ‘when’, for example tsibeyƛvannat mekkodit ṇikemmydůn tsiṡỉvvin įu ‘you told me (about the time) after you lived with us’.

temporal

non-fusionalfusional
migit giḷḷumigiḷḷut‘before whom/which’
migit mahumimahut‘after whom/which’
migit ekkot, eġotmekkodit, meġodit‘after whom/which’
migit dảlįenmiddalit, midảlįenit~millįit‘when, during which, while’
migit agỉnmagỉnit‘since which’
migit agỉtmagỉdit‘until which’
migit keggetmikeggedit, mikkedit‘until which’
(81)asiskikoṃṃỉggannin migiḷḷut pinaukvatṡin tsekokkintṡis kvayvi na
asisku-m-miiggannin migiLLut pinaukfac--in c-i-ku-ggian-c--is kfaa--fi na
[ɑːsɪsːkɪˈkɔm̥ːiːkːanːɪn ˈmɪːgɪɬːʊt pɪˈnɑu̯kʷɑːt͡ʃːɪ t͡sɛˈkɔʰkɪn̥ːt͡ʃɪs ˈkᶣæy̯ɥɪ nɑː]
a-sis-g-i-koṃṃỉg-vannin mi=giḷḷu=t pi-naukv-a-tṡin tse-kogg-ϕin-tṡis kvayv-i na
incep-cis-1.ag.pst-kin-visit-1˚.ret.pst before.rel poss.2-dog-acc-poss.loc.pl.incl 2.ag.pst- get-1˚.hyp.pst-pl.incl.pst summer-gen pron.3i
s/he came to visit us the summer before we got our dog’
(82)guktaḷḷugguṡ middalit tsatsẻlġġa įu
guktaLLugguc mit-talit c-ac-i-i-lg-ga ju
[gʊkːtaɬːʊkːʊʃ ˈmɪtːɑːlɪt t͡sɑˈtseːlːɣɑ jʊ]
g-ukt=aḷḷug-vuṡ mi=ddal=it tsa-tsẻlġġ-a įu
1.ag-clean.up-loc.fut while.rel 2.ag-cook-loc.hyp.prs when
‘I will clean up while you cook’
(83)idneskůddangivamit mekkodit gaylginnit lullimin keukvon a eġyt neiktsit, a meḍkvepiskakki-t da
it-ni-sku--t-taN-ifamit mi-kku-t-it gaa--lginnit lullimin ki-ukfu-n a/ i-g-a-t ni-ikc-it, a/ mi-t--kfi-f-iskakki_0 t-a
[ɪˈʔtnɛsːkœtːaŋːɪwɑːmɪt ˈmɛʰkɔːdɪt ˈgæy̯lːgɪnːɪt ˈlʊlːɪːmɪn ˈkɛu̯ʰkʷɔn ɑː ˈɛːɣʏt ˈnɛɪ̯kːt͡sɪt ɑ ˈmɛθːkᶣɛˈpɪsːkaʰkɪd ͜ dɑ]
Ø-iϕ-nesk=ůd-van-gi-vamit m=ekkot=it gaylg-innit Ø-lull-ϕimin keukv-on a eġyt neikts-it a meḍkve=pisk-ϕa-Ø-kki–t da
3a.ag.pst-kin-ask.repeatedly-2˚.pst-pl.ambi-3o.io after.rel village-elat 3a.ag.pst-leave-3o.hyp.pst day-gen pron.3i about question-acc.pl top police.officer-act-pl top
‘the police asked them questions about the day after they left town’

causal

non-fusionalfusional
migit maḍḍỉnmimaḍḍỉnit‘following which, because of which, why’
migit tekvenmitekvenit, mitekit, mitekkit‘as a consequence of which, why’
migit peġġỉnmipeġġỉnit‘therefore, because of which, why’
migit ƛikkỉnmiƛikkỉnit, miƛƛit‘therefore, because of which, why’
migit hillỉnmillỉnit, millit‘due to which, why’
(84)įukka gekekkůnnekki millit miheyt nįilot sisilgat iskit nủkat voiḍḍut
jukka gi-ki-kku--nni-kki millit mihi-a-t n--ilu-t sisilgat iskit nuukat fu-ait--tut
[ˈjʊʰkɑ gɛˈkɛʰkœnːɛʰkɪ ˈmɪlːɪt mɪˈhɛy̯t ˈɲɪːlɔt sɪsˈɪlːgat ˈɪsːkɪt ˈnuːkat ˈwɑɪ̯ðːʊt]
įukka ge-kekk=ůn-vet-gi m=illi=t mi=heyt nįil=ot sis-ilg-at isk-ϕit nủ=k-at voiḍḍ-ut
just.now 1.ag.pst-discuss-3˚.pst-pl.ambi due.to.rel tonight north.illat cis-travel-dep can-conneg.itr.hyp 1.ag.neg.aux- loc.hyp.pl weather-acc.pl
‘we were just discussing the weather because of which we can’t travel up north tonight’
(85)aįeddanin miṡ nindivot mitekit gaylgi įo gigaldeltsġutussin lakkemut ỉ mi obbu įo
aji-t-tanin mic nint-ifu-t miti-kit gaa--lgi ju- gigalt-i-Lc-hf-utussin lakki-mut ii/ mi u-p-pu ju-
[ˈɑ jɛtːɑːnɪn mɪʃ ˈnɪnːdɪːwɔt ˈmɪːtɛkɪt ˈgæy̯lːgɪ jɔ gɪˈgɑːlːdɛɬːt͡sxʊʰkːɪ ˈlaʰkɛːmʊh iː mɪ ˈɔpːʊ jɔː]
Ø-aįed-van-in miṡ nindiv-ot mi=tek=it gaylg-i įo gi-Ø-gald=eltsġ-vutuss-in lakkem-ut ỉ mi obbu-Ø įo
3a.ag.pst-explain-2˚.pst-pl.infra.pst try.and youths-illat as.a.consequence.rel village-pat foc transloc-3i.unag.pst-evacuate-pass-nloc.hyp.pst event-acc.pl pron.3i.pl det old.man-act pron.3a
‘the old man tried to explain to the youths the events that caused the village to be evacuated’
(86)ginttyt miƛƛit įeįįa gakka ai ỏts nủka
gintta-t miTTit ji-jja gakka ai u-u-c- nuuka
[ˈgɪnːtʏt ˈmɪt͡ɬːɪt ˈjɛjːɑ ˈgaʰkɑ æɪ̯ oːt͡s ˈnuːkɑ]
gind-ϕyt mi=ƛƛi=t įe=įįa g-aθ-a ai ỏ=ts nủ=k-a
understand-conneg.tr because.rel here.iness 1-cop-loc.hyp.prs pron.3i.acc still.not 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs
‘I still don’t understand why I’m here’

circumstantial, goal

non-fusionalfusional
migit monetmimonedit, mimmit‘in which way, for which, how’
(87)iṡkỉlalttảts bįellagi mimmit sisůlkanat getungit nadnit ỉ ninnaski
ickiilalttaac- p-ji-llagi mimmit sisu--Lkanat gi-tuN-it nat-nit ii/ ninnaski
[ɪʃːkiːˈlalːtæːt͡s ˈbjɛlːɑgɪ ˈmɪmːɪt sɪsˈœɬːkɑːnat gɛˈtʊŋːɪt ˈnaʔtnɪh iː ˈnɪnːasːkɪ]
iṡk=ỉ=laltt-ảts Ø-bįell-a-gi mi=mmi=t sis-ůlk=an-at m-ikk-it ge-tung-vit nadn-it ỉ ninnas-Ø-ki
self.evidence-ess 3a.ag-believe-2˚.prs-pl.ambi for.rel cis-fight-dep 1.ag.pst-must-loc.hyp.pst.pl many-acc.pl pron.3i.pl young-act-pl
‘the youth take many things for granted we had to fight for’

goal, result, manner

non-fusionalfusional
migit ƛikven miƛƛikvenit, miƛƛit‘for which, in order for which’
migit tsabbenmitsabbenit‘for which, in the hopes of which’
migit nįavvetminįavvedit‘for which, by which, through which’
migit disƛỉnmidisƛỉnit, midd(is)it‘as a result of which’
(88)maįįeggimmatṇut miƛƛit aggivuggoƛƛit gảmppi na, a sṇuįįukvan da
majji-ggimmat-n-ut miTTit aggifuggu-TTit gaamppi na, a/ st-n-ujjukfan t-a
[ˈmajːɛkːɪmːatːn̥ʊt ˈmɪt͡ɬːɪt akːɪˈwʊkːɔt͡ɬːɪt ˈgæːmːpɪ nɑː ɑ ˈstn̥ʊjʊʰkʷan dɑ]
ḥ-im-aįįeg-vimman-tṇut mi=ƛƛi=t a-g-g-i-vugg=oƛ-vit gảmpp-i na a s-nuįįuḳ-Ø-an da
3i.ag.pst-kin-show-1˚.ret.hyp.pst-1.io for.rel incep-transloc-1.ag.pst-kin-pick.crowberries- loc.hyp.pst.pl cake-acc pron.3i top poss.3a-grandmother-act-poss.loc top
‘her/his grandmother showed me the cake that we gathered the crowberries for’
(89)nả mitsabbenit skinįeġtat ahỉt sittsimindvitṡit galba na mi na-t de
naa mic-ap-pi-nit skin--i-hf-tat ahiit mic-cuc--it sic-cimintf-ic--it galp-a na mi na_0 t-i-
[næː ˈmɪːt͡sapːɛːnɪt skɪˈɲɛxːtah ˈɑːhiːt ˈmɪt͡sːʊːt͡ʃɪt sɪt͡sːɪˈmɪnːdᶣɪːt͡ʃɪt ˈgalːbɑ nɑː mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ]
nả mi=tsabben=it si-gi-nįeġt-at ahỉt sit-ts-i-mind-vitṡit galba-Ø na mi na–t de
cop.nloc.prs in.the.hopes.rel cis-transloc-buy-dep for cis-2.ag.pst-kin-come-loc.hyp.pst.pl.incl land-act pron.3i det pron.3i dem.prox
‘this is the land that we came here in hopes of buying’
(90)uġu-t tġva mitṇa minįavvedit migeset uįo minissuts lakkogi nỉ nukka
ug-u_0 hf--a mit-n-a min--affi-t-it migi-si-t uju- minissuc- lakku-gi nii nukka
[ˈʊːɣʊx ͜ xʷɑ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈmɪɲaʋːɛːdɪt ˈmɪːgɛsɛh ˈʊːjɔ mɪˈnɪsːʊt͡s ˈlaʰkɔːgɪ niː ˈnʊʰkɑ]
uġun–t tġva mitṇa mi=nįavvet-it migi-set uį-o mi-niss-ϕuts lakka-Ø-gi nỉ nu=kk-a
cop.conneg part many by.rel correct-adv right-acc 4-work-1˚.hyp.opt way-act-pl neg.aux-nloc.prs
‘there are not many tools to do the right thing right’

concessive

non-fusionalfusional
migit midỉnmimidỉnit‘knowing which’
migit tenimitenit‘despite which’
migit tsallỉnmitsallỉnit, mittsalit‘depending on which, whichever’
migit laknỉnmilaknỉnit‘depending on which, whichever’
(91)simindvi mimidỉnit kủt ỉlįunit ỉ sassa ḷakkenis bỉktṡỉt teni ƛunƛitṇittit
simintf-i mimit-iinit kuut iiL-unit ii/ sassa Lakki-nis p-iikc--iit ti-ni Tun-Tit-n-ittit
[sɪˈmɪnːdᶣɪ ˈmɪːmɪdiːnɪt ˈkuːh ˈiːʎʊːnɪh iː ˈsasːɑ ˈɬaʰkɛːnɪs ˈbiːkːt͡ʃiːt tɛːnɪ ˈt͡ɬʊn̥ːt͡ɬɪtːn̥ɪʰtɪt]
si-Ø-mind-vi mi=midỉn=it kủt ỉlįun-it ỉ sassa h-lakk=en-is bỉktṡ-ỉt teni ƛunƛitṇ-ittit
cis-3a.ag.pst-come-nloc.pst knowing.rel two family.clan-gen.pl between.iness 3i.unag.pst-happen- nloc.hyp.pst.pl quarrel-gen.pl despite funeral-illat.pl
‘s/he came to the funerals despite knowing of the fights that happened between the two families’
(92)gisakṡetinnit miṡ ṇisảssedda mitenit va-t kattsun ỉlukkin mįủrrỉt ỉ
gisakci-tinnit mic n-isaassi-t-ta miti-nit fa_0 kac-cun iilukkin mjuurriit ii/
[gɪˈsakːʃɛtɪnːɪt mɪʃ n̥ɪˈsæːsːɛtːɑ ˈmɪːtɛnɪt wɑk ͜ kat͡sːʊn iːˈlʊʰkɪn ˈmjuːrːiːh iː]
g-i-sakṡ-vet-in-nit miṡ ṇi-sảss-et-va mi=teni=t va–t_ka=ttsun ỉ_Ø_lukk-in mįủrr-ỉt ỉ
1.ag.pst-kin-warn-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst-1˚.dit try.and poss.1-sister-illat-poss.loc nonetheless 3a.ag.pst- succeed-nloc.hyp.pst obstacle-acc.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I tried to warn my sister about the obstacles despite which she still succeeded’
(93)ỉlninttongi-n důt a mittsalit sġauddot geggilullulit oattỉ-t ka nỉ
iilninttu-N-i_n t-u--t a/ mic-calit shf-aut-tu-t gi-ggilullulit u-attii_0 ka nii
[iːlˈnɪnːtɔŋːɪ ͜ ndœh ɑ ˈmɪt͡sːɑːlɪt ˈsxɑu̯tːɔt gɛkːɪˈlʊlːʊːlɪh ˈɑːʰtiːk ͜ kɑ niː]
ỉl_Ø_nind-von-gi–n důt a mi=ttsal=it si=hauddot get-g-i-lull-ϕulit oatt-ỉt–t ka nỉ
3a.ag.pst-predict-2˚.dub.pst-pl.ambi apparently top depending.on.rel tomorrow.morning translo-1.ag.pst-kin-leave- loc.hyp.pot.prs.pl condition-acc.pl part pron.3i.pl
‘they apparently predicted just the right conditions we depend on to leave in the morning’

other postpositions

non-fusionalfusional
mivvenit uġġitmuġġidit‘without which’
migit tekketmitekkedit‘regarding/towards which’
migit sṇengủnanminengủnit‘on behalf of whom (singular)’
mỉgỉnit sṇengủnatminengủnit‘on behalf of whom (plural)’
migit dallįe(i)nmidallįe(i)nit‘in which time’
migit dảlįetmidảlįedit, middalit‘for which (neg) time’
migit dảlįỉnmidảlįỉnit, middalit‘since which, from which, during time’
miįįỉnit aukkamaukkat, menokkat ‘apart/except from which’
migit nuḳmiṇṇukvit, mikvit‘regarding which’
migit eġytmeġydit, meġġy(di)t‘about which’
migit nanna, -et, -ỉnminannat, -edit, -ỉnit‘inside which’
migit keįįa, -et, -ỉnmikeįįat, -edit, -ỉnit‘along which’
(94)sippigiḍvet bakvet muġġidit ỏdnįosset kvẻvvit suįįen skukkuan
sippigitf--i-t p-akfi-t mug-git-it u-u-t-nju-ssi-t kfi-i-ffit sujji-n skukkuan
[sɪʰpɪˈgɪðᶣːɛt ˈbaʰkᶣɛt ˈmʊɣːɪːdɪh ˈoːʔtɲɔsːɛt ˈkᶣeːʋːɪt ˈsʊjːɛn ˈskʊʰkʊɑ̯n]
sit-p-i-giḍḍ-vet bakv=et m=uġġit=it ỏdnįoss-et kvẻv-ϕit s-u=įį-ven s-kukk-o-an
cis-2.unag.pst-kin-forget-3˚.pst home.illat without.rel dreamland-illat get-conneg.itr.hyp 3a.unag-neg.aux- nloc.hyp.prs poss.3a-teddy.bear-acc-poss.nloc
‘we forgot her/his teddybear that s/he can’t fall asleep without at home’
(95)nả meġġydit gevalloƛƛin miṡkeha kilġi na mi na-t de
naa mi-g-ga-t-it gi-fallu-TTin micki-ha kiLhf-i na mi na_0 t-i-
[næː ˈmɛɣːʏːdɪt gɛˈwalːɔt͡ɬːɪn ˈmɪʃːkɛːhɑ ˈkɪɬːxɪ nɑː mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ]
nả m=eġġyt-it ge-vall-oƛ-vin miṡkeha kilġi-Ø na mi na–t de
cop.nloc.prs about.rel 1.ag.pst-read-freq-loc.hyp.pst medicinal flowering.plant-act pron.3i det pron.3i.act dem.prox
‘this is the medicinal plant I was reading about’
(96)ůltset nả eįįa migit ahỉt~mihỉdit gaįaƛƛunga keggi na
u--Lc-i-t naa i-jja migit ahiit // mihiit-it gajaTTunia ki-ggi na
[ˈœɬːt͡sɛt næː ˈɛjːɑ ˈmɪːgɪh ˈɑːhiːt ~ ˈmɪːhiːdɪt ˈgɑːjat͡ɬːʊŋːɑ ˈkɛkːɪ nɑː]
ůltset nả e=įįa m=igit ahỉt ~ mi=hỉt=it g-aį=aƛƛ-unga kekṇi-Ø na
nearly cop.nloc.prs here.iness that.3i.gen for ~ that.for 1.ag-study-hyp.perf.prs day-act pron.3i
‘the day I’ve been studying for is nearly here’
(97)migit upṃet~mupṃedit geniṡpattavin bakvi na
migit up-mi-t // mup-mi-t-it gi-nicpattafin p-akfi na
[ˈmɪːgɪh ˈʊpːm̥ɛt ~ ˈmʊpːm̥ɛːdɪt gɛˈnɪʃːpaʰtɑːwɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː]
m=igit upṃet ~ m=upṃet=it ge-nỉṡp-atta-vin bakvi-Ø na
that.3i.gen behind ~ that.3i.behind 1.ag.pst-hide-med-loc.hyp.pst house-act pron.3i
‘the house that I hid behind’
(98)migit nannet~minannedit a įoa-t ka sittsididdin bakvi na
migit nanni-t // minanni-t-it a/ ju-a_0 ka sic-cit-i-t-tin p-akfi na
[ˈmɪːgɪt ˈnanːɛt ~ ˈmɪːnanːɛːdɪt ɑ jɑk ͜ kɑ sɪt͡sɪːˈdɪtːɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː]
m=igit nann=et ~ mi=nann=et=it a įoa–t ka sit-ts-i-did-vin bakvi-Ø na
that.3i.gen inside.illat ~ that.3i.inside.illat part now part cis-2.ag.pst-kin-step-loc.hyp.pst house-act pron.3i
‘the house that you just stepped in’
(99)migit piṛįen~mipiṛįenit tsaminatṡit sevvi na
migit pir-ji-n // mipir-ji-nit c-aminac--it si-ffi na
[ˈmɪːgɪt ˈpɪr̥ːjɛn ~ ˈmɪːpɪr̥ːjɛːnɪt t͡sɑˈmɪːnɑt͡ʃɪt ˈsɛʋːɪ nɑː]
m=igit piṛįen ~ mi=pirįen=it tsa-min-atṡit sevvi-Ø na
that.3i.gen along ~ that.3i.along 2.ag-walk-loc.hyp.prs.incl.pl river-act pron.3i
‘the river we walk along’
§12.5.1.5.3 mit- Locative, Comitative & Essive Restrictive Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses can be found in the three locative cases – the inessive, the illative or the elative, as well as the comitative and essive cases. These clauses have an antecedent which is relativised as a location or a comitative or essive argument in the relative clause. The fourth-person locative relative pronouns (meįįat ‘somewhere that/where’, meįįedit ‘to somewhere that/to where’, meįįỉnit ‘from somewhere that/to where’) can be used without an antecedent in a free relative clause, for example mi meįįat nįukku ṇuokku na nin a sisikṇat gaskanna ‘I want to live somewhere where there is a lot of trees’ (lit. I want to live somewhere that has a lot of trees in/there’). In more formal language, these constructions are replaced with non-restrictive phrases, often with a pre-relative antecedent locative (here oįįa): (oįįa) sisikṇat gaskanna, namiat nįukku ṇuokku na naġan nin (lit. I want to live there, where there are a lot of trees’).

inessive

(100)bintṡegami miįįat gikṇa bakvi na
pin-c--i-gami mijjat gikN-a p-akfi na
[ˈbɪn̥ːt͡ʃɛgɑːmɪ ˈmɪjːat ˈgɪkːŋ̊ɑ ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː]
Ø-bintṡeg-ami m=iįįa=t g-ikṇ-a bakvi-Ø na
3i.ag-be.small-3i.prs that.3i.iness 1.ag-live-loc.hyp.prs house-act pron.3i
‘the house that I live in is small’
(101)sinįaṡkuttugat meįįat ḥulttemi na
sin--ackuttugat mi-jjat h--ultti-mi na
[sɪˈɲaʃːkʊʰtʊːgat ˈmɛjːat ˈʔʊlːtɛːmɪ nɑː]
si-Ø-nįaṡk-uttug-at m=eįįa=t ḥ-uld-vemi na
cis-3a.ag-hide-mid-nloc.prs.pl that.4.iness 3i.ag-be.dark-3i.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘they hide somewhere dark’
(102)tammekkuddami miįįat nủtsa sisikṇat skadnit bakvi na
tammi-kkut-tami mijjat nuuc-a sisikN-at skat-nit p-akfi na
[ˈtamːɛʰkʊtːɑːmɪ ˈmɪjːat ˈnuːt͡sɑ sɪsˈɪkːŋ̊at ˈskaʔtnɪt ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː]
Ø-tamme=kkudd-ami m=iįįa=t n=ủ=ts-a sis-ikṇ-at skan-ϕit bakvi-Ø na
3i.ag-be.bigger-3i.prs that.3i.iness 2.ag-neg.aux-loc.hyp.prs cis-live-dep want-conneg.itr.hyp house-act pron.3i
‘the house that you don’t want to live in is bigger’
(103)tsaƛƛaƛƛat miįįat uġun nįukku soaƛƛi nuįįe na
c-aTTaTTat mijjat ug-un n--ukku su-aTTi nujji-n na
[ˈt͡sat͡ɬːat͡ɬːat ˈmɪjːah ˈʊːɣʊn ˈɲʊʰkʊ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ ˈnʊjːɛ nɑː]
t-saƛƛ-aƛƛ-at m=iįįa=t nįukku soaƛƛi-Ø n=u=įį-ve a
3a.ag-fish-freq-nloc.prs.pl that.3i.iness cop.conneg much.det fish-act neg.aux.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘they fish where there is not a lot of fish’

(also tsaƛƛaƛƛat oįįa, numiat uġun nįukku soaƛƛi nukken)

(104)atṡummegganninin gvaiddit miįįat įo įo nỉn tảbmi na
ac--ummi-gganninin gfait-tit mijjat ju- ju- niin taapmi na
[ɑˈt͡ʃʊmːɛkːanːɪːnɪn ˈgᶣæɪ̯tːɪt ˈmɪjːat jɔː jɔ niːn ˈtæːʔpmɪ nɑː]
a-Ø-tṡummeg-vannin-in gvaidd-it m=iįįa=t įo įo nỉn tảbm-i na
incep-3i.unag.pst-endanger-1˚.ret.pst-pl.infr.pst everyone-acc.pl that.3i.iness pron.3a.act foc cop.nloc.hyp.pst situation-pat pron.3i
‘the situation s/he was in put everyone in danger’

illative

(105)tṡamogami miḥedit tsṃiggatṡit ƛikka na
c--amu-gami mih--i-t-it c-p-miggac--it Tikka na
[ˈt͡ʃɑːmɔgɑːmɪ ˈmɪːʔɛdɪt t͡sˈm̥ɪkːɑːt͡ʃɪt ˈt͡ɬɪʰkɑ nɑː]
Ø-tṡamog-ami m=iḥet=it ts-migg-atṡit ƛikka-Ø na
3i.ag-be.sacred-3i.prs that.3i.illat 2.ag-go-loc.hyp.prs.pl.incl area-act pron.3i
‘the area we are going to is sacred’
(106)gimiggauḥats meįįedit kaikkat nẻ na!
gimiggau nac- mi-jji-t-it kaikkat ni-i- na!
[gɪˈmɪkːɑu̯ʔat͡s ˈmɛjːɛːdɪt ˈkæɪ̯ʰkat neː nɑː]
gi-migg-auḥ=ats m=eįįet=it kaikk-at nẻ na
transl-go-neg.imp.2 that.4.illat be.dangerous-dep cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘don’t go anywhere dangerous!’
(107)miḍḍyt miḥedit siskiġaġġin nektsoma na tuįįan
mit--ta-t mih--i-t-it siskig-ag-gin ni-kc-u-ma na tujjan
[ˈmɪðːʏt ˈmɪːʔɛdɪt sɪsːkɪˈɣaɣːɪn ˈnɛːkːt͡sɔːmɑ nɑː ˈtʊjːan]
miḍ-ϕyt m=iḥet=it sis-ge-i-ġaġ-vin nektso-ma na t-u=įį-van
like-conneg.tr that.3i.illat cis-1.ag.pst-kin-answer-loc.hyp.pst question-acc pron.3i 3a.ag-neg.aux-2˚.pst
‘s/he didn’t like the question that I answered (lit. to which I answered)’
(108)nả miįįedit sihalisƛuttat tsƛukka ṃakti na amoeġġets
naa mijji-t-it sihalisTuttat c-Tukka m-akti na amu-i-g-gi-c-
[næː ˈmɪjːɛːdɪt sɪˈhɑːlɪsːt͡ɬʊʰtat ˈt͡st͡ɬʊʰkɑ ˈm̥akːtɪ nɑː ˈɑːmɔˈɛɣːɛt͡s]
nả m=iįįet=it si-halisƛuθ-at ts-lukk-a ṃakti-Ø na amo=eġġets-Ø
cop.nloc.prs that.3i.illat cis-get.used.to-dep 2.ag-must-loc.hyp.prs taste-act pron.3i blood.sausage-act
‘blood sausage is a taste that you have to get used to’
(109)maįeddanttsatṇut ninůgynnit bitṇinůgůt miįįedit sitṇỉṡƛutummin ỉmoaḍḍoga na
maji-t-tanc-cat-n-ut ninu--ga-nnit p-it-n-inu--gu--t mijji-t-it sit-n-iiscTutummin iimu-at--tu-ga na
[mˈɑːjɛtːanːt͡satːn̥ːʊt ˈnɪːnœgʏnːɪt ˈbɪtːn̥ɪnœːgœt ˈmɪjːɛːdɪt sɪtːn̥ˈɪʃːt͡ɬʊtʊmːɪn iːˈmɑːðːɔːgɑ nɑː]
Ø-im-aįed-van-s-atṇut ninůg-ynnit bitṇinůg-ůt m=iįįet=it sit_ṇ-i_ỉṡƛ-vutum-vin ỉ=moaḍḍo-ga na
3a.ag.pst-kin-explain-2˚.pst-pl.suppra.pst-1.io detail-elat small.detail-illat that.3i.illat 1.unag.pst-invite-pass- loc.hyp.pst ceremony-acc pron.3i
‘they explained to me the ceremony that I was invited to in detail’

elative

(110)uġun miįįỉnit leḍḍen ṇevoḥḥiġƛuttattṡin na nủįa mi na-t de
ug-un mijjiinit li-t--ti-n n-i-fu-h--hihf-Tuttac--cin na nuuja mi na_0 t-i-
[ˈʊːɣʊn ˈmɪjːiːnɪt ˈlɛðːɛn n̥ɛˈwɔʔːɪxːt͡ɬʊʰtat͡ʃːɪn nɑː ˈnuːjɑ mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ]
uġun m=iįįỉn=it leḍḍ=en ṇe-voḥḥ=iġƛuθ-ϕattṡin na n=u=į-a mi na–t de
cop.conneg that.3i.elat easily 1.unag-get.scared-loc.hyp.cond.prs pron.3i 3i.ag-neg.aux-3i.prs det pron.3i.act dem.prox
‘this is not something I would get easily fightened by (lit. from)’
(111)miskuḷḷat nủįoat mỉngidit tsƛủla tsallogi nỉ
miskuLLat nuuju-at miiN-it-it c-Tuula c-allu-gi nii
[ˈmiːskʊɬːah ˈnuːjɑːt ˈmiːŋːɪːdɪt ˈt͡st͡ɬuːlɑ ˈt͡salːɔːgɪ niː]
miskuḷḷ-ϕat n=ủ=į-oat m=ỉngit=it ts-ḷủl-a tsalla-Ø-gi nỉ
be.simple-conneg.itr 3i.ag-neg.aux-3i.prs.pl that.3i.elat.pl 2.ag-speak-loc.hyp.prs thing-act-pl pron.3i.pl
‘the issues you are talking about are not simple’
(112)ỉllyt nủįekki muįįủnit ṇeumi tsitelkvin sagvemit go
iilla-t nuuji-kki mujjuunit n-i-umi c-iti-Lkfin sagfi-mit gu-
[ˈiːlːʏt ˈnuːjɛʰkɪ ˈmʊjːuːnɪt ˈn̥ɛu̯mɪ t͡sɪˈtɛɬːkᶣɪn ˈsakᶣːɛːmɪt gɔː]
ỉl-ϕyt n=ủ=į-et-agi m=uįįủn=it ṇeu=mi tsi-telk-vin sagve-mit go
know-conneg.tr 3a.ag-neg.aux-3˚.prs-pl.ambi that.3o.elat pron.1.illat.pl.excl 2.ag.pst-write.hyp.pst-loc.hyp.pst man- acc.pl pron.3o
‘they don’t know the men you wrote to us about’
(113)uṃṃet nả kekvot miįįỉnit illot nįottset ṇeteṃṃisinga keggi na
um-mi-t naa ki-kfu-t mijjiinit illu-t n--u-c-ci-t n-i-ti-m-misiN-a ki-ggi na
[ˈʊm̥ːɛt næː ˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈmɪjːiːnɪh ˈɪlːɔt ˈɲɔt͡sːɛt n̥ɛˈtɛm̥ːɪsɪŋːɑ ˈkɛkːɪ nɑː]
uṃṃet nả kekv=ot m=iįįỉn=it illot nįott=set ṇe-teṃṃis-inga keggi-Ø na
finally cop.nloc.prs today that.3i.elat thus.prox long.adv 1.unag-look.forward-loc.hyp.perf day-act pron.3i
‘today is finally the day I’ve look forward to for so long’

comitative

(114)leḍḍetginttussivuppat nủįa mikkudit gaḷủla lủbma na
li-t--ti-tginttussifuppat nuuja mikkut-it gaLuula luupma na
[ˈlɛðːɛtˈgɪnːtʊsːɪwʊʰpaʔˈ ˈnuːjɑ ˈmɪʰkʊːdɪt gɑˈɬuːlɑ ˈluːʔpmɑ nɑː]
leḍḍet=gind-ϕivuθ-ϕat n=ủ=į-a m=ikkut=it ga-ḷủl-a lủbma-Ø na
easily.understand-hab-pass-conneg.itr 3i.unag.neg.aux.3i.prs that.3i.com 1.ag-talk-loc.hyp.prs language-act pron.3i
‘the language which I speak is not easy to understand’
(115)nekkyt ai giḷḷu voaḥḥįu mukkidit mittsun ṇinennenna įo lullin tseilkkon įo nủkungi
ni-kka-t ai giLLu fu-ah--hju mukkit-it mic-cun n-ini-nni-nna ju- lullin c-i-ilkku-n ju- nuukuN-i
[ˈnɛʰkʏt æɪ̯ ˈgɪɬːʊ ˈwɑːʔːjʊ ˈmʊʰkɪːdɪt ˈmɪt͡sːʊn n̥ɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑ jɔ ˈlʊlːɪn ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɔn jɔː ˈnuːkʊŋːɪ]
neg-ϕyt ai giḷḷu voaḥḥįu m=ukkit=it mitts=un ṇi-nennen-Ø-va įo Ø-lull-in tseilkk-on įo nủ=k-ungi
see-conneg.tr pron.3i.gen before never that.3o.com with poss.1-friend-act-poss.loc foc 3a.ag.pst-leave- nloc.hyp.pst young.woman-acc pron.3a 1.ag.neg.aux-1˚.perf
‘I’ve never before seen the young woman my friend left with’
(116)kuniḷḷoat mỉgỉnit obbogi nỉ įo tṃinnas kaibmogi nỉ
kuniLLu-at miigiinit u-p-pu-gi nii ju- tp-minnas kaipmu-gi nii
[ˈkʊːnɪɬːɑːt ˈmiːgiːnɪh ˈɔpːɔːgɪ niː jɔ ˈtm̥ɪnːas ˈkæɪ̯ʔpmɔːgɪ niː]
Ø-kuniḷḷ-oat m=ỉgỉn=it obba-Ø-gi nỉ įo t-min-vas kaibma-Ø-gi nỉ
3i.ag-be.made.of.oak-3i.prs.pl that.3i.com.pl old.man-act-pl pron.3a.pl foc 3a.ag-walk-loc.hyp.pl walking.stick-act-pl pron.3i.pl
‘the walking stick the old man walks with is made from oak wood’
(117)nả mikkudit uġġet ikṇit nukkattṡin tsỉnot niṡki įo ṇipṃava
naa mikkut-it ug-gi-t ikN-it nukkac--cin c-iinu-t nicki ju- n-ipm-afa
[næː ˈmɪʰkʊːdɪh ˈʊɣːɛh ˈɪkːŋ̊ɪt ˈnʊʰkat͡ʃːɪn ˈt͡siːnɔt ˈnɪʃːkɪ jɔː ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ]
nả m=ikkut=it uġġet ikṇ-vit nu=kk-ϕattṡin tsỉnot niṡki-Ø įo ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va
cop.nloc.prs that.3a.com without live-conneg.itr.hyp 1.ag.neg.aux-hyp.cond.prs only person-act pron.3a poss.1-wife-act- poss.loc
‘my wife is the only person I couldn’t live without’

essive

(118)tsamma-t ga migits tsebįelvaddit a
c-amma_0 ga migic- c-i-p-ji-lfat-tit a/
[ˈt͡samːɑg ͜ gɑ ˈmɪːgɪt͡s t͡sɛˈbjɛlʷːatːɪh ɑː]
ts-aθ-va–t ga m=igi=ts tse-bįell-vaddit a
2-cop-loc.prs part that.3i.ess 2.ag.pst-believe-0˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘you are afterall what I believed you to be’
(119)ỉliskyt migits paḷḷunga daġa nủki
iiliska-t migic- paLLuN-a t-ag-a nuuki
[ˈiːlɪsːkʏt ˈmɪːgɪt͡s ˈpɑːɬːʊŋːɑ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈnuːkɪ]
ỉlisk-ϕyt m=igi=ts p-aḷḷ-unga daġa nủ=k-i
recognise-conneg.tr that.3a.ess 2.unag-become-loc.hyp.perf pron.3a.acc 1.ag.neg.aux-1˚.prs
‘I don’t recognise the person you’ve become’
(120)mittyt migits~muguts tṡảrkken įo ṃaktvungen ai nủka
mitta-t migic- // muguc- c--aarkki-n ju- m-aktfuN-i-n ai nuuka
[ˈmɪʰtʏt ˈmɪːgɪt͡s ~ ˈmʊːgʊt͡s ˈt͡ʃærːkɛn jɔ ˈm̥akːtʷʊŋːɛn æɪ̯ ˈnuːkɑ]
mid-ϕyt m=igi=ts tṡảrkk-en įo h-ṃakt=vungen ai nủ=k-a
know-conneg.itr that.3i.ess ~ that.4.ess reindeer.meat-pat foc 3i.unag-taste-3i.hyp.prs pron.3i.acc 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs
‘I don’t know what reindeer meat tastes like’
§12.5.1.5.4 mit- Temporal & Adverbial Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses can have as a head a temporal argument, in which case the relative pronoun found is miįįut ‘at a time that, when’. The antecedent can be missing entirely, or it can often be the obviated temporal oįįu or more commonly simply įu (or įo), such that many such temporal relative clauses are composed of miįįut….(oį)įu, but ni~nįi or even na are also possible. Because temporal arguments can be found before the verb in Pine, a restrictive relative clause whose head is a temporal argument can also be found before the verb of the main clause. This can also be expressed with a non-restrictive phrase (oįįu…naįįu… ‘when’)

(121)tsemindin miįįut uġun bakven nukkin (įu)
c-i-mint-in mijjut ug-un p-akfi-n nukkin ju
[t͡sɛˈmɪnːdɪn ˈmɪjːʊh ˈʊːɣʊn ˈbaʰkᶣɛn ˈnʊʰkɪn (jʊ)]
tse-mind-in m=iįįu=t uġun bakv=en n=u=kk-ϕin (įu)
2.ag.pst-come-loc.pst when cop.conneg home.iness 1.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-loc.hyp.pst (then)
‘you came when I wasn’t home’

or

(122)oįįu tsemindin, nuįįut uġun bakven nukkin
u-jju c-i-mint-in, nujjut ug-un p-akfi-n nukkin
[ˈɔjːʊ t͡sɛˈmɪnːdɪn ˈnʊjːʊh ˈʊːɣʊn ˈbaʰkᶣɛn ˈnʊʰkɪn]
o=įįu tse-mind-in nu=įįut uġun bakv=en n=u=kk-ϕin
then.dist 2.ag.pst-come-loc.pst when.neg cop.conneg home.iness 1.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-loc.hyp.pst
‘you came when I wasn’t home’

Much more commonly however, temporal arguments are not relativised but instead a conjunctive temporal clause is used:

(123)tsemindin įuġġun bakven nukkin
c-i-mint-in jug-gun p-akfi-n nukkin
[t͡sɛˈmɪnːdɪn ˈjʊːɣːʊn ˈbaʰkᶣɛn ˈnʊʰkɪn]
tse-mind-in įu=ġu=uġun bakv=en n=u=kk-vin
2.ag.pst-come-loc.pst when.neg cop.conneg home.iness 1.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-loc.hyp.pst
‘you came when I wasn’t home’

The same is true of restrictive hyponomous relative clause whose head is an adverb – they can be expressed by the relative adverb milladit~misedit ‘in a way that’ , often without any antecedent, or the obviated antecedent ollat or oset or even na, such that they are composed of milladit~misedit….(ollat~oset~ḥa), but it is equally common to express this with a conjunctive clause or with a non-restrictive relative clause (ollat…nallat…).

(124)tsƛủbma misedit ṇallagiddat
c-Tuupma misi-t-it n-allagit-tat
[ˈt͡st͡ɬuːʔpmɑ ˈmɪːsɛdɪt ˈn̥alːɑgɪtːaʔ]
ts-lủbm-va m=iset=it ṇ=allag=iddat
2.ag-speak-loc.prs how 1.unag-annoy-3˚.ret.hyp.prs
‘you speak in a way that annoys me’

or

(125)ollat tsƛủbma, nallat ṇallagiddat
u-llat c-Tuupma, nallat n-allagit-tat
[ˈɔlːat ˈt͡st͡ɬuːʔpmɑ ˈnaːlːat ˈn̥alːɑgɪtːat]
o=llat ts-lủbm-va na=llat ṇ-allag-iddat
thus.dist 2.ag-speak-loc.prs which.adv 1.unag-annoy-3˚.ret.hyp.prs
‘you speak in a way that annoys me’

or

(126)tsƛủbma au laggi va ṇallagiddat
c-Tuupma au/ laggi fa n-allagit-tat
[ˈt͡st͡ɬuːʔpmɑ ɑu̯ ˈlakːɪ wɑ ˈn̥alːɑgɪtːat]
ts-lủbm-va au_laggi_va ṇ-allag-iddat
2.ag-speak-loc.prs in.such.a.way.that 1.unag-annoy-3˚.ret.hyp.prs
‘you speak in a way that annoys me’

§12.5.2 Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Non-restrictive relative clauses are clauses that introduce additional information about a relativised antecedent. Unlike normal hyponomous clauses, non-restrictive relative clauses have a SOVA word order, where A indicates the antecedent independent pronoun. Clauses with this reverse order when compared to autonomous clauses are called reverse verb phrases. As such, non-restrictive relative clauses are similar to restrictive relative clauses of the form mi...įo/na/nỉ but instead are introduced by a relative pronoun and have the form nami...įo/na/nỉ/go.

The reverse verb phrase (vp) has as its head a relative pronoun (nami). Reverse verb phrases are exclusively found with the hyponomous order and are found in non-restrictive relative clauses and in non-restrictive indirect relative interrogative clauses. There are two types of non-restrictive indirect relative interrogative clauses: non-relativised and relativised, which differ in the presence or absence of a relative pronoun. The reverse verb phrase differs from the independent verb phrase and the relative verb phrase in various respects, but it is more similar to the relative verb phrase in that the verb complement phrase precedes the verb.

Non-restrictive relative clauses begin with a relative pronoun, nami in the singular asematic, which has a referent in the main clause as its head (which it usually immediately follows, except in some cases where only one or a few words follow the non-restrictive relative clause, for example a negative auxiliary). The relative pronoun is followed by the verb complement phrase, the verb adjunct phrase, the main hyponomous verb, and concludes with an independent pronoun that agrees with the head of the relative clause. As in relative clauses, if a non-head subject appears in the clause, it must occur immediately following the relative pronoun and be separated from the rest of the clause by the focus particle įo, for example ...nama ṇiġaġaveva įo tỉliddat įo ‘whom my brother knows’. The subject can also be found with a topic marker: ...nama tỉliddat įo, a ṇiġaġaveva-t da 'whom my brother knows'.

As with relative clauses, reverse clauses can be bound when the head has an antecedent in the main clause, or free when the antecedent is absent, or the clause itself. Free reverse clauses lack an independent pronoun at the end of the clause (for most speakers).

The various dependents of the verb phrase are unchanged in their individual ordering, only the order of the reverse phrases is changed. Verb adjunct and predicate phrases are found after the main hyponomous verb in non-restrictive relative clauses, much like in relative clauses. Note that the predicate of existiential clauses in Pine is considered part of the adjunct phrase.

In cases where the main verb of the non-restrictive relative clauses governs a non-finite verb which would otherwise take on polypersonal markers, for example in ...namut....mibaḍvat mitṡin ỉ 'which s/he tried to catch', standard Pine allows for polypersonal markers to be dropped all together, but in more formal registers, a special verbal form does exist called the semifinitive auxiliary marker (sam, -a-ϕ-pron-theme instead of the dependent marker -at) which hosts polypersonal markings of a non-finite verb (thereby making it semifinitive). Semifinitive verbs only have hyponomous present markings – they cannot be conjugated for tense.

...namut mibaḍvat mitṡin ỉ 'which s/he tried to catch'
...namut mibaḍvattunin mitṡin ỉ'which s/he tried to catch (3a.ag⟫3i.pl)

Semifinitive verbs also occur in cases where there is no clear subject to a verb but an object does exist, in which case the subject will be anchored in a fourth-person hierarchical position without a pronoun, in which case the semifinitive auxiliary marker has the shape -a-ϕ- (or -a-, depending on how one looks at it, since all transitive hyponomous themes are augmented by the -ϕ-versioner), and the semifinitive verb will be found with an impersonal finite copula.

...nallat siḷḷuttassisit nusin'...how to do it'
...nallat gasiḷḷuppisits '...how I should do it'
vp in independent clausevp in non-restrictive relative clause
(av) ⟫ v ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp)(sp + įo) ⟫ [(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v ⟫ (pp) ] pron

bound

rel ⟫ vp ⟫ pron

(127)mi iṡi sakvin įo, nami deįįa nin įo
mi ici sakfin ju-, nami t-i-jja nin ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈdɛjːɑ nɪːn jɔː]
mi iṡi sakvin-Ø įo nam-i de=įįa nin įo
det old man-act pron.3a which-act here.iness cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘the old man, who is here’
(128)mi iṡi sakvin įo, nami ṇikkava nin įo
mi ici sakfin ju-, nami n-ikkafa nin ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ nɪːn jɔː]
mi iṡi sakvin-Ø įo nam-i ṇ-ikka-Ø-va nin įo
det old man-act pron.3a which-act poss.1-father-act-poss.loc cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘the old man, who is my father’
(129)mi iṡi sakvin įo, nama ỉski įo tỉlliddit įo
mi ici sakfin ju-, nama iiski ju- tiillit-tit ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈiːsːkɪ jɔ ˈtiːlɪtːɪt jɔː]
mi iṡi sakvin-Ø įo nam-a ỉski-Ø įo t-ỉl-ϕiddat įo
det old man-act pron.3a which-acc woman-act foc 3a.ag-know-3˚.ret.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘the old man, whom the woman knows’
(130)mi sakvin įo, nama mitṇa tyvyt ỉ tỉllummiddit įo
mi sakfin ju-, nama mit-n-a ta-fa-t ii/ tiillummit-tit ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈtʏːɥʏh iː ˈtiːlːʊmːɪtːɪt jɔː]
mi iṡi sakvin-Ø įo nam-a mitṇa tyv-yt ỉ t-ỉl-ϕummiddit įo
det old man-act pron.3a which-acc know-dep many.det year-acc.pl pron.3i.pl 3a.ag-know-3˚.ret.hyp.perf pron.3a
‘the man, whom s/he has known many years’
(131)mi iṡi sagvemot įo, namugit ṇikkava įo usket tammet ṡimma ṇuomen ṛeikno saƛƛaƛƛin įo
mi ici sagfi-mu-t ju-, namugit n-ikkafa ju- uski-t tammi-t cimma n-aa-mi-n r-i-iNu- saTTaTTin ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɔt jɔː ˈnɑːmʊːgɪt ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ˈʊsːkɛt ˈtamːɛt ˈʃɪmːɑ ˈn̥uʊ̯mɛn ˈr̥ɛɪ̯ʔkŋɔ ˈsat͡ɬːat͡ɬːɪn jɔː]
mi iṡi sagvem-ot įo nam-ugit ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo ṛeikn-o usket saƛƛ-aƛƛ-at tammet ṡimm-a ṇuom=en Ø-saƛƛ-aƛƛ-ϕin įo
det old man-illat pron.3a which-com poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc often large lake-gen out.on.the.water.iness trout-acc 3a.ag.pst-fish-freq-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘to the old man, with whom my father often fished trout out on the big lake’
(132)mi iṡi sagvemot įo, namugit ṇikkava įo usket tammet ṡimma ṇuomet ṛeikno asisaƛƛaƛƛat hallin įo
mi ici sagfi-mu-t ju-, namugit n-ikkafa ju- uski-t tammi-t cimma n-aa-mi-t r-i-iknu- asisaTTaTTat hallin ju-
[mɪ ˈɪːʃɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɔt jɔː ˈnɑːmʊːgɪt ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ˈʊsːkɛt ˈtamːɛt ˈʃɪmːɑ ˈn̥uʊ̯mɛt ˈr̥ɛɪ̯ʔkŋɔ ɑːsɪˈsat͡ɬːat͡ɬːɑt ˈhalːɪn jɔː]
mi iṡi sagvem-ot įo nam-ugit ṇ-ikk-Ø-va įo usket tammet ṡimm-a ṇuom=et ṛeikn-o a-si-saƛƛ-aƛƛ-at Ø-hall-ϕin įo
det old man-illat pron.3a which-com poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc often large lake-gen out.on.the.water.illat trout-acc incep-cis- fish-freq-dep 3a.ag.pst-use.to-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘to the old man, with whom my father used to go tout fishing out on the big lake’
(133)mi tammet ṛengogi nỉ, namut mittsun sṇemmugỉn ṇikkava įo usket tammet ṡimma ṇuomen batvungi nỉ
mi tammi-t r-i-N-u-gi nii, namut mic-cun st-n-i-mmugiin n-ikkafa ju- uski-t p-atf--at tammi-t cimma n-aa-mi-n p-atfuN-i nii
[mɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈr̥ɛŋːɔːgɪ niː ˈnɑːmʊt ˈmɪt͡sːʊn ˈstn̥ɛmːʊːgiːn ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ˈʊsːkɛt ˈbaðʷːat ˈtamːɛt ˈʃɪmːɑ ˈn̥uʊ̯mɛn ˈbaʰtʷʊŋːɪ niː]
mi tammet ṛenga-Ø-gi nỉ nam-ut misk=ven s-nemm-ugit-an ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo usket tammet ṡimm-a ṇuom=en Ø-baḍv-ϕun-gi nỉ
det large trout-act-pl pron.3a.pl which-acc.pl together.with poss.3a-friend-com-poss.nloc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc often large lake-gen out.on.the.water.iness 3a.ag.pst-catch-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.ambi pron.3a.act.pl
‘the big trouts, which my father often caught out on the big lake with his friend’
(134)mi tammet ṛengogi nỉ, namut mittsun sṇemmugỉn ṇikkava įo tammet ṡimma ṇuomen sibaḍvat mittṡin ỉ
mi tammi-t r-i-N-u-gi nii, namut mic-cun st-n-i-mmugiin n-ikkafa ju- tammi-t cimma n-aa-mi-n sip-atf--at mic--cin ii/
[mɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈr̥ɛŋːɔːgɪ niː ˈnɑːmʊt ˈmɪt͡sːʊn ˈstn̥ɛmːʊːgiːn ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ˈtamːɛt ˈʃɪmːɑ ˈn̥uʊ̯mɛn sɪˈbaðʷːat ˈmːt͡ʃːɪn iː]
mi tammet ṛenga-Ø-gi nỉ nam-ut mitts=un s-nemm-ugit-an ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo tammet ṡimm-a ṇuom=en si-baḍv-at Ø-mitṡ-ϕin ỉ
det large trout-act-pl pron.3a.pl which-acc.pl together.with poss.3a-friend-com-poss.nloc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc large lake-gen out.on.the.water.iness cis-catch-det 3a.ag-try-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.act.pl
‘the big trouts, which my father tried to catch out on the big lake with his friend’

or

(135)mi tammet ṛengogi nỉ, namut mittsun sṇemmugỉn ṇikkava įo tammet ṡimma ṇuomen sibaḍvattutan mittṡin ỉ
mi tammi-t r-i-N-u-gi nii, namut mic-cun st-n-i-mmugiin n-ikkafa ju- tammi-t cimma n-aa-mi-n sip-atf--attutan mic--in ii/
[mɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈr̥ɛŋːɔːgɪ niː ˈnɑːmʊt ˈmɪt͡sːʊn ˈstn̥ɛmːʊːgiːn ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ˈtamːɛt ˈʃɪmːɑ ˈn̥uʊ̯mɛn sɪˈbaðʷːaʰtæɪ̯tan ˈmɪːt͡ʃɪn iː]
mi tammet ṛenga-Ø-gi nỉ nam-ut mitts=un s-nemm-ugit-an ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo tammet ṡimm-a ṇuom=en si-baḍv-ϕut-an Ø-mitṡ-ϕin ỉ
det large trout-act-pl pron.3a.pl which-acc.pl together.with poss.3a-friend-com-poss.nloc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc large lake-gen out.on.the.water.iness cis-catch-dam-3a.ag-2˚.hyp-pl.infra 3a.ag-try-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.act.pl
‘the big trouts, which my father tried to catch out on the big lake with his friend’
(136)mi soaƛƛi įo, nama batvun a
mi su-aTTi ju-, nama p-atfat sattun a/
[mɪ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈbaʰtʷːʊn ɑː]
mi soaƛƛi-Ø įo nam-a Ø-baḍv-ϕun a
det fish-act pron.3a which-acc 3a.ag-catch-2˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the fish which s/he caught’
(137)mi soaƛƛi įo, nama malkkunnamit a
mi su-aTTi ju-, nama malkkunnamit a/
[mɪ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ mˈalːkʊnːɑːmɪh ɑː]
mi soaƛƛi-Ø įo nam-a Ø-im-alk-ϕun-namit a
det fish-act pron.3a which-acc 3a.ag-kin-give-2˚.hyp.pst-3o.io pron.3i
‘the fish that s/he gave her/him2
(138)mi bakvi na, nama mi ai-t de įo nįuḷḷut tủnttin a
mi p-akfi na, nama mi ai_0 t-i- ju- n--uLLut tuunttin a/
[mɪ ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː ˈnɑːmɑ mɪ ˈæɪ̯d ͜ dɛ jɔ ˈɲʊɬːʊt ˈtuːnːtːɪn ɑː]
mi bakvi-Ø na nam-a mi ai–t de įo nįu=ḷḷut Ø-tủnd-ϕin a
det house-act pron.3i which-acc det pron.3i.pat prox.dem foc most 3i.unag-affect-1˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the house that this affected the most’
(139)mi sakvin įo, nami gesekƛaƛƛimmun įo
mi sakfin ju-, nami gi-si-kTu--TTimmun ju-
[mɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ gɛˈsɛkːt͡ɬœt͡ɬːɪmːʊn jɔː]
mi sakvin-Ø įo nam-i ge-sekƛ-ůƛƛ-ϕimmun įo
det man-act pron.3a which-act 1.ag.pst-take.care.of-freq-1˚.ret.hyp pron.3a
‘the man who took care of me’
(140)miġvu, namun piṇįeḷḷistikkiddutṡ a
mihfu, namun piNi-LListikkit-tuc-- a/
[ˈmɪɣʷːʊ ˈnɑːmʊn pɪˈɲ̊ɛɬːɪsːtɪʰkɪtːʊt͡ʃ ɑː]
miġvu-Ø nam-un pi-ṇįeḷḷisteg-ϕiddutṡ
food-act which-pat 1.unag-make.sick-3˚.ret.fut.hyp pron.3i
‘food which will make you sick’
(141)nả mi ma nakvỉgat nẻ na, namun tsảbbi mimalkkikkinnit a
naa mi ma nakfiigat ni-i- na, namun c-aap-pi mimalkkikkinnit a/
[næː mɪ mɑː ˈnaʰkᶣiːgat neː nɑː ˈnɑːmʊn ˈt͡sæːpːɪ nɪmˈaɬːkɪ̯aʰkɪnːɪh ɑː]
nả mi ma nakvỉg-at nẻ na nam-un tsảbb-i m-im-alk-ϕin-kin-nit nỉ a
cop.3i.prs det pron.4a.act give.birth-dep cop.hyp.prs pron.3i.act which-pat hope-acc 4-kin-give-1˚.hyp.pst-1˚.ret.io pron.3i
‘giving birth is something that gave her/him hope’

free

rel ⟫ vp ⟫ Ø

(142)baḍvan ṛeikno, namit beuhoggemi
p-atf--an r-i-iknu-, namit p-i-uhu-ggi-mi
[ˈbaðʷːan ˈr̥ɛɪ̯ʔkŋɔ ˈnɑːmɪt ˈbɛu̯hɔkːɛːmɪ]
Ø-baḍv-van ṛeikn-o nam-it Ø-beuhog-ve=mi
3a.ag.pst-catch-2˚.pst trout-acc which-free.act 3i.ag-be.nice-3i.hyp.prs
‘s/he caught a trout, which is nice’
(143)gipeġummannin, nallat siḷḷuttassit nissun
gipi-g-ummannin, nallat siLLuttassit nissun
[gɪˈpɛːɣʊmːːanːɪn ˈnalːat ˈsɪɬːʊʰtasːɪt ˈnɪsːʊn]
gi-peġuθ-vannin na=llat Ø-siḷḷuθ-aϕ-ϕit nissun
1.ag.pst-tell-1˚.ret.pst how 4-do-sem.aux-1˚.hyp.prs cop.nloc.opt.hyp
‘s/he told me how to do it’
(144)oįįu gemindin, naįįot įaltsa tsakkin
u-jju gi-mint-in, najju-t jaLc-a c-akkin
[ˈɔjːʊ gɛˈmɪnːdɪn ˈnajːɔh ˈjaɬːt͡sɑ ˈt͡saʰkɪn]
o=įįu ge-mind-in na=įįot įaltsa ts-aθ-ϕin
then.dist 1.ag.pst-come-loc.pst whenaway.iness 2.ag-cop-loc.hyp.prs
‘I came when you were away’
(145)ṇiṇįeḷḷin, nuhỉn iskyt skeumindat nukkin
n-iNi-LLin, nuhiin iska-t ski-umint-at nukkin
[n̥ɪˈɲ̊ɛɬːɪn ˈnʊːhiːn ˈɪsːkʏt skɛu̯ˈmɪnːdat ˈnʊʰkɪn]
ṇi-ṇįeḷḷ-in nu=hỉn isk-ϕyt si-keu-mind-at nu=kk-ϕin
1.unag.pst-be.sick-loc.pst which.neg.due.tocan-conneg.itr.hyp cis-with-come-dep 1.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst- loc.hyp.pst
‘I was sick, so I couldn’t come along’
(146)oįįa gamma, namiat mitṇa soaƛƛi na nin
u-jja gamma, namiat mit-n-a su-aTTi na nin
[ˈɔjːɑ ˈgamːɑ ˈnɑːmɪ̯ah ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ nɑː nɪːn]
o=įįa g-aθ-va nam-iat mitṇa soaƛƛi-Ø na nin
there.dist 1.ag-cop-loc.prs which.free-iness many.det fish-act pron.3i cop.hyp.prs
‘I am where there is a lot of fish’
(147)oįįa gamma, namiat gvai soaƛƛi na nin
u-jja gamma, namiat gfai su-aTTi na nin
[ˈɔjːɑ ˈgamːɑ ˈnɑːmɪ̯ah gᶣæɪ̯ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ nɑː nɪːn]
o=įįa g-aθ-va nam-iat gvai soaƛƛi-Ø na nin
there.dist 1.ag-cop-loc.prs which.free-iness all.det fish-act pron.3i cop.hyp.prs
‘I am where all the fish is’
(148)oįįu, naįįu tsenekkiddun
u-jju, najju c-i-nikkit-tun
[ˈɔjːʊ ˈnajːʊ tsɛˈnɛːʰkɪtːʊn]
o=įįu na=įįu tse-neg-ϕiddun
then.dist when.rel 2.ag.pst-see-0˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘(the moment) when I saw you’

Negated non-restrictive relative clauses behave similarly to their positive counterparts, with the connegated verb in initial position and with the finite negative auxiliary in final position.

(149)mi soaƛƛi įo, numa batvut tuġġun a
mi su-aTTi ju-, numa p-atfut tug-gun a/
[mɪ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ jɔː ˈnʊːmɑ ˈbaʰtʷːʊt ˈtuːɣːʊn ɑː]
mi soaƛƛi-Ø įo num-a baḍv-ϕut t-u=ġġ-ϕun a
det fish-act pron.3a which.neg-acc catch-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-2˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the fish that s/he didn’t catch’
(150)mi soaƛƛi įo, numa imalkkut tuġġisin a
mi su-aTTi ju-, numa imalkkut tug-gisin a/
[mɪ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ jɔː ˈnʊːmɑ ɪmˈalːkʊt ˈtʊɣːɪːsɪn ɑː]
mi soaƛƛi-Ø įo num-a im-alk-ϕut t-ủ=į-ϕisin a
det fish-act pron.3a which.neg-acc kin-give-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst-neg.aux.hyp.pst-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the fish that s/he didn’t give her/him2
(151)mi bakvi na, numa mi ai-t de įo nįuḷḷut tủnttut nukkin a
mi p-akfi na, numa mi ai_0 t-i- ju- n--uLLut tuunttut nukkin a/
[mɪ ˈbaʰkᶣɪ nɑː ˈnʊːmɑ mɪ ˈæɪ̯d ͜ dɛ jɔ ˈɲʊɬːʊt ˈtuːnːtːʊt ˈnʊʰkɪn ɑː]
mi bakvi-Ø na num-a mi ai–t de įo nįu=ḷḷut tủnd-ϕut nu=kk-ϕin a
det house-act pron.3i which.neg-acc det pron.3i.pat prox.dem foc most affect-conneg.tr 3i.unag.pst- neg.aux.hyp.pst-1˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the house that this didn’t affect the most’
§12.5.2.1 The Semifinitive Auxiliary Marker

When a polyvalent verb is in its dependent form, it is normally unable to take on polypersonal markings. The semifinitive auxiliary marker (sam) is an auxiliary-like morpheme that takes on the verbal elements which cannot normally be added to a dependent form. It has the form -- and replaces the dependent marker -at. The combination of the semifinitive auxiliary -- and the -ϕ-versioner yields -a-θ- instead of the expected -app-. Verbs that are augmented by the semifinitive auxiliary marker are called semifinitive verbs.

The semifinitive auxiliary marker is mainly found in non-restrictive relative clauses when it contains non-relativised complements – if the relative clause contains an object (direct or indirect) which isn’t the head of the clause, it must be encoded into the semifinitive auxiliary marker (and can be encoded, facultatively, if it is nominal), which is only exists in the hyponomous order. It is also found with certain infinitives, mostly dependent infinitives when polypersonal agreement cannot be housed by the copula. In standard Pine, the semifinitive auxiliary marker only functions to house polypersonal elements of non-relativised (pronominal) objects and their subject: suprapositional pronouns, ditransitive preverbs, retrograde markers, hyponomous markers and polyvalent plural markers. It does not inflect for tense or mood, and as such only exists the indicative present hyponomous conjugation.

In cases where no clear subject can be attributed to the semifinitive verb, a zero-form fourth person is used as the suprapositional anchor. For example, in sisiḷḷuttassit piḍḍegat nẻ na 'to help to make it', the semifinitive auxiliary in si-siḷḷuθ-- is found with the 1˚ hyponomous prograde marker -ϕit (si-siḷḷuθ--ϕitsi-siḷḷuθ-a=θ=itsisiḷḷuttassit), which assumes a fourth person suprapositional pronoun. This can only be understood to be 4⟫3i, and therefore a third person inanimate must be the object.

In cases where a suprapositional pronoun is specified, it appears following the auxiliary, for example sisiḷḷuttattsisit tsepiḍḍeggannat 'I asked you to do it' has si-siḷḷuθ--ts-ϕisit '(to) you doing it'. However, since the main verb and the semifinitive are syllogous (have the same suprapositional pronoun), the pronoun can be left out: sisiḷḷuttassisit tsepiḍḍeggannat 'I asked you to do it'.

If the semifinitive verb has as its head a finite verb, for example in cases where a finite verb governs a second non-finite verb, for example 'to try to do it', where 'to do it' is an infinitival phrase in Pine, the main verb ('to try') will take on finite markings. If no main verb exists, the copula must be present to house finite markings. In colloquial registers, the semifinitive auxiliary marker is often avoided when a finite verb governs the semifinitive phrase – independent pronouns are preferred to the semifinitive auxiliary marker. Object transfer is also common, whereby polyvalent markings are moved from the semifinitive verb onto the main verb.

laggi, nallat sisiḷḷuttat ai nẻ na'a way to do it'copular infinitive
laggi, nallat sisiḷḷuttassit nẻ na'a way to do it'with sam
laggi, nallat ai sisiḷḷuttat mitṡat nẻ na'a way to try to do it'with independent pronouns
laggi, nallat sisiḷḷuttassit mitṡat nẻ na'a way to try to do it'with sam
laggi, nallat sisiḷḷuttat mitṡassit nẻ na'a way to try to do it'with object transfer

When a non-restrictive relative clause contains an infinitive as its main verb, the independent pronoun linked to the relative pronoun is generally dropped to avoid a sequence of two independent pronouns in a row.

The semifinitive auxiliary marker is common in standard language as a sort of perfect participial phrase, sometimes found with conjunctions.

(152)negattsiddut (įu) gelullin
ni-gac-cit-tut(ju) gi-lullin
[ˈnɛːgat͡sːɪtːʊt (jʊ) gɛˈlʊlːɪn]
neg-aϕ-ts-ϕiddit (įu) ge-lull-in
see-dam-2.ag-0˚.ret.hyp (when) 1.ag.pst-leave-loc.pst
'(having) seen you/when I saw you, I left'
§12.5.2.2 Constituent Ordering of Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Each type of non-restrictive relative clause has a slightly different constituent ordering, although they all have a characteristic SOV(A) ordering.

relative auxiliary verb

relpron [(subjp + įo] [(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ vp ⟫ (av) ⟫] pron (cp+top)

(153)mi vukvi įo, nama naukvis įo gikekvot sukkiddin įo au įu va aggimidnit
mi fukfi ju-, nama naukfis ju- giki-kfu-t sukkit-tin ju- au/ ju fa aggimit-nit
[mɪ ˈwʊʰkᶣɪ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈnɑu̯ʰkᶣɪs jɔ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈsʊʰkːɪtːɪn jɔː ˈɑu̯ jʊː wɑ akːɪˈmɪʔtnɪt]
mi vukvi-Ø įo nam-a naukvis-Ø įo gi=kekvot Ø-suk-ϕiddin įo au_įu_va a-gi-g-i-min-ϕit
det bird-act pron.3a which-acc dog-act foc yesterday 3a.ag.pst-kill-3˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a.act when incho- transloc-1.ag.pst-kin-walk-loc.hyp.pst.pl
‘the bird, which the dog killed yesterday when we went out for a walk’
(154)mi iltṇi na, nama ṇinenogedda geggimatṇisin a
mi iLt-n-i na, nama n-ini-nu-gi-t-ta gi-ggimat-n-isin a/
[mɪ ˈɪɬːtn̥ɪ nɑː ˈnɑːmɑ n̥ɪˈnɛːnɔgɛtːɑ gɛkːɪmˈatːn̥ɪːsɪn ɑː]
mi iltṇi-Ø na nam-a ṇi-nenog-et-va geg_g-im-atṇ-ϕisin a
det name-act pron.3i which-acc poss.1-son-illat-poss.loc 1.ag.pst-choose-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the name, which I chose for my son’
(155)nả ṇibistudda mi na de, nama daġa sỉlnonan geggimatṇisinnit įo
naa n-ip-istut-ta mi na t-i-, nama t-ag-a siilnu-nan gi-ggimat-n-isinnit ju-
[næː n̥ɪˈbɪsːtʊtːɑ mɪ nɑː ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɑ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈsiːlːnɔːnan gɛkːɪmˈatːn̥ɪsɪnːɪt jɔː]
nả ṇi-bistut-Ø-va mi na–de nam=a daġa s-ỉln-on-an geg_g-im-atṇ-ϕisin-nit įo
cop.nloc.prs poss.1-older.brother’s.child-poss.loc det pron.3i.act dem.prox which-gen pron.3a.gen poss.3a-name-acc- poss.nloc 1.ag.pst-kin-choose-3˚.hyp.pst-1˚.dit pron.3a
‘this is my nephew, whose name I chose’
(156)ṇinenudda, namet ỉlaittimmin įo, a ṇikkava-t da
n-ini-nut-ta, nami-t iilaittimmin ju-, a n-ikkafa_0 t-a
[n̥ɪˈnɛːnʊtːɑ ˈnɑːmɛt ilˈæɪ̯ʰtɪmːɪn jɔː ɑ ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑd ͜ dɑ]
ṇi-nenut-Ø-va nam-et ỉl_Ø-aidd-ϕimmin įo, a ṇ-ikka-Ø-va–t da
poss.1-son-act-poss.loc which-illat 3i.ag.pst-suggest-1˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a top poss.1-father-act.pocc.loc top
‘my son, to whom my father suggested it’
(157)mi vukvi įo, nami dessit tevvut sisustunin įo
mi fukfi ju-, nami t-i-ssit ti-ffut sisustunin ju-
[mɪ ˈwʊʰkᶣɪ jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈdɛsːɪt ˈtɛʋːʊt sɪsʊsːtʊːnan jɔː]
mi vukvi-Ø įo nam-i de=ssit tevv-ut sis-Ø-ust-ϕun-in nỉn įo
det bird-act pron.3a which-act here.illat.pl egg-acc.pl cis-3a.ag.pst-lay.eggs-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst pron.3a
‘the bird, who laid eggs here’
(158)mi roktu įo, nami hauddadeddet uḷḷon keminįikkunnamit įo
mi ru-ktu ju-, nami haut-tat-i-t-ti-t uLLu-n ki-min--ikkunnamit ju-
[mɪ ˈrɔkːtʊ jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈhɑu̯tːɑdɛtːɛh ˈʊɬːɔn kɛːmɪˈɲɪʰkʊnːɑːmɪh jɔː]
mi roktu-Ø įo nam-i haudda=deddet uḷḷo-n kem_Ø-i-nįikk-ϕun-namit įo
det young.man-act pron.3a which-act every.morning coffee-acc 3a.ag.pst-kin-bring-2˚.hyp.pst-3o.io pron.3a
‘the young man, who brings her/him2 coffee every morning’

semifinitive auxiliary marker

relpron [(subjp + įo][(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ vdam ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v] pron

(159)mi ḷủlut a, namet sinįavassisit gahalisuttunga na
mi Luulut a, nami-t sin--afassisit gahalisuttuN-a na
[mɪ ˈɬuːlʊh ɑː ˈnɑːmɛt sɪˈɲɑːwasːɪːsɪt gɑˈhɑːlɪsʊʰtʊŋːɑ nɑː]
mi ḷủlut-Ø a nam-et si-nįav-aϕ-ϕisit ga-halisuθ-ϕung=a na
det language-act pron.3i which-illat cis-use-dam-1.ag-3˚.hyp 1.ag-get.used.to-hyp.perf.loc pron.3i
‘the language, which I’ve gotten used to using’

or

(160)mi ḷủlut a, namet sinįavat gahalisuppungisit a
mi Luulut a, nami-t sin--afat gahalisuppuN-isit a/
[mɪ ˈɬuːlʊh ɑː ˈnɑːmɛt sɪˈɲɑːwat gɑˈhɑːlɪsʊʰpʊŋːɪːsɪh ɑː]
mi ḷủlut-Ø a nam-et si-nįav-at ga-halisuθ-ϕung=isit a
det language-act pron.3i which-illat cis-use-dep 1.ag-get.used.to-3˚.hyp.perf pron.3i
‘the language, which I’ve gotten used to using’
(161)mi gaulka na, namỉn ṇiṡṡavagi įo nẻs a va nammut vỏskveha tṃaḍḍuts a
mi gauLka na, namiin n-ic-cafagi ju- ni-i-s a/ fa nammut fu-u-skfi-ha tpm-at--tuc- a/
[mɪ ˈgɑu̯ɬːkɑ nɑː ˈnɑːmiːn ˈn̥ɪʃːɑwɑːgɪ jɔ ˈnɑːɣan wɑ ˈnamːʊt ˈwoːsːkᶣɛːhɑ ˈtm̥aðːʊt͡s ɑː]
mi gaulka-Ø na nam-ỉn ṇ-iṡ=va-va-gi įo nẻ-s va na=mmut vỏskveh-a t-maḍḍ-ϕut-s a
det village-act pron.3i which-elat poss.1-parent.act.pl-poss.loc-pl foc cop.nloc.hyp.prs-pl and which.iness moose-acc 3a.ag-hunt-2˚.hyp.prs-pl.supra pron.3i
‘the village, where my parents are from and hunt moose’
(162)mi ṡinnen a, nammut nįukku soaƛƛi na nẻ
mi cinni-n a, nammut n--ukku su-aTTi na ni-i-
[mɪ ˈʃɪnːɛn ɑː ˈnamːʊh ˈɲʊʰkʊ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ nɑː neː]
mi ṡinnen-Ø a nam-mut nįukku soaƛƛi-Ø na nẻ
det lake-act pron.3i which-iness much fish-act pron.3i cop.nloc.hyp.prs
‘the lake, in which there are a lot of fish’

negative auxiliary verb

relpron [(subjp + įo][(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ vconeg ⟫ (av/pp) ⟫ negaux] (pron)

(163)mi bįuḷḷu įo, numa daġa sỉlnonan gegatṇut nukkisin įo
mi p-juLLu ju-, numa t-ag-a siilnu-nan gi-gat-n-ut nukkisin ju-
[mɪ ˈbjʊɬːʊ jɔː ˈnʊːmɑ dɑːɣɪ ˈsiːlːnɔːnan gɛgˈatːn̥ʊt ˈnʊʰkɪːsɪn jɔː ]
mi bįuḷḷu-Ø įo num-a daġa s-ỉln-on-an geg_atṇ-ϕut n=u=kk-ϕisin įo
det boy-act pron.3a which-gen.neg pron.3a.gen poss.3a-name-acc-poss.nloc choose-conneg.tr 1.ag.neg.aux-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘the boy, whose name I didn’t choose’
(164)mi roktu įo, numi hauddadeddet uḷḷon keminįikkut tuġġuttamit įo
mi ru-ktu ju-, numi haut-tat-i-t-ti-t uLLu-n ki-min--ikkut tug-guttamit ju-
[mɪ ˈrɔkːtʊ jɔː ˈnʊːmɪ ˈhɑu̯tːɑdɛtːɛh ˈʊɬːɔn kɛːmɪˈɲɪʰkʊt ˈtʊɣːʊʰtɑːmɪt jɔː]
mi roktu-Ø įo num-i haudda=deddet kem_i-nįikk-ϕut uḷḷo-n t-u=ġġ-ϕut-tamit įo
det young.man-act pron.3a which-act.neg every.morning coffee-acc kin-bring-conneg.tr 3a.ag- neg.aux-2˚.hyp.prs-3o.io pron.3a
‘the young man, who does not bring her/him2 coffee every morning’
(165)mi ṡinnen a, nummut uġun nįukku soaƛƛi na nuįįe
mi cinni-n a, nummut ug-un n--ukku su-aTTi na nujji-
[mɪ ˈʃɪnːɛn ɑː ˈnʊːmːʊh ˈʊːɣʊn ˈɲʊʰkʊ ˈsɑːt͡ɬːɪ nɑː ˈnʊjːɛ]
mi ṡinnen-Ø a num-mut uġun nįukku soaƛƛi-Ø na n=u=įį-ve
det lake-act pron.3i which-iness.neg cop.conneg much fish-act pron.3i neg.aux.nloc.hyp.prs
‘the lake, in which there are not a lot of fish’

§12.5.3 Types of Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Non-restrictive Relative Clauses are relative clauses whose role is to add information about the antecedent which they refer to, but whose presence is not necessarily absolutely necessary to identify the antecedent. In other words, the information added by the relative clause is seen as less essential if it appears in a non-restrictive relative clause.

In formal language, the final independent pronoun linked to the relative nam- pronoun agrees in case (active/patientive/accusative/genitive), but this is no longer common in non-formal registers.

nả ṇitsukṇeva mi na-t de, namun ṇakṇin a

nả ṇitsukṇeva mi na-t de, namun ṇakṇin ai

‘this is my knife, which broke’

The first phrase lacks case agreement with the relative pronoun, while the second does not. Lack of case agreement of the clause final independent pronoun is not a new development, but agreement is still the standard for formal registers. It is not widely used in this book as its use has fallen out of all registers except formal, standardised written Pine.

Non-restrictive clauses can be either bound, in which case the relative pronoun refers to a specific antecedent, or free, in which case the antecedent is a whole clause, in which case a relative pronoun is not used. Note that the antecedent mi ma(na) ‘something’ normally requires a free relative pronoun.

Subject non-restrictive relative clauses are introduced by a pronoun (nami in the singular, namegi in the plural agentive, nama in the singular and namut in the plural unagentive for bound clauses and namit for free agentive clauses and namat for free unagentive clauses) followed by main hyponomous clause and finally an independent pronoun which agrees with the argument of the relative clause (in the case of bound relative clauses). Should there be a subject which is not the argument of the relative clause, it must come before the verb and is followed by the focus particle įo~įe, or it can be clipped out of the phrase by the topic marker a Ø–t da.

(166)nả ṇitsukṇeva mi na-t de, nami ari kuįįoggemi na
naa n-ic-ukN-i-fa mi na_0 t-i-, nami ari kujju-ggi-mi na
[næː n̥ɪˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɛːwɑ mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈɑːrɪ ˈkʊjːɔkːɛːmɪ nɑː]
nả ṇi-tsukṇi-Ø-va mi na–t de nam-i ari Ø-kuįįog-vemi na
cop.nloc.prs poss.1-knife-act-poss.loc det pron.3i.act dem.prox which-act very 3i.ag-be.sharp-3i.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘this is my knife, which is very sharp’
(167)nả ṇitsukṇeva mi na-t de, nama nįukkut ganįavvisit a
naa n-ic-ukN-i-fa mi na_0 t-i-, nama n--ukkut gan--affisit a/
[næː n̥ɪˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɛːwɑ mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɑ ˈɲʊʰkʊt gɑˈɲaʋːɪːsɪh ɑː]
nả ṇi-tsukṇi-Ø-va mi na–t de nam-a nįukkut ga-nįav-ϕisit a
cop.nloc.prs poss.1-knife-act-poss.nloc det pron.3i.act dem.prox which-acc much 1.ag-use-3˚.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘this is my knife, which I use a lot’
(168)nảt ṇitsukṇevagi mi nỉ-t de, namut ṇiġaġaveva įo usket tṇįavvutan ỉ
naat n-ic-ukN-i-fagi mi nii_0 t-i-, namut n-ig-ag-afi-fa ju- uski-t t-n-jaffutan ii/
[næːt n̥ɪˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɛwɑːgɪ mɪ niːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmʊt n̥ɪˈɣɑːɣɑɥɛːwɑ jɔ ˈʊsːkɛt ˈtɲ̊aʋːʊːtan iː]
nả-t ṇi-tsukṇi-Ø-va-gi mi nỉ–t de nam-ut ṇi-ġaġavi-Ø-va įo usket t-nįav-ϕut-an ỉ
cop.nloc.prs-pl poss.1-knife-act-poss.loc-pl det pron.3i.act.pl dem.prox which-acc.pl poss.1-older.brother-acc-poss.loc foc often 3a.ag-use-2˚.hyp.prs-pl.infra pron.3i.pl
‘these are my knives, which my brother uses often’
(169)nảt ṇitsukṇevagi mi nỉ-t de, namut nįukkut ganįavvisitan ỉ
naat n-ic-ukN-i-fagi mi nii_0 t-i-, namut n--ukkut gan--affisitan ii/
[næːt n̥ɪˈt͡sʊkːŋ̊ɛwɑːgɪ mɪ niːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmʊt ˈɲʊʰkʊt gɑˈɲaʋːɪsɪːtan iː]
nả-t ṇi-tsukṇi-Ø-va-gi mi nỉ–t de nam-ut nįukkut ga-nįav-ϕisit-an ỉ
cop.nloc.prs-pl poss.1-knife-act-poss.loc-pl det pron.3i.act.pl dem.prox which-acc.pl much 1.ag-use-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.infra pron.3i.pl
‘these are my knives, which I use a lot’

Non-restrictive relative phrases whose antecedent is a predicative argument often include a prerelative antecedent, for example ollut ‘such a’. Such prerelative pronouns are quite common in such cases. Prerelative antecedents (that are animate) are obviated, while the precedent isn’t.

(170)geneggimin ollut illįoġa, numa~nuƛon nekkyt ai guḷḷu voaḥḥįu nukkungisit a
gi-ni-ggimin u-llut iL-Lu-g-a, numa // nuTu-n ni-kka-t ai guLLu fu-ah--hju nukkuN-isit a/
[gɛˈnɛkːɪːmɪn ˈɔlːʊh ˈɪʎːɔːɣɑ ˈnʊːmɑ~ˈuːt͡ɬɔn ˈnɛʰkʏh æɪ̯ ˈgʊɬːʊ ˈwɑːʔːjʊ ˈnʊʰkʊŋːɪːsɪh ɑː]
ge-neg-vi=min ollut illįo-ġa num-a~nu=ƛon neg-ϕyt ai_guḷḷu voaḥḥįu nu=kk-ϕung=isit a
1.ag.pst-see-4˚.pst such.dist creature-acc which.neg-acc~like.which.neg-acc see-conneg.tr before.neg never 1.ag- neg.aux-3˚.hyp.perf pron.3i.act
‘I saw (such a) creature, which I have never seen before’
§12.5.3.1 Subject Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Relative clauses which are non-restrictive and whose main clause referent is the subject of the relative clause are introduced by a non-restrictive relative pronoun either directly after the main clause or after the antecedent. The positive relative clause is introduced by means of the non-restrictive relative pronoun nami, which has the plural form namegi. The connegative dependent form is in -ϕit for monvalent verbs (which differs from the non-relative connegative, which has the form -ϕat), and -ϕụt for polyvalent verbs (which is identical to the non-relative connegative). Negative non-restrictive subject relative clauses are introduced by the negative relative pronoun numi, which like its positive form is sensitive to number and case. The non-restrictive relative clause is contained between the relative pronoun and a hyponomous verb (or the negative auxiliary copula in negative clauses). The word order in such clauses is SOV(A). Finally, the relative clause ends with the subject independent pronoun. Note that if the referent of the relative clause is the clause itself (a free relative clause), the relative pronoun namit in the asematic and namat in the sematic is used instead of nami in the positive, and numit in the asematic negative and numat in the sematic negative. Free forms only distinguish sematic and asematic forms. Independent pronouns are not found in free relative forms.

The subject non-restrictive relative pronoun has the following forms:

boundfree
positivenegativepositivenegative
singularpluralsingularplural
activenaminameginuminumeginamitnumit
patientivenamunnamunitnumunnumunitnamatnumat
acc/gennamanamutnumanumut

bound singular

(171)ollot tannumittan ṇipṃava, nami issigasekƛaƛƛimmit įo
u-llu-t tannumittan n-ipm-afa, nami issigasi-kTaTTimmit ju-
[ˈɔlːɔt ˈtanːʊmːɪʰtan ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ɪsːɪgɑˈsɛkːt͡ɬat͡ɬːɪmːɪt jɔː]
ollot Ø-tannumiθ-an ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va nam-i issi_ga-sekƛ-aƛƛ-ϕimmit įo
so 3a.ag-be.patient-nloc.prs poss.1-wife-act-poss.loc who-act 1.ag-take.care-freq-1˚.ret.hyp pron.3a
‘my wife, who takes good care of me, is so patient’
(172)ḷủllat ṇikkut tủįan ṇisasava, nami ṇůġeůn givassen įo
Luullat n-ikkut tuujan n-isasafa, nami n-u--g-i-u--n gifassi-n ju-
[ˈɬuːlːat ˈn̥ɪʰkʊt ˈtuːjan n̥ɪˈsɑːsɑwɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈn̥œːɣøːn gɪˈwasːɛn jɔː]
ḷủl-ϕat ṇi=kkut t-ủ=į-an ṇi-sasa-Ø-va nam-i ṇůġ=eůn gi-Ø-vass-ven įo
speak-conneg.itr pron.1.com 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.prs poss.1-older.sister-act-poss.loc who-act pron.1.elat transloc-3a.ag-be.ashamed-nloc.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘my sister, who is ashamed of me, doesn’t talk to me’

nả belkkussivummen sakvin pinennenna, nami mitṇaset tsaknungimmit įo

naa p-i-lkkussifummi-n sakfin pini-nni-nna, nami mit-n-asi-t c-aknkkuN-immit ju-

[næː ˈbɛlːkʊsːɪwʊmːɛn ˈsaʰkᶣɪn pɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑːsɛh ˈt͡saʔkŋʊŋːɪmːɪt jɔː]

nả belg-ϕussivuθ-ven sakvin-Ø pi-nennen-Ø-va nam-i mitṇa-set ts-ang-ϕung=immit įo

cop.nloc.prs trust-hab.pass-nloc.hyp.prs man-act poss.2-friend-act-poss.loc who-pat many-adv

2.ag-help-1˚.ret.hyp.perf pron.3a

‘your friend, who has helped you many times, is a trustworthy man’

nả aįįikki ủnủna ṇipṃava, nami ảlįỉn ahava bįůeƛƛi timalkkisitṡutṇut įo

naa ajjikki uunuuna n-ipm-afa, nami aaL-iin ahafa p-ju--i-TTi timalkkisic--ut-n-ut ju-

[næː ˈajːɪʰkɪ ˈuːnuːnɑ ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈbjʏy̯t͡ɬːɪ ˈæːʎiːn tɪmˈalːkɪsɪt͡ʃʊtːn̥ʊt jɔː]

nả aįįeg=ϕi-Ø ủnủna ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va nam-i ảlįỉn ahava bįůeƛƛ-i t-im-alk-ϕisitṡ-utṇut įo

cop.nloc.prs teacher-act excellent poss.1-wife-act-poss.loc who-act soon beautiful boy-acc

3a.ag-kin-give-3˚.hyp.fut-1.io ron.3a

‘my wife, who will soon give me a beautiful son, is an excellent teacher’

(173)nả įaltsa ṇinennenna, nami gvaigga tilidnitṇut įo
naa jaLc-a n-ini-nni-nna, nami gfaigga tilit-nit-n-ut ju-
[næː ˈjaɬːt͡sɑ n̥ɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈgᶣæɪ̯kːɑ tɪˈlɪʔtnɪtːn̥ʊt jɔː]
nả įal=tsa ṇi-nennen-Ø-va nam-i gvaigg-a t-i-lidn-ϕit-tṇut įo
cop.nloc.prs away.iness poss.1-friend-act-poss.loc who-act everything-acc 3a.ag-kin-tell-1˚.hyp.prs-1.io pron.3a
‘my friend, who tells me everything, is away’
(174)sṇỉggi gikekvot miįįỉnit gaḷủla sagvema įo, nami ṇillįunava nỉn įo
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mijjiinit gaLuula sagfi-ma ju-, nami n-iL-Lunafa niin ju-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈmɪjːiːnɪt gɑˈɬuːlɑ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔ ˈnɑːmɪ n̥ɪʎːʊnɑːwɑ niːn jɔː]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekvot mi=įįỉnit ga-ḷủl-a sagvem-a įo nam-i ṇ=illįuni-Ø-va nỉn įo
3a.unag.pst-die.pst-nloc.pst yesterday that.elat 1.ag-speak-loc.hyp.prs man-pat pron.3a who-act poss.1-relative-act- poss.loc cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘the man I talked about, who was a relative of mine, died yesterday’
(175)nả pỉƛṇuokku mi na-t de, nami nįalpṇůeykit kini nẻ na
naa piiTt-n-aa-kku mi na_0 t-i-, nami n--aLpt-n-fi-a-kit kini ni-i- na
[næː ˈpit͡ɬːn̥ʊu̯ʰkʊ mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈɲaɬːpn̥ᶣɛy̯kɪt ˈkɪːnɪ neː nɑː]
nả pỉƛ=ṇuokku-Ø mi na–t de nam-i nįalp=ṇůeyk-it kini-Ø nẻ na
cop.nloc.prs old.pine-act det pron.3i.act dem.prox which-act conifer-gen.pl species-act cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘this an old pine tree, which is a species of coniferous trees’
(176)iskasekƛaƛƛemi ṇipṃava, nami illot tannumimmen įo
iskasi-kTaTTi-mi n-ip-mafa, nami illu-t tannumimmi-n ju-
[ɪsːkɑˈsɛkːt͡ɬat͡ɬːɛːmɪ ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈɪlːɔt ˈtanːʊmɪmːɛn jɔː]
is-ga-sekƛ-aƛƛ-emi ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va nam-i illot Ø-tannumiθ-ven įo
well-1.ag-take.care-freq-1˚.ret.prs poss.1-wife-act-poss.loc who-act so 3a.ag-be.patient-nloc.hyp.prs pron.3a
‘my wife, who is so patient, takes good care of me’
(177)nả ṇỉkava įo soḷḷa-t de, namun tuovvo bỉṛvu tṡattṡisin įo
naa n-iikafa ju- su-LLa_0 t-i-, namun taa-ffu- p-iir-fu c--ac--isin ju-
[næː ˈn̥iːkɑːwɑ jɔː ˈsɔɬːɑd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmʊn ˈtuʊ̯ʋːɔ ˈbiːrːfʊ ˈt͡ʃat͡ʃːɪːsɪn jɔː]
nả ṇ-ỉka-va įo soḷḷa-Ø–t de nam-un tuovvo bỉṛv-u Ø-tṡattṡ-ϕisin įo~ai
cop.nloc.prs poss.1-father.gen-poss.loc pron.3a female.reindeer-act dem.prox which-pat last.year calf-acc 3a.unag.pst-give.birth-3˚.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘this female reindeer, which had a calf last year, is my father’s’
(178)ṇigattsandesets mitṇattsun keukvon a dảlįet mi kaltṡenmảven a, namun gikekvot ṡilttṡutuppin a
n-igac-cant-i-si-c- mit-n-ac-cun ki-ukfu-n a/ t-aaL-i-t mi kaLc--i-nmaafi-n a, namun giki-kfu-t cilc--cutuppin a/
[n̥ɪˈgat͡sːanːdɛːsɛt͡s ˈmɪtːn̥at͡sːʊn ˈkɛu̯ʰkʷɔn ɑː ˈdæːʎɛt mɪ ˈkaɬːt͡ʃɛnˈmæːɥɛn ɑː ˈnɑːmʊn gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈʃɪlːt͡ʃʊtʊʰpɪn ɑː]
ṇi-gattsand-eset-s mitṇa-ttsun keukv-on a dảlį=et mi kaltṡen=mảv-en a nam-un gi=kekvot Ø-ṡiltṡ-ϕutuθ-ϕin na
1.unag-suffice-3˚.ret.prs-pl.supra many-also day-gen pron.3i for det elk.meet-pat pron.3i which-pat yesterday 3i.unag.pst- butcher-pass-3i.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘the elk meat, which was butchered yesterday, can feed us for days’

bound plural

(179)ollat tahattat ṇibỉṡkevagi, namegi issigasekƛaƛƛimmitan ỉ
u-llat tahattat n-ip-iicki-fagi, nami-gi issisi-kTaTTimmitan ii/
[ɔlːat ˈtɑːhaʰtat n̥ɪˈbiːʃːkɛwɑːgɪ ˈnɑːmɛːgɪ ɪsːɪgɑˈsɛkːt͡ɬat͡ɬːɪmːɪːtan iː]
ollat t-ahaθ-at ṇi-bỉṡki-Ø-va-gi nam-egi issi_ga-sekƛ-aƛƛ-ϕimmit-an ỉ
so 3a.ag-be.beautiful-nloc.prs.pl poss.1-child-act-poss.loc-pl who-act.pl 1.ag-take.care.of-freq-1˚.ret.hyp-pl.infra pron.3a.pl
‘my children, who take good care of me, are so beautiful’
(180)nảt spelkkussivummas sakvingi pinennennagi, namegi mitṇaset tsaknungitan ỉ
naat spi-lkkussifummas sakfiN-i pini-nni-nna, nami-gi mit-n-asi-t c-aknkkuN-itan ii/
[næː ˈspɛlːkʊsːɪwʊmːas ˈsaʰkᶣɪŋːɪ pɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑːgɪ ˈnɑːmɛːgɪ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑːsɛh ˈt͡saʔkŋʊŋːɪːtan iː]
nảt s-belg-ϕussivuθ-vas sakvin-gi pi-nennen-Ø-va-gi nam-egi mitṇa-set ts-ang-ϕungit-an įo
cop.nloc.prs.pl 3a.unag-trust-hab.pass-nloc.hyp.prs.pl man-act.pl poss.2-friend-act-poss.loc-pl who-act.pl many-adv 2.ag-help-1˚.ret.hyp.perf-pl.infra pron.3a.pl
‘your friends, who have helped you many times, are trustworthy men’
(181)nảt gvaiƛisƛvaki mi nỉ-t de, namegi vukvelaggut nẻs ỉ
naat gfaiTisTfaki mi nii_0 t-i-, nami-gi fukfi-laggut ni-i-s ii/
[næːt ˈgᶣæɪ̯ˈt͡ɬɪsːt͡ɬʷɑːkɪ mɪ niːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɛgɪ ˈwʊʰkᶣɛˈlakːʊt neːs iː]
nả-t gvai=ƛisƛ-va=kki mi nỉ–t de nam-egi vukve=laggut-Ø nẻ-s ỉ
cop.nloc.prs-pl starling-act.pl det pron.3a.act.pl dem.prox which-act.pl species.of.bird-act cop.nloc.hyp.prs.pl pron.3a.pl
‘these are starlings, which are a type of bird’
(182)gepuiįįetin miskven ṇủmukkidda ṛilkkobỉlįit, namegi ṇeuddut tṡamot billįogi nẻs ỉ
gi-puijji-tin miskfi-n n-uumukkit-ta r-ilkku-p-iiL-it, nami-gi n-i-ut-tut c--amu-t p-iL-Lu-gi ni-i-s ii/
[gɛˈpʊɪ̯jːɛːtɪn ˈmɪsːkᶣɛn ˈn̥uːmːʊʰkɪtːɑ ˈr̥ɪlːkɔˈbiːʎɪt ˈnɑːmɛgɪ ˈn̥ɛu̯tːʊt ˈt͡ʃɑːmɔt ˈbɪʎɔːgɪ neːs iː]
ge-puįį-vet-in misk=ven ṇ-ủm-ukkit-va ṛilkko=bỉlį-it nam-egi ṇe=uddut tṡamot billįu-Ø-gi nẻ=s ỉ
1.ag.pst-pick.pst-3˚.pst together poss.1-mother-com-poss.loc cloudberry-acc.pl which-act.pl pron.1.illat.pl sacred berry- act-pl cop.nloc.hyp.prs.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I picked cloudberries with my mum, which are sacred berries to us’
(183)ṇihalkketin ṇiƛykkydda, namegi ṇilỉlủnna algu nỉs ỉ
n-ihalkki-tin n-iTa-kka-t-ta, namit-gi, n-iliiluunna algu niis ii/
[n̥ɪˈhalːgᶣɛːtɪn n̥ɪˈt͡ɬʏʰkʏtːɑ ˈnɑːmɛgɪ n̥ɪˈliːluːnːɑ ˈalːgʊ niːs iː]
ṇi-halg-vet-in ṇi-ƛykk-yt-va nam-egi ṇi-lỉl-ủn-va algu-Ø nỉ=s ỉ
1.unag.pst-lose.pst-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst poss.1-ski-acc.pl-poss.loc which-act.pl poss.1-uncle-elat-poss.loc gift-act cop.nloc.hyp.pst.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I lost my skis, which were a gift from my uncle’
(184)immugigiggeddetin bayƛvet ṇinůektsidda, namegi noalmimut ḥįůįįis ỉ
immugigiggi-t-ti-tin p-aa--Tfi-t n-inu--i-kc-it-ta, nami-gi nu-almimut h--ju--jjis ii/
[ɪmːʊgɪˈgɪkːɛtːɛːtɪn ˈbæy̯t͡ɬᶣːɛt n̥ɪˈnʏy̯kːt͡sɪtːɑ ˈnɑːmɛgi ˈnɑːlːmɪːmʊt ˈʔjœjːɪs iː]
immu_g-i_gigged-vet-in bayƛv-et ṇi-nůekts-it-va nam-unit noalm-imut ḥ-įůįį-ϕis ỉ
1.ag.pst-kin-gather.around-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst trip-illat poss.1-bag-acc.pl-poss.loc which-pat.pl floor-iness 3i.ag-lie-3i.pst.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I gathered my belongings, which lied on the floor, for the trip’
(185)getṇigiḍvetin bakvet ṇiƛykkydda, namegi luṡkoggas va ḥikkoggas ỉ
gi-t-n-igitf--i-tin p-akfi-t n-iTa-kka-t-ta, nami-gi lucku-ggas fa ikku-ggas ii/
[gɛtːn̥ɪˈgɪðᶣːɛːtɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɛt n̥ɪˈt͡ɬʏʰkʏtːɑ ˈnɑːmɛːgɪ ˈlʊʃːkɔkːas wa ˈʔɪʰkːɔkːas iː]
get-ṇ-i-giḍḍ-vet-in bakv=et ṇi-ƛykk-yt-va nam-egi Ø-luṡkog-vas va ḥ-ikkog-vas ỉ
transloc-1.unag.pst-kin-forget-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst home.illat poss.1-ski-acc.pl-poss.loc which-act.pl 3i.ag- be.old-3i.hyp.prs.pl and 3i.ag-be.broken-3i.hyp.prs.pl pron.3ipl
‘I forgot my skis, which are old and broken, at home’
(186)siṃoiktvi ảṃṃittit, namunit innik dalgvilttis ỉ, įoįįa-t ṃuoįavvun gi
sim-u-aiktfi aam-mittit, namunit innik t-algfilttis ii, ju-jja_0 m-aa-jaffun gi
[sɪˈm̥ɑɪ̯kːtᶣɪ ˈæːm̥ːɪʰtɪt ˈnɑːmʊːnɪh ˈɪnːɪk ˈdalːgᶣɪlːtɪs iː jɔjːam̥ ͜ ˈm̥uʊ̯jɑːʋːʊn gɪ]
si-Ø-ṃoikt-vi ảṃṃ-ittit nam-unit innik Ø-dalgv=ild-ϕis ỉ įoįįa–t Ø-ṃuoįav-ϕun gi
cis-3a.act.pst-blow-nloc.pst ember-illat.pl which-pat.pl still 3i.unag.pst-glow-3i.hyp.pst.pl pron.3i.pl so.that 3a.ag.pst-warm.oneself-nloc.hyp.dub.pst part
‘s/he blew on the embers, which were still glowing, to warm herself/himself up’

bound negative

(187)olla-t ġet tannumittan ṇipṃava, numi issisekƛaƛƛut nukkimmit įo
u-lla_0 g-i-t tannumittan n-ipm-afa, numi issisi-kTaTTut nukkimmit ju-
[ˈɔlːaɣ ͜ ɣɛt ˈtanːʊmːɪʰtan ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ ˈnʊːmɪ ɪsːɪˈsɛkːt͡ɬat͡ɬːʊt ˈnʊʰkɪmːɪt jɔː]
ollat–t ġet Ø-tannumiθ-an ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va num-i issi=sekƛ-aƛƛ-ϕut n=u=kk-ϕimmit įo
so part 3a.ag-be.patient-nloc.prs poss.1-wife-act-poss.loc who.neg-act take.care.of-conneg.tr 1.ag.neg.aux-1˚.ret.hyp.prs pron.3a.act
‘my wife, who doesn’t good care of me, is in fact patient’
(188)uġun belkkussivummas sakvingi tủįat pinennennagi, numegi usket aknut nuttsungitan ỉ
ug-un p-i-lkkussifummas sakfiN-i tuujat pini-nni-nnagi, numi-gi uski-t aknut nuc-cuN-itan ii/
[ˈʊːɣʊn ˈbɛlːkʊsːɪwʊmːas ˈsaʰkᶣɪŋːɪ ˈtuːjat pɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑːgɪ ˈnʊːmɛːgɪ ˈʊsːkɛh ˈaʔkŋʊt ˈnʊt͡sːʊŋːɪːtan iː]
uġun belg-ϕussivuθ-vas sakvin-Ø-gi t-ủ=į-at pi-nennen-Ø-va-gi num-egi usket ang-ϕut n=u=tts-ϕung=it-an ỉ
cop.conneg trust-hab.pass-nloc.hyp.prs.pl man-act.pl 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.prs.pl poss.2-friend-act-poss.loc-pl who.neg-act.pl often help-conneg.tr 2.ag-neg.aux-1˚.ret.perf.hyp-pl.infra pron.3a.act.pl
‘your friends, who have not helped you often, are not trustworthy men’
(189)nả įaltsa ṇinennenna, numi gvaigga ilidnyt tuġġitṇut įo
naa jaLc-a n-ini-nni-nna, numi gfaigga ilit-na-t tug-git-n-ut ju-
[næː ˈjaɬːt͡sɑ n̥ɪˈnɛnːɛnːɑ ˈnʊːmɪ ˈgᶣæɪ̯kːɑ ɪˈlɪʔtnʏt ˈtuːjɪ̯atːn̥ʊt jɔː]
nả įal=tsa ṇi-nennen-Ø-va num-i gvaigg-a i-lidn-ϕyt t-uġġ-ϕit-tṇut įo
cop.nloc.prs away.iness poss.1-friend-act-poss.loc who.neg-act everything-acc kin-tell-conneg.tr 3a.ag-neg.aux-1˚.hyp-1.io pron.3a
‘my friend, who doesn’t tell me everything, is away’
(190)sṇỉggi gikekvot miįįỉnit gaḷủla sagvema įo, numi ṇillįeniṡkeva uġun tuġġin įo
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mijjiinit gaLuula sagfi-ma ju-, numi n-iL-Li-nicki-fa ug-un tug-gun ju-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈmɪjːiːnɪt gɑˈɬuːlɑ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnʊːmɪ ˈn̥ɪʎːɛnɪʃːkɛːwɑ ˈʊːɣʊn ˈtʊɣːɪn jɔː]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekvot ga-ḷủl-a sagvem-a įo num-i ṇ-illįe=niṡki-Ø-va uġun t-u=ġġ-ϕin įo
3a.unag.pst-die.pst-nloc.pst yesterday which.iness 1.ag-speak-loc.hyp.prs man-pat pron.3a which.neg-act poss.1-relative-act-poss.loc cop.conneg 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘the man I talked about, who wasn’t relative of mine, died yesterday’
(191)nảt kunnutṡki mi na-t de, numegi nįalpṇůeykit kini uġun nuįįas ỉ
naat kunnuc--ki mi na_0 t-i-, numi-gi ug-un n--aLpt-n-fi-a-kit kini nujjas ii/
[næːt ˈkʊnːʊt͡ʃːkɪ mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnʊːmɛgɪ ˈɲaɬːpn̥ᶣɛy̯kɪt ˈkɪːnɪ ˈʊːɣʊn ˈnʊjːas iː]
nả-t kunnutṡ-Ø-gi mi na–t de num-egi nįalp=ṇůeyk-it kini-Ø uġun n=u=įį-vas ỉ
cop.nloc.prs-pl oak.tree-act-pl det pron.3i.act dem.prox which.neg-act.pl conifer-gen.pl species-act cop.conneg 3i.ag- neg.aux-nloc.hyp.pl pron.3i.pl
‘these are old oak trees, which are not a species of coniferous trees’
(192)issisekƛaƛƛut nủkemi ṇipṃava, numi tannumippit tuįįen įo
issisi-kTaTTut nuuki-mi n-ipm-afa, numi tannumippit tujji-n ju-
[ɪsːɪˈsɛkːt͡ɬat͡ɬːʊt ˈnuːkɛːmɪ ˈn̥ɪpːm̥ɑːwɑ ˈnʊːmɪ ˈtanːʊmːɪʰpɪt ˈtʊjːɛn jɔː]
issi-sekƛ-aƛƛ-ϕut nủ=k-emi ṇ-ipṃa-Ø-va num-i tannumiθ-ϕit t-u=įį-en įo
well-take.care-freq-conneg.tr 1.ag.neg.aux-3˚.ret.prs poss.1-wife-act-poss.loc who-act.neg be.patient-conneg.itr.hyp 3a.ag-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.prs
‘my wife, who is not patient, does not take good care of me’

nả ṇỉkava įo soḷḷa-t de, numun tuovvo bỉṛvu tṡattṡut tuġġin įo

naa n-iikafa ju- su-LLa_0 t-i-, numun taa-ffu- p-iir-fu c--ac--cut tug-gin ju-

[næː ˈn̥iːkɑwɑ jɔː ˈsɔɬːɑd ͜ dɛ ˈnʊːmʊn ˈtuʊ̯ʋːɔ ˈbiːr̥ːfʊ ˈt͡ʃat͡ʃːʊt ˈtʊːɣɪn jɔː]

nả ṇ-ỉka-a-va įo soḷḷa-Ø–t de num-un tuovv=o bỉṛv-u tṡattṡ-ϕut t-u=ġġ-ϕin įo

cop.nloc.prs poss.1-father-gen-poss.loc pron.3a female.reindeer-act dem.prox which-pat.neg last.year calf-acc

have.calf-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.pst pron.3a

‘this female reindeer, which did not have a calf last year, is my father’s’

(193)gattsanttut mitṇa keukvon a dảlįet mi kyṡemavvu na nủkesets, numun gikekvot ṡilttṡutuppit nủįa na
gac-canttut mit-n-a ki-ukfu-n a/ t-aaL-i-t mi ka-ci-maffu na nuuki-si-c-, numun giki-kfu-t cilc--cutuppit nuuja na
[ˈgat͡sːanːtʊt ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈkɛu̯ʰkʷɔn ɑː ˈdæːʎɛt mɪ ˈkʏːʃɪˈmɑʋːʊ nɑː ˈnuːkɛːsɛt͡s ˈnʊːmʊn gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈʃɪlːt͡ʃʊtʊʰpɪh ˈnuːjɑ nɑː]
gattsand-ϕut mitṇa keukv-on a dảlį=et mi kyṡi=mavvu-Ø na nủ=k-eset-s num-un gi=kekvot ṡiltṡ-ϕutuθ-ϕit n=ủ=į-a na
suffice-conneg.tr many day-gen pron.3i for det squirrel.meat-act pron.3i 1.ag.neg.aux-3˚.ret.prs-pl.supra which-pat.neg yesterday butcher-pass-conneg.itr.hyp neg.aux.nloc.pst.hyp pron.3i
‘the squirrel meat, which wasn’t butchered yesterday, can’t feed us for days’
(194)immugigiggeddetin bayƛvet ṇinůektsidda, numegi noalmimmut įůįįit nuġġis ỉ
immugigiggi-t-ti-tin p-aa--Tfi-t n-inu--i-kc-it-ta, numunit nu-almimmut ju--jjit nug-gis ii/
[ɪmːʊgɪˈgɪkːɛtːɛːtɪn ˈbæy̯t͡ɬᶣːɛt n̥ɪˈnʏy̯kːt͡sɪtːɑ ˈnʊːmʊːnɪt ˈnɑlːmɪmːʊt ˈjœjːɪt ˈnʊɣːɪs iː]
i=mm=u-g-i-gigg=ed-vet-in bayƛv-et ṇi-nůekts-it-va num-unit noalmi-mmut įůįį-ϕit n=u=ġġ-ϕis ỉ
and-1.ag.pst-kin-gather-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst trip-illat poss.1-bag-acc.pl-poss.loc which-pat.pl.neg lie-conneg.itr.hyp floor-iness neg.aux.nloc.hyp.pst.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I gathered my belongings, which didn’t lie on the floor, for the trip’
(195)ṇigiḍvetin bakvet ṇiƛykkydda, numegi luṡkukkit vu ikkukkit nuįįas ỉ
n-igitf--i-tin p-akfi-t n-iTa-kka-t-ta, numi-gi luckukkit fu ikkukkit nujjas ii/
[n̥ɪˈgɪðᶣːɛːtɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɛt n̥ɪˈt͡ɬʏʰkʏtːɑ ˈnʊːmɛːgɪ ˈlʊʃːkʊʰkɪt wʊ ˈɪʰkʊʰkɪh ˈnʊjːas iː]
ṇi-giḍd-vet-in bakv=et ṇi-ƛykk-yt-va num-egi luṡkog-ϕit vu ikkog-ϕit n=u=įį-vas ỉ
1.unag.pst-forget-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst home.illat poss.1-ski-acc.pl-poss.loc which-act.pl.neg be.old-conneg.itr.hyp and.neg be.broken-conneg.itr.hyp neg.aux.nloc.hyp.pl pron.3i.pl
‘I forgot my skis, which aren’t old and broken, at home’
(196)siṃoiktvi ảṃṃittit, numunit unnuk dalgvilttit nuġġis ỉ, au ƛikven va ṃuoįavvulin
sim-u-aiktfi aam-mittit, numunit unnuk t-algfilttit nug-gis ii, au/ Tikfi-n fa m-aa-jaffulin
[sɪˈm̥ɑɪ̯kːtᶣɪ ˈæːm̥ːɪːʰtɪt ˈnʊːmʊnɪh ˈʊnːʊk ˈdalːgᶣɪlːtɪt ˈnʊɣːɪs iː(t) ɑu̯ ˈt͡ɬɪʰkᶣɛn wɑ ˈtm̥uʊ̯jɑʋʊːlɪn]
si-Ø-ṃoikt-vi ảṃṃ-ittit num-unit uk dalgvild-vit n=u=ġġ-ϕis ỉ au_ƛikven_va Ø-ṃuoįav-ϕulin
cis-3a.ag.pst-blow-nloc.pst ember-illat.pl which-pat.pl.neg glow-conneg.itr.hyp neg.aux.nloc.hyp.pst.pl pron.3i.pl in.order.to 3a.ag.pst-warm.oneself-nloc.pot.hyp
‘s/he blew on the embers, which were no longer glowing, to warm herself/himself up’

free positive

(197)geneggan ṇįoaḥimut nỉn ỏhakakken, namat ṇidinƛiġġammin
gi-ni-ggan n--u-ah-imut niin u-u-hakakki-n, namat n-it-in-Tig-gammin
[gɛˈnɛkːan ˈɲ̊ɑːʔɪːmʊh niːn ˈoːhɑkaʰkɛnˈnɑːmat n̥ɪˈdɪn̥ːt͡ɬɪːɣːamːɪn]
ge-neg-van ṇįoaḥ-imut nỉn ỏha=kakk-en nam-at ṇi-dinƛiġ-vammin
1.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst woods-iness cop.nloc.hyp.prs someone-acc which.free-pat 1.unag.pst-startle-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘I saw someone in the woods, which startled me’
(198)ṇinakṇet ṇitsuoġneva, namit ṇaigava nỉ
n-inakN-i-t n-ic-aa-g-ni-fa, namit n-aigafa nii
[n̥ɪˈnakːŋ̊ɛt n̥ɪˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛːwɑ ˈnɑːmɪt ˈn̥æɪ̯gɑːwɑ niː]
ṇi-nakṇ-vet ṇi-tsuoġn-e-va nam-it ṇ-aiga-Ø-va nỉ
1.unag.pst-break-3˚.pst poss.1-knife-acc-poss.loc which.free-act poss.1-fault-act-poss.loc cop.nloc.hyp.pst
‘I broke my knife, which was my fault’
(199)ṇihalgvet ṇinįủġeva, namit iksun nin
n-ihalgfi-t n-in--uug-i-fa, namit iksun nag-an niin
[n̥ɪˈhalːgᶣɛt n̥ɪˈɲuːɣɛːwɑ ˈnɑːmɪt ˈɪkːsʊn nɪːn]
ṇi-halg-vet ṇi-nįủġ-e-va nam-it iksun-Ø nin
1.unag.pst-lose-3˚.pst poss.1-bow-acc-poss.loc which.free-act shame-act cop.nloc.hyp.prs
‘I lost my bow, which is a shame’

getṇigiḍvetin bakvet ṇinůektsidda, namat usket ḷakkinne

gi-t-n-igitf--i-tin p-akfi-t n-inu--i-kc-it-ta, namat uski-t Lakkinni-

[gɛtːn̥ɪˈgɪðᶣːɛːtɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɛt n̥ɪˈnʏy̯kːt͡sɪtːɑ ˈnɑːmah ˈʊsːkɛt ˈɬaʰkɪnːɛ]

get-ṇ-i-giḍḍ-vet-in bakv=et ṇi-nůekts-it-va nam-at usket h-lakkin-ve

transloc-1.unag.pst-kin-forget-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst home.illat poss.1-bag-acc.pl-poss.loc which.free-pat often

3i.unag-happen-3i.hyp.prs

‘I forgot my belongings at home, which happens often’

(200)piuįįanįukkokkat tuovvo nuįįi, namit hįelgyttyt iggitamme
piujjan--ukku-kkat taa-ffu- nujji, namit h-i-lga-tta-t iggitammi-
[ˈpɪu̯jːɑˈɲʊʰkːɔʰkat ˈtuʊ̯ʋːɔ ˈnʊjːɪ ˈnɑːmɪh ˈɕɛlːgʏʰtʏt ɪkːˈtamːat]
piuįįa=nįukkog-ϕat tuovv=o n=u=įį-vi nam-it hįelg-yttyt iggi=Ø-tamm-ve
be.snowy-conneg.itr last.year neg.aux.nloc.pst which.free-act reindeer-illat.pl 3i.ag-be.advantageous-3i.hyp.prs
‘it wasn’t a snowy winter last year, which is advantageous for the reindeers’

free negative

(201)geneggan ṇįoaḥimut nỉn ỏhakakken, numat supputtut nutṇimmun
gi-ni-ggan n--u-ah-imut niin u-u-hakakki-n, numat supputtut nut-n-immun
[gɛˈnɛkːan ˈɲ̊ɑːʔɪːmʊh niːn ˈoːhɑkaʰkɛn ˈnʊːmat ˈsʊʰpʊʰtʊt ˈnʊtːn̥ɪmːʊn]
ge-neg-van ṇįoaḥ-imut nỉn ỏha=kakk-en num-at suppod-ϕut ṇ-u=tṇ-ϕimmun
1.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst woods-iness cop.nloc.hyp.pst someone-acc which.neg.free-pat surprise-conneg.tr 1.unag-neg.aux-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘I saw someone in the woods, which didn’t surprise me’
(202)ṇinakṇet ṇitsuoġneva, numit ṇaigava uġun muġġin
n-inakN-i-t n-ic-aa-g-ni-fa, numit n-aigafa ug-un mug-gin
[n̥ɪˈnakːŋ̊ɛt n̥ɪˈt͡sʊu̯ɣːnɛːwɑ ˈnʊːmɪt ˈn̥æɪ̯gɑːwɑ ˈʊːɣʊn ˈmʊɣːɪn]
ṇi-nakṇ-vet ṇi-tsuoġn-e-va num-it ṇ-aiga-Ø-va uġun m-u=ġġ-ϕin
1.unag.pst-break-3˚.pst poss.1-knife-acc-poss.loc which.free.neg-act poss.1-fault-act-poss.loc cop.conneg 4-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.pst
‘I broke my knife, which was not my fault’
(203)gipeġummannin įa geṡemmemmun, numit bįunnu uġun muġġin
gipi-g-ummannin ja gi-ci-mmi-mmun, numit p-junnu ug-un mug-gin
[gɪˈpɛːɣʊmːanːɪn jɑ gɛˈʃɛmːɛmːʊn ˈnʊːmɪh ˈbjʊnːʊ ˈʊːɣʊn ˈmʊɣːɪn]
gi-peġuθ-vannin įa ge-ṡem-vemmun num-it bįunnu-Ø uġun m-u=ġġ-ϕin
1.ag.pst-tell-1˚.ret.pst that 1.ag.pst-believe-1˚.ret.dub.hyp.pst which.neg.free-act joke-act cop.conneg 4-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.pst
‘s/he told me he believed me, which wasn’t a joke’
(204)getṇigiḍvetin bakvet ṇinůektsidda, numat usket lakkidnit muįįen
gi-t-n-igitf--i-tin p-akfi-t n-inu--i-kc-it-ta, numat uski-t lakkit-nit mujji-n
[gɛtːn̥ɪˈgɪðᶣːɛːtɪn ˈbaʰkᶣɛt n̥ɪˈnʏy̯kːt͡sɪtːɑ ˈnʊːmah ˈʊsːkɛt ˈlaʰkɪʔtnɪt ˈmʊjːɛn]
get-ṇ-i-giḍḍ-vet-in bakv=et ṇi-nůekts-it-va num-at usket lakkin-ϕit m-u=įį-ven
transloc-1.unag.pst-kin-forget-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst home.illat poss.1-bag-acc.pl-poss.loc which.neg.free-pat often happen-conneg.itr.hyp 4-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.prs
‘I forgot my belongings at home, which does not happen often’
(205)piuįįanįukkoggi tuovvo, numit hįelgyttyt iggitabmit muįįen
piujjan--ukku-ggi taa-ffu-, numit h-i-lg-a-tta-t iggitapmit mujji-n
[ˈpɪu̯jːɑˈɲʊʰkɔkːɪ ˈtuʊ̯ʋːɔ ˈnʊːmɪh ˈɕɛlːgʏʰtʏt ɪkːɪˈtaʔpmɪt ˈmʊjːɛn]
piuįįa=nįukkog-vi tuovv=o num-it hįelg-yttyt iggi=tamm-ϕit m-u=įį-ven
be.snowy-nloc.pst last.year which.neg.free-act reindeer-illat.pl be.advantageous-conneg.itr.hyp 4-neg.aux-nloc.hyp.prs
‘it was a snowy winter last year, which isn’t advantageous for the reindeers’
§12.5.3.2 Object Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Object non-restrictive relative clauses are clauses whose antecedent in the main clause appears as the object of the relative clause. As in all other cases, free relative clauses have a fourth-person referent.

bound singular positivenama
bound plural positivenamut
free positivenamat
bound singular negativenuma
bound singular negativenumut
free negativenumat

Like non-restrictive relative clauses, the antecedent of the relative clause is often preceded by the determiner mi (or some other pronoun), and relative clause itself is followed by the corresponding independent pronoun. However, because of the less essential nature of the relativised information, such determiners are not equally as common in object non-restrictive relative clauses.

Likewise, if the subject of the relative clause is not the head of the relative clause, it is usually indicated by the focus particle įo~įe followed by the relevant independent pronoun, which must follow a nominal subject. The subject may also be clipped to the end of the clause by a topic marker.

For oblique objects – relativised arguments which are found with postpositions, for example, the head of the relative clause may either be understood to be the relative pronoun (nama hỉt....a 'for which....') or the independent pronoun at the end of the clause (nama....ai hỉt), in which case it must be declined in the appropriate case. The latter construction is mostly a formal, written construction.

bound singular positive – direct transitive object

(206)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sagvema įo, nama iggit gỉllin įo
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-ma ju-, nama iggit giillin ju-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈɪkːɪt ˈgiːlːɪn jɔː]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekvot mi sagvem-a įo nam-a iggit g-ỉl-ϕin įo
3a.unag.pst-die.pst-nloc.pst yesterday det man-pat pron.3a which-acc well 1.ag-know-1˚.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘the man, whom I knew well, died yesterday’

tṇuhuttugas tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuvutsoġa mi summegi nỉ, nama vavvits tsiltṇeġġisitṡis a

t-n-uhuttugas tammi-t ki-mmikf nut--tufuc-u-g-a mi summi-gi nii, nama faffic- c-iLt-n-i-g-gisic--is a/

[ˈtn̥ʊːhʊʰtʊːgas ˈtamːɛt ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈnʊðːʊwʊt͡sɔːɣɑ mɪ ˈsʊmːɛːgɪ niː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈwaʋːɪt͡s ˈt͡sɪɬːtn̥ɛːɣɛdɑːt͡ʃɪs ɑː]

t-nuh=uttug-a-s tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuv=utsoġ-a mi summi-Ø-gi nỉ, nam-a vavviṡ-ts ts-iltṇeġ-ϕisit-tṡis a

3a.ag-build.one’s.nest-2˚.prs-pl.supra big large nest.augm-acc det eagle-act-pl pron.3a.pl which-acc vavviṡ-ess

2.ag-call-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.incl.supra pron.3i

‘eagles build a very large nest, which we call vavviṡ

bound singular positive – oblique object

(207)nả-t tġva ḷủlut meurra Niṡkullit, nama hỉt ari sisaįaƛƛat gelukvin a
naa_0 hf--a Luulut mi-urra nickullit, nama hiit ari sisajaTTat gi-lukfin a/
[næːx ͜ xʷɑ ˈɬuːlʊt ˈmɛu̯rːɑ ˈnɪʃːkʊlːɪt ˈnɑːmɑ hiːh ˈɑːrɪ sɪsˈɑːjat͡ɬːɑt geˈlʊʰkᶣɪn ɑː]
nả–t tġva ḷủlut-Ø meurra Niṡkullit-Ø nam-a hỉt ari sis-aį=aƛƛ-at ge-lukk-vin a
cop.nloc.prs part language-act difficult Pine-act which-gen for very cis-study-dep 1.ag.pst-must-loc.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘Pine is a difficult language, for which I had to study a lot’

(more formally: ..., nama ari sisaįaƛƛat gelukvin ai hỉt)

bound plural positive – direct transitive object

(208)sṇỉggit gikekvot mi sagvemut ỉ, namut iggit gỉlianin ỉ
st-n-iiggit giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-mut ii, namut iggit giilianin ii/
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪt gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmʊh iː ˈnɑːmʊh ˈɪkːɪh ˈgiːlɪ̯ɑːnɪn iː]
s-nỉg-vit gi=kekvot mi sakvem-ut ỉ nam-ut iggit g-ỉl-ian-in ỉ
3a.unag.pst-die.pst-nloc.pst.pl yesterday det man-pat.pl pron.3a.pl which-acc.pl well 1.ag.pst-know-1˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst pron.3a.pl
‘the men, whom I knew well, died yesterday’

tṇuhuttugagi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuvutsoġit mi summegi nỉ, namut vavvittset tsiltṇeġġisitṡagi nỉ

t-n-uhuttugagi tammi-t ki-mmikf nut--tufuc-u-g-it mi summi-gi nii, namut faffic-ci-t

c-iLt-n-i-g-gisic--agi nii

[ˈtn̥ʊːhʊʰtʊgɑːgɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈnʊðːʊwʊt͡sɔːɣɪt mɪ ˈsʊmːɛːgɪ niː ˈnɑːmʊt ˈwaʋːɪt͡sɛh ˈt͡sɪɬːtn̥ɛɣɪsʊt͡ʃɑːgɪ niː]

t-nuh=uttug-a-gi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuv=utsoġ-it mi summi-Ø-gi nỉ, nam-ut vavviṡ-ttset ts-iltṇeġ-ϕisit-tṡa=gi nỉ

3a.ag-build.one’s.nest-2˚.prs-pl.ambi big large nest.augm-acc.pl det eagle-act-pl pron.3a.pl which-acc.pl vavviṡ-ess.pl

1.ag-call-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.incl.ambi pron.3i.pl

‘eagles build very large nests, which we call vavviṡ

bound plural positive – oblique object

(209)nả-t ga ḷủlukki meurra mi lỏllillit ḷủlukki nỉ, namut ahỉt ari sisaįaƛƛat gelukvin ỉ
naa_0 ga Luulukki mi-urra mi lu-u-llillit Luulukki nii, namut ahiit ari sisajaTTat gi-lukfin ii/
[næːg ͜ gɑ ˈɬuːlʊʰkɪ ˈmɛu̯rːɑ mɪ ˈloːlːɪlːɪt ˈɬuːlʊʰkɪ niː ˈnɑːmʊh ˈɑːhiːh ˈɑːrɪ sɪsˈɑːjat͡ɬːɑt gɛˈlʊʰkᶣɪn iː]
nảt–t ga ḷủlut-Ø-gi meurra mi lỏllillit ḷủlut-Ø-gi nỉ nam-ut ahỉt ari sis-aį=aƛƛ-at ge-lukk-vin a
cop.nloc.prs.pl part language-act-pl difficult det eastern language-act-pl pron.3i.pl which-gen.pl for very cis-study-dep 1.ag.pst-must-loc.hyp.pst pron.3i.pl
‘Eastern dialect is difficult language, for which I had to study a lot’

bound singular positive – direct ditransitive object

(210)getṡadnet ahava hảṇṇi, nama ṇummava įo bỉṡkỉts ibmiekkutṇut a
gi-c--at-ni-t ahafa haan-ni, nama n-ummafa ju- p-iickiic- ipmii-kkut-n-ut a/
[gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛh ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈhæːn̥ːɪ ˈnɑːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈbiːʃːkiːt͡s ɪˈʔpmːɪːɛ̯ʰkʊtːn̥ʊh ɑː]
ge-tṡadn-vet ahava hảṇṇ-i nam-a ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo bỉṡk-ỉts Ø-iϕ-mieg-ϕun-tṇut a
1.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst beautiful creek-acc which-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc child-ess 3a.ag.pst-kin-show-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io pron.3i
‘I found a beautiful creek, which my mother had showed me as a child’
(211)gaįįeṡkvet sikiltṡat ủnủn laggi, nama ṇikkava įo maįikkutṇut a
g0ajji-ckfi-t sikiLc--at uunuun laggi, nama n-ikkafa ju- majikkut-n-ut a/
[gajːɛʃːkᶣɛh sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah ˈuːnuːn ˈlakːɪ ˈnɑːmɑ ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ mˈɑːjɪʰkʊtːn̥ʊh ɑː]
g-aįį=eṡk-vet si-kiltṡ-at ủnủn lagg-i nam-a ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo Ø-im-aįeg-ϕun-tṇut a
1.ag.pst-learn-3˚.pst cis-start.fire-dep excellent way-acc which-acc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc 3a.ag.pst-kin- show-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io pron.3i
‘I learned an excellent way to start a fire, which my father taught me’

bound plural positive – direct ditransitive object

(212)getṡadnetin ahava hảṇṇyt, namut ṇummava įo bỉṡkỉts ibmiekkutṇut ỉ
gi-c--at-ni-tin ahafa haan-na-t, namut n-ummafa ju- imii-gat p-iickiic- sattainit-n-ut ii/
[gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛːtɪn ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈhæːn̥ːʏt ˈnɑːmʊt ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈbiːʃːkiːt͡s ɪˈʔpmɪ̯ɛʰkʊtːn̥ʊh iː]
ge-tṡadn-vet-in ahava hảṇṇ-yt nam-ut ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo bỉṡk-ỉts Ø-iϕ-mieg-ϕut-tṇut ỉ
1.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst beautiful creek-acc.pl which-acc.pl poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc child-ess 3s.ag.pst-kin- show-3a.ag.pst-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst-1.io pron.3i.pl
‘I found beautiful creeks, which my mother had showed me as a child’

gaįįeṡkvetin sikiltṡat ủnủn laggut, namut ṇikkava įo maįikkunitṇut ỉ

gajji-ckfi-tin sikiLc--at uunuun laggut, namut n-ikkafa ju- majikkunit-n-ut ii/

[ˈgajːɛʃːkᶣɛːtɪn sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah ˈuːnuːn ˈlakːʊt ˈnɑːmʊt ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ mˈɑːjɪʰkʊnɪtːn̥ʊh iː]

g-aįįeṡk-vet-in si-kiltṡ-at ủnủn lagg-ut nam-ut ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo Ø-im-aįeg-ϕun-in-tṇut ỉ

1.ag.pst-learn-3˚.pst-pl.infra.pst cis-light.fire-dep excellent way-acc.pl which-acc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc

3a.ag.pst-kin-teach-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst-1.io pron.3i.pl

‘I learned excellent ways to start a fire, which my father taught me’

bound singular positive – indirect ditransitive object

getekvin ủa tseilkkon, nama ṇummava įo hảṇṇinnit ippeġuppimmukinnat įo

gi-ti-kfin uua c-i-ilkku-n, nama n-ummafa ju- haan-ninnit ippi-g-uppimmukinnat ju-

[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɔn ˈnɑːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈhæːn̥ːɪnːɪt ɪʰˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪmːʊkɪnːat jɔː]

ge-tekk-vin ủa tseilkk-on nam-a ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit Ø-iϕ-peġuθ-ϕimmun-kin=nat įo

1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst pretty girl-acc which-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc creek-elat

3i.ag.pst-kin-tell-1˚.ret.hyp.pst-2˚.ret.dit pron.3a

‘I met a pretty girl, whom my mother had told about the creek’

or

getekvin ủa tseilkkon, namet ṇummava įo hảṇṇinnit ḥippeġummimman įo

gi-ti-kfin uua c-i-ilkku-n, nami-t n-ummafa ju- haan-ninnit h--ippi-g-ummimman ju-

[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɔn ˈnɑːmɛt ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈhæːn̥ːɪnːɪt ʔɪʰˈpɛːɣʊsːɪmːɑkɪmːat jɔː]

ge-tekk-vin ủa tseilkk-on nam-et ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit ḥ-i-peġuθ-vimman-ki=mmat įo

1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst pretty girl-acc which-illat poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc creek-elat

3i.ag.pst-kin-tell-1˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a

‘I met a pretty girl, whom my mother had told about the creek’

(213)vůaben sisỉlat gehalin, nama ṇỉkava ai sikkaġan įo sikiltṡat maįeggiddat įo
fu--ap-i-n sisiilat gi-halin, nama n-iikafa ai sikkag-an ju- sikiLc--at maji-ggit-tat ju-
[ˈɥøœ̯bɛn sɪsˈiːlatgɛˈhɑːlɪn ˈnɑːmɑ~ˈnɑːmɛt ˈn̥iːkɑːwɑ æɪ̯ ˈsɪʰkɑːɣan jɔ sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah mˈɑːjɛkːɪtːat jɔː]
vůab-en sis-ỉl-at ge-hal-in nam-a~nam-et ṇ-ỉk-a-va ai s-ikkaġa-n įo si-kiltṡ-at Ø-m-aįeg-viddat įo
old.man-acc cis-know-dep 1.ag.pst-use.to.pst-loc.pst which-acc poss.1-father-gen-poss.loc poss.3a-father-act-poss.nloc foc cis-light.fire-dep 3a.ag.pst-kin-teach--3˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘I used to know an old man, whom my father’s father taught how to light a fire’

bound plural positive – indirect ditransitive object

getekvinin ủa tseilkkit, namut ṇummava įo hảṇṇỉn ippeġuppimmunikinnat ỉ

gi-ti-kfinin uua c-i-ilkkit, namut n-ummafa ju- haan-niin ippi-g-uppimmunikinnat ii/

[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪːnɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɪt ˈnɑːmʊt~ˈnɑːmʊdʊt ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈhæːn̥ːɪnːɪh ɪʰˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪmːʊnɪkɪnːah iː]

ge-tekk-vin-in ủa tseilkk-it nam-a~nam-et ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit Ø-iϕ-peġuθ-ϕimmun-in-kin=nat ỉ

1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst-pl.infra.pst pretty girl-acc.pl which-acc.pl poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc

creek-elat 3i.ag.pst-kin-tell-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst-2˚.ret.io pron.3a.pl

‘I met pretty girls, whom my mother had told about the creek’

or

getekvinin ủa tseilkkit, namudut ṇummava įo hảṇṇỉn ippeġuppimmunin ỉ

gi-ti-kfinin uua c-i-ilkkit, namut-ut n-ummafa ju- haan-niin ippi-g-uppimmunin ii/

[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪːnɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯lːkɪt ˈnɑːmʊt~ˈnɑːmʊdʊt ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈhæːn̥ːɪnːɪh ɪʰˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪmːʊːnɪn iː]

ge-tekk-vin-in ủa tseilkk-it nam-ud=ut ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit Ø-iϕ-peġuθ-ϕimmun-in ỉ

1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst-pl.infra.pst pretty girl-acc.pl which-acc.pl poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc

creek-elat 3i.ag.pst-kin-tell-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst pron.3a.pl

‘I met pretty girls, whom my mother had told about the creek’

(214)vůabit sisỉlat gehalin, namut ṇỉkava daġa sikkaġan įo sikiltṡat maįeggiddanin ỉ
fu--ap-it sisiilat gi-halin, namut n-iikafa t-ag-a sikkag-an ju- sikiLc--at maji-ggit-tanin ii/
[ˈɥøœ̯bɪt sɪsˈiːlat gɛˈhɑːlɪn ˈnɑːmʊt~ˈnɑːmʊdʊt ˈn̥iːkɑːwɑ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈsɪʰkɑːɣan jɔ sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah ˈmɑːjɛkːitːɑːnɪn iː]
vůab-it sis-ỉl-at ge-hal-in nam-ut~nam-udut ṇ-ỉk-a-va daġa s-ikkaġa-n įo si-kiltṡ-at Ø-m-aįeg-viddan-in įo
old.man-acc.pl cis-know-dep 1.ag.pst-use.to-loc.pst which-acc.pl~-elat.pl poss.1-father-gen-poss.loc pron.3a.gen poss.3a- father-act-poss.nloc foc cis-light.fire-dep 3a.ag.pst-teach--1˚.ret.hyp.pst-pl.infra.pst pron.3a.pl
‘I used to know old men, whom my father’s father taught how to light a fire’

bound singular negative – direct transitive object

(215)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sakvin įo, numa ikkủ ỉllyt nukkin įo
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sakfin ju-, numa ikkuu iilla-t kukkin ju-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsaʰkᶣɪn jɔː ˈnʊːmɑ ˈɪʰkuː ˈiːlːʏt ˈnʊʰkɪn jɔː]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekvot mi sakvin-Ø įo num-a ikk=ủ ỉl-ϕyt nu=kk-ϕin įo
3a.unag.pst-die.pst-nloc.pst yesterday det man-act pron.3a which.neg-acc well know-conneg.tr 1.ag.pst- neg.aux-1˚.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘the man, whom I did not know well, died yesterday’

bound plural negative – direct transitive object

(216)tṇuhuttugagi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuvutsoġit mi ṛirkogi nỉ, numut tylpṃảttset iltṇeġġyt nukkisikki nỉ
t-n-uhuttugagi tammi-t ki-mmikf nut--tufuc-u-g-it mi r-ir-ku-gi nii, numut faffic-ci-t iLt-n-i-g-ga-t nukkisikki nii
[ˈtn̥ʊːhʊʰtʊgɑːgɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈnʊðːʊwʊt͡sɔːɣɪt mɪ ˈr̥ɪr̥ːkɔːgɪ niː ˈnʊːmʊt ˈtʏɬːpm̥æːt͡sːɛh ˈɪɬːtn̥ɛɣːʏt ˈnʊʰkɪsɪʰkɪ iː]
t-nuh=uttug-a-gi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuv=utsoġ-it mi summi-Ø-gi nỉ, num-ut tylpṃ-ảttset iltṇeġ-ϕyt n=u=kk-ϕisit-gi nỉ
3a.ag-build.one’s.nest-2˚.prs-pl.ambi big large nest.augm-acc.pl det eagle-act-pl pron.3a.pl which.neg-acc.pl vavviṡ-ess.plcall- dep 1.ag.neg.aux-3˚.hyp.prs-pl.ambi pron.3i.pl
‘ravens build very a large nest, which we do not call tylpṃa (squirrel's nest)’

bound negative – oblique object

nả-t tġva ḷủlut leḍḍet Niṡkullit, numa hỉt ari sisaįaƛƛat lukkit nukkin a

naa_0 hf--a Luulut li-t--ti-t nickullit, numa hiit ari sisajaTTat lukkit nukkin a/

[næːx ͜ xʷɑ ˈɬuːlʊt ˈlɛðːɛt ˈnɪʃːkʊlːɪt ˈnʊːmɑ hiːh ˈɑːrɪ sɪsˈɑːjat͡ɬːat ˈlʊʰkɪt ˈnʊʰkɪn ɑː]

nả–t tġva ḷủlut-Ø leḍḍet Niṡkullit-Ø num-a hỉt ari sis-aįa=ƛƛ-at lukk-ϕit n=u=kk-ϕin a

cop.nloc.prs part language-act easy Pine-act which.neg-gen for very cis-study-dep must-conneg.itr.hyp

1.ag. neg.aux-loc.hyp.pst pron.3i

‘Pine is an easy language, for which I did not have to study a lot’

bound negative – direct ditransitive object

(217)getṡadnet ahava hảṇṇi, numa ṇummava įo imiekkyt tuġġutṇut a
gi-c--at-ni-t ahafa haan-ni, numa n-ummafa ju- imii-kka-t tug-gut-n-ut a/
[gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛh ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈhæːn̥ːɪ ˈnʊːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ɪˈmɪ̯ɛʰkʏt ˈtʊɣːʊtːn̥ʊh ɑː]
ge-tṡadn-vet ahava hảṇṇ-i num-a ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo i-mieg-ϕyt t=uġġ-ϕun-tṇut a
1.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst beautiful creek-acc which.neg-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc kin-show-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst. neg.aux.pst-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io pron.3i
‘I found a beautiful creek, which my mother hadn’t showed me’
(218)gaįįeṡkvet sikiltṡat ủnủn laggi, numa ṇikkava įo imaįikkut tuġġutṇut a
gajji-ckfi-t sikiLc--at uunuun laggi, numa imajikkut n-ikkafa ju- tug-gut-n-ut a/
[ˈgajːɛʃːkᶣɛh sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah ˈuːnuːn ˈlakːɪ ˈnʊːmɑ ˈn̥ɪʰkɑːwɑ jɔ ɪmˈɑːjɪʰkʊt ˈtʊɣːʊtːn̥ʊh ɑː]
g-aįį=eṡk-vet si-kiltṡ-at ủnủna lagg-i num-a im-aįeg-ϕut ṇ-ikka-Ø-va įo t=uġġ=ϕun-tṇut
1.ag.pst-learn-3˚.pst cis-light.fire-dep excellent way-acc which.neg-acc poss.1-father-act-poss.loc foc kin-teach-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst-neg.aux.pst-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io pron.3i.act
‘I learned an excellent way to start a fire, which my father didn’t teach me’

bound negative – indirect ditransitive object

(219)getekvin ủa tseilkkon, numa ṇummava įo hảṇṇinnit ipeġupput tuġġimmukinnat įo
gi-ti-kfin uua c-i-ilkku-n, numa n-ummafa ju- haan-ninnit ipi-g-upput tug-gimmukinnat ju-
[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯ɬːkɔn ˈnʊːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ hæːn̥ːɪnːɪt ɪˈpɛːɣʊʰpʊt ˈtʊɣːɪmːʊkɪnːat jɔː]
ge-tekk-vin ủa tseilkk-on num-et ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit i-peġuθ-ϕut t=uġġ-ϕimmun-kin=nat įo
1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst pretty girl-acc which.neg-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc creek-elat kin-tell-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst.neg.aux.pst-2˚.ret.hyp.pst-2 ̊.ret.io pron.3a
‘I met a pretty girl, whom my mother hadn’t told about the creek’

or

(220)getekvin ủa tseilkkon, numet ṇummava įo hảṇṇinnit ipeġupput tuġġimmun įo
gi-ti-kfin uua c-i-ilkku-n, numi-t n-ummafa ju- haan-ninnit ipi-g-upput tug-gimmun ju-
[gɛˈtɛʰkᶣɪn ˈuːɑ ˈt͡sɛɪ̯ɬːkɔn ˈnʊːmɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ hæːn̥ːɪnːɪh ɪˈpɛːɣʊʰpʊt ˈuːnɪmːʊn jɔː]
ge-tekk-vin ủa tseilkk-on num-et ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo hảṇṇ-innit i-peġuθ-ϕut tuġġ=-ϕimmun įo
1.ag.pst-meet-1˚.pst pretty girl-acc which.neg-illat poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc creek-elat kin-tell-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst.neg.aux.pst-2˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘I met a pretty girl, whom my mother hadn’t told about the creek’
(221)vůaben sisỉlat gehalin, numa ṇỉkava daġa sikkaġan įo sikiltṡat imaįikkut tuġġiddin įo
fu--api-n sisiilat gi-halin, numa n-iikafa t-ag-a sikkag-an ju- sikiLc--at imajikkut tug-git-tin ju-
[ˈɥøœ̯bɛn sɪsˈiːlat gɛˈhɑːlɪn ˈnʊːmɑ ˈn̥iːkɑːwɑ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈsɪʰkːɑːɣan jɔ sɪˈkɪɬːt͡ʃah ɪmˈɑːjɪʰkʊt ˈtʊɣːɪtːɪn jɔː]
vůab-en sis-ỉl-at ge-hal-in num-et ṇ-ỉk-a-va daġa s-ikkaġa-n įo si-kiltṡ-at im-aįeg-ϕut t-uġġ-ϕiddin įo
old.man-acc cis-know-dep 1.ag.pst-use.to-1˚.pst which.neg-acc poss.1-father.gen-poss.loc pron.3a.gen poss.3a-father-act-poss.loc foc kin-light.fire-dep kin-teach-conneg.tr 3a.ag-neg.aux-3˚.ret.hyp.pst pron.3a
‘I used to know an old man, whom my father’s father didn’t teach how to light a fire’

free positive – direct transitive object

(222)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sagvema įo, namat eġogetadnunts
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-ma ju-, namat i-g-u-gi-tat-nun-c-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmah ɛːɣɔgɛˈtaʔtnʊn̥ːt͡s]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekvot mi sagve-ma įo, nam-at eġo_ge-tann-ϕum-is
3.a.unag.pst-die-nloc.pst yesterday det man-pat pron.3a which.free-acc 1.ag.pst-expect-2˚.hyp.pst- pl.supra.pst
‘the man died yesterday, which we expected’
(223)tṇuhuttugagi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuvutsoġit mi summegi nỉ, namat pavvi įo mimittiddut
t-n-uhuttugagi tammi-t ki-mmikf nut--tufuc-u-g-it mi summi-gi nii, namat paffi ju- mimittit-tut
[ˈtn̥ʊːhʊʰtʊgɑːgɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈnʊðːʊwʊt͡sɔːɣɪt mɪ ˈsʊmːɛːgi niː ˈnɑːmat ˈpaʋːɪ jɔ mɪˈmɪʰtɪtːʊt]
t-nuh=uttug-a-gi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuv=utsoġ-it mi summi-Ø-gi nỉ, nam-at pavvi-Ø įo mi-mid-ϕiddut
3a.ag-build.one’s.nest-2˚.prs-pl.ambi big large nest.augm-acc.pl det eagle-act-pl pron.3a.pl which.free-acc few-act.pl foc 4-know-0˚.nloc.hyp.prs
‘eagles build a very large nest, which few people know about’

free positive – oblique object

(224)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sagvema įo, namat eġot ṇihuoḥḥissin
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-ma ju-, namat i-g-u-t n-ihaa-h-hissin
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmah ˈɛːɣɔt n̥ɪˈhʊu̯ʔːɪsːɪn]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekv=ot mi sagve-ma įo nam-at eġot ṇi-huoḥḥ=is-vin
3a.unag.pst-die-nloc.pst yesterday det man-pat pron.3a which.free-gen after 1.unag.pst-become.sad-loc.hyp.pst
‘the man died yesterday, after which I became sad’

free positive – direct ditransitive object

getṡadnet ahava hảṇṇi, namat ippeġuppinnamit, a ṇummava-t da

gi-c--at-ni-t ahafa haan-ni, namat ippi-g-uppinnamit, a/ n-ummafa_0 t-a

[gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛh ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈhæːn̥ːɪ ˈnɑːmat ɪʰˈpɛːɣʊʰpɪnːɑːmːɪh ɑ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑd ͜ dɑ]

ge-tṡadn-vet ahava hảṇṇ-i nam-at Ø-iϕ-peġuθ-ϕin-namit a ṇ-umma-Ø-va–t da

1.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst beautiful creek-acc which.free-acc 3a.ag.pst-kin-tell-1˚.hyp.pst-3o.io top

poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc top

‘I found a beautiful creek, which my mother told her/him (about)’

geggimiggin ƛảrget, namat ṇiṡṡittidda gimuṡƛủbmun

gi-ggimiggin Taargi-t, namat n-iccittit-ta ginucTuupmun

[gɛkːɪˈmɪkːɪn ˈt͡ɬæːrːgɛt ˈnɑːmat ˈn̥ɪʃːɪʰtɪtːɑ gɪːmʊʃˈt͡ɬuːʔpmʊn]

geg-g-i-migg-in ƛảrg-et nam-at ṇ-iṡ-ϕittit-va g-im-uṡ=lủbm-ϕun

transloc-1.ag.pst-kin-go-loc.pst seashore-illat which.free-acc poss.1-parent-illat.pl-poss.loc

1.ag.pst-kin-lie-2˚.hyp.pst

‘I went down to the seashore, which I lied about to my parents (about)’

free negative – direct transitive object

(225)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sagvema įo, numat eġotadnut nukkunts
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-ma ju-, numat i-g-u-tat-nut nukkun-c-
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnʊːmat ɛːɣɔˈtaʔtnʊt ˈnʊʰkʊn̥t͡s]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekv=ot mi sagve-ma įo num-at eġo=tann-ϕut n=uk-ϕun-s
3a.unag.pst-die-nloc.pst yesterday det man-pat pron.3a which.neg.free-acc expect-conneg.tr 1.ag.pst. neg.aux-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.supra.pst
‘the man died yesterday, which we didn’t expect’
(226)tṇuhuttagagi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuvutsoġit mi summegi nỉ, numat nanni įo mittyt muġġidduts
t-n-uhuttagagi tammi-t ki-mmikf nut--tufuc-u-g-it mi summi-gi nii, numat nanni ju- mitta-t mug-git-tuc-
[ˈtn̥ʊːhʊʰtʊgɑːgɪ ˈtamːɛt ˈkɛmːɪkʷ ˈnʊðːʊwʊt͡sɔːɣɪt mɪ ˈsʊmːɛːgi niː ˈnʊːmat ˈnanːɪ jɔ ˈmɪʰtʏt ˈmʊɣːɪtːʊt͡s]
t-nuh=uttug-a-gi tammet kemmiḳ nuḍḍuv=utsoġ-it mi summi-Ø-gi nỉ, num-at nanni-Ø įo mid-ϕyt m-uġġ-ϕiddut-s
3a.ag-build.one’s.nest-2˚.prs-pl.ambi big large nest.augm-acc.pl det eagle-act-pl pron.3a.pl which.neg.free-acc many-act.pl foc know-conneg.tr 4-neg.aux-0˚.nloc.hyp.prs-pl.supra
‘eagles build a very large nest, which many people don’t know about’

free positive – oblique object

(227)sṇỉggi gikekvot mi sagvema įo, numat eġot huoḥḥissit nutṇin
st-n-iiggi giki-kfu-t mi sagfi-ma ju-, numat i-g-u-t haa-h--hissit nut-n-in
[ˈstn̥iːkːɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt mɪ ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnʊːmah ˈɛːɣɔt ˈhʊu̯ʔːɪsːɪt ˈnʊtːn̥ɪn]
s-nỉg-vi gi=kekv=ot mi sagve-ma įo num-at eġot ṇi-huoḥḥ=is-vit n=u=tṇ-ϕin
3a.unag.pst-die-nloc.pst yesterday det man-pat pron.3a which.neg.free-gen after become.sad-conneg.itr.hyp 1.unag.pst-neg.aux-hyp.loc.pst
‘the man died yesterday, after which I did not become sad’

free negative – direct ditransitive object

(228)getṡadnet ahava hảṇṇi, numat ṇummava įo ipeġupput tuġġinnamit
gi-c--at-ni-t ahafa haan-ni, numat n-ummafa ju- ipi-g-upput tug-ginnamit
[gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛh ˈɑːhɑwɑ ˈhæːn̥ːɪ ˈnʊːmat ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ɪˈpɛːɣʊʰpʊt ˈtʊɣːɪnːɑːmɪt]
ge-tṡadn-vet iƛƛa hảṇṇ-i num-at ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo i-peġuθ-ϕat t-u=ġġ-ϕin-namit
1.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst beautiful creek-acc which.neg.free-acc poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc kin-tell-conneg.tr 3a.ag.pst- neg.aux.pst-1˚.hyp.pst-3o.io
‘I found a beautiful creek, which my mother didn’t tell him (about)’
(229)geggimiggin ƛảrget, numat ṇiṡṡittidda imuṡƛủbmut nukkun
gi-ggimiggin Taargi-t, numat n-iccittit-ta imucTuupmut nukkun
[gɛkːɪˈmɪkːɪn ˈt͡ɬæːrːgɛt ˈnʊːmat ɪːmʊʃˈt͡ɬuːʔpmʊt ˈn̥ɪʃᶣːɪʰtɪtːɑ ˈnʊʰkʊn]
geg-g-i-migg-in ƛảrg-et num-at im-uṡ=ƛủbm-vut ṇ-iṡ-ϕittit-va n=u=k-ϕun
transloc-1.ag.pst-kin-go-loc.pst seashore-illat which.neg.free-acc kin-lie-conneg.tr poss.1-parent-illat.pl-poss.loc 1.ag.pst.neg.aux-2˚.hyp.pst
‘I went down to the seashore, which I didn’t lie to my parents (about)’
§12.5.3.2.1 Recursive Asyllogous Non-restrictive Hyponomous Relative Clause

In rare cases, a subject non-restrictive relative clause can contain a restrictive relative clause, where the referent is an object. Both interrogative (ka- and kiṡ-) and relativised indirect interrogative pronouns (na- and naṡ-) may be used in recursing indirect interrogatives. This is not normally allowed in English, for example ‘this is a man who I don’t know where [he] lives’, but it can be allowed in Pine:

(230)nả sakvin mi na-t de, [nami [mittit naįįa nủka] tikṇon įo]
naa sakfin mi na_0 t-i-, nami mittit nnajja nuuka tikN-u-n ju-
[næː ˈsaʰkᶣɪn mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmɪ ˈmɪtːɪt ˈnajːɑ ˈnuːkɑ ˈtɪkːŋ̊oːn jɔː]
nả sakvin-Ø mi na–t de nam-i mid-ϕit na=įįa~na=įįa n=ủ=k-a t-ikṇ-von įo
cop.nloc.prs man-act det pron.3i.act-dem.prox which-act know-conneg.itr.hyp where.iness.rel 1.ag.neg.aux- loc.hyp.prs 3a.ag-live-nloc.hyp.dub pron.3a
‘this is a man who I don’t know where [he] lives’

This combines one non-restrictive relative clause, nami [ỏhakaįįa] tikṇỏn įo ‘who (apparently) lives somewhere’ and the restrictive relative clause mi mittit naįįa nủka na ‘somewhere I don’t know’. The restrictive relative clause is inserted where the locative of the non-restrictive clause would be. Because of the recursively relative nature of this type of construction, the determiner mi….na is normally dropped, as it is already embedded in a relative clause. This type of relative clause is sometimes called a recursive asyllogous non-restrictive hyponomous relative clause.

Other examples of such a recursively relative clause is:

(231)nả mavvolaggut mi tṡẻlġġutummen tṡarga na, [namun [mittit nỉset nủka] ṃaktunno na]
naa maffu-laggut mi c--i-i-lg-gutummi-n c--arga na, namun mittit niisi-t nuuka m-aktunnu- na
[næː ˈmaʋːɔˈlakːʊt mɪ ˈt͡ʃeːlːɣʊtʊmːɛn ˈt͡ʃarːgɑ nɑː ˈnɑːmʊn ˈmɪtːɪt ˈniːsɛt ˈnuːkɑ ˈm̥akːtʊnːɔ nɑː]
nả mavvo=laggut-Ø mi Ø-tṡẻlġġ-vutum-ven tṡarga-Ø na nam-un mid-ϕit nỉ=set n=ủ=k-a h-ṃakt=unn-o na
cop.nloc.prs meat=type-act det 3i.unag-cook-pass-3i.hyp.prs reindeer.meat-act pron.3i which-pat know- conneg.itr.hyp how.rel 1.ag.neg.aux-loc.hyp.prs 3i.unag-taste-3i.hyp.dub pron.3i
‘cooked reindeer is a type of meat, which I don’t know what [it] tastes like’
(232)nả ollut nįavvat mi na-t de, [namun [aįittit naįįet tuġġin] ṇįavvututtỏ na]
naa u-llut n--affat mi naa_0 t-i-, namun ajittit najji-t tug-gin n--affututtu-u- na
[næː ˈɔlːʊt ˈɲaʋːat mɪ nɑːd ͜ dɛ ˈnɑːmʊn ˈɑːjɪʰtɪt ˈnajːɛt ˈtʊɣːɪn ˈɲ̊aʋːʊtʊʰtoː nɑː]
nả ollut nįavvat-Ø mi na–t de nam-un aįed-ϕit na=įįet t-u=ġġ-ϕin h-nįav-ϕutuθ-ỏ na
cop.nloc.prs such tool-act det pron.3i.act dem.prox which-pat explain-conneg.itr.hyp what.rel.illat 3a.neg.aux.nloc.hyp 3i.unag-use-pass-dep 3i.dub.hyp.pst pron.3i
‘this is a tool which he didn’t explain what [it] was used for’
(233)genįavvet lỉdnoga, [namun [mittit naṡnen nukka] keytsůƛƛet a]
gi-n--affi-t liit-nu-ga, namun mittit nac-t-n-i-n nukka ki-a-c-u--TTi-t a/
[gɛˈɲaʋːɛt ˈliːʔtnɔːgɑ ˈnɑːmʊn ˈmɪʰtɪt ˈnaʃːtn̥ɛn ˈnʊʰkɑ kɛy̯ˈt͡sœt͡ɬːɛh ɑː]
ge-nįav-vet lỉdn-oga na-ma mid-ϕit kiṡk-en~naṡn-en nu=kk-va key_Ø-tsůḷḷ-ϕet na
1.ag.pst-use-3˚.pst word-acc which-pat know-conneg.itr.hyp what-acc.rel 1.ag.neg.aux.loc.hyp.prs 3i.unag-mean-1˚.hyp.dub pron.3i
‘I used a word, which I don’t know what [it] means’
§12.5.3.2.2 Genitive Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Genitive non-restrictive relative clauses are clauses whose antecedent in the main clause possesses an argument in the relative clause. Such clauses do not significantly differ from either subject or object non-restrictive relative clauses. The role of the relativised argument in the relative clause determines the clause’s structure. The sole difference is that the genitive argument is introduced by a genitive independent pronoun when bound. Such relative clauses do not differ from their corresponding subject or object non-restrictive relative clauses in any other way – simply the addition of an independent genitive pronoun. Below is a non-exhaustive list of bound genitive relative clauses – non-exhaustive as these relative clauses only differ from their non-genitive counter part by the addition of an genitive independent pronoun followed by the possessed argument.

(234)gỉli mi na boagvimu-t de tikṇen saƛƛemma įo, nami daġa spįuḷḷonttsun įo tsaƛƛoƛƛemin go
giili mi na p-u-agfimu_0 t-i- tikN-i-n saTTi-mma ju-, nami t-ag-a spjuLLu-nc-cun ju- c-aTTu-TTi-min gu-
[ˈgiːlɪ mɪ nɑː ˈbɑːkᶣːɪːmʊd ͜ dɛ ˈtɪkːŋ̊ɛn ˈsat͡ɬːɛmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈspjʊɬːɔnːt͡sʊn jɔ ˈt͡sat͡ɬːɔt͡ɬːɛːmɪn gɔː]
g-ỉl-i mi na boagv-imut–t de t-ikṇ-ven saƛƛ-ϕemma įo nami daġa s-bįuḷḷu-Ø-n-ttsun įo t-saƛƛ-oƛƛ-vemin go
1.ag-know-1˚.prs pron.3i house-iness dem.prox 3a.ag-live-nloc.hyp.prs pron.3a.act which.act pron.3a.gen poss.3a-boy-act- poss.nloc-also foc 3a.ag-fish-freq-3o.hyp.prs pron.3o
‘I know the fisherman that lives in this house, whose son also fishes’
(235)tṡilttṡas mi gikekvot maḍḍus kalttṡema įo, nama heuįo dảlįet ai ṃảvenan giktutṡas a
c--ilc--ac- mi giki-kfu-t mat--tuc- kalc--ci-ma ju-, nama hi-uju- t-aaL-i-t ai/ m-aafi-nan giktuc--as a/
[ˈt͡ʃɪlːt͡ʃas mɪ gɪˈkɛʰkʷɔt ˈmaðːʊs ˈkalːt͡ʃɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ˈhɛu̯jɔ ˈdæːʎɛt æɪ̯ m̥æːɥɛːnan ˈgɪkːtʊɪ̯t͡ʃas ɑː]
Ø-tṡiltṡ-van-s mi gi=kekvot Ø-maḍḍ-ϕun-s kalttṡe-ma įo nam-a heuį-o dảlį=et ai h-mảv-en-an Ø-gikt-ϕutṡ-as
3a.ag.pst-butcher-2˚.pst-pl.supra.pst det yesterday 3a.ag.pst-hunt-2˚.hyp.pst-pl.supra.pst elk-acc pron.3a which- acc winter-gen for pron.3i.gen poss.3i-meat-acc-poss.nloc 3a.ag-keep-2˚.hyp.fut-pl.supra pron.3i
‘they were butchering an elk they hunted yesterday, whose meat they will keep for winter’
(236)gỉli mi sṇỉgin sagvema įo, nami daġa spįuḷḷon įo misku ṇaįaƛƛungidda tavemin įo
giili mi st-n-iigin sagfi-ma ju-, nami t-ag-a spjuLLu-n ju- misku n-ajaTTuN-it-ta tafi-min ju-
[ˈgiːlɪ mɪ ˈstn̥iːgɪn ˈsakᶣːɛːmɑ jɔː ˈnɑːmɪ ˈdɑːɣɑ ˈspjʊɬːɔn jɔ ˈmɪsːkʊ ˈn̥ɑːjɑt͡ɬʷːʊŋːɪtːɑ ˈtɑːɥɛmɪn jɔː]
g-ỉl-i mi s-nỉg-in sagve-ma įo nami daġa s-bįuḷḷu-Ø-n įo misku-Ø ṇ-aįaƛ-ϕungit-va t-aθ-vemin įo
1.ag-know-1˚.prs det 3a.unag.pst-die-nloc.hyp.pst man-acc pron.3a which.act pron.3a.gen poss.3a-boy-act- poss.nloc foc one-act poss.1-student-elat.pl-poss.loc 3a.ag-cop-3o.hyp.prs pron.3a.act
‘I know the man who died, whose son a student of mine’
(237)tṡadnet stiḍnuƛin naukva mi bįuḷḷu įo, nama au saruġvemamin gaylgimyt getṡadnis go
c--at-ni-t stit--nuTin naukfa mi p-juLLu ju-, nama au/ saruhfi-nan c--at-nat gaa--lgima-t gi-c--at-nic- gu-
[ˈt͡ʃaʔtnɛt ˈstɪðːnʊːt͡ɬɪn ˈnɑu̯ʰkʷɑ mɪ ˈbjʊɬːʊ jɔː ˈnɑːmɑ ɑu̯ sɑˈrʊɣᶣːɛmɑːmɪn ˈgæy̯lːgɪːmœt gɛˈt͡ʃaʔtnɪs gɔː]
Ø-tṡadn-vet Ø-stiḍn=uƛ-in naukv-a mi bįuḷḷu-Ø įo nam-a au sa-ṛuġve-ma-mi=n gaylg-imyt ge-tṡadn-ϕin-s go
3a.ag.pst-find-3˚.pst 3i.unag.pst-injure-nloc.hyp.pst dog-acc det boy-act pron.3a which-gen pron.3o.gen poss.3a-owner-acc-poss.3o village-iness 1.ag.pst-find-1˚.hyp.pst-pl.supra.pst pron.3o
‘the boy found a an injured dog, whose owner we found in the village’
(238)geƛisƛvet mi ṇummava įo maįikkutṇut ƛỉkson a, nama ai heġon įo tsikva ṛirka nẻ na
gi-TisTfi-t mi n-ummafa ju- majikkut-n-ut Tiiksu-n a, nama ai hi-g-u-n ju- c-ikfa r-ir-ka ni-i- na
[gɛˈt͡ɬɪsːt͡ɬᶣɛt mɪ ˈn̥ʊmːɑːwɑ jɔ ˈmɑːjɪʰkʊtːn̥ʊt ˈnɑːmɑ æɪ̯ ˈhɛːɣɔn jɔ ˈt͡sɪʰkʷɑ ˈr̥iːrːkɔn ˈsaʰtɑːmɪh ɑː]
ge-ƛisƛ-vet mi ṇ-umma-Ø-va įo Ø-im-Ø-aįeg-ϕun-tṇut ƛỉks-on a nam-a ai h-eġu-Ø-n įo tsikva ṛirka-Ø nẻ na
1.ag.pst-sing-3˚.pst det poss.1-mother-act-poss.loc foc 3a.ag.pst-kin-teach-2˚.hyp.pst-1.io song-acc pron.3i which- gen pron.3i.gen poss.3i-subject-nloc.poss foc white raven-act cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i
‘I sang a song my mother taught me, whose story is about a white raven’

A genitive relative clause whose argument is a dependent copular verb (which is Pine’s equivalent of an infinitive) can be expressed by using the fourth-person genitive independent pronoun mani if the verb action itself is being relativiser (namat mani siḷḷuttat nẻ na įo ‘which its doing, which the doing of it’), or a genitive form of an independent pronoun referring to the object of the verb (namat ỉt negat nẻ na įo ‘which their seeing, which the seeing of them’), and the copular construction of the verb (which must agree in tense with the clause) followed by (n)a įo, which is declined according to its role in the phrase, acting like a noun phrase.

Such constructions are awkward in English, for example ‘I saw someone in the woods, whose happening/the happening of which didn’t startle me’ (…numat mani lakkinat nỉn ai įo ‘the happening of which…not’), but they are completely grammatical in Pine, if perhaps wordy and not especially colloquial. They can sometimes be avoided due to their relative complexity by using a non-restrictive pronoun (…namỉn geggisakṡava na ‘which I avoid’), though this erases the bound-free distinction.

As such, a relativised dependent copular verb can have as an antecedent a phrase, in which case it is free and possessed by the fourth-person eįįa, or an argument of the main clause, in which case it is bound and possessed by its nominal or pronominal antecedent by the relevent independent pronoun.

positive free polyvalent copular genitive clause

subject relative

(239)geneggan ṇįoaḥimut nỉn ỏhakakken, namat mani lakkinat nỉn ai įo ṇidinƛiġġammin
gi-ni-ggan Nu-ah-imut niin u-u-hakakki-n, namat mani lakkinat niin ai ju- n-it-in-Tig-gammin
[gɛˈnɛkːan ˈɲ̊ɑːʔɪːmʊt niːn ˈoːhɑˈkaʰkɛn ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈlaʰkɪːnat niːn æɪ̯ jɔ n̥ɪˈdɪn̥ːt͡ɬɪɣːamːɪn]
ge-neg-van ṇįoaḥ-imut nỉn ỏha=kakk-en nam-at mani lakk=in-at nỉn ai įo ṇi-dinƛiġ-vammin
1.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst woods-iness cop.nloc.hyp.pst someone-acc which.free-gen pron.4.gen happen-dep cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.pat foc 1.unag.pst-startle-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘I saw someone in the woods, the happening of which startled me’
(240)geneggan ṇįoaḥimut nỉn ỏhakakken, namat mani ipeġuttat ṇinemmodda nỉn ai įo ṇikiṡtistvammin
gi-ni-ggan Nu-ah-imut niin u-u-hakki-n, namat mani ipi-g-uttat n-ini-mmu-t-ta niin ai ju- n-ikictistfammin
[gɛˈnɛkːan ˈɲ̊ɑːʔɪːmʊt niːn ˈoːhɑˈkaʰkɛn ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ɪˈpɛːɣʊʰtat n̥ɪˈnɛmːɔtːɑ niːn æɪ̯ jɔ n̥ɪˈkɪʃːkɪsːtʷamːɪn]
ge-neg-van ṇįoaḥ-imut nỉn ỏha=kakk-en nam-at mani peġutt-at ṇi-nemm-ot-va nỉn ai įo ṇi-kiṡtist-vammin
1.ag.pst-see-2˚.pst woods-iness cop.nloc.hyp.pst someone-acc which.free-gen pron.4.gen kin-tell-dep poss.1-friend-illat- poss.loc cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.pat foc 1.unag.pst-make.nervous-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘I saw someone in the woods, the telling of which to my friend made me nervous’
(241)minni ṇįoaḥimut sakvin, namat mani negat nỉn ai įo ṇikinkeggammin
minni Nu-ah-imut sakfin, namat mani ni-gat niin ai ju- n-ikiN-ki-ggammin
[ˈmɪnːɪ ˈɲ̊ɑːʔɪːmʊt ˈsaʰkᶣɪn ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈnɛːgat niːn æɪ̯ jɔ n̥ɪˈkɪŋ̊ːkɛkːamːɪn]
Ø-min-vi ṇįoaḥ-imut sakvin-Ø nam-at mani neg-at nỉn ai įo ṇi-kinkeg-vammin
3a.ag.pst-walk-nloc.pst woods-iness man-act which.free-pat pron.4.gen see-dep cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.pat foc 1.unag.pst-shock-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘a man was walking in the woods, the seeing of which shocked me’

subject polyvalent relative

(242)voḥḥeltsġvannan ṇinaukvava mi sỉktson a, namat mani kakkat nỉn ai įo simįutṇuƛat salttsimman
fu-h-hi-Lc-hf--annan n-inaukfafa mi siikc-u-n a, namat mani kakkat niin ai ju- simjut-n-uTat salc-cimman
[ˈwɔʔːɛɬːt͡sxʷanːan n̥ɪˈnɑu̯ʰkʷɑːwɑ mɪ ˈsiːkt͡sɔn ɑ ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈkaʰkat niːn æɪ̯ jɔ sɪˈmjʊtːn̥ʊːt͡ɬah ˈsalːt͡sɪmːan]
Ø-voḥḥ=eltsġ-vannan ṇi-naukv-a-va mi sỉkts-on a, nam-at mani kakk-at nỉn ai įo si-mįutṇuƛ-at alts-an oss-imat nỉ
3a.unag.pst-scare-2˚.ret.pst poss.1-dog-acc-poss.loc det thunder-pat pron.3i which.free-pat pron.4-gen stop-dep cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.pat foc cis-calm.down-dep 3a.unag.pst-cause-1˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘the thunder was scaring my dog, the stopping of which caused him to calm down’
(243)nảt ṇikkut mitṇa nennengi nỉ, namat ỉt negat nin ai įo ṇetepṃůġtammit
naat n-ikkut mit-n-a ni-nni-N-i h-ii, namat iit ni-gat nin ai ju- n-i-ti-p-mu--hf-tammit
[næːt ˈn̥ɪʰkʊt ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈnɛnːɛŋːɪ niː ˈnɑːmah iːt ˈnɛːgat nɪːn æɪ̯ jɔ n̥ɛˈtɛpːm̥œxːtamːɪt]
nả-t ṇi=kkut mitṇa nennen-Ø-gi nỉ, nam-at ỉt neg-at nin ai įo ṇe-tepṃůġt-ammit
cop.nloc.prs.pl pron.1.com many friend-act-pl pron.3a.pl which.free-gen pron.3a.pl.acc see-dep cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i.pat foc 1.unag-make.happy-2˚.ret.hyp.prs
‘I have many friends, the seeing of which [my friends] makes me happy’
(244)gaḷủlodda mitṇa nennemain ỉ, namat mani siḷḷuttat nin ai įo gveiddit ṇetsirttukammit
gaLuulu-t-ta mit-n-a ni-nni-main ii, namat mani siLLuttat nin ai ju- gfi-it-tit n-i-c-irttukammit
[gɑˈɬːuːlɔtːɑ ˈmɪtːn̥ɑ ˈnɛnːɛːmæɪ̯n iː nɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈsɪɬːʊʰtat nɪːn æɪ̯ jɔ ˈgᶣɛɪ̯tːɪt n̥ɛˈt͡sɪrːtʊːkamːɪt]
ga-ḷủl-add-va mitṇa nennem-ain ỉ, nam-at mani siḷḷuϕ-at nin ai įo gveiddit ṇe-tsirttuk-ammit
1.ag-speak-distr-loc.prs many friend-com.pl pron.3a.pl which.free-gen pron.4.gen make-dep cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i.pat foc always 1.unag-cheer.up-2˚.ret.hyp.pst
‘I speak with many friends, the doing of which [speaking] always cheers me up’

object relative

gatsintet dalįut dvaukko, namat mani siḷḷuttat nin nannit įo geggisakṡava

gac-in-ti-t t-aL-ut tf-aukku-, namat mani siLLuttat nin nannit ju- gi-ggisakcafa

[gɑˈt͡sɪn̥ːtɛt ˈdɑːʎʊt ˈdʷɑu̯ʰkɔ ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈsɪɬːʊʰtat nɪːn ˈnanːɪt jɔ gɛkːɪˈsakːʃɑːwɑ]

ga-tsint-et dalįut dvaukk-o, nam-at mani siḷḷuϕ-at nin na=nnit įo ge-g-i-sakṡav-a

1.ag-drink-3˚.prs sometimes alcohol-acc which.free-gen pron.4.gen make-dep cop.nloc.hyp.prs pron.3i.elat foc

transl-1.ag-kin-avoid-loc.hyp.prs

‘I sometimes drink alcohol, the doing of which I avoid’

or

(245)gatsintet dalįut dvaukko, naminnat geggisakṡava miṡ
gac-in-ti-t t-aL-ut tf-aukku-, naminnat gi-ggisakcafa mic
[gɑˈt͡sɪn̥ːtɛt ˈdɑːʎʊt ˈdʷɑu̯ʰkɔ ˈnɑːmɪnːat gɛkːɪˈsakːʃɑːwɑ mɪʃ]
ga-tsint-et dalįut dvaukk-o, nam-innat geg-g-i-sakṡav-a mʼṡ
1.ag-drink-3˚.prs sometimes alcohol-acc, which.free-elat transl-1.ag-kin-avoid-loc.hyp.prs try.and
‘I sometimes drink alcohol, which I try to avoid’
(246)ganiṡkỏmma, namat mani siḷḷuttat nỉn ai įo hỉt nįukkut sisaįaƛƛat gelukvin
ganicku-u-mma, namat mani siLLuttat niin ai ju- hiit n--ukkut sisajaTTat gi-lukfin
[gɑˈnɪʃːkoːmːɑ ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈsɪɬːʊʰtat niːn æɪ̯ jɔ hiːt ˈɲʊʰkʊt sɪsˈɑːjat͡ɬːat gɛˈlʊʰkᶣɪn]
ga-niṡkỏm-va, nam-at mani siḷḷuϕ-at nỉn ai įo hỉt nįukkut sis-aįa=ƛƛ-at ge-lukk-vin
1.ag-speak.Pine-loc.prs which.free-gen pron.4.gen make-dep cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.gen foc for much cis-study-dep 1.ag.pst-must-loc.hyp.pst
‘I speak Pine, which in order to do I had to study a lot’

ganiṡkỏmma, namat ahỉn nįukkut sisaįaƛƛat gelukvin

ganicku-u-mma, namat ahiin n--ukkut sisajaTTat gi-lukfin

[gɑˈnɪʃːkoːmːɑ ˈnɑːmah ˈɑːhiːn ˈɲʊʰkʊt sɪsˈɑːjat͡ɬːat gɛˈlʊʰkᶣɪn]

ga-niṡkỏm-va nam-at ahỉn nįukkut sis-aįa=ƛƛ-at ge-lukk-vin

1.ag-speak.Pine-loc.prs which.free-gen for much cis-study-dep 1.ag.pst-must-loc.hyp.pst

or ‘I speak Pine, for which I had to study a lot’

(247)gepalġġet ḷinkka, namat mani siḷḷuttat nỉn ai įo gemiḍḍun
gi-palg-git LiN-kka, namat mani siLLuttat niin ai ju- gi-mit--tun
[gɛˈpalːɣɛt ˈɬɪŋːkɑ ˈnɑːmah ˈmɑːnɪ ˈsɪɬːʊʰtat niːn æɪ̯ jɔ gɛˈmɪðːʊn]
ge-palġ-vet ḷinkk-a nam-at mani siḷḷuϕ-at nỉn ai įo ge-miḍ-ϕun
1.ag.pst-make-3˚.pst boat-acc which.free-gen pron.4.gen do-dep cop.nloc.hyp.pst pron.3i.acc foc 1.ag.pst-like-2˚.hyp.pst
‘I made a boat, the doing of which [boat making] I liked’
(248)gapalġen ḷinkkut, namat ỉt palġat nin ai įo gamiḍḍut
gapaLhf-i-n LiN-kkut, namat iit paLhf-at nin ai ju gamit--tut
[gɑˈpaɬːxɛn ˈɬɪŋːkʊt ˈnɑːmah iːt paɬːxat nɪːn æɪ̯ jɔ gɑˈmɪðːʊt]
ga-palġ-et-an ḷinkk-ut nam-at ỉt palġ-at nin ai įo ga-miḍ-ϕut
1.ag-make-3˚.prs-pl.infr boat-acc.pl which.free-gen pron.3i.gen.pl make-dep cop.nloc.hyp pron.3i.acc foc 1.ag-like-2˚.hyp
‘I make boats, the making of which [the boats] I like’

gepalġġet tsuoġne, namat mani imalkat nỉ na įo ṇůveůt mỉgalgủts nỉ na

‘I made a knife, my giving (it to them) of which was like a privilege to me’

negative free polyvalent copular genitive clause

subject relative

geneggan mi ṇįoaḥimut nỉn ỏhakakken įo, numat mani lakkinat nỉ ai įo dinƛiġġyt nutṇimmun na

‘I saw someone in the woods, the happening of which didn’t startled me’

subject polyvalent relative

soḥḥeltsġvanan ninaukvava mi sỉskon a, numat mani aṡtat nỉn ai įo simįutṇuƛat altsut muġġun a

‘the thunder was scaring my dog, the stopping of which did not cause him to calm down’

object relative

gatsintet dalįut dvaukko, numat mani siḷḷuttat nin nannit įo gisakṡavvit nukka na

‘I sometimes drink alcohol, the doing of which I do not avoid’

ganiṡkỏmma, numat mani siḷḷuttat nỉn ai hỉt įo lukkit nįukkut sisaįaƛƛat nukkin a

‘I speak Pine, which in order to do I didn’t have to study a lot’

Rarely, it is the dependent copular verb which is negated, though this is quite a rare occurrence. Often, the negated as an impersonal monovalent verb (Ø-ϕit ủįa(n) in the present)

gatsintet dalįut dvaukko, namat mani siḷḷupput uįįen ai įo uṡkaƛủbmun a

‘I sometimes drink alcohol, which I lie about not doing’

§12.5.4 Oblique Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses

Non-restrictive Relative Clauses which require a non-sematic or oblique case, such as the locative, comitative or essive cases, are expressed by using ỉm- restrictive Relative Clauses, which are highly analogous to the restrictive mit- relative clauses. These pronouns are termed oblique non-restrictive relative pronouns. There are both positive and negative, bound singular and plural and free non-restrictive oblique relative pronouns. Such clauses have an antecedent, which is referred to using non-restrictive relative forms of thesse bound or free non-restrictive relative pronouns. Free non-restrictive pronouns are often equivalent to locative relative pronouns in English, for example namiat ‘in which’ or ‘where’. For most speakers, a prerelative antecedent is required with locations and destinations. If it is lacking in the main phrase, it will often be included in the form of a prerelative marker, which is the short form of the obviate deictic pronoun (oįį-/ov-/ủ-). Furthermore, the inclusion of an obviate location in the main clause may trigger the appearance of the translocative initial gi-. It is very common to include a prerelative antecedent, for example ollut ‘such a’ even if there is already an antecedent in the main clause: ollut halda, nammut… ‘(such) a place, where’.

casebound singularbound pluralfreeprerelative antecedent
positivenegativepositivenegativepositivenegative
inessivenamia
nammut
numia
nummut
namisitnumisitnamiat
nammudat
numiat
nummudat
oįįa
illativenametnumetnamuttutnumuttutnamedatnumedatoįįot
elativenamỉn
naminnit
numỉn
numinnit
namingitnumingitnamỉnatnumỉnatoįįủn
comitativenakkut
namikkut
nukkut
numikkut
nameinnumeinnakkudat
namikkudat
nukkudat
numikkudat
okkit
essivenamảtsnumoatsnamỉtsetnumỉtsetnamảtsatnumoatsatủts (ollut)

inessive

gikṇa mi ṇikkava įo palġġun boagvimut na, nammudat mitṇa luṡkot tsallagi nỉ nẻs

‘I live in the house my father built, where there are many old things’

tsaƛƛaƛƛat ṡimmit, nummut uġun nįukku soaƛƛi nuįįe na

‘they fish in a lake, where there is not a lot of fish’

ginįaṡkuttugat oįįa, nammut ultte

‘they hide (there) where it is dark’

also tṇįaṡkuttugat, nammut ultte

‘they hide (there) where it is dark’

gamma ollut tảbmimyt, nummut sisỉddat iskit nủka na

‘I am in (such) situation, where I cannot win’

geggitemma gaylginnit, nummut nįiƛit siḷḷupput nukkisikki na

‘I come from a village, where we do not do such things’

illative

nảt mi ma tṡůġtůgi, namedat sihalisƛuttat milukven

‘mosquitos are something you must get used to’

nảt mi ma tṡůġtůgi, numedat sihalisƛuttat iskit nủka

‘mosquitos are something I cannot get used to’

spaitṇi mi hirttsema įo, namedat gvaingi tseṃairritṡit

‘the thief fell down, which we all laughed at’

tsetṡadnets mi luṡkot mỉḍnu, namet hevvi dảlįet gettsidattitṡit a

‘we found an old cabin, where we stopped for the night’

elative

nả skekvot mi įu sittsibidna keggi, naminnit nįottset ỉlgateṃṃisinga na

‘today is the day when you come, which I have looked forward to for a long time’

nả mi aįįelkki mana mi na-t de, numỉnat gattse ḷủllit nủtsatṡit

‘this is something important, about which we do not talk enough’

gasaƛƛaƛƛon mitṇa laggit sauƛut ỉ gakki, namingit baḷḷummas, a ṇiṡinnengen da

‘we fish many types of fish, of which our lakes are full’

comitative

nả miįįỉnit geggisaƛƛaƛƛuṡ ḷinkkas, nakkut mitṇa goaksut ỉ gasiḷḷussinga na

‘this is the boat I will fish from, which I have been working on for many months’

sikeskat iskat nukka, nakkudat ṃỉktit ṇevassa

‘I cannot read, which I am deeply ashamed of’

nảt lillovagi mi nįiįįa obbogi, numein mitṇa tyvyt ỉ dảlįỉn ḷủllit nủkunga nỉ

‘the old men over there are my uncles, with whom I have not spoken in years’

essive

ḥaḷḷat kỉlmindat bakvet nin ai įo nủįa na, namảtsat tsabįellut

‘returning home is not what you believe it to be’

nả tannumet niṡki nipṃova, namảtsat sisaḷḷat gamiḍḍattṡin

‘my wife is a patient person, which I would also like to become’

§12.5.4.1 Non-Restrictive Relative Adverbs & Subordinating Adverbs

Non-restrictive relative adverbs are adverbial forms of the relative pronouns (nam- or nah-) which have various functions in Pine. Primarily, they act as non-restrictive relativisers of -set adverbs, adverbs of degree, manner, time, reason, goal, cause and type. Some relative adverbs also function as subordinating adverbs when the main clause contains a cataphoric reference in the form of a prerelative adverb.

non-restrictive relative adverb

ganiṡkỏmma, nahỉt nįukku sisaįaƛƛat gelukkin

‘I speak Pine, for which I had to study a lot’

subordinating adverb

ohỉt gelukvan aįaƛƛat nįukka mikkin, nahỉt ganiṡkỏmissun

‘I had to study a lot in order to speak Pine’

§12.5.4.1.1 Non-Restrictive Relative Adverbs

Non-restrictive relative adverbs are special adverbial forms of the non-restrictive relative pronoun ỉm-, whose function is to relativise adverbs or adverbial phrases of some type. There are 10 such adverbs: -set adverbs (namiset~nasset), adverbs of degree (nammi), comparative adverbs of degree (nammut~namut), adverbs of manner (nallat), adverbs of duration (nallįet, naddan) or time (naįįot), adverbs of reason (namỉn), goal (nahỉt), cause (nahỉn) and type (nallut). Adverbs of reason and cause are similar enough in meaning that they can be synonymous in most cases, and adverbial (namiset) and manner (nallat) are also quite similar in meaning and function, with only a slight nuance – namiset usually refers to adverbs in -set or -it/-ut/-yt (for example lỏset ‘slowly’) while nallat is more general, or it can refer to adverbs of manner in laggi (ai laggi ‘like this’).

functionnon-restrictive relative
positivenegative
adverbialnamiset~nasset
‘in/by/with which, how’
numiset~nusset
degreenammi
‘how (much)’
nammut~namut
‘how (much more)’
nummi
nummut~numut
mannernallat
‘in which way, how’
nullat
duration, timenallįet, naddan
‘during which, while which’
naįįot, naįįu
‘when, at which point’
nullįet, nuddan
nuįįot, nuįįu
reasonnamỉn
‘why, due to which, so’
numỉn
goalnahỉt
‘for which’
nuhỉt
causenahỉn
‘due to which, because of which’
nuhỉn
typenallut
‘the kind which’
nullut
§12.5.4.1.2 Subordinating Adverbs

Subordinating adverbs are adverbs or adverbial constructions that introduce a dependent clause that is subordinated to the clause to which it is connected. In the context of non-restrictive relative adverbs, these subordinating adverbs are made up of a cataphoric referent in the independent clause in the form of a prerelative adverb, whose function is to signal that an explanation or elaboration on the independent clause will follow. The independent pronoun generally correspond in form to the non-restrictive relative adverb which it announces. Not everyone of the ten non-restrictive relative adverbs have corresponding subordinating adverbial functions, in which case the presence of the prerelative pronoun may be facultative or may otherwise modify the meaning of the sentence.

functionnon-restrictive relativesubordinating adverbs
positive
adverbialnamiset, nasset
‘in/by/with which, how’
oset~osset…, namiset~nasset…
‘like, how’
degreenammi
‘how (much), so (much that)’
nammut~namut
‘how (much more), so (much more that)’
ommi…, nammi…
‘how/as (much)’
ommut~omut…nammut~namut
‘how (much more)’
mannernallat
‘in which way, how’
ollat…, nallat…
‘like, how’
duration, timenallįet, nadan
‘during which, while which’
naįįot, naįįu
‘when, at which point’
ollįet~oddan…, nallįet~naddan…
‘while’
oįįu~oįįot…, naįįot~naįįu…
‘(at such a time) when’
reasonnamỉn
‘why, due to which, so’
omỉn…, namỉn…
‘because’
goalnahỉt
‘for which’
ohỉt…, nahỉt…
‘in order to, to’
causenahỉn
‘due to which, because of which’
ohỉn…, nahỉn…
‘because, due to
typenallut
‘the kind which’
ollut…, nallut
‘such a…that…’
§12.5.4.1.3 Adverbial: namiset

The non-restrictive relative adverb namiset or nasset is used to relativise a manner or an adverb in -set, -it/-ut/-yt. It is essentially synonymous with nallat, and can often be found relativizing the word lakka ‘way’. When the cataphoric referent is a noun, pronoun or adjective (most commonly lakka ‘way’), the relative clause is considered bound and therefore ends with an independent pronoun, although this is optional in non-formal registers. It has a negative form in numiset or nusset. There exists alternative forms in naset, nanttset and napset (and corresponding negative forms in nuset, nunttset and nupset).

In the case of the adverb namiset, the difference between its true non-restrictive relative function and subordinating adverbial function is not morphosyntactically distinct, except when namiset truly has no antecedent, making it a free non-restrictive relative adverb.

bound relative and/or subordinating adverb

(oset)…, namiset…

‘by which, how, the way’

mi lakka na, namiset tsatủla

‘the way (by which) you think’

uġun voaḥḥa lakka na nuįįi, namiset seuvu hillỉkkun

‘there was no way by which they could cross the river’

gitṇa (laggi~oset)…, namiset…

‘the same way’

gitṇa laggi siḷḷupput nuttset, namiset gimaįikkisipput~tsimaįikkiddun

‘you didn’t do it the same way I taught you’

unbound relative adverb

…, namiset

‘by which, such that’

ṃiġtỏmmi, namiset gemittin, įỏ sṇuonnukkun

‘s/he spoke loudly, by which I knew that s/he was angry’

§12.5.4.1.4 Degree: nammi & nam(m)ut

The non-restrictive relative adverb nammi relativises a degree. This is difficult to translate directly into English, but it may be useful to think of nammi as meaning ‘(the) how (much) of which’. The line between the relative adverb and subordinating adverb function of nammi is blurry when one tries to understand it from the perspective of an English speaker. Generally, nammi is commonly found with the prerelative adverb ommi. The construction ommi…nammi can be translated as ‘like’, or when gitṇa ommi is found in the independent clause, nammi means ‘as’, equating the degree between the main clause and the relative clause.

The subordinating adverb ommi…, nammi.. is similar in meaning to ommi…va ‘as/so…as’ but introduces a verb instead of a noun, as is the case with ommi…va. It is also possible to have no real phrase following nammi and instead have a noun or noun phrase as with ommi…va. The prerelative adverb ommi is very commonly found with nammi, which may be understood to act as the subordinating adverb ‘how (much)’ or ‘as, like’

The adverbs nammi and nammut~namut cannot readily be said to be either relative or subordinating adverbs, as they may function as either or both.

(ommi)…, nammi

‘how (much, long), like’

nannit suppuƛƛi, nammi nįukkut sellanumin

‘s/he was surprised by how much s/he2 had grown’

(ommi) gaįįeddingi, nammi tammikkimi

‘they showed us how big it was’

(ommi) migvan nįukka, nummi mikvyt ai giḷḷu voaḥḥįu tuġġuttṡin

‘the boy ate like he had never eaten before’

ommi gekoįįoddet ṇinįayrƛƛenna, nammi tsỉn ṇikkava įo iskin

‘I sharpened my axe, like only my father could do’

gitṇoset~gitṇa ommi~gitṇomi…, nammi…

‘(as much)…as’

gitṇoset (nįukkut) simigvat tsiskva, nammi tsamiha

‘you can eat (as much) as you want’

gitṇomi hįaƛƛet givalppa, nammi tsiska

‘swim out as far as you can’

gitṇa ommi tammeggi, nammi ỉmiskaippin

‘it was as big as it was impressive’

gitṇomi ṃiġtvi sỉktson, nammi ỏhaįu gasiggingu

‘the thunder was as loud as I’ve ever heard’

lidnit, įỏ gitṇa ommi tammikkun mi giṡkin įo, nammi biktun nun

‘they said that the salmon was as big as a sturgeon (is)’

omut… [adv.comp], namut…[adv.comp]

‘the (more)…, (the more)…’

omut nįokkoset gatủlulġet, namut nittut gaginda

‘the longer I think about it, the less I understand’

(omut)…, namut

‘how much (more)’

kintṡimmi nannet ai, namut mi ỉlkon a įo temat kįaskut ỉlỏḍmin

‘s/he realised/was struck by how much faster the trip went than s/he had expected’

omut gimaįeddannis, namut ittut siƛisƛat iskin

‘s/he showed us how much better s/he could sing’

omut ṇikapṡassit, namut įoa nįustut sigindat iskin

‘I’m surprised by how much more s/he can understand now’

§12.5.4.1.5 Manner: nallat

The relative pronoun nallat ‘like which, how’ (or nallaggi, nallak, nalkki) and its negative form nullat (also nullaggi, nullak, nulkki) have the corresponding prerelative form ollat and indicate in what manner or way something is done. It is similar in meaning and function to the adverbial namiset and its corresponding interrogative kỉset ‘how’, which assumes an answer involving an adverb (deset ‘this way’, lỏset ‘slowly’), but corresponds to the interrogative kiṡƛa ‘how, like what, in what way’, which assumes an answer involving some sort of manner adverb (bįůeƛƛi laggi ‘like a boy’, sỉttṡon laggi ‘by her-/himself’, raugvot ‘hard’). As it refers to an adverbial phrase, there is no object referent. The antecedent pronoun ollat can be omitted in most cases as the relative pronoun nallat generally refers to the entire main clause (and as such is a free relative pronoun), but it must be included for example if it has some sort of attributive such as gitṇa ollat….nallat ‘the same way as’. As with ommi…, nammi, the relative clause can be reduced to a simple noun phrase, which makes ollat…, nallat synonymous with ollat va ‘like’, although it is common to drop the dependent verb and only keep the copula, similar to how English allows ‘like he does’.

The adverb nallat can function both as a subordinating adverb or a non-restrictive relative adverb, although it can be difficult to assess the true syntactic function of the adverb as the distinction between subordinating and non-restrictive relative adverbial function is not always clear-cut.

subordinating adverb

(ollat)…, nallat…

‘the way, how, like’

na tsurtvinin ke sauƛut, nallat tsimaįikkiddun~gimaįikkisipput?

‘did you gut the fish the way I taught you?’

ollat gipeġummannin, nallat ṛvůekki mipalġġin

ollat gipeġummannin, nallat ṛvůekki palġat nissun

‘he told me how to build a fire’

(ollat) lủbmut Niṡkuƛit tủįat, nallat mi Niṡkuvullikki nỉ įo ai ƛủbmus

‘they don’t speak Pine like/how Pine people do’

ollat minan, nallat summaġan įo tṃinnemin

‘s/he walks like her/his mother’

ollat ilgavas, nallat piṡvi

‘move like a lynx (does)’

gitṇa ollat…, nallat…

‘like, the same (way) as’

gitṇa ollat tṡiltṡan sṃảvet mi kuokkullikki, nallat mi peutṡet nỉt tsaṡiltṡisitṡis

‘foreigners butcher their meat the same way we butcher ours’

non-restrictive relative adverb

…, nallat…

‘by which, like which, in which way, whereby, how’

gipeġummannin laggỉn, nallat ṛvůekki palġat nussin

‘he told me of way how to build a fire’

genegget mi laggi, nallat mi kuokkullikki nỉ įo sṃảvet tṡilttṡuts

‘I saw how the way foreigners butcher their meat’

§12.5.4.1.6 Duration & Time: nallįet, naddan~naddal, naįįot~naįįu

The relative adverbs nallįet or naddan~naddal ‘for/during/while/when which’ or ‘at which time’ and its negative counterpart nullįet or nuddan~nuddal have the corresponding prerelative form ollįet~oddan~oddal and indicate a duration over, or time at which something occurs. The relative pronoun nallįet, naddan~naddal is analogous to the interrogative kallįet, kaddan~kaddal ‘when, during which time, at what point’, which assumes an answer involving some sort of time (mįa keukvon a ‘for a day’) while kottset ‘for how long, how long’ corresponds to nįottset ‘for, X long’. As it refers to an adverbial phrase, there is no object referent. Note that gitṇa ollįet~oddan~oddal exists and means ‘as (of time)’, ‘all the while’, ‘simultaneously with’ or ‘at the same time as’.

Closely related is the relative pronoun naįįot or naįįu ‘when, at a time when’ and its negative form nuįįot~nuįįu, which have the corresponding prerelative form oįįot or oįįu, which indicate a time when rather than a time during, but both nallįet~naddan~naddal and naįįot are often used interchangeably. There are also relative forms in naįįogỉdat (neg. nuįįogỉdat) ‘until a time when’ and naįįogỉnat (neg. nuįįogỉnat) ‘since a time when’. These are usually used with the same prerelative as naįįot, or without any prerelative.

The distinction between non-restrictive relative adverbial function and subordinating adverbial function is not clear in the case of nallįet~naddan~naddal and naįįot, but the presence of a prerelative antecedent tends to result in a subordinating adverbial reading, such as ‘when, while, as’, while the non-restrictive relative reading of ‘during which, at which point’ is often more applicable in the absence of ollįet~oddan~oddal/oįįot~oįįu or any other cataphoric referent.

subordinating adverb

(ollįet~oddan~oddal)…, nallįet~naddan~naddal…

‘while, during, as, when’

oddan sippinaġvin a gaulppomo-t de, naddan mi tsảlyt ỉ įo kįasƛet haḷḷiḷḷis

‘you were born into this world when things were changing quickly’

gitṇa ollįet~oddan~oddal…, nallįet~naddan~naddal

‘as, at the same time as’

gitṇa ollįet gasaġġa, naddal mi kuokkit ỉ įo sƛỏmmas

‘as I wake, the others sleep’

(oįįu~oįįot)…, naįįu~naįįot

‘(at which at time) when’

oįįu gimindin, naįįot įaltsa tsakkin

‘I came when you were away’

(oįįu~oįįot)…, naįįogỉnat

‘(ever) since’

(oįįu) gamihinget, naįįogỉnat bỉṡkỉts gakkin

‘I’ve liked it ever since I was a child’

(oįįu~oįįot)…, naįįogỉdat

‘until (such a time when)’

oįįogỉt siskiṡivvuṡ, naįįogỉdat ainyƛƛůṡ

‘I will stay here until it clears up’

non-restrictive relative adverb

…, nallįet~naddan~naddal…

‘during which, then’

gassin deįįa tġeůts keukvon ỉ dảlįen, nallįet gemaḍḍin

‘I was here for three days, during which I hunted’

…, naįįot…

‘at which point/time, then, (which is) when’

hallungummi, naįįot nįittsun edda oallįủn nỉn

‘s/he got lost, at which point it was already too late’

§12.5.4.1.7 Reason: namỉn

The relative adverb namỉn ‘why, due to, for which’ or ‘about which’ and its negative form numỉn have a corresponding antecedent in omỉn which indicate a reason for an action or a subject of an action. The form namỉn is actually the elative form of the relative pronoun. The relative pronoun namỉn is analogous to the interrogative pronoun kamỉn ‘why’.

The adverbial construction omỉn…, namỉn… functions as a subordinating adverb ‘because’, where omỉn signals that the dependent clause will explain the independent clause. Without any cataphoric referent, …, namỉn… functions as a non-restrictive relative adverb meaning ‘because of/due to which, (which is) why’. In other words, without any prerelative antecedent, namỉn emphasises the effect, while ỏmỉn…, namỉn emphasise the cause-and-effect relationship between the main clause and subordinated clause.

subordinating adverb

omỉn…, namin…

‘because’

omỉn ṇiskaitṇin, namỉn ṛỉlelut garuktisitan

‘I screamed because I hate spiders’

omỉn gelullinen, namỉn siminttis

‘we left because they came’

gitṇa omỉn…, namin…

‘for the same reason as’

non-restrictive relative adverb

…, namỉn…

‘because of which, due to which, (which is/the reason) why, to, so, therefore’

garuġten ṛỉlelut, namỉn geskaitṇin

‘I hate spiders, which is why I screamed’

uġun selyttsit nủįa voaḥḥa altsin a, namỉn teṡkvon a

‘the bride has no reason to (lit. due to which she would) refuse’

nả altsints mi na-t de, numỉn dakkut ḷủllit nủka na

‘this is the reason why I don’t speak to her/him’

§12.5.4.1.8 Goal: nahỉt

The relative pronoun nahỉt ‘for which’ and its negative form nuhỉt have a corresponding antecedent in ohỉt which indicate a goal, and are derived from the postposition (a)hỉt ‘for’. It is analogous to the interrogative pronoun kahỉt ‘what for’.

When only the adverb nahỉt is found, without any clear cataphoric referent, it functions as a non-restrictive relative adverb meaning ‘for which, in order for which, to’, while the combination or the antecedent ohỉt and nahỉt functions as a subordinating adverb, with an independent clause containing an explanation and a dependent clause detailing the goal and therefore corresponds to ‘to, in order to, for’.

subordinating adverb

ohỉt…, nahỉt

‘to, in order to, for’

ohỉt gelukvan aįaƛƛat nįukka mikkin, nahỉt geniṡkỏmissun

‘I had to study a lot to speak Pine’

ohỉt tsakiƛisaƛƛotṡiṡ, nahỉt heyt ṛvůekki tsapalġġisitṡit

‘we will gather wood to make a fire tonight’

gitṇa ohỉt gipeġummepput, nahỉt gipeġuppisinnin

‘I told you for the same (reason/goal) as I told them’

non-restrictive relative adverb

…, nahỉt

‘for which, in order for which, to, so, therefore’

ganiṡkỏmma, nahỉt nįukka sisaįaƛƛat gelukkin

‘I speak Pine, for which I had to study a lot’

haḷḷi ṇůġeůn ellamiddỉts, nahỉt ṇįoaḥimut eḷḷit skednaskat nỉn nammut genaƛƛin

‘I became a botanist, for which I spent a lot of time in the woods looking at plants’

tsapalġetṡis heyt ṛvůekki, nahỉt tsakỉƛisaƛƛuṡotṡit

‘we are making a fire tonight, so we will gather wood’

tsƛukva kekvot kỉƛisaƛƛat mittsin, nuhỉt ankkut nuttsiddutṡ

‘you must gather wood today, for which I will not help you’

§12.5.4.1.9 Cause: nahỉn

The relative pronoun of cause nahỉn and its negative form ủhỉn have a corresponding antecedent in ohỉn which indicate a cause, and are derived from the postposition (a)hỉn ‘due to’. It is analogous to the interrogative pronoun kahỉn ‘why, because of what, due to what’.

When only the adverb nahỉn is found, without any clear cataphoric referent, it functions as a non-restrictive relative adverb meaning ‘because of which, due to which’, while the combination or the antecedent ohỉt and nahỉt functions as a subordinating adverb, with an independent clause containing an explanation and a dependent clause detailing the goal and therefore corresponds to ‘to, in order to, for’.

subordinating adverb

ohỉn…, nahỉn…‘because, due to, why’

ohỉn bakvet siṡivvat galukva įoa, nahỉn ai įu va gemaḍḍin tavamunnit ṇistiḍnuƛƛin

‘I now have to stay home because I injured my foot hunting’

ohỉn kủkin miḍḍyt, nahỉn guṡƛimminin

‘I do not like them because they insulted me’

minat nỉn nakkut ohỉn seuvu sihillỉgat tsiskinetṡin, nahỉn hysƛin ai

‘we could cross the river by walking because it froze’

ohỉn iskat sikeumindat nủkin, nahỉn ṇiṇįeƛƛin

‘I couldn’t come along because I was sick’

non-restrictive relative adverb

…, nahỉn…‘due to which, because of which, why, therefore’

ṇiṇįeḷḷin, nahỉn sikeumindat iskit nukkin

‘I was sick, because of which I couldn’t come along’

§12.5.4.1.10 Type: nallut

The non-restrictive pronoun of type nallut (or naḷḷut), the negative form nullut (or nuḷḷut) and the prerelative antecedent ollut (or oḷḷut) correspond to the interrogative pronoun kiṡƛat ‘what type, what kind’. It is not an adverb, but is included here because it is otherwise unique in form and function. The prerelative antecedent form ollut can function as both an attributive adjective, a predicative adjectival verb (neither naḷḷ- not oḷḷ- are affected by apophony in the past) or an adverb, for example:

ollut ỉ sakvin įo, nullut nįukkut ḷủllit tuġġinadverb
ỉ ollut sakvin įo, nullat nįukkut ḷủllit tuġġinadjective

‘he was a man that didn’t speak much’

oḷḷi mi sakvin, nullut nįukkut ḷủllit tuġġin įoadjectival verb

‘the man was not the type to speak much’

The pronoun ỉllut only functions as a non-restrictive relative pronoun, regardless of the presence of absence of ollut. The relative pronoun itself, nallut, is declined in all cases and can have any function in the phrase, much like the relative pronoun nami. The adjectival verb can also be relativised in the dependent form as ỉḷḷ·at, but the copula can also be used with nallut behaving more like an adverb.

casesingularplural
positivenegativepositivenegative
asematicnallutnullutnallukkinullukki
sematicnaƛonnuƛonnaƛitnuƛit
inessivenaƛumit
naƛummit
nallummit
nuƛumit
nuƛummit
nullummit
naƛusutnuƛusut
illativenaƛotnuƛotnaƛiditnuƛidit
elativenaƛủnnuƛủnnaƛungitnuƛungit
comitativenaƛugit
naƛukkit
nalluttit
nuƛugit
nuƛukkit
nulluttit
naƛeinnuƛein
essivenallủtsnullủtsnallủtsotnullủtsot

(ollut)…, nallut…

‘(such a type) that’

nả mi ollut sakvin, nullut nįukkut ḷủllit tuįįen įo

‘he is the type of man who does not speak a lot’

genegget ollut sauƛen, nuƛon voaḥḥįu nekkyt nukkisin~nukkun įo

‘I saw a type of fish I’ve never seen before’

nỉ ollut sakvin, nalluttit gvaiddit įo issigenttitan, a ṇikkava-t da

‘my father was the type of man with whom everyone got along’

ollu-t tġva nả ḷủlut a Niṡƛikketṡin da, nuƛon mįa keukvon a dallįein aiṡkyt nuttsuttṡut~nuttsuttṡisit

‘Pine is the kind of language you couldn’t learn in a day’

(ollut)…, naḷḷat…

‘(such a type) that…is, like’

gỉlin ollut sagvemut, naḷḷat tsakka

‘I know men like you (lit. I know the man of the type that you are)’

oḷḷ-…, nallut…

‘be such (a type) that’

ḥoḷḷoat mi dissit vaihegi, naƛit skỉkut haḷḷiḷḷas ỉ

‘the weather around here is such that it changes very quickly’

§12.5.4.1.11 Overview of Non-Restrictive Relative & Subordinating Adverbs

The table below summarises the way non-restrictive relative adverbial and subordinating adverbial functions of non-restrictive adverbs differ in meaning through examples:

non-restrictive adverb
non-restrictive relative adverbsubordinating adverb
adverbialmi laggi (na), namiset tsatủla (na)
‘the way (by which) you think’
oset gamiḍḍa, namiset tsatủla
‘I like how you think’
degreeommi gimaįedipput, nammi nįukkut pisulkkiddut
‘I showed you how much I love you’
mannernả lakka mi na-t de, nallat galidnisit (na)
‘this is the way I say it’
ollat nả mi na-t de, nallat galidnisit
‘this is how I say it’
duration
time
miṡivvi kủt keukvut ỉ, nallįet įaltsa gakkin (ỉ)
‘s/he stayed her two days, during which I was away’
oįįu miṡivvi, naddan įaltsa gakkin
‘s/he stayed here while I was away’
reasonaįeddan mi alttsema, numỉn uġun bakven nukkin na
‘s/he explained the reason why s/he wasn’t home’
omỉn aįeddi, numỉn uġun bakven nukkin
‘s/he explained why s/he wasn’t home’
goalnả mi keggi na mi na-t de, nahỉt gaṡaįįunga (na)
‘this is the day, which I have been preparing for’
nįukka sisaįaƛƛat ohỉt gelukvan, nahỉt ganiṡkỏmissun
‘I had to study a lot to speak Pine’
causegeneggin mi nemma, nahỉn sittsisastuttukkin įo
‘I saw the friend, because of whom you moved here’
skeumindat iskyt ohỉn kủkin, nahỉn ṇiṇįeƛƛin
‘I couldn’t come along because I was sick’
typeollu-t tġva nả ḷủlut a Niṡƛikketṡin da, nuƛon mįa keukvon a dallįein aiṡkyt nuttsuttṡisit
‘Pine is the kind of language you couldn’t learn in a day’
§12.5.4.2 Conjunctive & Postpositional Forms

The non-restrictive relative pronoun in na- can be found with conjunctions and postpositions, which sometimes fuse together. For example, the postposition and conjunction teni ‘despite’ has fused with the relative pronoun to form natteni ‘despite which’.

fusional forms

Non-restrictive relative pronouns can be found with conjunctions and adpositions. In certain cases, the relative pronoun and the conjunction or postposition have fused to form a single word. Many conjunctions have a positive and negative form, for example giḷḷu ‘before’ and guḷḷu ‘before not’. This is not true of fusional conjunctive forms of the non-restrictive relative pronouns, which have a positive form in na- and a negative form in nu-. The argument of the relative clause is less salient in fusional forms, and is most commonly understood to be free in nature, not referring to a specific participant in the main clause but referring to the main clause as a whole. For that reason, most speakers omit the independent pronoun after fusional forms of non-restrictive relative pronouns. For that reason, such clauses may be subject-headed even though the relative pronoun does not refer to the head. This is called a disjunctive subject head, and results in subjects most commonly being found clause finally instead of moved clause-initially as in non-subject headed relative clauses. Subjects can still be moved to the start of the relative clause but this is not common.

temporal

non-fusionalfusional
nama giḷḷunaggiḷḷu, naggil‘before which’
nama mahunammahu‘after which’
nama ekkot~eġotnakkot~nameġot‘after which, following which, then’
nama dảlįennaddảlįen, naddalįen, naddal‘during which’
nama agỉnnaggỉn‘since which’
nama agỉtnaggỉt‘until which’
nama keggetnakkegget, nakken‘until which’

naġvi kvayvyt ṇimỉnaġvina, nuggiḷḷu mittyt mi eġogetadnus naṡnen ai nukkus

‘my first born was born in the summer, before which we did not know what to expect’

geṡilttṡin hįảlgvi, nameġot mi ỉskegi nỉ įo tṡảrkken sitṡoaƛṇuƛat nįallus

‘we butchered the reindeer, after which the women hung the meat to dry’

siskimindvuṡ oallįut, naggỉt bakvet miṡivat tsƛukka

‘I will come home late, until which you must stay home’

causal

non-fusionalfusional
nama maḍḍỉnnammaḍḍỉn‘following which, because of which’
nama tekvennattekven, nattek, nattet‘as a consequence of which, therefore’
nama peġġỉnnappeġġỉn‘therefore, because of which’
nama ƛikkỉnnaƛƛikkỉn, naƛƛik, naƛƛit‘therefore, because of which’
nama hillỉnnahhillỉn, nallỉn‘due to which’

gaįubbondet kin skeůltton, nammaḍḍỉn pỉṛṛa nįiddan geggiḷįauvvisits

‘we first soak the hide, after which we then slip the flesh off’

uṡṡatsilủbmat, nuttek pỉ siṡemat innuk iskyt nủka

‘you lied to me, therefore I can’t believe you anymore’

ṇistiḍnuƛin, nallỉn galemppaiskimiġġůma

‘I injured myself, due to which I cannot work’

circumstantial

non-fusionalfusional
nama monetnammonet, nammot‘in which way, such that’

lỏset taįeddan, nammo(ne)t ḥaivvin na

‘s/he explained slowly, such that it was clear’

goal, result, manner

non-fusionalfusional
nama ƛikvennaƛƛikven, naƛƛik, naƛƛit‘for which, in order for which’
nama tsabbennattsabben‘for which, in the hopes of which’
nama nįavvetnannįavvet‘for which, by which, through which’
nama disƛỉnnaddisƛỉn, naddis‘as a result of which’

tsindan mįihỉgat ḷinkka ginin a mi ḷinkkapalġġi įo, naƛƛik simįihamat tsƛukkitṡit

‘the boat builder needs to tar the boat, for which we must make tar’

nả na hindat uṃṃet bakvet nẻ na, nattsabben gamiaġlalka

‘finally returning home is that, in the hopes of which I keep struggling’

(or: ‘the hope of finally returning home is what I keep struggling for‘)

nả (go) mi miaġlat nin ai moni, nannįavvet sisỉtsillįat naiṡkven

‘the path of struggling is that, by which one learns to survive’

(or: ‘one learns to survive through struggling’)

miaġli ỉllįummut ṇiṡṡavaki, naddis sisỉtsillįat aiṡkis

‘my parents struggled in life, as a result of which they learned to survive’

concessive

non-fusionalfusional
nama midỉnnammidỉn‘knowing which’
nama teninatteni‘despite which’
nama tsallỉnnattsallỉn, nattsal‘depending on which, whichever’
nama laknỉnnallaknỉn‘depending on which, whichever’

gipaitṇi mi įusƛin seuvot a sṇaugvan, nammidỉn ai sisangat aniġġin

‘her/his dog fell in the frozen river, knowing which s/he ran to help him’

miminttit speƛƛutummit tủįisủn a, natteni mi koḍmegi nỉ įo siminttis

‘they were told not to come here, despite which the guests still came’

iįįu gi įaġa siġġit skekvot ukkusin, nattsallỉn tsƛulluṡotṡit

‘hopefully it will not rain tomorrow, depending on which we will leave’

other postpositions

A number of postpositions can appear in fusional relative forms. In many cases, the antecedent is clear and the relative clause is understood to be bound, which triggers the use of an independent pronoun, although this is less common with determiner clauses or pronouns, such as mi ma ‘something’.

non-fusionalfusional
nakkut uġġitnammuġġit, nakkuġġit‘without which’
nama tekketnattekket‘regarding/towards which’
nama sṇengủnannannengủnan‘on behalf of whom (singular)’
nama sṇengủnatnannengủnat‘on behalf of whom (plural)’
nama dallįe(i)nnaddallįe(i)n‘in which time’
numa dảlįetnuddảlįet, nuddalįet, nuddal‘for which (neg) time’
nama dảlįỉnnaddảlįỉn, naddalįỉn, naddal‘since which, from which, during time’
namỉn aukkanamỉnokka, namenokka ‘apart/except from which’
nama nuḳnannuḳ‘regarding which’
nama nanna, -et, -ỉnnannanna, -et, -ỉn‘inside which’
nama keįįa, -et, -ỉnnakkeįįa, -et, -ỉn‘along which’

nả mi ma tsintat tsảƛen nẻ na, nukkuġġit sisillįat iskit nủtsatṡit

‘drinking water is something, without which we cannot live’

nả mi ma gimiggat heyt aṡkvet nẻ na, nannuḳ bỉttṡisit mitṇa sakṡohįiḷḷogi nỉ nẻs

‘going outside at night is something regarding which we have many cautionary tales’

tsasungitagi kekvot mi nįagis ỉt tsattṡin, nannengủnat a bįảren de tsalkkisitṡis ỉ

‘today we honor the dead, on behalf of whom we make this offering’

ṡivvi ṇennủn mįa ůnnįen a mi koḍmi įo, naddal gvai ṇimỉkvogat simigvat pattin

‘the guest was with us for one evening, during which time s/he managed to eat all our food’

nả mi eįįogỉt naƛƛut dallįi na mi na-t de, nuddal kvoavvot siġġit nuįįunge

‘this is now the longest time period, for which it hasn’t rained this summer’

miḍḍan mi gảmpi na mi nakvakeggebįuḷḷu įo, numenokka voikuokki miḍḍin utṇit tuġġin

‘the birthday boy liked the cake, apart from which he didn’t seem to like anything else’

nả niṡpin mi na-t de, nannannet ṇibeuvidda ganiṡpisitan na

‘this is a box, inside which I keep my jewelry’

§12.5.4.2.1 Non-Fusional Conjunctive & Postpositional Forms

Non-fusional forms of conjunctive and postpositional found with the sematic form of the relative pronoun (nama in the singular positive, numa in the negative singular, namut in the plural positive and numut in the plural negative) are found preceding the conjunction (or adposition) – this replaces the third-person sematic independent pronoun found with many conjunctions, and the particle va/vu is also missing, for example the conjunction ai ṇukvet va ‘once, after’ is relativised to nama ṇukvet ‘after which’. Semantically, not all conjunctions can be relativised in Pine. For example, įu ‘when’, aggen ‘as soon as’, au miuḍḍet va ‘at the same time’, au itse~eset~oset va ‘such that’, aỉn (va) ‘such that’, aiįįa/akkut ‘therefore’, au ƛikven va ‘so that’, au skanỉn va ‘in order to’ cannot be relativised. The resulting relativised form would not make sense, and as such they are not found with the relative pronoun.

§12.5.5 Indirect Interrogatives

Indirect interrogatives are questions which are embedded into a main clause. All indirect interrogatives are dependent, meaning their order is invariably the hyponomous and they require relative interrogative forms of adverbs and pronouns, the so-called n- forms (as opposed to the k- forms of direct interrogatives). There are four main types of indirect interrogatives clauses in Pine in addition to polar indirect interrogatives: restrictive, extractive, polar extractive and dependent indirect interrogatives. These four variations are synonymous, although they vary with regard to language register.

restrictivemittyt mi naṡ maḍḍi įo kvaupṃa nuṡkvisin ai nủka
extractivemittat nukka, naṡ maḍḍi įo kvaupṃa nuṡkvisin
polar extractivemittat nukka, na nuṡkvisin ke kvaupṃa naṡ maḍḍi įo
dependentmittat nukka, kvaupṃa nuṡkvisin naṡ maḍḍi įo

‘I don’t know which hunter killed the bear’

Restrictive indirect interrogatives embed the question into a determiner phrase. Extractive indirect interrogatives move the interrogatives phrase to the initial position, while polar extractive indirect interrogatives use a tag-question construction (na...-t ke) on the verb in first position. Finally, dependent indirect interrogatives have the standard dependent word order (OVS).

Polar indirect interrogatives are embedded yes/no questions syntactically similar to polar extractive indirect interrogatives in that they use a tag-question construction with a verb-initial order.

polarmittat nukka, na nuṡkvisin ke kvaupṃa mi maḍḍi įo

‘I don’t know whether the hunter killed the bear’

§12.5.5.1 Restrictive Indirect Interrogative Clauses

Indirect interrogative clauses can be expressed through interrogative restrictive relative clauses. The relative determiner clause has no antecedent in the main clause, and as such is free, such that the independent pronoun of the clause must be declined according to the function of the relative determiner clause, which has a fourth-person object referent in the verb – when an indirect restrictive interrogative functions as a subject, the referent subject pronoun is usually a third-person inanimate. This independent pronoun can have any function of a normal noun.

Indirect interrogative restrictive relative clauses differ from other restrictive relative clauses in that the head of the relative clause is not a noun, but either the verb complement or the predicate of the copula (pp). This means that the constituent ordering of indirect interrogative restrictive relative clauses differs from other similar clauses, as the head must be found clause-finally. In cp-headed indirect interrogative relative clauses, the cp moves from a position before the verb adjunct and the verb to after the verb, while in pp-headed indirect interrogative relative clauses, the pp appears after the verb. In independent clauses, the predicate of the copula is normally included in the verb adjunct, but here the verb adjunct and predicate appear on either side of the verb. For example, ‘…who the woman awake is’ would see ‘awake’ appear before the verb, but ‘who’ after the verb: …mi ỉski įo sảktsen ninen kammi (na). The constituent ordering of complement-headed and predicate-headed indirect interrogative restrictive relative clauses is given below, as well as the normal relative constituent ordering from which they differ for comparison:

vp in restrictive relative clause is head

mi… (subj + įo) [[(cp) ⟫ (av) ⟫ v] ⟫ n] ⟫ pron

mi ỉski įo tỉlliddut ari iṡi sakvin įo

‘the very old man that the woman knows’

cp in indirect interrogative relative clause is head

mi… (subj + įo) [(av) ⟫ cp ⟫ v] ⟫ (n)a

mittyt mi ỉski įo [nakken tỉllut] ai] nủka

‘I don’t know who the woman knows’

pp in indirect interrogative relative clause is head

mi… (subj + įo) [(av) ⟫ pp ⟫ v] ⟫ (n)a

mittyt mi ỉski įo [nammi nin] ai nủka

‘I don’t know who the woman is’

mittyt mi (mi) na-t de įo [naṡni ninen] ai nủka

‘I don’t know what this is’

Because these indirect interrogative clauses commonly begin with the determiner, subjects are often not determined, or if they are, the initial definite determiner is dropped, for example:

na tsṃida-t ke mi sakvin įo įe tikṇen naįįa ai?

‘do you know where the man lives?’ (never *…mi mi sakvin įo įe…)

To avoid this, dependent interrogatives may be preferred:

na tsṃidda-t ke, naįįa tikṇen mi sakvin įo?

‘do you know where the man lives?’

When the determiner clause itself is the subject of the main clause, it behaves as a third-person inanimate:

nả mi beyƛissemi naṡni na mi na-t de

‘this is what is important’

This is more naturally expressed without an interrogative form in Pine, as indirect interrogative clauses in Pine generally entail an actual question – if the indirect interrogative clause can be reworded as an actual question (‘I don’t know who she is’ ⟫ ‘I don’t know…who is she?’), then it is probably acceptable as an indirect relative question, but if it is not, then Pine speakers will prefer to word it differently. This is the case here, as the direct interrogative ‘what is important?’ is easily reworded from ‘this is what is important’ (‘this is…what is important?’).

nả mi beyƛissemi na mi na-t de

‘this is what is important’

However, the relative clause may not be found in the main polypersonal verb if it is not a direct object, for example geneskvimman mi na-t de įo nủn naṡni nannit ‘s/he asked me about (+elat) what this was’.

Indirect interrogative restrictive clauses often contain infinitival clauses, which can themselves contain non-finite verbs. For example, the phrase ‘I don’t know how to do it’ expressed with a restrictive relative clause is mittyt mi siḷḷuttat ai naṡƛa nus ai nủka, which contains the infinitival clause siḷḷuttat ai nẻ na ‘to do it’ (where the copula is found in the optative due to the nature of the main clause). A more accurate translation of this phrase however would be ‘I don’t know the way to do it’, as the infinitival clause is inherently more determined when using a restrictive relative clause. Using a non-restrictive relative clause gives a reading closer to ‘I don’t know how to do it’: (ollat) mittat nukka, nallat ai sisiḷḷuttat nỏ. There is a second type of non-restrictive relative clauses that uses a relativised form of the interrogative pronoun (naṡƛa) and does not require or allow a prerelative adverb: mittat nukka, naṡƛa siḷḷusseuts ‘I don’t know how to do it’, which is a more common and less formal way of expressing this idea than using a non-restrictive relative pronoun.

In contrast, if the interrogative restrictive clause acts instead as a subject, whose verb must thus be an infinitival clause (midat nẻ na ‘to know’) , the secondary infinitive (siḷḷuttat ai nẻ na ‘to do it’) cannot appear as an infinitival clause within an infinitival clause due to copula exclusion. As such, the phrase ‘knowing how to do it is what is important’ can be expressed with an interrogative restrictive relative clause containing two non-finite verbs:

nả mi mittyt nukkisit a mi midat siḷḷuttat ai naṡƛa nus a

‘knowing how to do it is what I don’t know’

Here, the subject of the phrase, midat…naṡƛa nus a ‘to know how to…’ is container within the determiner clause mi….na ‘the…’, and contains another infinitival clause siḷḷuttat ai nẻ na ‘to do it’. Combining these three clauses into one requires the conversion of the inner infinitival clause (siḷḷuttat ai nẻ na) into an auxiliary decopularised clause, siḷḷuttat ai. The independent pronoun of the determiner phrase [mi…na] and the independent pronoun of its embedded infinitival clause midat…naṡƛa įus a are nearly universally mutually exclusive, which means that only one occurs and as such serves a dual purpose, although hypercorrection may lead some speakers to add įo na to the clause, even though this is not necessary and widely considered incorrect or at least superfluous and awkward (such that the phrase would become *mi midat siḷḷuttat ai naṡƛa nus a įo na). The same idea can be expressed by use of a non-restrictive clause: beyƛissami ollat midat nẻ na, nallat siḷḷuttat ai nus a ‘knowing how to do it is important’, or more commonly beyƛissami midat nẻ na, naṡƛa siḷḷuttat ai nus a. The main difference being the presence of a prerelative adverb and the presence of two infinitival clauses, which is allowed as they are not embedded within each other. For that reason, non-restrictive relative clauses are sometimes preferred in order to avoid complex embedding of multiple non-finite forms.

Below is an example of an even more complex example of such recursive embedding of clauses within an indirect interrogative restrictive relative clause which contains another restrictive relative clause.

mittyt mi mỉnttot gimalkian ilbi na įo naįįa nin ai nủka

‘I don’t know where the flower I gave to the girl is’

It is more likely that this phrase would be expressed using a less convoluted construction such as with a polar extractive interrogative or dependent indirect interrogative:

mittat nukka, na nin ke naįįa mi mỉnttot gimalkian ilbi na

mittat nukka, naįįa nin mi mỉnttot gimalkian ilbi na

‘I don’t know where the flower I gave to the girl is’

Below are given examples of indirect interrogative restrictive relative clauses:

siggyt mi naṡnen tselidnisin ai nukkan

‘I didn’t hear what you said’

mittyt mi mi na-t de įo nammi nin ai nủka

‘I don’t know who this is’

mittyt mi na įo naṡni nin ai nủka

‘I don’t know what it is’

mittyt mi hulġġu įo naṡni nin ai nủka

‘I don’t know what a hulġġu is’

gamidda mi naįįa tsikṇa ai

‘I know where you live’

gamidda mi sakven įo naįįa tikṇen ai

‘I know where the man lives’

tṃidi mi sṃangen įo naįįet miggimin ai mi tselga įo

‘the young girl knows where her sister went’

geneskvan mi įo sakven-ni įo naṡnen siḷḷuppin nannit ṇiġaġaveva

‘my brother asked me about what that man was doing’

or ineskvatṇut mi įo sakven-ni įo naṡnen siḷḷuppin ai ṇiġaġaveva

‘my brother asked me what that man was doing’

§12.5.5.2 Extractive Indirect Interrogative Clauses

In colloquial speech, indirect interrogative clauses can be found in their extractive form. Extractive refers to the fact that this construction requires the movement of the interrogative phrase to the start of the embedded clause. Because extractive indirect interrogatives are so similar to non-restrictive relative clauses, prerelative antecedents are sometimes heard in the main clause.

na tseneggimin ke, nakken gikekvot tekkin ṇibisseva?with prerelative
na tsenegin ke, nakken gikekvot tekkin ṇibisseva?without prerelative

‘did you see who my uncle met yesterday?

mittyt nủket, naṡni nin mi na-t dewith prerelative
mittat nukka, naṡni nin mi na-t dewithout prerelative

‘I don’t know what this is’

siggyt nủket, naṡnen tselidnun with prerelative
siggat nủkin, naṡnen tselidnunwithout prerelative

‘I didn’t hear what you said’

extractive indirect interrogative clause

pp is head

[(pp.rel) ⟫ (av) (cp) ⟫ v ] (sp)

mittat nukka, naṡni nin hulġġu

‘I don’t know what a hulġġu is’

mittat nukka, nammi nin mi na-t de

‘I don’t know who this is’

mittat nukka, naṡ sakvin įo nin mi na-t de

‘I don’t know what man this is’

ipeġuttattsat, nammi nin pinennnenna

‘tell me who your friend is’

sinegat giskva, naṡnits paḷḷunna

‘I can see what you’ve become’

eġỏkautġas, nuṡnits aḷḷit puġuppin

‘don’t regret what you didn’t become

skegatṇat tsindva, naṡkuįįas nuṡ a

‘you can decide which one it will be’

av is head

[(av.rel) ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ v ] (sp)

ipeġuttattsappi, naįįa sƛinkkan palġġun mi sakvin įo

‘please tell me where the man built his boat’

hįiḷḷats, naṡnits siniṡpat tsƛukkisit

‘remember what you must keep it’ (…kept it warm)’

giddats, nauma helvin

‘look how much it grew’

ipeġupput nukkanninin, na(nno)ttset ṇikeįįedon siṡivus

‘they didn’t tell me how long they would stay here with us’

tṃidan mi tselga įo, naįįet mikkin sṃangen

‘the young girl knows where her sister went’

na tsipeġummin ke, noiḷḷot keutsṃinduṡ ḷu sittsiṡivuṡ ḷu

‘did you tell her/him, whether you will come along or stay?’

nekkat nủkin, naṡkuƛƛin gilullin įo

‘I didn’t see along which side s/he left’

mittat nukka, naṡnihủt nįusta simigvat gisko

‘I don’t know how much more I can eat’

sisỏḍmat iskat nukka, nauvovun tammekkuts haḷḷumin

‘I can’t imagine how much bigger it could become’

cp is head

[(cp.rel) ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ (av) ⟫ (pp) ⟫ v ] (sp)

na tsenegin ke, naṡnen gikekvot siḷḷuppin ṇibisseva?

‘did you see what my uncle did yesterday?’

na tseneggimin ke, nakken gikekvot tekkin ṇibisseva?

‘did you see who my uncle met yesterday?

na tsṃidda ke, naṡnen sasṇįaitkvenan ṃuoįủts niṡpin mi sakvin įo?

‘do you know what the man was keeping warm with his blanket?’

na tsepiskin ke, naṡnen gelidnun?

‘did you hear what I said?’

na tsỉli-t ke, nakkikkut geḷullin?

‘do you know whom I was speaking with?’

na tsỉli-t ke, naṡ nỉktṡon įo geḷullin?

‘do you know which person I was speaking with?

na tsṃidda-t ke, naṡnen sủmaġedan malkkin mi bįuḷḷu įo?

‘do you know what the boy gave his mother?

na tsṃidda-t ke, nakket a tsuoġne-t de malkkunnamit mi bįuḷḷu įo?

‘do you know whom the boy gave this knife?’

nekkat kủkin, naṡkuįįu gảmpi na gittsatṇisin

‘I didn’t see which cake you chose’

§12.5.5.3 Polar Extractive Indirect Interrogative Clauses

Polar extractive indirect interrogative clauses are clauses that use the polar interrogative format (na…(-t) ke įi/mo/ko) with an extractive indirect interrogative clause. The extracted phrase is the verb phrase itself, resulting in a VOS word order, unique for dependent clauses. Polar extractive interrogatives are often understood to be more emphatically interrogative than non-polar interrogative clauses. They are most common following expressions such as mittat nukka ‘I don’t know’, heůkkeggyt nủtṇet ‘I can’t tell’, ṇetalttṡa ‘I doubt, I am in doubts’ or ṇeneskva ‘I ask myself, I wonder ’, ṇesiįusut ‘I am curious’, and the interrogative clause is nearly always found in the dubitative rather than the indicative.

mittat nukka, na nun ke įi naṡni mi na-t de

‘I don’t know what this is’

ṇeneskva, na tselidnisin ke ko naṡnen

‘I wonder what you said’

ṇetalttṡa, na bidnon-t ke įi naįįu

‘I am in doubts as to when s/he will come back’

heůkkeggyt nủtṇet, na kỉlnįikvun ke įi naṡnen ṇitaveva

‘I can’t tell what my daughter brought back’

§12.5.5.4 Dependent Indirect Interrogatives

Indirect interrogatives can be expressed through both relative and dependent clauses in Pine. The interrogative phrase is in-situ – there is no extraction. The normal dependent word order, OVS, is used.

mittat nukka, naṡni nin hulġġu

‘I don’t know what a hulġġu is’

Dependent indirect interrogatives can also be analyzed as a verb adjunct and can therefore sometimes be found before the main verb:

naṡni nin hulġġu mittat nukka

'I don't know what a hulġġu is'

This is mostly limited to shorter indirect interrogatives, as it can be awkward to have a very long av phrase precede the clause to which it is dependent.

Because dependent interrogative clauses are free, no independent pronoun appears at the end of the phrase, and no antecedent is found in the main clause, and it may contain an intransitive verb.

predicate-headed

na tsṃidda ke, nammi gakka?

‘do you know who I am?’

gamidda, nammi uġun nủtsa

‘I know who you aren’t’

mittat tủįan mi bįuḷḷu įo, nattomin naįįa daġa summaġan

‘the boy doesn’t know where his mother is’

gaṡkin, naṡƛat nin ủġġi

‘I learned what a unripe berry is like’

ginttat tuġan, naṡƛat nin pukkut

‘s/he doesn’t understand what too much is’

adjunct-headed

hįiḷḷat nukka, naįįu ḷakkidnin ai

‘I don’t remember when it happened’

ipeġuttat iskat tsủtsemmat, ṇitsuoġneva naįįet guktisin

‘I can’t tell you where I put my knife’

na tsahįiḷva-t ke, tsuoġne naįįet uktun mi bįuḷḷu įo?

‘do you remember where the boy put the knife?’

§12.5.5.5 Polar Indirect Interrogatives

An indirect tag interrogative clause is a yes/no question clause that has been imbedded into a main clause. Pine uses the same strategy to render direct and indirect tag interrogatives, with the exception that indirect tag interrogatives are very commonly found with the particle įi/mo/ko and in the dubitative rather than the interrogative. And as they are not the main clause, they also have to be in the hyponomous. As with indirect tag-extractive interrogatives, indirect tag interrogatives are most common following expressions such as mittat nukka ‘I don’t know’, heůkkekkyt nủtṇet ‘I can’t tell’, ṇetalttṡa ‘I doubt, I am in doubts’ or ṇeneskva ‘I ask myself, I wonder ’, ṇesiįusut ‘I am curious’.

mittat nukka, na tsṃihu-t ke įi keumindan ṇikeįįon

‘I don’t know whether you want to come with us’

ṇetalttṡa, na nun ke mo migůhyt mi na-t de

‘I doubt whether this is true’

geneskvin, na nủn keko migůhyt mi na-t de

‘I asked her/him whether this was the truth’

sỉįis, na į-ỉllaḷḷisin ke įi

‘s/he was curious as to whether s/he1 might have known her/him2

§12.6 Hyponomous Order: Complementised Clauses

A complementised clause (or complementiser clause) is a clause embedded in a main clause and introduced by a complementiser. Pine has many types of complementisers, which are all relexicalised short copula forms. The most common and most neutral complementiser is įa ‘that’ (occasionally or poetically as na, and in formal language oḳ with negative clauses). Complementisers that introduce a negative complementised clause have a negative form with the augment -Vġ- (įaġa, įoġon, įaġai, įuguṡ, įuġul, etc.). Intransitive verbs have a special negative form in complementised clause, where the connegative -ϕat of main autonomous clauses becomes -ϕit.

Unlike English, Pine has some level of agreement between the complementiser and the mood of the complementised clause, such that a complementised clause which is in the dubitative mood will more often than not be introduced by a dubitative complementiser (įon), and a conditional complementised clause by a conditional complementiser (įai). Sometimes, two complementisers can be found together, which is especially common when using a copular complementiser in its long form, for example nus įa, nus gi įa, nuski (įa), introducing an optative complementised clause. This comes with a caveat – mood specific complementisers more often than not have a specialised function which introduces nuances. For example, the use of the dubitative complementiser įon~įỏ emphasises the inferentiality of the following statement, lowering the overall confidence that it is factual or correct, while the future complementiser įuṡ often has a comissive connotation, meaning that the complementised claused will be understood to convey some sort of agreement, intention or commitment, such that įuṡ tṃindvuṡ ‘that s/he will come’ should be understood as ‘that s/he is committed/has agreed to/intends to come’. The complementiser įu can function as a real potential complementiser when paired with the potential mood, to introduce an irrealis conditional phrase (‘if’) when paired with the conditional, or to introduce a realis conditional phrase (‘if’) when paired with the indicative.

There are often slight nuances in meaning between using solely a short complementiser, or a long copular complementiser and the standard complementiser įa. Whatever the complementiser may be, a complementised clause must always be found in the hyponomous. Complementization is a recursive feature, meaning a complementised clause can contain another complementised clause, ad infinitum, all of which will be in the hyponomous.

Sometimes, a complementised clause will appear by itself, in which case the complementiser may be found in second position, for example: kuokset įaįįa ḥutṇuįo ‘if only it weren’t so, unfortunately (lit. that it would seem otherwise)’.

Below is a list of various forms and functions of complementisers with their associated mood.

moodfunctionpositivenegativeuse
indicativeneutralįa (na)įaġa (oḳ)…that…
realis protaticįu, įuḥḥiįuġu, įuḥḥot…if…
dubitativedubitativeįon, įỏįoġon…that (may/possibly)…
inferentialįoįįa…that (apparently/I hear/they say)…
quotativeįoįįa…-t ƛi…(said) that…
reportativeįoįįa…-n důt…(said) that (apparently)…
goalįoįįa…-t gi…so that/in order that…
futurecomissiveįuṡįuġuṡ…that (commitment/intention/agreement)…
future-in-the-pastįon, įỏįoġon...that (would)...
optativeanaphoric optativeįusįuġus…(want/obligation/requirement/wish) that…
deonticįus įaįus įaġa…(ought/should)…
conditionalpredictiveįaiįaġai…that (would [as expected/predicted])…
counterfactual protasisįaįįa…that (would [but didn’t])…
irrealis protaticįu, įuḥḥiįuġu, įuḥḥot…if…
potentialprobabilitiveįul, įuƛƛuįuġƛu, įuġul…that (could/might/maybe)…
epistemic potentialįul įa, iįįuįul įaġa, iįįuġu…that (should [according to expectations])…

§12.6.1 Indicative Complementised Clause

neutral indicative complementiser

gamidda, įa tsesiḷḷuppisin‘I know that you did it’
genegin, įa pipaitṇin‘I saw that you fell’ or ‘I saw you falling’
gamidda, oḳ siḷḷupput nuttsisin‘I know that you did not do it’s

§12.6.2 Dubitative Complementised Clause

neutral complementiser įa

gabįelva, įa lullun‘I believe that s/he left’

dubitative complementiser įon~įỏ

gabįelva, įỏ lullun‘I believe that s/he may have left’

inferential complementiser

gabįelva, įoįįa lullun‘I believe that she apparently left’

quotative complementiser

lidni, įoįįa-t galullu-t ƛi ‘s/he said that s/he’s leaving’

(lit. ‘s/he said that I’m leaving’)

reportative complementiser

gesikvin, įoįįa-t ƛullon důt‘I heard that s/he’s apparently leaving’

goal complementiser

miṡivvats deįįet, įoįįa-t tsṇekkusu-t gi‘stay here so I can see you’

future-in-the-past complementiser

gemidin, įon mi ai-t ni tsiḷḷuppot'I knew that s/he would do that'

There is only a slight nuance between the use of the standard complementiser įa, the short complementiser įon~įỏ and the compound complementiser įoįįa (or įon~įỏ įa). The standard complementiser is neutral, the dubitative complementiser įon~įỏ adds additional emphasis on the unconfirmed or uncertain nature of the subordinate clause (‘it appears that, it may be true that, it is possible that’) while the inferential compound complementiser įoįįa emphasises on the reported or second-hand nature of information contained in the subordinate clause (this is something that the speaker was told or heard, with no guarantee that the statement is actually true). The compound complementiser serves the same function without a main clause for it to be embedded into, such that įoįįa lullun by itself is grammatical and simply means ‘Xs/he apparently left (they say)’.

Dubitative complementised clauses can also be used in a reportative manner, to indicate that the following information is what someone said. Such clauses are often introduced by įoįįa-t, and the following complementised verb is usually found in quotee’s perspective (often a first person), and if generally followed by -t ƛi. This is called the reportative complementiser. The dubitative replaces the indicative in such reportative complementised quotes, but if the quoted utterance is not in the indicative, the mood is conserved. Likewise, įoįįa-t …-t gi corresponds to ‘so that, in order to, such that’ and is called the goal complementiser, introducing a subordinated clause which is not realised but contingent on the main clause.

When a main clause is in the past and introduces a complementised clause with įon/įỏ whose verb is in the future, the result is a future-in-the-past reading, which in English is generally expressed by 'would'.

§12.6.3 Future Complementised Clause

standard complementiser

gabįelva, įa ƛulluṡ‘I believe that s/he will leave’

commissive complementiser

gabįelva, įuṡ ƛulluṡ‘I believe that s/he shall/accepts to leave’
gabįelva, įuġuṡ lullit tuįįuṡ‘I believe that s/he shan’t/refuses to leave’

Here, the nuance between the standard complementiser įa and the future complementiser įuṡ is quite slight, and they may be in free variation in some speakers. The standard complementiser is neutral, and the short complementiser indicates a commissive intention, implying an agreement, intent or otherwise some sort of commitment. There is no compound complementiser for future complementised clause (*įuṡ įa is not allowed).

§12.6.4 Optative Complementised Clause

standard complementiser

gatsappa, įa lullisun‘I hope that s/he left’

‘I hope that s/he wanted to leave’

optative complementiser

gatsappa, įus lullisun‘I hope that s/he left’

deontic complementiser

gabįelva, įus įa ƛullusin‘I believe that s/he ought to leave’

The use of the standard complementiser with optative complementised clauses has two possible readings – the subclause is in the optative due to a main clause verb which indicates some sort of wish, demand or hope, or the subclause is in the optative due to an optative meaning in the subordinate verb. This means that įa lullisun can both mean ‘that s/he left’ or ‘that s/he wanted to leave’. The use of the short complementiser usually excludes the optative meaning of the subordinate verb and instead usually agrees with the optative of the main clause, such that the only reading of įus lullisun would be ‘that s/he left’. Finally, the compound complementiser įus įa serves to introduce some sort of deontic (or epistemic in the translative or passive verbs) necessity, requirement or probability. This also is the case without a main clause, where įus įa has the same purpose. The phrase įus įa ƛullus ‘s/he out to leave’ is perfectly grammatical on its own, without being embedded into a main clause.

The complementiser įus is also found following certain words in fixed expressions:

(nả) lugu įus…‘it is required that…’
appi įus…‘please…’
i įus~nus (gi)…‘were it that…, I wish that…’
i įus~nus pỉ…/ippỉ įa/įus~nus‘if only…’

§12.6.5 Conditional Complementised Clause

standard complementiser

gabįelva, įa tsiḷḷupputtṡut‘I believe that s/he would do it’ (possible)

conditional complementiser

gabįelva, įai tṃinttatṡin‘I believe that s/he would come’ (expected)

compound complementiser

gabįelleƛu, įaįįa siḷḷupput tuġġuttṡu‘if s/he hadn’t done it, then I would believe her/him’

(but s/he did, so I don’t)

A conditional subordinate clause is usually introduced by the standard complementiser įa. The short form įai can also be used, but the resulting clause is often more predictive – the nuance between įa tṃinttatṡin and įai tṃinttatṡin is that the first example is simply complementised (stating a irrealis possibility), and the second can be understood to be a prediction or expectation of what would happen ‘that s/he would (as is to be expected) come’. Finally, the compound form įaįįa, įai įa or įaįįu, įai įu, introduces a counterfactual irrealis protasis. If-conditional sentences in Pine have their apodosis in the autonomous order, while the protasis is in the hyponomous order, which may seem counterintuitive to some. According to this, the consequence (the apodosis) is the actual main statement, for example gaminttatṡat ‘I would come’, while the condition for that statement is considered subordinated to the consequence, for example įu siġve ‘if/when it rains’.

§12.6.6 Potential Complementised Clause

standard complementiser

gatủlla, įa gỉƛƛulimi‘I think that it could work’

potential complementiser

gatủlla, įul gỉƛƛulimi‘I think it might/could work’
įuƛƛu gỉƛƛulimi‘it might work'

compound complementiser

gatủlla, įul įa gỉƛƛulimi‘I think that it should work’
iįįu-t gi įa gỉƛƛulimi‘hopefully it works’
na iįįu-t ke įa gỉƛƛulimi‘I wonder if it works’

Potential subordinate clauses complementised by the standard įa have a neutral reading. If the same clause is introduced by the short potential complementiser įu, the following clause is best translated as containing a ‘maybe’, increasing the potential of the clause, for example įa giƛƛulimi ‘that it could work’ but įul gỉƛƛulimi ‘(that) it could maybe work’ or ‘that it might work’. Likewise, the long form įul įa indicates that the action could and should occur (if all things are as they should), emphasizing a more epistemic possibility. The short potential complementiser įu in the absence of the potential in dependent clause should be understood to mean ‘when’, but with the indicative it can also mean ‘if’ in predictive protasis clauses (ḷįuḍḍuṡ įu siġve or siġve įu ḷįuḍḍuṡ ‘if it rains, it will be wet’). Otherwise, įuḥ(ḥ)i introduces an if-conditional protasis, which is a modified version of the potential complementiser, which also exists as įuḥḥot in the negative (instead of įuġu, which does not have the ‘if’ reading at all and exclusively means ‘that (maybe) not’). The short complementiser įu can appear in hyponomous clauses with or without a main clause with a number of particles, sometimes fusing with parts of all of them, namely i įu-t gi įa (iįįu-t gi įa, iįįuggi, iuggi, įuggi įa) ‘hopefully’ and na (iį)įu-t ke (na įu-t ke, na iįįu-t ke įa, naįįu-t ke įa) ‘I wonder if….’.

§12.7 Hyponomous Order: Conjunctive Clauses

The hyponomous order is required with some subordinate conjunctive clauses. Pine distinguishes two types of hyponomous conjunctive clauses: primary and secondary conjunctive clauses. Primary conjunctive clauses are so called because they are introduced by a conjunction, which serves as the first word of the phrase. Primary conjunctive clauses must be found following a primary clause. Secondary hyponomous conjunctive clauses either lack a conjunction all together, or the conjunction is found in second position (for example non-coordinate conjunctive adverbs). Secondary conjunctive clauses nearly always precede the main clause. Typically, secondary conjunctive clauses have a more contextual and less rigidly defined relationship to the main clause – for example, when lacking a conjunction all together, the relationship may be temporal (‘when’), show manner (‘as’), cause (‘since, because’) or consequence (‘so’).

Many conjunctions are formed from nominal or verbal roots, though they are often found with case markers in the asematic form rather than the expected sematic form. These include an elative -ỉn, illative -et and a comitative -(v)vn/-vgvt.

Subordinating conjunctions derived from nominal or verbal stems are usually found in the form au Ø va in the positive and au Ø vu in the negative, where va and vu ‘and’ serves as a sort of complementiser. Note that it is very common for conjunctions ending in a consonant, especially -n, to fuse with va and vu in spoken language, eliminating the -v- and causing gemination, for example ai alkṇỉn va can be heard as ai alkṇỉnna. Likewise, the sequence vu uġun ‘(that/and) is not’, containing the dependent copula uġun, is usually realised as v-uġun, for example au alkṇỉn v-uġun deįįa nuįįemi ‘because it isn't here’.

Sentences can be subordinated with a number of postpositions with an obviated (prerelative, or more accurately presubordinative or preconjunctive) pronoun followed by va/vu instead of an expected complementiser. For example, the noun buoḍkni ‘tree stump’ acts as a postposition (in a non-apophonised form), ai buoḍgnen ‘in the end (of it), at its core, in essence’ but can also be used as a conjunction as au buoḍgnen va, which can be translated as ‘essentially (…Ø-ing), ultimately resulting in’, as in tsintvin keggededdet au buoḍgnen va sṇỉkkin ‘s/he drank everyday, ultimately resulting in her/his dying’.

A small number of conjunctions which lack this sequence have a special negative form, for example giḷḷu ‘before’ and guḷḷu ‘before not’. Not all speakers use these internally negative forms, which may sound too formal or archaic to them.

Many such conjunctions can also be used with the dependent order as a sort of infinitive construction. Pine lacks true infinitives, and these constructions are called infinitival copular constructions, and serve a similar purpose as infinitive clauses in English but are a type of converbs. They are common when the subject of the finite verb is identical to the implied subject of the infinitival clause, which are then said to be syllogous, having the same subject. Composite conjunctions in au Ø va/vu cannot appear in such infinitival constructions.

conjunctive hyponomous

gebidnin giḷḷu siġġisun‘I arrived before it started raining’
gebidnin au dảlįen va siġġisun‘I arrived as it was raining’

syllogous infinitival clause

sibidnat giḷḷu gemyngavvin‘I got ready before arriving’

§12.7.1 Temporal Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
įuįuġu‘when, if’
įuįuġu‘if (+cond)
au įu vaau įuġu vu‘while, when, as’
(au) giḷḷu~gil (va)(au) guḷḷu~gul (vu)‘before, not until (neg.)’
(au) maḍḍu~mahu (va)(au) muḍḍu~muhu (vu)‘after’
(au) eġot (va)(au) eġot (vu)‘after, following’
au dảlįen vaau dảlįen vu‘while, during’
dette dảlįen įudette dảlįen įuġu‘every time, each time that, whenever’
au dảlįỉnvaau dảlįỉn vu‘since, before’
agỉnugỉn‘since, while’
agỉtugỉt‘until, to the point where’
au kegget vaau kegget vu‘until’
aggenuggen~aggen‘as soon as’
au ṇukvet vaau ṇukvet vu‘after, once’
au ṛukvỉn vaau ṛukvỉn vu‘at/around the time when’
au miuḍḍet vaau miuḍḍet vu‘at the same time, while’

iggit siḷḷa įu siġve

‘it smells good when it rains’

gasiḷḷuppattṡet, įu gatůlġġattṡin

‘I would do it if I could’

gegilkkautġa au įu va siskve

‘don’t go outside while/when there is thunder’

ṃaktut nuttsohet guḷḷu kaskvit nuįįe na

‘don’t taste it before it’s not (until it’s) ready’

kaskvami maḍḍu tṡůskyngůmmingů mi tsảƛi na

‘it is ready after the water has cooled down’

tseṃairrin dette dảlįen įu gelủbmin

‘you laughed whenever I spoke’

gỉƛƛami ugỉt gỉƛƛit nuįįe

‘it works until it doesn’t

minttas bakvet aggen humukvuƛusin

‘come home as soon as it starts to dark’

ḷakkinni au ṛukvỉn va pinakvin

‘it happened around the time when you were born’

minttas au ṇukvet va tsṃyknavůṡ

‘come once you are (lit. will be) ready’

§12.7.2 Causal Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
au maḍḍỉn vaau maḍḍỉn~muḍḍỉn vu‘because, following, as a consequence’
au eġủn vaau eġủn vu‘because, following, as a consequence’
hỉn, ahỉnhỉn, ahỉn‘because, why’
amỉnamỉn‘because, due to’
au hỉn vaau hỉn vu‘because'
au alkṇỉn vaau alkṇỉn vu‘due to, because’
au tekven vaau tekven vu‘because, as a consequence’
au peġġỉn vaau peġġỉn vu‘because, that is, due to’
au lagỉn vaau lagỉn vu‘because, with the intention of, in order to’
au altsỉn vaau altsỉn vu‘because, due to’
au ƛikkỉn vaau ƛikkỉn vu‘since, because, seeing as, due to’
au hillỉn vaau hillỉn vu‘due to, therefore’
au teummỉn vaau teummỉn vu‘because, following’

gemindin au alkṇỉn va geskadnin

‘I came because I wanted to’

minttat nủkin au alkṇỉn vu skannit nukkin

‘I didn’t come because I didn’t want to’

sṇỉggi hỉn sṇįeƛƛadnun

‘s/he died because s/he was (lit. had been) sick’

sṇįeḷḷuƛƛi au eġủn va lůrrůt tsảƛa tsinttun

‘Xs/he became sick after having drunk dirty water’

skidattat gelukkinen au peġġỉn v-uġun vaḥḥa moni na nuġġi

‘we had to stop there as there was no way’

getṡẻlġġet au lagỉn va tsṃikvavisit

‘I cooked it so that you would eat it’

tsettsisuƛoat mi keukvut ỉ au tekven va nůgyƛƛen mi heyįů na

‘the days are starting to get shorter because winter is approaching

sidulbat sisaįįegat tsƛukkemmat au ƛikkỉn vu aiṡkit voaḥḥįu nuttsin

‘I have to teach you to sew seeing as you never learned’

kukvi mi kỉƛu na au hillỉn va tṡoaḷḷaukkin mi hay na

‘the wood split due to fact that the air was too dry’

§12.7.3 Circumstantial Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
au monet vaau monet vu‘such that’
au itse~eset~oset vaau itse~eset~oset vu‘in such a way that, such that’
aỉn vaaỉn vu‘such that’
aỉn‘therefore, so’
aiįįa‘therefore, so’
nakkut‘therefore, so’

aivan, aỉn gaminduṡ

‘the weather is good, therefore I will come’

gesiḷḷummet au monet vu irįit nuttsin

‘I did it such that you didn’t notice’

uṡṡatselủbmin, nakkut ṡebmyt nủttsiddut

‘you lied, therefore I don’t believe you’

lidni itse pikkava, aiįįa sisissimmaḍḍat tsƛukkit

‘your father said so, so you must obey him’

§12.7.4 Conjunctions of Goal, Result & Manner

positivenegativemeaning
au ƛikven vaau ƛikven vu‘so that, for (+pot/dub)’
au skanỉn vaau skanỉn vu‘with the intent to, in order to (+pot/dub)’
iḳ‘lest (+cond)’
au tsabben vaau tsabben vu'so that, with the hope that (+pot/dub)’
au voḥven vaau voḥven vu'in fear that (+pot)'
ailat~aulat vaailat~aulat vu'so that, by (+pot/dub)’
įoįįa-t…-t giuįoįįa-t…-t gi‘so that, such that (+dub)’
au nįavvet vaau nįavvet vu‘to, so that (+pot/dub)’
(a)hỉt‘to, why (+pot/dub)’
au hỉt vaau hỉt vu‘in order to, for (+pot/dub)’
au disƛỉn vaau disƛỉn vu'as a result, resulting in’
au gattse (va)au gattse (vu)‘enough that, to the extent that (+pot/dub)’
au laggi vaau laiggi vu'so that, such that, so, by’ (+pot/dub)
au enkvỉn vaau enkvỉn vu‘such that’
au buoḍgnen vaau buoḍgnen vu‘ultimately resulting in, essentially’

įubbondvan au skanỉn va ittut ṇįůllůlimi

‘s/he soaked it in order for it to bend better’

simindvi au tsabben va tṇekkaḷḷut

‘s/he came here in hopes of seeing it’

simindvi au tsabben va tṇekkot

‘s/he came here in hopes of seeing it’

deset lidnat tsƛukket ailat va tsaginttimaḷḷitan

‘you must say it this way so that they may understand you’

giƛiggỉggessit moadne iḳ hallunguppuįon

‘I showed her/him the path, lest s/he get lost’

moadne simaḍḍat gilidnin ahỉt hallunguppit tuġġulin

‘I told her/him to follow the path not to get lost’

sṇỉggi au disƛỉn va hallunguppin

‘s/he died as a result of getting lost’

ganiṡkỏmma au gattse va gaginttimmitan

‘I speak enough Pine that they can understand me’

tsuktet au laggi va ṇeguƛƛulimi

‘you placed it so that it could be visible’

§12.7.5 Concessive Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
aimma(aumma)‘even though’
au ġvenỉn vaau ġvenỉn vu‘despite’
au midỉnvaau midỉn vu‘knowing that, despite’
teni(tunu)‘even though’
au teni vaau teni~tunu vu‘despite, even though’
dette tenidette teni~tunu‘despite, even though, no matter how much’

simindvi aimma gelidnian įuġu giminttit tuġġisun

‘s/he came here even though I told her/him not to come’

sƛỏmisƛummi au ġvenỉn va stuįįoƛa alttsunts

‘s/he fell asleep despite the fact that they were making a ruckus’

tsilidnian au midỉn va ṇulttaviddin

‘you told her/him knowing it would hurt her/him2

skaggi tunu aįįikkut voaḥḥįu nukkin

‘s/he was able, even though I never taught her/him’

ṃuƛvi dette teni tsemitṡettsitṡit va

‘it failed, despite how much we did tried’

§12.7.6 Conditional Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
au tsallỉn vaau tsallỉn vu’depending on, given that, provided that’
įuḥḥiįuḥḥot'if, if ever, in the case that'
kuoḥḥikuoḥḥot‘unless’
au akkỉn vaau akkỉn vu'on the condition that’
peůha‘otherwise’
au laknỉn vaau laknỉn vu‘depending on, given that’
au hįaƛƛet vaau hįaƛƛet vu‘as long as’

gỉƛƛumiṡ au tsallỉn va tsoaṛṛu milakven va tsaįįikkiddun

‘it will work provided that you do as I taught you’

keugamikvuṡ įuḥḥi keutsamigguṡ

‘I will come along if you come along’

keumikkat nukkuṡ kuoḥḥot keutsamigguṡ

‘I won’t come along unless you come along’

keugamikvuṡ au akkỉn va keutsamigguṡ tsami va

‘I will come along on the condition that you too come along’

nus gi įa keutsamiggussin, peůha sinegat skakkut nuttsetṡ

‘you ought to come along, otherwise you won’t be able to see her/him’

gimalkepput au akkỉn va ỉtsalku įaġa vuoddet ilidnyt nuttsuts

‘I will give it to you on the condition that you promise you won’t tell anyone’

§12.7.7 Modal Conjunctions

positivenegativemeaning
au lakven vaau lakven vu'like, as though (+dub)’
au nỉƛven vaau nỉƛven vu'like, as though'
au mỉ vaau mỉ vu'as if'
au kỉdnu vaau kỉdnu vu‘like, similar to’
milak(ƛ)ven~millat vamilak(ƛ)ven~millat vu‘as if, like’
au laggi~lat vaau laggi~lat vu‘like, as if’
au raiƛven vaau raiƛven vu'as much as'
au bikṡen vaau bikṡen vu‘as little as’
au monnen vaau monnen vu'like, as though'
mimonnen vamimonnen vu‘like, as though, the same way’

minni au lakven va stunuƛƛun

‘she walked as though she was pregnant’

tṃaivvi au nỉƛven va tṇunniknun

‘s/he smiled as if s/he was (looking) angry’

ḷủlli au mỉ va mipiskun ỏhakammi

‘s/he spoke as if someone was listening’

ḷủlli millat vu ginttit nukkun

‘s/he spoke as if I didn’t understand’

ỉ au laggi v-uġun deįįa tuġġun

‘it was as though s/he wasn’t here’

mikva au raiƛven va tsaskanu

‘eat as much as you want’

galemppa au bikṡen va gaskagu

‘I work as little as I can’

uktuttukkas au monnen v-uġun deįįa nủku

‘pretend as though I’m not here’

aįoƛƛi mimonnen va gaįaƛƛin gami

‘s/he learned the same way as I learned’

§12.7.8 Secondary Hyponomous Conjunctive Clauses

Secondary hyponomous conjunctive clauses are conjunctive clauses that either lack a conjunction (and therefore are textual in nature) or have a conjunction (such as non-coordinate conjunctive adverbs) in second position – the second non-particle word of a clause. In addition, secondary conjunctive clauses are often found preceding the main clause, which is not the norm for hyponomous clauses – Pine strongly favours hyponomous clauses to follow the main clause in most other cases.

§12.7.8.1 Non-Conjunct Secondary Conjunctive Clauses

Non-conjunctive secondary conjunctive clauses are hyponomous clauses that (nearly) always precede a main clause but is not connected to it by any conjunction. Such clauses exist in English as well, for example when saying ‘having finished work, I came back home’, which is essentially the same as saying ‘I came back home when I had finished work’, where when functions as a conjunction. Although they are called non-conjunctive, a second position particle in (-n) da or alternatively na (n-) as well as kin is often found between the two clauses, but they are facultative and may be better described as filler words or discourse markers – they may also instead be found in second position in the main clause as well.

In Pine, this type of construction can express a range of relationships between the main clause and the hyponomous clause, including time, reason or consequence. The prodosis of a conditional phrase can also be non-conjunct. It is very common for the first-person agentive pronominal prefix ga-/ge- to be omitted if it appears again in the main clause.

lemppanun, gebidnin kin bakvet

‘when/because/as I had finished work, I came back home’

mittuttṡin, gipeġupputṡit da

‘had I known about it, I would have told her/him’

siġġe (įu), nukka-n da aṡkvet lakkat

‘since/because/if/when it rains, I won’t go outside’

§12.7.8.2 Conjunct Secondary Conjunctive Clauses

Secondary conjunctive clauses are clauses whose relationship to the main clause is expressed by a conjunction (or even a complementiser) in second position, either before or after the main clause. Most common are non-coordinate conjunctive adverbs, for example (-t) (nip)pu ‘so, because, as’, but coordinate conjunctive adverbs may also be found, especially go~go-t ka~go-t ku, or na (n-)~n(an)u (n-) which essentially has the same range of meaning as non-conjunct secondary conjunctive clauses, from time or reason to consequence. The conjunction įu is especially common in secondary clauses found before the main clause.

siġġe įu aṡkven, nukka-n da mikkat

‘when it rains outside, I don’t go’

lemppanun go ƛuo keukvon a, gebidnin da bakvet

‘when/since/as I had worked all day, I came back home’

mittuttṡin (nu), gipeġupputṡin da

‘had I known, I would have told her/him’

§12.8 Subject & Object Verbal Predicatives

Pine allows verbal adjuncts and complements of both subjects and objects. Adjuncts add facultative information in the form of a verb, while complements are required information for the phrase to be grammatical. In addition, syntactic object verbal predicatives can appear as part of a reportative construction, where information about the participant is reported, witnessed or involves some sort of reported mentation by an unspecified, impersonal syntactic subject. The morphosyntactic distinction between subject verbal adjuncts and verbal complements is not as salient as that of object verbal adjuncts and complements. For that reason, subject verbal adjuncts and complements are treated together as subject verbal predicatives, while object verbal adjuncts are considered separately from their complement counterparts.

subject verbal perdicative

ṇįeḷḷat tsutṇa

‘you seem (to be) sick’

object verbal adjunct

minis gineggints ~ gineigget sṃinattat nỉn ai

‘I saw them coming’

object verbal complement

gỏkendet siḷḷutummen ai

siḷḷutummen gỏkendet

‘I consider it done’

§12.8.1 Copular & Dependent Subject Predicatives

Copular or dependent subject predicatives are occasionally found with verbs that typically have a subject complement in the essive, but instead of a noun or adjective in the essive, the complement is an infinitive. The infinitive can either be a copular infinitival phrase, in which case tense congruency is maintained with the main verb, or a dependent infinitive, which is a true infinitive form and therefore has no tense congruency with the main verb. Dependent subject predicatives generally precede the main verb much like a subject complement in the essive. Dependent subject predicatives cannot contain a connegated verb. Instead, a special abessive dependent form in -auġġit is used.

dependent subject complement

minat hutṇami

‘it seems to be coming’

radnat hiksami

‘it sounds like it’s over’

radnauġġit hiksami

‘it sounds like it’s not over’

A copular subject predicative serves the same function but distinguishes tense through its copula. The function of the independent pronoun in the copular infinitival phrase is to indicate the agentivity of the infinitive verb rather than the syntactic object role of the phrase as in object copular complements.

hiksami radnat ninnun ai

‘it sounds like it has ended’

hutṇin minat nuḷḷu na

‘it appeared to have come, like it had come’

§12.8.2 Object Verbal Predicatives

Object verbal predicatives correspond to complementised phrases which have been incorporated into the main clause instead. Unlike subject predicatives, which do not clearly differentiate adjuncts from complements, object verbal adjuncts differ significantly from object verbal complements. An object verbal adjunct adds information about the object, but can be omitted without affecting the grammaticality of phrase. In contrast, an object verbal complement is required by the verb.

§12.8.2.1 Hyponomous, Copular & Syllogous Dependent Object Adjuncts

There are three types of object verbal adjuncts. Copular object adjuncts are in essence a copular infinitival phrase whose dependent verb is found with possessive affixes that reflect the subject of the copular infinitive verb. Copular object adjuncts strongly disfavour nominal infinitival subjects, and are therefore more commonly found when the object of the main verb is pronominal.

The second type of object verbal adjunct is called the hyponomous object adjunct. Such object predicative constructions are syntactically most similar to restrictive relative clauses, but they are found without determiners and behave as an attributive to the object. With pronominal objects, hyponomous object adjuncts are found preceding the verb, much like essive object or subject adjuncts. Hyponomous object adjuncts precede nominal objects, much like restrictive relative verbs.

The third type of object adjuncts arises when the subject and object of the finite verb are one and the same. This type of object verbal adjunct is called a syllogous dependent object adjunct. Instead of a hyponomous finite verb or a copular infinitival phrase with a possessed dependent verb, syllogous dependent object adjuncts require a middle finite verb and a simple dependent verb as an adjunct, nearly always found preceding the finite verb. They are nearly identical in form to subject dependent adjuncts but differ in the presence of the middle formant -VttV(g)- on a polyvalent verb.

Copular object adjuncts differ from hyponomous object adjuncts in that they use a third-person inanimate pronoun as the syntactic object of the main verb, while the true semantic object of the phrase is expressed through possessive affixes on the dependent verb. Hyponomous object adjuncts have a normal object referent in the main verb. The sentence ‘I saw them coming’ can be expressed using either a hyponomous object adjunct or a copular object adjunct:

hyponomous object adjunctminis genegginin ‘I saw them walking’
copular object adjunctgenegget sṃinttat nỉn ai‘I saw them walking’
syllogous dependent object adjunctminat genegattavin‘I saw myself walking’

In colloquial registers, nominal copular object adjuncts are less common than nominal hyponomous object adjuncts, but they are used in formal registers. In these cases, the object is in the genitive case and the dependent verb has possessive affixes. This is not always true however, as copular object adjuncts are often preferred when the object adjunctive phrase is more complex. For simple adjunctive phrases however, hyponomous object adjuncts often sound more natural.

genegget sagvemut sṃinattat nỉn ai

‘I saw men walking (lit. I saw the men’s their walking)’

This is be more commonly expressed with a hyponomous object adjunct instead:

genegginin minis sagvemut

minis genegginin sagvemut

‘I saw men walking’

In the case of a hyponomous object adjunct, the syntactic object is a third-person animate plural (e.g. ‘I saw them’ in Pine is expressed as genegginin). However, with a copular object adjunct, the syntactic object is a third-person inanimate singular (e.g. ‘I saw it’ in Pine is expressed as genegget, where ai refers to sṃinattat nỉn ai, meaning ‘them coming’).

§12.8.2.1.1 Hyponomous Object Adjuncts

Hyponomous object adjuncts consist of a hyponomous verb whose head is the object of the finite verb. Should the head be a pronoun, the hyponomous object adjunct usually precedes the finite verb. However, if the head is instead a noun or adjective, the hyponomous object adjunct will be found preceding it. With local objects, the hyponomous object adjunct is usually found preceding an independent accusative pronoun (or in the case governed by the verb). It is not unusual for the local pronoun affixes to be absent with agentive hyponomous object adjuncts. This is not allowed in negative hyponomous object adjuncts, where local agentive pronouns must appear on the negative auxiliary in the adjunctive phrase.

ḷủluttis gesigvints

‘I heard them talking’

getaġvannin (ge)piskin gamut

‘s/he noticed me listening’

getaġvannin piskit nukkin gamut

‘s/he noticed me not listening’

keungit gikvẻvvin taġvet

‘s/he noticed her/him2 sneaking out’

§12.8.2.1.2 Copular Object Adjuncts

Copular object adjuncts are similar in form and function to hyponomous object adjuncts, but instead of using a finite verb in the hyponomous, they consist of a copular infinitival phrase whose subject is expressed as possessive affixes on the dependent verb of the copular phrase. The object referent on the finite verb is the copular phrase itself, which is reflected in a third-person inanimate object pronoun. A nominal object appears as in the genitive as the possessor to the copular phrase, along with possessive affixes, which results in double possession markings. Note that possessive affixes are found in the prorrhizal slot -2, and therefore appear after initials. Obviative objects typically have no plural forms, but possessive affixes on the dependent verb can be pluralised in the case of plural nominal objects.

Because the referent is the copular phrase itself, copular object adjuncts contain a third-person inanimate independent pronoun, typically in the accusative.

Copular object adjuncts are often preferred over hyponomous object adjuncts when the adjunctive phrase is more complex. Hyponomous object adjuncts are favoured when negated however.

Copular object adjuncts cannot be fully negated. This is because the connegative form of verbs cannot house possessive affixes. Instead, a special abessive form of the dependent verb is used, characterised by the ending -auġġit which can take on possessive suffixes. This abessive dependent form does not negate the copula.

gesigvet sƛủlattat nỉn ai

ḷủllis gesigvet

‘I heard them talking’

taġvan ṇipiskamma nỉn ai

gepiskin taġvi

‘s/he noticed me listening’

taġvan ṇipiskauġġidda nỉn ai

piskit nukkin taġvi

‘s/he noticed me not listening’

taġvan mi mỉlįiḳnemmi įo nenuit uṡṡodnįikkattat ṇįippeyt gỉkinunnit nỉn ai

‘s/he noticed the neighbor’s boys stealing meat from the meat cache in the middle of the night’

§12.8.2.1.3 Syllogous Dependent Object Adjuncts

Object adjuncts can occur with a syllogous object. Syllogous objects are the same participant as the subject. Therefore, the head of the syntactic syllogous dependent object adjunct is also the subject of the main verb, which means that the verb much appear with the middle formant -VttV(g)-. Syllogous dependent object adjuncts are most similar to dependent subject complements in that they appear before the finite verb. The dependent form can appear with or without possessive affixes.

Dependent object adjunct phrases cannot be negated and possessed. Instead of possessive affixes being found on the connegative form of the dependent infinitive, a special abessive suffix in -auġġit is used, which can house possessive suffixes. With the copula, the connegative form does not occur at all in dependent object adjuncts.

syllogous dependent object adjunct

ṇiminamma~minat genegattagin

‘I saw myself walking’

gveiddit ṇintsuttamma~ intsuttat gemidattavungan

‘I’ve always known myself to be different’

na piṇįeḷḷadda~ṇįeḷḷa-t ke tsilidnattagin?

‘did you say you were sick?’

(lit. ‘did you say yourself to be sick?’)

naġan bakven gelidnattagin

‘I said I was home’

uġun bakven (nukkin) gelidnattagin

‘I said I was not home’

§12.8.2.2 Hyponomous Object Complements

Hyponomous object complements are a type of object predicatives that redefine the object of a verb and that cannot be removed without changing the meaning of the phrase significantly. They are similar in form and function to hyponomous object adjuncts. Formally, they differ from hyponomous adjuncts in that pronominal object referents must be reiterated as the head of the hyponomous complement phrase. Whereas pronominal hyponomous object adjuncts have as their head the finite verb, a pronominal hyponomous object complement phrase requires an independent pronoun as its head. They also rarely appear before the finite verb, except in formal or poetic language.

hyponomous object adjunct

minis genegginin

‘I saw them coming’

hyponomous object complement

ỉltsalủbmemmats (tse)selvitsis tsakkut

‘I declare you married’

In colloquial registers, the distinction between object verbal complements and adjuncts is not a salient, and it is not necessarily considered incorrect to use either construction regardless of whether the speaker considers the object predicative to be an adjunct or a complement.

hyponomous object complement phrase

ỉllủbmets snỉkkingimin au

snỉkkingimin ỉllủbmets

‘they declared her/him dead’

gilpṃegginindvinin lullanus ỉt

lullanus gilpṃegginindvinin

‘I assumed that they had left’

gilpṃegginindvinin lullit tuġġanus ỉt

lullit tuġġanus gilpṃegginindvinin

‘I assumed that they had not left’

gitủllanninin aiḥḥůin gakkun gamut

aiḥḥůin gakkun gitủllanninin

‘they thought I was wrong’

ṇevokki hallunguppungen ai

hallunguppungen ṇevokki

‘I fear that s/he has gotten lost’

giltsittsinindvaddit pinỉkkun tsamut

pinỉkkun giḷtsittsinindvaddit

‘I assumed you dead’

gỏdnendvet siḷḷutuppanun ai

siḷḷutuppanun gỏdnendvet

‘I considered it done’

tsṇinditṡiṡ deįįa natton ai

deįįa natton tsṇinditṡiṡ

‘we will count her/him as being here’

lidnan iset nủn ai mi bįuḷḷu įo

iset (įỏ) nủn lidnan mi bįuḷḷu įo

‘the boy said that it was so’

lidnan uġun iset nuġġun ai mi bįuḷḷu įo

iset (įỏ) uġun nuġġun lidnan mi bįuḷḷu įo

‘the boy said that it wasn’t so’

§12.8.2.2.1 Reportative Object Complements

Reportative object complements are a type of hyponomous object complement phrases where the object is redefined by information that involves reporting, witnessing or mentation of some type. The subject of the finite verb is generally a fourth person. Existential predicates cannot be expressed through reportative object complement phrases. Instead, they are expressed through reportative existential copular phrases.

Reportative object complements can be expressed as a complement object phrase, in which case the reportative main verb must be transitive.

reportative object complement phrase

mipeġussi ari hủhhiḷven ai

‘it is said to smell very bad’

mibįelli deįįa ṇiṡputummen pỉlġġu

‘copper is thought to be hidden here’

tṡỉlumit mipeġussin natġus tṡamat pỉƛṇůeykit

‘it is said that there are sacred pine trees on the island’

lidnannan bakven nủn daġa

‘s/he was said to be home’

ƛidnemi sỉkaġan tṇuṡkungisit daġa

sỉkaġan tṇuṡkungisit sƛidnutumman

sỉkaġan tṇuṡkungisit ƛidnemi

‘s/he is said to have murdered her/his father’

§12.8.2.2.2 Reportative Complements

Reportative compliment phrases may also be modified so that the object compliment phrase becomes the subject of a passive infinitival or hyponomous phrase. They contain a dependent reportative phrase and in the case of negative verbs, a hyponomous negative phrase must be used. Another way to express negative reportative complements is with the use of the special abessive dependent form in -auġġit, which some analyse as an adjective and may treat it as such. The head of the compliment phrase, which is the syntactic subject, is the subject of the passive verb and the copula, and is therefore always unagentive.

Reportative forms often use the verb peġuθ- ‘tell’ in its irregular passive form, peġġutuθ- (instead of the expected *peġupputuθ-)

reportative complement phrase

ari hủssiḷḷat peġġututtun mi mảven a

ari (įỏ) hủhhiḷḷemi peġġututton mi mảven a

‘the meat is said to smell very bad’

bįellututton niṡpututtat deįįa nỏ pỉlġġu

deįįa (įỏ) ṇiṡputummen bįellututtun pỉlġġu

‘copper is thought to be hidden here’

peġġututtuat tṡỉlumit ellat naġġus tṡamat pỉƛṇůeykit

tṡỉlumit (įỏ) elvos peġġututtuat tṡamat pỉƛṇůeykit

‘it is said that there grow sacred pine trees on the island’

sƛidnututtun bidnat bakven nitanun daġa

bakven bidnanun sƛidnututtun

‘s/he was said to have returned home’

sƛidnututtun sỉkaġan nuṡkvat nủn mi vỉskun įo

sỉkaġan nuṡkvenut sƛidnututtun mi vỉskun įo

‘the widow is said to have murdered her father’

sƛidnututtun sỉkaġan nuṡkvut tủįungit mi vỉskun įo

sỉkaġan nuṡkvut tủįungit sƛidnututtun mi vỉskun įo

‘the widow is said not to have murdered her father’

sƛidntuttun illįit tṡỉlo kekkein nuįįo vaḥḥa kvaupṃa įo

tṡỉlo kekkein illįit nuįįo sƛidnututton vaḥḥa kvaupṃa įo

‘it is said that there live no bears in the west of the island’

spįeƛƛututtun ƛiggimiṡkat bakvet nủn mi kayƛƛimůn įo

bakvet ƛiggimiṡkun spįeƛƛututtun mi kayƛƛimůn įo

‘it is believed that the reindeer hunter found her/his way home after all’

§12.8.3 Reportative Existential Copular Phrases

Reportative existential copular phrases are a there-existential phrase that is expressed as reported information. They are analogous to reportative object complements but instead function as complements of the predicate of the existential copula. The complement or semantic subject of a reportative there-existiential phrase is not the subject of the main verb but rather a dependent there-existential clause, therefore ending with a copula, either the true copula or the translative copula aḷḷ-, which behaves much like in normal there-existentials – singular predicates are found with the short or impersonal copula form, and plural predicates with a plural copula form. The copula itself is commonly found in the dubitative, and it is invariably in the hyponomous order. The main verb must be converted to a dependent impersonal passive form, often dubitative as well. Reportative phrases usually contain verbs of reporting, witnessing or mentation such as lidn- ‘say’, bįell- ‘believe’, peġuθ- ‘say, tell’, tủl- ‘think’, hįiḷḷ- ‘remember’ and mid- ‘know’.

The reportative verbal phrase may instead appear before the reportative verb as a hyponomous complement clause.

Unlike reportative cocopular complements, which contain a passive verb whose subject is the head of the cocopula, in reportative existential copular phrases, there is a dummy third-person inanimate subject to the passive verb, which like in normal existential phrases agrees in number only, and the head of the cocopular phrase is in the agentive, as in normal existential phrases. Compare the following:

peġġututtuat ellat oįįa natġus pigaḳ eḷḷut

oįįa helvos peġġututtuat pigaḳ eḷḷut

oįįa peġġututtuat helvos pigaḳ eḷḷut

‘there are thought to grow poisonous plants there’

peġġututtuat oįįa pigaḳ elliski natġus

oįįa pigaḳ elliski~eḷḷut nỏs peġġututtuat~peġġututton

oįįa pigaḳ eḷḷut peġġututtuat

‘there are thought to be poisonous plants there’

impersonal passive verb |(Ø-at) | sp | copula |

tṡỉlumit peġġututtuat tṡamat pỉƛṇuokkogi natġus

tṡỉlumit tṡamat pỉƛṇuokkogi natġus peġġututtuat~peġġututtun

tṡỉlumit tṡamat pỉƛṇůeykit peġġututtuat

‘it is said that there are sacred pine trees on the island’

mi ai-t de misiḷḷuttat vaḥḥa lakka na nun mittutuppat nủįa

mituttutuppat nủįa mi ai-t de misiḷḷuttat vaḥḥa laggi na

‘there is not known to be any way to do this’

na ṡimmi-t de niṡputummen pilġi nủn bįellututtun

na ṡimmi-t de bįellututtun niṡputummen pỉlġġu

‘there was believed to be copper hidden in this lake’

a hevvi-t ba gvůakṡỉ aḷḷungo tủlututton

‘the weather is thought to have turned windy that night’

Reportative existential copular phrases cannot truly be negated. In literary or formal registers, a special abessive form of dependent/connegative verbs exists in -(att)-auġġit, which can be used, but this is not commonly heard in colloquial registers. The copula has a special abessive form in either naġauġġit or naġattauġġit, but both are rare even in formal registers – circumlocutions are favored. A negated complementised clause is usually preferred, and the impersonal passive construction is normally changed to a fourth-person construction.

na tṡỉlummi-t ba lidnututtun naġattauġġit~naġauġġit vaḥḥa ikṇi įo nun

‘it is said that there is no one inhabitant on that island’

or more commonly:

na tṡỉlummi-t ba uġun nuįįon lidnututtun vaḥḥa ikṇi įo

milidnan, įaġġun a tṡỉlumit vaḥḥa iḳni įo nuįįe

‘it is said that there is no one inhabitant on that island’

§12.9 Non-Finite Verbs

Non-finite verbs are verbs which are not conjugated for tense. Such verbs can be augmented by the semifinitive auxiliary marker -- to host polypersonal agreement markers, in which case they carry pronominal markers and a theme, but the theme is not sensitive to tense.

There are three types of non-finite verbs: copular infinitives, dependent verbs and connegative verbs. Dependent verbs always end in -at (which becomes -aϕ- for semifinitive forms). Monovalent verbs have autonomous connegative forms ending in -ϕat, and hyponomous connegative forms ending in -ϕit, while polyvalent verbs have connegative forms in -ϕut or -ϕyt (with all front or front-rounded vowels) for both autonomous and hyponomous order.

monovalentpolyvalent
autonomoushyponomous
copular-at ... cop
dependent-at
semifinitiveØ-aϕ-
connegative-ϕat-ϕit-ϕut / -ϕyt

Copular infinitive verbs are a type of infinitive verbs that behave as a noun phrase and function as a nominal argument of a finite verb. Copular infinitives are also the citation form of verbs. If an infinitive verb is an argument of a verb (subject or object), it must decline for case. This is achieved by having the main verb in its dependent form, separated by the verbal phrase and concluded by the copula followed by an independent third-person inanimate pronoun. Although the head of the copular infinitive phrase is a third-person inanimate, the infinitival phrases itself is considered a fourth person:

mibeuhogan ḷủlat pikkut nẻ na'it is nice to talk to you'

The copular infinitival phrase ḷủlat pikkut nẻ na '(the act of) speaking with you' functions as the subject of the verb appeuhogan 'one is nice'. It is the independent pronoun na that carries information about case. If the same phrase is used as an object, for example of the verb miḍ- 'like', then the head of the infinitival phrase, the independent pronoun, will be declined accordingly:

gamiha ḷủlat pikkut nẻ ai'I like talking to you'

Dependent verb forms (without a copula) can also function as subordinate infinitives to verbs, nouns or an auxiliary verb such as the polyvalent imperative auxiliary verb. Such dependent infinitives very commonly mark their relationship with the matrix verb through the kinetic initials si-/gi-. The dependent infinitival phrase has as its head the dependent verb, and the verbal phrase itself precedes the subordinate dependent verb:

nannit gineskat ṇigiḍḍin 'I forgot to ask about it'
keunįikkat nattset!'bring it along!'

Semifinitive verbs are dependent verbs which contain either polypersonal agreement markers (for example ditransitive markers), a theme, or both.

gineskapput ṇigiḍḍin'I forgot to ask you'
gegimalkassisittit ṇigiḍḍin'I forgot to give it to her/him'
simalkattsisittit gineskat ṇigiḍḍin'I forgot to ask you to give it to her/him'
orsimalkassisittit gineskassisipput ṇigiḍḍin'I forgot to ask you to give it to her/him'

Finally, as the name implies, connegative forms are used to indicate that the verb is negated. The theme of connegated verbs is found in the negative auxiliary, for example lỏbmat tủįan ‘s/he is not sleeping’ or nekkyt nuttsannat ‘I did not see you’.

The three types of non-finite constructions are shown below:

type of infinitival constructionsformfunctionexample
copular infinitivesØ-at….nẻ naThe infinitival nominal argument and citation form of a verbbeyƛissami ṛuikkįandat nảltit nẻ na
‘brushing one’s teeth is important’
dependent infinitives…si-/gi-Ø-at…The subordinate non-finite form a verbgiṛuikkįandat nảltit ṇigiḍḍin
‘I forgot to brush my teeth’
semifinitives(si/gi)-Ø-aθ-The subordinate form of a verb with polyvalency markingsnảltit siṛuikkįandat ipeġuttatṇut pigiḍḍin
‘you forgot to tell me to brush my teeth’

It is worth mentioning that the independent pronoun of a copular infinitive when it functions as a citation form is declined for agentivity. The copula itself can also be conjugated for tense, and in many cases when an copular infinitival phrase appears in a sentence with a specific temporal context, the copula will agree with the tense of the phrase in which it is embedded.

naġan nẻ na‘to be’agentive
aḷḷat nẻ na‘to become’agentive
aḷḷat nin ai‘to change’unagentive
aiṡkat Niṡkuƛit nẻ na‘to learn Pine’agentive
aiṡkat Niṡkuƛit ninnan na‘to have learned Pine’agentive
lỏmat nin ai‘to sleep’unagentive
agilỏmat nẻ na‘to go to sleep’agentive

§12.9.1 Copular Infinitives

Pine uses copular infinitives, which are a type of nominal phrase consisting of a dependent verb, a copula, and a third-person inanimate pronoun. Although they are not true infinitives in the strictest sense because the copula is finite and tends to agree in tense and mood with the clause, they serve a similar purpose. Copular infinitives are always impersonal, and the copula has a special impersonal form used in such constructions. Additionally, agency is indicated by the case marking on the third-person inanimate pronoun. The simplest copular infinitive has the following structure:

vdep ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ cop ⟫ pron

lỏm-at | nįottset | nin | ai

‘to sleep long’

siḷḷutt-at | kekvot | mi ai-t de | nẻ | na

‘to do this today’

skaipaƛƛ-at | hauddogiƛƛenet tuovo | tṡvauƛṇuƛin kỉƛu | nẻ | na

‘to cut dry wood from last year early in the morning’

siḷḷutt-at | gikekvot | mi ai-t de | ninnan | na

‘to have done this yesterday’

The case marking of the third-person inanimate pronoun in Pine can indicate the agentivity of the copular infinitive when it acts as the subject of a clause or is in its citation form without any embedding. When used in the present tense (citation form), the copula takes the form nẻ before na to indicate an agentive copular infinitive or a copular infinitive that functions as an active subject in a clause, while it takes the form nin in other cases, such as with unagentive copular infinitives that use ai (e.g. nin ai but nẻ na)

naġan nẻ na‘to be’agentive
aḷḷat nẻ na‘to become’agentive
aḷḷat nin ai‘to change’unagentive
aiṡkat Niṡkuƛit nẻ na‘to learn Pine’agentive
aiṡkat Niṡkuƛit ninnan na‘to have learned Pine’agentive
lỏmat nin ai‘to sleep’unagentive
agilỏmat nẻ na‘to go to sleep’agentive

gemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nỉn~nin ai

‘I liked cutting wood’

gemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu ninnan ai

‘I liked having cut wood’

Tense congruence is not always required or allowed with copular infinitives. If the copular infinitive is not as intimately related to the set time of the phrase, it can appear in the present – this is true of more gnomic or general statements. Compare the phrase meurrin nakvỉgat nỉn na and meurrin nakvỉgat nẻ na ‘giving birth was difficult’. With a copula in the past, the first phrase indicates a more intimate relationship between the verb and the infinitive, such that one may understand it to mean ‘giving birth was difficult (when it happened)’. The second example uses a present copula in a past sentence, which serves to make the statement more general: ‘giving birth was difficult (at that time, in those days)’. The copula of copular infinitives is usually either in a present, past or perfect tense – only the assertive tenses are common, although the future is sometimes used in autonomous clauses.

The polypersonal referent of a copular infinitive clause is the fourth person despite its third-person inanimate pronoun. For example, in na tsṃiha-t ken aiṡkat Niṡkuƛit nin ai? ‘do you like learning Pine?’, the copular infinitive is the object of the verb tsṃiha ‘you like it’, which is in the second degree prograde, meaning the object is the a fourth person, but in fact it is the third-person inanimate ai in aiṡkat….nin ai ‘to learn’.

§12.9.1.1 Negative Copular Infinitives

Negative copular infinitives differ from positive copular infinitives in two ways. The copula must be replaced by the negative auxiliary verb, and the dependent verb must be found in its connegative form instead. The negative auxiliary copula has a corresponding impersonal form. It is formed on the basis of the third-person inanimate, but lacks the progogic finals -mi/-i(n) of the third-person inanimate.

naġan nẻ na‘to be’positive
(uġun) nuįįe na‘not to be’negative
naġan ninnan na‘to have been’positive
(uġun) nuįįunge na‘not to have been’negative

vneg ⟫ (av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ neg.aux ⟫ pron

lỏb-mat | nįottset | nuįįe | ai

‘not to sleep long’

siḷḷup-put | kekvot | mi ai-t de | nuįįe | na

‘not to do this today’

skaipaƛƛ-ut| hauddogiƛƛenet tuovo | tṡvauƛṇuƛin kỉƛu | nuįįe | na

‘not to cut dry wood from last year early in the morning’

siḷḷup-put | gikekvot | mi ai-t de | nuġġi | na

‘to have done this yesterday’

gemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nỉn aigemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛyt kỉƛu nuįįen ai
‘I liked cutting wood’‘I liked not cutting wood’
gemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nuna ai gemiḍḍan skaipaƛƛyt kỉƛu nuįįungen ai
‘I liked having cut wood’‘I liked not having cut wood’
§12.9.1.2 Objects of Copular Infinitives

Because copular infinitives have a copula in their positive forms, which cannot take on polypersonal endings unless augmented by the semifinitive auxiliary marker, pronominal objects must be expressed through one of three ways. Nominal objects can stand on their own without any polypersonal endings.

The first and most common and widely accepted strategy, as well as most neutral with regard to register, is to treat pronominal objects like nominal objects, by expressing them through independent pronouns. Because the object is not congruent with any polypersonal markings, it is called a discongruent object. Independent pronouns cannot stand alone if the copular infinitive is negated, because the negative auxiliary must encode the object through polypersonal markers, and for that there must be a designated subject.

mibeuhogan palġat tsuoġne nẻ namibeuhogan palġat ai nẻ na
‘making a knife is fun’‘making it is fun’
mibeuhogan tekkaddat nemmut nẻ namibeuhogan tekkaddat ỉt nẻ na
‘seeing friends is fun’‘seeing them is fun’
midalpṃittan tsintat tsảƛen nẻ naØ

‘drinking water is healthy’

The second strategy is to transform the dependent verb of the infinitival phrase into a semifinitive verb through the semifinitive auxiliary marker --. The semifinitive verb hosts polypersonal markers. This means that an overt subject must be specified, which is usually the fourth person (without any overt pronoun) but can also be another person which has some logical antecedent in the phrase. Most speakers use a fourth person, and many do not use pronominal prefixes for the fourth person. Semifinitive copular infinitives are more common in formal registers than in colloquial registers, which tend to favour independent pronouns.

mibeuhogan palġat tsuoġne nẻ namibeuhogami palġattait nẻ na
‘making a knife is fun’‘making it is fun’
mibeuhogan tekkaddat nemmut nẻ namibeuhogan tekkaddassimmitan nẻ na
‘seeing friends is fun’‘seeing them is fun’
dalpṃivami tsintat tsảƛen nẻ naØ

‘drinking water is healthy’

The third strategy is to render the object into the possessor of the dependent form of the verb such that the dependent form appears in its possessed form. Such possessed dependent verbs represent the most formal way of marking objects of infinitives. They are not common in everyday language, perhaps with the exception of gasungeset pitekkadda nỉ na ‘it is a pleasure to meet you’ (lit. ’your meeting honors me’). Possessed dependent verbs convey a sense of respectful formality, and are mostly a literary form. This is not allowed with negative copular infinitives.

mibeuhogan palġat tsuoġne nẻ namibeuhogan palġattami nẻ na
‘making a knife is fun’‘making it is fun’
mibeuhogan tekkaddat nemmut nẻ namibeuhogan stekkaddattat nẻ na
‘seeing friends is fun’‘seeing them is fun’
uṡtalpṃittami tsintat tsảƛen nẻ naØ

‘drinking water is healthy’

Negative copular infinitives must take polypersonal endings due to the fact that the negative auxiliary must encode polypersonal markers. A dummy fourth-person pronoun is present, which has no pronominal prefix as the negative auxiliary verb lacks non-local pronominal prefixes.

mibeuhogan palġat tsuoġne nẻ namibeuhogan palġġut ủįįen a
‘making a knife is fun’‘not making it is fun’
mibeuhogan tekkaddat nemmut nẻ namibeuhogan tekkaddut tuġġimmitan a
‘seeing friends is fun’‘not seeing them is fun’
midalpṃittan tsintat tsảƛen nẻ nauṡtalpṃittan tsinttyt tsảƛen nuġġit a
‘drinking water is healthy’‘not drinking water is unhealthy’

uṡtalpṃittan tsinttyt nuįįe na

‘not drinking it is unhealthy’

§12.9.1.3 Possessives of Copular Infinitives

The subject of a copular infinitive can also act as the possessor of the infinitive clause in certain cases. For example, gamiha ṇủmava tṡẻlġġaƛƛat nin ai ‘I like my mother’s cooking’, where the implied subject of the verb is ‘my mother’, but here the subject is found in the genitive as the possessor of the copular infinitive phrase:

gvaykůt ġulġuƛƛat nẻ na

‘the wolves’ howling’

In older and more conservative language, the infinitive may be found in the possessive form relevant to the possessor. This is not common and may even be considered ungrammatical by some as it is a rare and highly literary form relegated to formal, archaic language. Negative dependent verbs cannot be possessed at all.

gvaykůt sġulġuƛƛattoat nẻ na

‘the wolves’ howling’ (lit. ‘the wolves’ their howling’)

gamiha ṇủmava satṡẻlġġaƛƛattan nin ai

‘I like my mother’s cooking’

Dependent forms of verbs can therefore be found with possessive affixes. Possessive prefixes are found directly following the semifinitive marker --, following any initials. For example, keu-raġin-at ‘to chat together’ with third-person animate plural possessive affixes becomes keu-sa-raġinatt-an (not *s-keuraġinatt-an). Possessive prefixes therefore occupy the same slot as pronominal prefixes, or slot -2.

Possessive affixes on copular infinitives are also found with copular object adjuncts and dependent object adjuncts, where the possessor refers to the subject of the copular or dependent infinitive, which is either the object of the main verb, or in the case of syllogous dependent object adjuncts, the subject:

gisigvet keusaraġinattoat nỉn ai

‘I heard them chatting together’

§12.9.1.4 Copular Infinitives as Subjects

A copular infinitive can function as the subject of an autonomous clause. The third-person inanimate independent pronoun then serves as the head of the subject phrase and declines according to the agentivity of the subject, such tha na indicates an agentive verb while ai indicates an unagentive verb. The distinction between an agentive infinitive and an unagentive infinitive is only conserved if the copular infinitive itself is in the active case and functions as the subject of a clause. This means that the semantically active case of copular infinitives has a morphologically sematic form when the verb is unagentive, but in the sematic cases, an agentive verb is identical to an unagentive verb. Copular infinitives have a third-person inanimate referent in polypersonal verbs.

asematicsematic
agentiveØ-at…nẻ naØ-at…nin ai
unagentiveØ-at…nin ai

The indicative present copula nẻ followed directly by the sematic independent pronoun ai is realised as nin ai rather than nẻ ai. This paragoge (or word-final n-epenthesis) is purely euphonic in nature.

The copular infinitive skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nẻ na ‘to cut wood’ has an agentive verb, skaip- ‘cut’, and in the first example below, it functions as the subject of the phrase and appears in the active case (…nẻ na). In the second example below, it functions as the object complement of gamiha ‘I like something’ and as such appears in the accusative case. Although it is semantically agentive, it is not morphosyntactically possible to distinguish it from a hypothetical unagentive meaning.

appeuhogan skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nẻ na

‘cutting wood is nice’

gamiha skaipaƛƛat kỉƛu nin ai

‘I like cutting wood’

As with nominal subjects, if a copular infinitive clause comes directly following a nominal object, it may be found with the definite determiner mi.

More examples of copular infinitives as subjects are given below:

mimeurran piskat nẻ na

‘listening is hard’

mimeurvi piskat nỉ na

‘listening was hard’

mimeurruṡ piskat nuṡ~nẻ na

‘listening will be hard’

miṛilgůgan aiṡkat kỉ ḷủlon nẻ na

‘learning a new language is wonderful’

ṇeṇuldeset negattsaddit nin ai

or ṇeṇuldeset negat pỉ nin ai

‘(my) seeing you hurts me’

nả mi geummot iḷḷyt miṡku na skednilġat ṛvůekket nẻ na

‘staring into the fire is the best medicine for the mind’

mimiṡkandeṡ nunnaįįỉn geummu mi skednilġat ṛvůekket nin ai

‘staring into the fire will cure the mind of anything’

§12.9.1.5 Copular Infinitives as Objects

Copular infinitives can appear as objects of autonomous clauses, in which case they behave much like their subject counterparts. The object can be the true object of a polyvalent verb, or an oblique object of a monovalent verb. The independent pronoun must be in the sematic case or any oblique case governed by the head verb. The inclusion of the mi determiner is sometimes seen, but as Pine tends to favour mi determiners on the subject, or phrase finally, this is not very common. The absence of a mi determiner in the subject phrase allows for it to appear in the object phrase, but this is not a requirement. It may be heard if the infinitival phrase has some sort of specification that distinguishes it from the plain infinitive, for example pirkaƛƛat nẻ na ‘whistling’, but it is common to hear mi pirkaƛƛat heyt nẻ na ‘whistling at night’. Copular infinitives as objects have a fourth-person referent in the verb.

gamiha tṡẻlġġat mảvi nin ai

‘I like cooking meat’

gasakṡavva heyt pirkaƛƛat nin nannit

‘I avoid whistling at night’

na tsiḷḷumma-t ke minkkat ḷinkka nin nakkut?

‘are you working on fixing the boat?’

puogga tṃairrat siṡṡidat tabnuƛat nin nannet

‘they laugh at their parents mistakes (lit. their parents being wrong) too much’

§12.9.1.6 Copular Infinitives in Oblique Cases

The use of a copular infinitives in certain oblique cases can have specific functions. For example, a copular infinitival clause whose independent pronoun is in the inessive without a head verb governing the inessive can be equivalent to a progressive present. Below are the various functions of copular infinitives in specific oblique cases. Often the main verb will be the copula in such expressions, though not always, as with the comitative.

inessive

A copular infinitive whose pronoun is in the inessive (naįįa) can carry a progressive or continual aspect. This is usually expressed by using the copula as the main verb, for example nả aiṡkat nin naįįa ‘is currently studying’. This progressive aspect is more salient and as such less common than in English, and is better understood as meaning ‘currently in the process of’. This is called the copular infinitival progressive. This can also express a concurrent action to the main verb, especially when moved clause initially through the focus particle įo.

nả minkkat ḷinkka nin naįįa ṇikkava

‘my dad is (right now in the process of) fixing the boat’

gamma migvat nin naįįa

‘I’m eating right now’

ḷủlitsat nỉktṡungit nin naįįa įo inuminan

‘s/he’s walking around chatting to people’

illative

Copular infinitives found in the illative (naįįet) can indicate an impending action. The infinitive can also be found in the negative with the adverbial initial ůḷḷ(ů)- added directly onto the connegated verb.

nỉ paitṇat nỉn naįįet mi tỏ na

‘the rock was just about to fall’

gassin tṡidnat nỉn naįįet

‘I was on the verge of tears’

gassin ůḷḷůtṡidnit ủįa naįįet

‘I was on the verge of crying, I nearly cried’

nỉt ỉginįůllat nỉn naįįet

‘they were about to give up, they nearly gave up’

elative

The elative used with copular infinitives (nannit) can indicate a reason for an action. Because reason precedes cause, it is common to have the infinitival copula in the perfective mood in such cases.

pỉƛƛiġƛussi sṇįaḷḷỉnan tṡidnat ninnan nannit mi sagvema įo

‘the man’s face was red from crying’

spįauvvi kỉltṇegat uṃṃet sṇenuan nannit mi sủmaġamin įo

‘the mother was overjoyed from finally seeing her son again’

spoḥḥiġƛummit gvaykyt ỉ ġulġaƛƛat nỉn nannit mi tsġỉdnįit ỉ

‘the mice got scared by the wolves’ howling’

comitative

The comitative (nakkut) is used with copular infinitives as a sort of adverbial infinitive, showing how something occurs.

taiṡkat piskat siṡṡidat nin nakkut mi bỉṡkegi nỉ

‘children learn by listening to their parents’

gaiṡkvet keskat nįukkut nỉn nakkut Niṡkuƛit

‘I learned Pine by reading a lot’

tsirtảts ảḍni tsindat nįukku tsảƛen a nỉn nakkut ṇinuįįukva

‘my grandmother stayed healthy by drinking a lot of water’

mihįiḷḷan kỉltsiḷḷussildat nin nakkut

‘one remembers through repetition’

essive

A copular infinitive whose independent pronoun is found in the essive (nats or ats) indicates that the infinitival clause is happening at the same time as the head verb (if in the present or some congruent tense to the main verb), or that it was already completed by the time the main verb occurs (if in the perfective) for example lulli migvat ninnan nats ‘having eaten, s/he left’, or lulli migvat ỉ nats ‘s/he left while s/he was eating’. This can also be expressed through taθ- 'be done', gimigvat tammungen~tattanun lulli 'having eaten, s/he left'.

gettsilullinetṡin mi sỉkvo na įo aṡtat ninnan nats tsattṡin

‘we left when the rain stopped’

mairvi migvat nỉ nats

‘s/he laughed as s/he was eating’

saskat ninnan nats giṡni myngavat mikkin

‘having woken up, I started getting ready’

abessive

The independent third-person inanimate pronoun found with copular infinitives has a special abessive form in (n)auġġet (or (n)auġġit), which is used to mean ‘without’. This abessive form functions as the independent pronoun of the infinitive phrase, replacing na: negat nin auġġet 'without seeing'. Eastern dialects have an abessive dependent form in -attauġġet (or -attauġġit) which can be used with dependent infinitives alone: negattauġġet 'without seeing'. For example, aḍn-uƛ-…Ø-ϕututtat nin auġġet means ‘to remain un-Ø-ed’ and lold-…Ø-ututtat nin auġġet means ‘to leave un-Ø-ed’. Forms in -ϕututtauġġet~-ϕututtauġġit also exist, which are adverbial in nature, although some speakers have reanalyzed the ending -auġġet~-auġġit as an adjective and use it in the essive: siḷḷututtauġġits loldat ai nẻ na ‘to leave it undone’ or ṡelkkututtauġġittset loldat ỉt nẻ na ‘to leave them unwashed’. Some speakers replace this by the adjective formant -ϕututt-uġġami: siḷḷututtuġġamits loldat ai nẻ na 'to leave it undone' Forms in -auġġet~-auġġit also be found attributively: aḷḷat allakkuttauġġit nin ai ‘to remind/stay/become undisturbed’ or allakkuttauġġit galba ‘undisturbed land/soil’. Predicatively, such forms must be transformed, usually as -ϕ(ut)oġuθ-: hallakkutoġuttami mi gảlppi na ‘the soil is undisturbed’.

gaṡkin piskat nỉn auġġet

gaṡkin piskattauġġet

‘I learned without listening’

haḍnuƛƛin palġġututtat nỉn auġġet mi boagve na

palġġuttauġġet(s) haḍnuƛƛin mi boagve na

‘the house remained unbuilt (without being built)’

gelolttet mikvututtat nỉn auġġet mỉkvoga

mikvuttauġġet(s) gelolttet mỉkvoga

mikvututtuġġamits gelolttet mỉkvoga

‘I left food uneaten’

galolditṡ lidnututtat nin auġġit

lidnututtauġġet(s) galolditṡ (ai)

lidnututtuġġamits galolditṡ

‘I will leave it untold’

gelolttet siḷḷututtat nin auġġet

siḷḷututtauġġet(s) gelolttet

hiḷḷutoġuttami ṇikkut ai

hiḷḷutoġuttamitṇut (ai)

‘I left it undone, I didn’t do it, I have yet to do it’

haḍnami siḷḷututtat nin~nuṡ auġġet

siḷḷututtauġġet(s) haḍnami

siḷḷututtuġġmits haḍnami

hiḷḷutoġuttami

‘it remains undone, it is yet to be done, it is left to do’

§12.9.2 Semifinitive Verbs

Semifinitive verbs are dependent verbs with a special auxiliary infix called the semifinitive auxiliary marker (sam), -- (replacing -at), which allows the attachment, of polypersonal agreement markers. Such verbs are semifinitive because they cannot be conjugated for tense, though constructions using the perfective -ung-/-ing- also exist, sometimes combining with -- as -ung-aϕ-/-ing--, and only accept hyponomous inflectional suffixes. Such verbs are unique in that the suprapositional pronoun follows the semifinitive auxiliary marker --, followed by the theme:

verb--pron-hyp.theme

As such, semifinitive verbs have their deutomeric prorrhizal elements (slot -2), pronoun affixes moved directly preceding the theme. Only medials appear between the semifinitive auxiliary marker and the root. Impersonal constructions use a zero-form fourth-person subject. Likewise, syllogous semifinitives (whose subject is the same as the matrix verb) often lack pronouns all together

Semifinitive verbs are not especially common in colloquial registers. Independent pronouns are generally preferred to semifinitive forms.

semifinitiveindependent pronouns
sinegakkisit~sinegassisit gemitṡinai sinegat gemitṡin
'I tried to see it''I tried to see it'
sipeġuttattsedappit tsỉkagaggannat daįįet ai sipeġuttat tsỉkagaggannat

'I encouraged you to tell her/him about it'

Here, the dependent verb i-peġutt-at becomes i-peġutt-aϕ-tts-isit-titipeġuttattsisittit '(for you) to see tell her/him about it'. The semifinitive auxiliary marker allows the attachment of a suprapositional pronoun -ts-, which is fortified, and immediately followed by hyponomous polypersonal agreement markers, in this case -ϕisit (3˚.hyp) and the first degree ditransitive final -tit (to her/him)

A third option to express polypersonal agreements on a dependent infinitive is through object transfer to the main verb:

object transfer

ai sinegat gemitṡinsinegat gemittṡet

'I tried to see it'

However, this may be considered awkward for some speakers, as intransitive verbs become transitive and some speakers may feel that certain intransitive verbs simply shouldn't be transitive. There is significant variation between dialects and even between speakers of the same dialect as to whether object transfer should be considered grammatical with certain intransitive verbs.

§12.9.2.1 Semiperfective Verbs

The semiperfective is a specialized derivation of the semifinitive that utilizes the perfective auxiliary marker -ungaϕ- (combination of the semifinitive -- and the transitive hyponomous perfective marker -ung-) in place of the standard --. While the standard semifinitive is aspectually neutral or contemporaneous with the governing verb, the semiperfective forms a relative past, indicating that the action of the dependent verb was completed prior to the timeframe of the finite verb.

ai gisiḷḷuttat gikoggan's/he denies doing it'
gisiḷḷuttattut gikoggan's/he denies doing it'
gisiḷḷuttungattut gikoggan's/he denies having done it'

§12.9.3 Dependent Infinitives

Beyond functioning as the subject or object of a sentence, infinitives can also function as the argument of a verb, a noun or an adjective. Such constructions are called dependent infinitives. They differ from copular infinitives in some respects. They do not end with an independent pronoun, they precede the matrix verb and often have a kinetic initial that describes an abstract relationship between the phrase governing the dependent verb and the dependent infinitive itself.

(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ kin-vdep ⟫ main verb

Niṡkuƛit | sisaiṡkat | giṡnin

‘I started learning Pine’

Niṡkuƛit | gegaiṡkat | gekakkin

‘I stopped learning Pine’

Niṡkuƛit | gegaiṡkat | gatamma

‘I have finished learning Pine’

Generally speaking, the cislocative (si(s)-) indicates some sort of positive, future or subsequent action, a goal – essentially indicates abstract prospective movement in time, goal or mode towards the main verb. Conversely, the translocative (gi-/geg-) indicates the opposite, a negative, past or previous action, a consequence or something that follows from the main verb – an abstract retrospective movement from the main verb.

Dependent infinitives can be found with both monovalent and polyvalent verbs. For example, the verb mitṡ- ‘try’ requires the cislocative with dependent infinitives: simindat gamittṡa ‘I try to come’. The verb teigg- ‘claim’ is polyvalent, and the dependent verb is found with a translocative initial: ai gisiḷḷuttat tsateiggemmat ‘I claim you to have done it’ or ‘I claim you did it’. Dependent infinitives can be found with both monovalent and polyvalent verbs. Certain verbs, for example lukk- ‘must, need, should’ take on the objects of the dependent infinitive onto themselves: sisiḷḷuttat galukket ‘I must do it’ (not *ai sisiḷḷuttat galukva or *sisiḷḷuttassisit galukva). This phenomenon is called object transfer. Only a handful of verbs require auxiliary object transfer, but object transfer can occur with almost any verb in order to avoid a semifinitive phrase.

Normally polyvalent verbs can freely appear as monovalent when they use a dependent infinitive, for example gatenget ‘I enjoy it’ but gisiḷḷuttassisit gatengva ‘I enjoy making it’. Should one want to avoid this, the object copular infinitive can be used instead: gatenget siḷḷuttat ai nin ai ‘I enjoy making it’ (lit. ‘I enjoy its making’). Object copular infinitives replacing dependent infinitives are mostly a feature of formal or literary language, but a handful of verbs require it, the most common of which is miḍ- ‘like’, for example gamiha siḷḷuttat ai nin ai ‘I like doing it’.

Dependent infinitives can themselves govern a secondary dependent infinitive. Secondary dependent infinitives can be chained endlessly, but because they come preceding the verb, a long chain of dependent infinitival phrases may be awkward.

[ai sisaskodat]2 [ṇỉ sisangat]1 pỉ sipiddegat gemitṡin

‘I tried to ask you [to help me]1 [to wake him up]2

[hautut sisaskat]3 [ai sisuktat]2 [ṇỉ sisangat]1 pỉ sipiddegat gemitṡin

‘I tried to ask you [to help me]1 [to make him]2 [wake up in the morning]3

§12.9.3.1 Negation of Dependent Infinitives

Dependent infinitives can be negated independently of their governing head, be it a verb or otherwise. By replacing the dependent or semifinitive ending -at/-- with the connegative marker, a dependent infinitive can be negated:

Niṡkuƛit sigiḍḍyt lakka

'a way not to forget Pine'

Connegative dependent infinitives cannot be semifinitive and therefore must use independent pronouns in cases of pronominal arguments.

In certain cases where the dependent infinitive refers to a different subject than that of the governing verb, so-called asyllogous dependent infinitives, negation can also be expressed through a prohibitive imperative instead of a true dependent infinitival clause. For example, ‘I dared you not to touch it’ is ai simiṡtyt tsestullįannat, but it can also be expressed with a prohibitive imperative: simiṡtyt nuttsedut tsestullįannat ‘I dared you not to touch it’ or literally ‘I dared you don’t touch it’.

(av) ⟫ (cp) ⟫ kin-vconneg ⟫ (negauxp) ⟫ main verb

vuogga | gisiḷḷupput | gatengva

orvuogga | gisiḷḷupput | nukkut | gatengva

‘I enjoy not doing anything’

ai | simiṡtyt | tsestullįannat

orsimiṡtyt | nuttsisit | tsestullįannat

‘I dared you not to touch it’

teiṡnunnit | geggipeġupput | ṇimiaġlin

orteiṡnunnit | geggipeġupput | nuttsiddut | ṇimiaġlin

‘I struggled not to tell (you) about the surprise’

§12.9.3.2 Dependent Infinitives in Interrogative Phrases

Dependent infinitives precede the head that govern them in positive and negative sentences, but when the main verb is the subject of a tag question (na...Ø-t ke), the dependent infinitive most often follows the main verb. However, the word order may remain unchanged with the exception that the interrogative particle -t ke will appear after the main verb.

non-interrogative

pỉ sisangat gemindin

'I came to help you'

interrogative

na tsemindin ke ṇỉ sisangat?

na ṇỉ sisangat tsemindin ke?

'did you come to help me?

(not na ṇỉ-t ke sisangat tsemindin?, which means 'is it me that you came to help?')

§12.9.3.3 Dependent Infinitive Kinetic Orientation

Dependent infinitives in Pine very commonly require a kinetic initial, either the translocative (gi-/geg-) or the cislocative (si(s)-). The kinetic orientation of the dependent infinitive is governed by the infinitive's head, be it a noun, a verb or an adjective. Orientation is mostly semantically determined, and can often be inferred through the temporal or modal relationship between the head and the dependent infinitive. Cislocative orientation generally indicates a prospective relationship to the head, while the translocative indicates a retrospective relationship to the head.

The table below highlights how the cislocative and translocative kinetic initials are used to indicate the orientation of the dependent infinitive in relation to the head that governs it.

cislocativetranslocative
intention
volition
intend, want, hope, wish, decide, look forward to, propose, try, be ready tocessation
failure
stop, give up, fail, be done/finished
inception
continuation
start, begin, continue, manage, hurry, end upavoidance
refusal
refuse, avoid, spare oneself, prevent, prohibit, warn
ability
possibility
can, be able, dare, suffice, be possibleretrospective mentationforget, not to remember
obligation
necessity
must, need, have toaffective stance of disalignmenthate, regret, fear, be ashamed, be bored of, long for
causation
influence
permission
advise, tell, teach, help, order, force, allow, cause, demanderror
misfortune
make the mistake of, happen to, be so unlucky as to
epistemic stanceexpect, make sure, assumespeech-acts with mismatchclaim (to have done), inform
prospective mentationremember (to do something)retrospective
logical necessity
must have (done something)
§12.9.3.3.1 Cislocative Dependent Infinitives

The following verbs commonly govern dependent infinitives with a cislocative copula:

aidd-

‘advise’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsaiddemmat

‘I advise you to do it’

aįįeg-

‘teach’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsaįįeggannat

‘I taught you to do it’

aiṡk-

‘learn’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gaiṡkin

‘I learned to do it’

alpṃ-

‘can, will, to be able to, to be willing’

na tsalpṃa-t ke sipeġuttassisitṇut?

‘can you tell me about it?’

‘might, could, would’

skeumindat galpṃa keumindat

‘I might come, I could come’

alts-

‘cause’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsaltsvannat

‘I caused you to do it’

ang-

‘help’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsangemmat

‘I helped you to do it’

sis-ank-

‘demand, request’

sisiḷḷuttassisit sittsimankemmat

‘I demand that you do it’

arġġ-

‘have time’

sisiḷḷuttassisit garġġva

‘I have enough time to do it’

balt-uttug-

‘accept’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gabaltuttuva

‘I accept to do it’

peġuθ-

‘tell’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsepeġummannat

‘I told you to do it’

bįelg-

‘trust’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsabįelgemat

‘I trust you to do it’

biltsġ-

‘order, command’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsabiltsġemmat

‘I order you to do it’

eġo-tann-

‘expect, assume’

sisiḷḷuttassisit eġogatanna

‘I expect to do it’

datt-

‘stop (somewhere)’

sisiḷḷuttassisit siskidattin

‘I stopped by to do it’

doidd-

‘propose, suggest’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsidoiddemmat

‘I suggest (to you) to do it’

dolg-

‘continue’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gadolkka

‘I continue to do it’

gattsand-

‘suffice’

simigvat gattsandami mi mảven na

‘there is enough meat to eat’

gỉƛƛ-

‘succeed’

sisiḷḷuttassisit ṇigỉƛƛin

‘I succeeded in doing it’

haḍg-

‘promise, swear’ (+ object transfer)

sisiḷḷuttat gahaḍget

‘I promise to do it’

helkk-

‘make sure’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsahelkkemmat

‘I make sure you do it’

heůkkeg-

‘know, understand, be able to manage’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gaheůkkegga

‘I know to do it’

hįiḷḷ-

‘remember’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gehįiḷḷin

‘I remembered to do it’

hįulk-elk-uƛ-

‘happen to, be so unlucky as to’

sisiḷḷuttassisit ṇihįulkelkuƛin

‘I happened/was so unlucky to do it’

patt-

‘manage, get’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gepattin

‘I managed to do it’

iltsġ-

‘force’

sisiḷḷuttassisit tsiltsġemmat

‘I force you to do it’

ind-

‘can, may, be allowed’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gindva

‘I may do it’

intt(uss)ivuθ-

‘be possible’

sisiḷḷuttassit inttivuttan

‘it is possible to do it’

isk-

‘be able to (because of ability, situation)’ (+object transfer)

sisiḷḷuttat gisket

‘I can do it’

iṡkeg-

‘start’ (+object transfer)

sisiḷḷuttat giṡkegget

‘I started to do it’

iṡn-

‘begin, start’ (+intransitive)

sitṡidnat ṇiṡnin

‘I started to cry’

kỉst-

‘hurry’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gakỉstva

‘I hurry to do it’

lag-

‘intend, want’

sisiḷḷuttassisit galagga

‘I intend to do it’

lukk-

‘must’ (+object transfer)

sisiḷḷuttat galukket

‘I must to do it’

ỉ-ƛigged-

‘decide’

sisiḷḷuttassisit ỉgeƛiggedin

‘I decided to do it’

maḍ-

‘like’ (+dep.inf, +cop.inf)

gamaḍḍa siḷḷuttassisit nin ai

sisiḷḷuttassisit gamaḍḍa

‘I like doing it’

mitṡ-

‘try’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gemitṡin

‘I tried to do it’

myngyθ-

‘be ready to’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gamyngymma

‘I am ready to do it’

nįav-

‘use’

misiḷḷuttassisit ganįavet

‘I use it to do it’

nįỏdnim-

‘get, succeed, manage’

sisiḷḷuttassisit genįỏdnimin

‘I managed to do it’

ỏḥ-

‘need, must’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gỏḥḥa

‘I need to do it’

radn-

‘end up’

sisiḷḷuttassisit ṇiradnin

‘I ended up doing it’

saiįį(e)-

‘must’

simigat haiįįami

‘it must be true’

‘may, might’

simigat haiįįỏmi

‘it might be true’

sasƛ-

‘be responsible’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gasasƛva

‘I am responsible to do it’

skag-

‘be able to (because of knowledge), know how to’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gaskagga

‘I can/know how to do it’

skan-

‘want’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gaskanna

‘I want to do it’

stullį-

‘dare’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gastullįova

‘I dare to do it’

ỉl-teṃṃis-

‘look forward to’

sisiḷḷuttassisit ỉltṇiteṃṃissa

‘I am looking forward to do it’

ten-

‘look, want, intend, will’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gatenna

‘I am looking to do it, I will do it’

tsabb-

‘hope’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gatsabba

‘I hope to do it’

tung-

‘must, to have to, shall, will’

sipiskat tsatungva

‘you must listen’

‘should, ought to, would’

sipiskat tsatungỏ

‘you ought to listen’

tṡibm-

‘wish’

sisiḷḷuttassisit gatṡibma

‘I wish to do it’

ukt-

‘put, make, cause'

sitủladdat ṇuktvaddit

‘it made me think’

§12.9.3.3.2 Translocative Dependent Infinitives

The following verbs commonly govern dependent infinitives with a translocative copula:

aihh-

‘make the mistake of’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇaihhin

‘I made the mistake of doing it’

aṡt-

‘stop’ (+monovalent)

gisiġġat aṡtvi

‘it stopped raining’

taθ-

‘be done, finished’ (+ object transfer)

gisiḷḷuttat gatasset

‘I am done/have finished doing it’

dav-

‘ask’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gedavin

‘I asked to do it’

eṡkv-

‘refuse’

gisiḷḷuttassisit geṡkva

‘I refuse to do it’

gaiḥḥ-

‘need, require’ (inverted valency +object transfer)

gisiḷḷuttat ṇegaiḥḥeset

‘I need to do it’

giḍḍ-

‘forget’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gegiḍḍin

‘I forgot to do it’

giugg-

‘avoid’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gagiukva

‘I avoid doing it’

giugg-uttug-

‘spare onself, manage to avoid’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gegiugguttugin

‘I spared myself doing it’

kaikỉn-

‘be careful’ (+neg, +object transfer)

gisiḷḷupput gakaikỉnet

‘I am careful not to do it’

kakk-

‘stop’ (+polyvalent)

gisiḷḷuttassisit gekakkin

‘I stopped doing it’

ƛeid-

‘need, (logically) have to'(+object transfer)

gisiḷḷuttat gaƛeidet

‘I must have to do it’

mieg-

‘inform, instruct’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsemieggannat

‘I informed you to do it’

miaġl·(alk)-

‘struggle’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇemiaġla

‘I struggle to do it’

ỉ-gi-nįůll-

‘give up’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ỉgegginįůllin

‘I gave up doing it’

notst-

‘prevent’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsenotstvannat

‘I prevented you from doing it’

ruġt-

‘hate’

gisiḷḷuttassisit garuġtva

‘I hate doing it’

sakṡ-

‘warn’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsesakṡannat

‘I warn you not to do it (lit. from doing it)’

skukk-isƛuθ-

‘tire, get bored of’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇeskukkisƛumma

‘I get tired/bored of doing it’

tabn-uƛ-

‘fail, make the mistake of’

gisiḷḷuttassisit getabnuƛin

‘I failed/made the mistake of doing it’

teigg-

‘claim (someone to)’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsateiggemmat

‘I claim that you have done it’

teigg-attag-

‘claim (to)’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gateiggattava

‘I claim to have done it’

teng-

‘enjoy’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gatengva

‘I enjoy doing it’

tents-

‘long for’

gisiḷḷuttassisit gatenttsa

‘I long to do it’

tserġġ-isteg-

‘motivate, incite, encourage’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsatserġġistegemat

‘I encourage you to do it’

tyġ-

‘prohibit, forbid’

gisiḷḷuttassisit tsatyġemmat

‘I forbid you from doing it’

vass-

‘feel/be ashamed’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇevassa

‘I am ashamed to do it’

vesk-

‘regret’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇeveskva

‘I regret doing it’

vokk-

‘fear, be afraid of’

gisiḷḷuttassisit ṇevokva

‘I am afraid of doing it’

§12.9.3.4 Dependent Infinitives as Non-Verbal Arguments

Just as verbs can govern a dependent infinitives, certain nouns, adverbs and adjectives can do the same. Such dependent infinitives behave exactly alike regardless of the category of that which governs them. For example, the word lakka ‘way’ can govern a cislocative dependent infinitive: misiḷḷuttassiat lakka ‘a way to do it’, milullat dallįi ‘a time to leave’, gisiḷḷuttassiat altsin ‘a reason to do it’.

When the dependent infinitive is semifinitive, the hierarchical anchor point for polypersonal alignment is a fourth-person subject. In the example misiḷḷuttass-iat lakka 'a way to do it', the alignment is a hyponomous first degree prograde, which with a fourth-person anchor point yields a third-person inanimate object (1˚: 4⟫3i)

uġun voaḥḥa seuvu sihillỉgat lakka na nukki

[ˈʊɣʊn ˈwɑːʔːɑ ˈsɛu̯wʊ sɪˈhɪlːiːgat ˈlaʰkɑ nɑː ˈnʊʰkɪ]

uġun voaḥḥa seuv-u si-hillỉg-at lakka-Ø na nu=kk-i

cop.conneg no river-acc cis-cross-dep way-act pron.3i neg.aux.nloc.pst

‘there was no way to cross the river’

nả silidnassiat huṡƛvemi lakka mi na-t de

‘this is a disrespectful way of saying it’

gvaįįet nả ỏhakittṡu gisiḷḷupput ga-t altsin na

‘there is always some reason not to do something’

milullat dảlįen sitṡidnan iskat kủkin

‘I couldn’t find the right time to leave’

§12.9.3.5 Syllogous & Asyllogous Dependent Infinitives

There are two types of dependent infinitives depending on the relationship between the subject of the main verb and the implied or overt subject of the dependent infinitive. Syllogous dependent infinitives are infinitives whose subject is the same as that found in the matrix verb, for example: sisiḷḷuttassisit gatsappa ‘I hope to do it’, where gatsappa ‘I hope’ and sisiḷḷuttassisit are syllogous, or have the same subject, the first person singular in this case. Asyllogous dependent infinitives have a subject which differs from the main verb. In most cases, the object of the main verb migrates to the role of the subject of the dependent infinitive (if the main verb is polyvalent) or simply introduced in the dependent infinitive, for example: sisiḷḷuttassisit tsidoiddemmat ‘I suggest you do it’ (lit. I suggest to you your doing it’). Here, the object of the main verb is the second person, which is the subject of the dependent infinitive. As the subject of the main verb and the subject of the dependent infinitive differ, the dependent infinitive is termed asyllogous. However, because both the first and second person behave identically with regard to the infrapositional object, there is no real need to specify the subject of the semifinitive verb. When this is not the case, the semifinitive form of the verb with a suprapositional pronoun is recommended:

sisiḷḷuttattait gidoiddi'I suggest s/he do it'

Because the dependent infinitive has polypersonal alignment markers and the overt reference point of the main verb is the first person, the semifinitive marker takes a pronoun (-t-) to specify what the second degree prograde marker -ait- is in reference to – the third-person animate.

§12.9.3.6 Asyllogous Imperatives

Asyllogous dependent infinitives have a corresponding imperative form called asyllogous imperative infinitives, both declarative and prohibitive. The imperative auxiliary copula comes after the connegated verb. Some speakers avoid this construction as the imperative auxiliary is normally not found in hyponomous clauses, and they may lack hyponomous inflections of the imperative auxiliary copula completely. The presence of the kinetic initial is also facultative, or at least subject to some debate. When instead of an imperative, a simple dependent infinitive is used, the kinetic initial is present. Instead, the imperative is embedded into a complementised clause. Such constructions only apply when a wish or command compatible with an imperative is used, generally only with verbs that command an optative subordinate clause, which are often introduced with the optative complementiser įus.

nả mi ṇiġảġġaįedda gepalġinat tsukṇi na, namat (g)ipeġupput nuttsohiat tsesakṡaddit

nả mi ṇiġảġġaįedda gepalġinat tsukṇi na, namat tsesakṡaddit įuġus gipeġupput nuttsohehun

‘this is a knife I gave to my brother, which I warned you not to tell him about’

nả mi ṇiġảġġaįedda gepalġinat tsukṇi na, namat (g)ipeġuttat nattsiat tsesakṡaddit

nả mi ṇiġảġġaįedda gepalġinat tsukṇi na, namat tsesakṡaddit įus ipeġuttat nattsehun

‘this is a knife I gave to my brother, which I warned you to tell him about’

or

nả mi ṇiġảġġaįedda gipalġinat tsukṇi na, namat gipeġuttattsiat tsesakṡaddit

‘this is a knife I gave to my brother, which I warned you to tell him about’

§12.9.3.7 Dependent Infinitives As Heads of Postpositions

Dependent infinitives may be the head of a postpositional phrase. Copular infinitives can be found with postpositions, whose head is the third-person inanimate pronoun, as in siḷḷuttat ai nin ai gảhi ‘worth doing it’. Because dependent infinitives cannot be the head of a postpositional phrase (as they are neither nouns, adjectives or pronouns and cannot be declined for case), postpositions instead appear directly following the dependent or connegative verb. In modern Pine, the dependent form is unchanged, meaning the postpositions do not govern any specific case – such postpositions are called dependent postpositions. In older stages of the language, dependent forms of verbs found as heads of postpositional phrases had a special genitive-like ending in -on/-ůn, which is occasionally still found in modern Pine, though it is no longer productive and now relegated to fixed expressions, such as naġon įu nỏmi ‘for the time being, at present, as things are now’.

Dependent postpositions are mostly found in infinitival phrases that have a semantically adverbial function in the clause where they are found, and often appear with an impersonal copula. They tend to be separated from the rest of the clause by moving before it.

(249)The most common dependent postpositions are listed here:
(250)aggensi- ‘as soon as (+opt as soon as it starts…)’
agỉngi- ‘since’
agỉtsi- ‘until’
hỉtsi- ‘in order to’
hỉngi- ‘because, due to’
įu‘when, if, should, in the event of’
giḷḷusi- ‘before’
la(ġa)t‘by, in Ø way’
maḍḍugi- ‘after’
teni(gi-) ‘despite’
bidnats sisiġġat aggen bakvet
[ˈbɪʔtnat͡s sɪˈsɪɣːah ˈakːɛn ˈbaʰkɛt]
bidn-ats si-siġġ-at aggen bakv=et
return-imp.2.sg cis-rain-dep as.soon.as home.illat
‘come home as soon as it starts raining’
(251)keggededdet siġġinga sikvẻvat agỉn
[ˈkɛkːɛdɛtːɛt ˈsɪɣːɪŋːɑ sɪˈkeːwah ˈɑːgiːn]
kegge=deddet siġġ-inga si-kvẻv-at agỉn
every.day rain-3i.perf transl-cis-arrive-dep since
‘it’s rained every day since I got here’
(252)siṡivvas sitserġġisƛuttat agỉt
[sɪˈʃɪʋːas sɪˈt͡sɛrːɣɪsːt͡ɬʊʰtah ˈɑːgiːt]
si-ṡivv-as si-tserġġisƛuθ-at agỉt m=itts=anu
cis-stay-imp.2.sg cis-recover-dep until
‘stay here until you’ve recovered’
(253)sṇįůarenamin siradnittat ahỉt ikset ƛvuonƛen Eįįak
[ˈstɲ̊øœ̯rɛnɑːmɪn sɪˈraʔtnɪʰtah ˈɑːhiːh ˈɪkːsɛt ˈt͡ɬʷuʊ̯n̥ːt͡ɬɛn ˈɛjːak]
s-nįůar-en-amin si-radn-iθ-at ahỉt įo Ø-iks-vet ƛvuonƛ-en Eįįak-Ø
poss.3a-suffering-acc-poss.3o cis-stop-semel-dep for 3a.ag.pst-shoot-3˚.pst injured.animal-acc Eįįak-act
‘Eįįak shot the injured animal in order to end its suffering’
(254)ginįorrulġat ahỉn ikset ƛvuonƛen Eįįak
[gɪˈɲɔrːʊɬːxah ˈɑːhiːn ˈgɛkːɪn jɔ ˈɪkːsɛt ˈt͡ɬʷuʊ̯n̥ːt͡ɬɛn ˈɛjːak]
gi-nįorr-ulġ-at ahỉn Ø-iks-vet ƛvuonƛ-en Eįįak-Ø
transl-suffer-dur-dep because 3a.ag.pst-shoot-3˚.pst injured.animal-acc Eįįak-act
‘Eįįak shot the injured animal because it was suffering’
(255)lullat įu gipeġussittṡupput
[ˈlʊlːat jʊ gɪˈpɛːɣʊsːɪt͡ʃʊʰpʊt]
lull-at įu gi-i-peġuθ-ittṡ-upput
leave-dep when 1.ag-kin-tell-3˚.loc.fut-2.io
‘I will tell (about it) you when/if I leave’
(256)lullat giḷḷu mindas ṇibimedda
[ˈlʊlːat ˈgɪɬːʊ ˈmɪt͡sːʊ ˈmɪnːdas n̥ɪˈbɪːmɛtːɑ]
lull-at giḷḷu mind-as ṇi-bim-et-va
leave-dep before come-imp.2.sg poss.1-home-illat-poss.loc
‘come to my house before leaving’
siḷḷuttat laġat illusit naiṡkaƛƛan
[ˈsɪɬːʊʰtat ˈlɑːɣat noː ˈɪlːʊːsɪt ˈnæɪ̯ʃːkat͡ɬːan]
siḷḷuθ-at laġat i=llusit n-aiṡk-aƛƛ-an
do-dep by best.adv 4-learn-freq-nloc.prs
‘we learn best by doing’
(257)unut gisiġġat eġot puƛṃoḍḍoat ṇůeykit
[ˈʊːnʊt gɪˈsɪɣːah ˈɛːɣɔt ˈpʊt͡ɬːpm̥ɔðːɑːt ˈn̥ɛy̯kɪt]
unut gi-siġġ-at eġot gegg-ỏ h-vuƛṃoḍḍ-oat ṇůeyk-it
first transl-rain-dep after 3i.unag-have.leaves.open.up-3i.pl.prs tree-pat.pl
‘leaves open up for the first time after it rains’

ihe gikvůaƛƛeṡṡat teni, nả-t tġva skekvot hikva vaihegi

[ˈɪːhɛ gɪˈkᶣøœ̯t͡ɬːɛʃːat ˈtɛːnɪ gɪˈnɪːn næːx ͜ xʷɑ ˈskɛʰkʷɔt ˈhɪʰkʷɑ ˈɥæɪ̯hɛːgɪ]

ihe gi-kvůaƛƛeṡṡ-at teni gi=nin nả-t–t tġva si=kekvot hikva vaihi-Ø-gi

quite transl-be.cloudy-dep despite cop.nloc.pl part today good air-act-pl

‘despite the fact that it’s quite cloudy, it’s a beautiful day today’

Dependent postpositional infinitive constructions can equally be expressed by conjunctions instead. However, conjunctive clauses must follow the main or autonomous clause, which makes them less flexible in terms of their position in a sentence.

mindats ṇibimedda giḷḷu tsƛullo

(258)[ˈmɪnːdat͡s n̥ɪˈbɪːmɛtːɑ ˈgɪɬːʊ ˈt͡st͡ɬʊlːɔ]
mind-ats ṇi-bim-et-va giḷḷu ts-lull-o
come-imp.2.sg poss.1-home-illat-poss.loc before 2.ag-leave-loc.hyp.dub
‘come to my house before you leave’

§12.10 Modality

Modality, the framing of a statement in relation to some knowledge or understand (epistemic modality), necessity or duty (deontic modality), ability or possibility (dynamic modality) and logical necessity (alethic modality) is indicated through various verbs and particles in Pine. This section outlines the various forms that such modalities can take.

§12.10.1 Epistemic Modal Verbs

Epistemic modality concerns reality, and how knowledge or understanding of the reality of a statement is assessed, and epistemic modal verbs vary in their strength. Epistemic modal verbs include verbs of epistemic possibility such as ind- ‘can’, saiįį(e)- ‘may, might’ or epistemic necessity such as saiįį(e)- ‘must’ or įus įa (often įus ga įa, įuska įa, i nus gi, nuski) ‘ought, should’ and įul įa ‘could, might’. Modal verbs which convey epistemic modalities are given below.

epistemic modality

įul įa(pot)‘could, might (epistemic possibility)’
(+pot)įul įa simindulin

‘s/he might come, could come’

įul įa eset nulin

‘it might be so, it could be so’

įus (ga) įa~įuska įa(opt)‘ought, should (epistemic necessity)’
(+opt)įus įa simindusin

‘s/he ought to come in, should come in (prediction)’

įuska įaġa skekvot siġġi-t vis ủįusin

‘it shouldn’t rain tomorrow (prediction)’

ind-(ind)‘may, be allowed, can (epistemic/dynamic possibility)’
(+si-)simindat tsindva

‘you may/can come in’

(-t įi)‘might, probably (can), can (polite)’

na gindva-t ke įi simitṡat?

‘might I try?’

(dub)‘is probable, is likely’

simindat tsindvu

‘you can (probably) come in’

int-t(uss)ivu-(ind)‘be possible (due to circumstances, permisson, possibility)’
(+si-)sinaġan intt(uss)ivutta

‘it may be, it can be, it’s possible’

int-t(ut)oġu-(ind)‘not be possible (due to circumstances, permission, possibility)’
(+gi-)ginaġan intt(ut)oġuttami

‘it can’t be, it’s impossible’

saiįį-(ind)‘must (due to epistemic certainty, no other outcome)’
(+si)simindat saiįįan

‘s/he must come in (any other outcome is impossible)’

(ga)‘surely…’

sibįunnaƛƛa-t ga pisaiįįů

‘surely you’re joking’

(+si)(dub)‘may, might (lower level epistemic possibility)’

eset ga-t įi sinaġan haiįįů

‘this might (indeed) be true’

simindat tsaiįįůn

‘s/he might come’

ƛeid-(ind)‘must, have to (logically, evidently)
(+gi +object transfer)giskukkisat tsƛeidda

‘you must be tired’

gegiskat gaƛeidet

‘I must be able to do it, I should be able to do it’

§12.10.2 Deontic Modal Verbs

Deontic modality concerns the necessity, requirement or obligation of a statement. They include verbs of deontic necessity, such as lukk- ‘must’, tung- ‘have to, must’ and gaiḥḥ- ‘need’.

deontic modality

gaiḥḥ-(ind)‘need, must, be required to (deontic necessity, requirement, lack)’
(+gi-)gegilgit ṇegaiḥva
(inverse when transitive)‘I need to go’

na pigaiḥḥesen ken aṇṇohemit?

‘do you need mittens?’

ƛeyġ-(ind)‘need, must, be required to (deontic necessity, requirement, lack)’
(+gi-)gegilgit ṇeƛeyġġa
(inverse when transitive)‘I need to go’

na piƛeyġesen ken aṇṇohemit?

‘do you need mittens?’

lukk-(ind)‘must, have to (strong or neutral deontic necessity, obligation)’
(+si-, +object transfer)sisiḷḷuttat tsƛukket

‘you have to/must do it’

ỏḥ-(ind)‘have to, must, need (deontic obligation, duty, requirement)’
(+si-)ṇỉ sisangat tsỏḥḥa

‘you have to help me’

sisilgat gỏḥḥa

‘I have to go’

gỏḥet

‘I need it, I require it’

(unag)‘have to, must, be required (strong deontic duty, moral duty)’

sisilgat ṇỏḥḥa

‘I must go (it is my moral duty)’

tung-(ind)‘must, have to, will, shall (strong exterior deontic necessity)’
(+si-)silỏmat tsatungva

‘you must/shall sleep’

(opt)‘should, ought, would (lesser deontic exterior deontic necessity)’

silỏmat tsatungvu

‘you ought to sleep, you should sleep’

(+si-)(neg)‘mustn’t, shall not, may not (strong deontic impermissibility)’

deįįa sinaġan tunkkat nuttsa

‘you mustn’t be here, you’re not allowed to be here’

§12.10.3 Dynamic Modal Verbs

Dynamic modality is concerned with the ability or possibility for a statement, and includes verbs such as isk- ‘can (due to ability or circumstances)’, skag- ‘can, know how (due to knowledge)’, alpṃ- ‘can, be able, be willing (due to ability or will)’, tsiv- ‘can, have permission, be allowed, be possible’ and ind- ‘can, may, be allowed’.

alpṃ-(ind)‘can, will, be able, be willing’
(+si)na tsalpṃa-t ken ṇỉ sisangat?

‘can you help me, are you able/willing to help me?’

(+si)(pot)‘might, could, would be able, would be willing’

simindat galpṃulut

‘I might come (I haven’t decided if I want to)’

isk-(ind)‘can (due to ability, or circumstances)’
(+si +object transfer)sisiḷḷuttat tiska

‘s/he can do it (it’s possible for her/him)’

ind-(ind)‘may, be allowed, can (dynamic possibility)’
(+si-)simindat tsindva

‘you may/can come in’

skag-(ind)‘can (due to knowledge)’
(+si)pỉ sisangat gaskagga

‘I can help you (because I know how to)’

na tsaskage-t ke Niṡkuƛidetṡin?

‘do you speak Pine?’

tůlġ-(ind)‘can (due to skill, ability, general)’
(+si)pỉ sisangat gatůlġġa

‘I can help you (because I know how to)’

na tsatůlġe-t ke Niṡkuƛidetṡin?

‘do you speak Pine?’

tsiv-/tsen-(ind)‘can, get, have permission or possibility to (deontic possibility)’
(+si-)na skeumindat gatsivva-t ke?

‘do I get to come along?’

iset ṇikkut silủbmat tsedna-t ga tsuttsa

‘you don’t get to speak like that to me’

§12.10.4 Alethic Modal Verbs

Alethic modality is concerned with the logical necessity of a statement, and includes verbs such as gaiḥḥ- ‘must, need’, ƛeyġ- 'need, have to' intt(ut)oġu- ‘can’t’ and saiįį(e)- ‘must’, which all indicate a logical necessity or impossibility. The alethic modality is evident from the future tense on the copula, which is not found in other modalities.

gaiḥḥ-(ind)‘need, must, be required to (alethic necessity)’
(+gi-)gimigat gaiḥvami mi na-t de

‘this needs to be true’

ƛeyġ-(ind)‘need, must, be required to (alethic necessity, general)’
(+gi-)gimigat ƛeyġami mi na-t de

‘this needs to be true’

int-t(ut)oġuθ-(ind)‘can’t (alethic impossibility)’
(+si-)simigat hintt(ut)oġuttami mi na-t de

‘this can’t be true’

saiįį(e)-(ind)‘must (alethic necessity)’
(+si)simigat haiįįami mi na-t de

‘this must be true’

§12.11 Focus & Topic Marking

Focusing and topicalization are two similar processes in Pine, both of which require changes in the ordering of constituents and special markers. Pine does not allow free scrambling, or re-ordering of constituents in any order without particles.

§12.11.1 Focus Marking

Focus is a process by which information is contrasted and isolates information. In English, focus is often realised prosodically, meaning that which is focused will be strongly stressed in the phrase, for example ‘I caught a salmon (not a trout)’, or ‘I caught a salmon (and did not buy)’. Pine on the other hand realises focus syntactically with the help of particles and movement. The focus marker in Pine is įo [jɔ] (or įe before the third-person animate pronoun įo), and although it has other functions, when used as a focus marker, it requires movement of its head clause-initially. It was originally an unstressed form of the third-person animate pronoun įo [jɔː] but unlike it, its vowel is short – this is not distinguished in writing and it can therefore be difficult to know whether įo should be pronounced [jɔ] or [jɔː], but context always makes it clear (for example įo įo is always [jɔː jɔ] and the first įo can only be interpreted as the third-person animate pronoun. Some speakers have a focus particle in įe when directly following the third-person animate įo such that įo įo becomes įo įe.

fIt is found directly after its head. In the case where the focus marker is not found in final position of the focused phrase, it can be repeated at the end of the phrase – Pine strongly prefers to isolate the whole phrase which is moved clause-initially, even if the actual focus marker may not be found phrase-finally. A secondary focus marker, i, is used to fill the phrase-final position which is left empty when the focus marker įo~įe does not appear, but in colloquial registers a second įo~įe can be used. For example, the phrase gami va ṇinennengeva ‘my friends and I’ must be moved clause initially as a whole, but either or both parts can be focused individually – gami įo va ṇinennengeva i ‘my friends and I’ is not the same as gami va ṇinennengeva įomy friends and I’. To focus only ‘my friends’, the word order must be changed – ṇinennengeva įo va gami i my friends and I’.

gebaḍven gỉktṡema‘I caught a salmon’
gỉktṡema įo gebaḍven‘I caught a salmon
gebaḍven įo gỉktṡema‘I caught a salmon’
gami įo gebaḍven gỉktṡemaI caught a salmon’
gami įo va ṇinennengeva įo~i gebaḍves gỉktṡema‘my friends and I caught a salmon’
gami va ṇinennengeva įo gebaḍves gỉktṡemamy friends and I caught a salom’
mįa įo gỉktṡema įo įe~i gebaḍven‘I caught one/a salmon’

Clefting can be used for focus but it is much less common, and makes use of restrictive relative clauses:

nả giṡkin mi gebatvisin a ‘it is a salmon that I caught’
gamma gami mi gỉktṡema batvun įo‘it is I who caught a salmon’
nả baḍvat gỉktṡema nẻ na mi gesiḷḷuppisin a‘what I did was catch a salmon’

§12.11.2 Topic Marking

Topicalization is semantically closely related to focusing, and is likewise syntactically marked rather than purely prosodically. The topic of a phrase can be thought of as the subject or that about which the sentence or utterance is centred or focused on. Topicalization can be non-contrastive in nature, but it can also be used to specify a single topic out of many possible other topics. Topicalization is expressed by the particles a Ø-t da, or Ø-t da. Determiners often cause the a to be dropped. Many speakers use an Ø-t da if an is followed by a vowel. A topicalised word or phrase can be either moved out of the phrase and placed clause-initially, clause-finally, or it can be duplicated and moved to either end. That is, the topic can appear twice, once topicalised and once non-topicalised. Clause-initial topicalization differs somewhat from clause-final topicalization in the level of emphasis. In many cases, clause-initial topicalization of obligate arguments, for example the subject of the copula, entails the presence of the topic both in the topicalised phrase and in the main clause to avoid an empty subject in the clause. For example, *mi įo-t de-t da, nả kammi? ‘who is this?’ is not grammatical because the subject is missing in the main clause, and thus a subject, įo or alternatively na, must be included: mi įo-t de-t da, nả kammi įo~na? ‘who is this?’. Because in clause-final topicalization, the subject remains at the end of the clause, it is not necessary to reduplicate the subject, but it may be done anyways. For example, one can both say nả kammi, mi įo-t de-t da? or nả kammi įo, mi įo-t de-t da? ‘who is this?’. As such, topicalization in Pine does not really move the topic out of the phrase but rather reduplicates it and inserts it either before or after the clause.

As a general and by no means universally applicable rule, clause-initial topicalization tends to be more emphatic, while clause-final topicalization can indicate a more reflective or contemplative topic, especially in questions. In statements rather than questions, clause-final topicalization can be used to convey a sort of mitigative, explanatory or otherwise less emphatic topic, surprise or that the speaker is wondering about the topic. Clause-final topicalization is usually obligate in non-independent clauses where topic movement is not possible clause initially. In cases where word order prevents movement, the focus marker įo~įe can be used with the topic markers.

mi įo-t de-t da, nả kammi įo?‘who is this?’
nả kammi (įo), mi įo-t de-t da?‘who is this?

a Ỉkakỉ-t da, nả kammi įo?

nả kammi (įo), a Ỉkakỉ-t da?‘who is Ỉkakỉ?’
gamidda, nammi nin įo, mi įo-t de-t da‘I know who this is’
gamidda, mi įo-t de-t da įo nammi nin įo‘I know who this is’

In the examples above, the clause-initial topicalization indicates that the speaker is asking about a specific person, perhaps pointing them out. The clause-final topicalization shows that the speaker is wondering about, reflecting on, is surprised about or (politely) requesting an explanation as to who this person is. For example, a parent pointing out a person to their child is more likely to use clause-final topicalization to express or encourage reflection on the topic.

These nuances can be very slight and are not completely universal. Some speakers may prefer clause-initial or clause-final topicalization irrespective of the possible differences in reading given above.

§12.11.2.1 Topic Contrast

There also exist secondary topic markers which are used to introduce a new topic. These markers are always contrastive and nature, and indicate a switch of topic from something previously topicalised to something which hasn’t been topicalised up to that point. The markers are a Ø-t ƛa, where a is also often dropped in the presence determiners. Because of the inherently more contrastive meaning of these topic markers, they tend to be found clause initially for emphasis.

gamidda kin, nin nammi įo, mi įo-t de-t da, mitty-t ƛu nukka, nin nammi mi įo-t ni-t ƛa

‘I know who this is, but I don’t know who that is.

a gami-t ƛa, miḍḍyt nủket

‘I, on the other hand, don’t like it’

mi įo-t de-t da, nả ṇikkava įo va mi įo-t de-t ƛa, nả ṇummava įo

‘this is my father, and this is my mother’

§12.12 Questions & Answers

There are three main types of questions found in Pine: polar (or tag) questions, alternative questions and non-polar questions, which are formed by using interrogatives and are described in sections §12.5.1.6 and §12.3.7.7. Each question type has specific syntactic rules. Much like topic and focus, interrogation is indicated syntactically more than prosodically in Pine.

§12.12.1 Polar Questions

Polar questions are questions which either have a positive or a negative answer – yes/no questions. Polar questions are formed by the use of interrogative markers, and Pine distinguishes positive from negative polar questions, as well as a few more types. Polar questions can either be answered by echoing the subject of the question (and if there is a topicalised argument, it is often reiterated), with aįi~ai~įi ‘yes’ for a positive answer, oat~oaḥḥa~ủt~ủḥḥu ‘no’ for a negative answer, or both. In the case of a negative answer containing a negated verb, some speakers only include the connegative form of the verb and drop the negative auxiliary. Negative questions cannot be answered positively with either aįi or ai but rather with oiḷḷu~aiḷḷů or more emphatically aįi-t ḷeů, ai-t ḷeů. Many speakers also use the emphatic marker -t ḷeů with oat~oaḥḥa~oaḥo~oaḥoa to answer a negative polar question negatively, either as oa-t ḷeů (oaḷḷeů, eůḷḷeů) or occasionally oa-t ḷỏ (oaḷḷỏ).

a tsami-t da, na tsƛulla-t ke kekvot?

‘what about you, are you leaving today?’

aįi, [(a gami-t da) galulla (kekvot)]

‘yes, (me) I’m leaving tomorrow’

ủt, [(a gami-t da) lullat (kekvot) (nukka)]

‘no, (me) I’m not leaving tomorrow’

a tsami-t da, nu tsuttsa-t ko kekvot lullat?

‘what about you, are you not leaving today?’

aįi-t ḷeů, [(a gami-t da) galulla (kekvot)]

‘yes, (me) I’m leaving tomorrow’

ủt (ḷeů), [(a gami-t da) lullat (kekvot) (nukka)]

‘no, (me) I’m not leaving tomorrow’

It is possible to mitigate answers to polar questions by using particles to lower the confidence in the answer, for example by using aįi-t įi~aįiįįi ‘yes, I guess’ or oat įi~oaįįi ‘no, I guess not’, aįi-t di~aįiddi~aiddi ‘yes, probably, or oat di~oaddi ‘no, probably not’ and aįi-n důt~aįiddůt~aiddůt~aindůt ‘apparently yes’ and oat důt~ảddůt ‘apparently not’.

§12.12.1.1 Positive Polar Questions

Positive polar questions are questions that are not semantically negative, and in most cases they do not contain any negation, but negation can still occur in certain, albeit rare cases.

The positive polar interrogative markers are na…(-t) ke(n), where ke appears as ken before a vowel. In most cases, (-t) ke appears directly following the first word (or rather the first head of a phrase) of the clause, but it may also appear at the end of a phrase if there is no movement involved in the question – this is only allowed if there is no movement, or if movement is due to clause-initial topicalization. The particle (-t) ke(n) can before information that is not being asked about, for example na tsƛulla-t ke kekvot? ‘are you coming today?’ can imply that it is known the leaving is happening today, but not whether ‘you’ are doing it, while na tsƛulla kekvo-t ke? can imply that the question is both about whether the person is leaving and whether it is today. The topic of the polar question must thus be moved clause initially, which can require the focus particle įo, which functions as a clause-initial movement-enabling particle and does not necessarily indicate focus but often does. In more formal language, interrogative markers do not require focus particles for clause-initial movement. The topic of the question can thus be found with the focus particle įo, without it, or it can also be re-iterated with topicalization either clause initially or clause finally. The interrogative markers na…(-t) ke(n) and the topicalization markers a…-t da can co-occur as na….-t da-t ke, but it is more common for the interrogation particle (-t) ke(n) to be pushed clause-finally if a topicalised argument exists clause-initially. If (-t) ke(n) is not pushed back clause finally, na…(-t) ke(n) must be repeated in the main clause, although the initial na can be dropped.

na nả-t ke na?‘is it?’
na tsamma-t ke?‘are you?’
na mi na-t de-t ke?‘this?’

The examples below are all polar question forms of the same phrase, tsƛulla kekvot ‘you leave today’.

na tsƛulla-t ke kekvot?

‘are you leaving today?’

No particular emphasis or topicalization, this is a generic polar question. The latter interrogative marker comes directly after the first word of the declarative sentence, and the subject of the question is the entire clause or the verb, with the implication that the person asking knows that it will happen today, just not whether the person they are asking will do it (along with others), or whether the action is leaving or something else.

na tsƛulla kekvo-t ke?

‘are you leaving today?’

No particular emphasis or topicalization, this is also a generic polar question, but the latter interrogative marker is found clause finally. The subject of the questions is the entire clause, implying that the person asking doesn’t know whether the other is leaving and whether it will happen today.

na tsami-t ke (įo) tsƛulla kekvot?

‘are you leaving today?’

The subject of the question is ‘you’, and the independent pronoun tsami is included and moved clause initially. The focus particle įo~įe is optional.

na kekvo-t ke (įo) tsƛulla?

‘are you leaving today?’

The subject of the question is ‘today’, which is moved claused initially. The focus particle įo~įe is optional.

na tsƛulla-t ke kekvot, a tsami-t da?

‘what about you, are you leaving today?’

The subject of the question is ‘you’, which is topicalised and found clause finally. Without clause initial movement, the latter interrogative particle is found after the first word of the declarative sentence, and due to the presence of a topicalised argument, there can be no reading where the question is focused on the verb, even if the particle (-t) ke(n) is found directly after it.

na tsami-t da-t ke, (na) tsƛulla-t ke kekvot?

‘what about you, are you leaving today?’

The topicalised argument is ‘you’, which is moved clause initially, and the interrogative markers na…-t ke(n) combine with the topic markers a…Ø-t da such that a is dropped.

a tsami-t da, na tsƛulla-t ke kekvot?

‘what about you, are you leaving today?’

The topicalised argument is ‘you’, which is moved clause initially. The interrogative particles are found as they would be without topicalization. This has the more or less the same reading as na tsami-t da-t ke, (na) tsƛulla-t ke kekvot? This is more common than the previous construction.

§12.12.1.2 Negative Polar Questions

Negative polar questions are questions that are semantically negative, and in most cases they contain negated verb. The negative interrogative markers are nu…(-t) ko(n), which are otherwise completely syntactically analogous to their positive counterparts. One exception is that the latter negative interrogative particle (-t) ko is likely to be found after the negative auxiliary verb than in positive polar questions.

nu į-uġut kon nủįa na?‘is it not?’
nu į-uġun nuttsa-t ko?‘are you not?’
nu mi na-t de-t ko?‘(not) this?’

nu lulla-t ko kekvot tsuttsa?

‘are you not leaving today?

nu lullat kekvot tsuttsa-t ko?

‘are you not leaving today?’

nu tsami-t ko (įo) lullat kekvot tsutta?

‘are you not leaving today?’

nu kekvo-t ko (įo) lullat tsutta?

‘are you not leaving today?

nu lulla-t ko kekvot, a tsami-t da?

‘what about you, are you not leaving today?’

nu tsami-t da ko, (nu) lulla-t ko kekvot tsuttsa?

‘what about you, are you not leaving today?’

nu tsami-t da, nu lullat kekvo-t ko tsuttsa?

‘what about you, are you not leaving today?’

§12.12.1.3 Speculative Polar Questions

Speculative polar questions indicate that the speaker wonders about the questions. They behave much like normal polar questions, but the interrogative markers are na…(-t) ke įi~keįi, (-t) ke mo~kemo, (-t) ke ko(n)~keko(n) or for positive speculative polar questions and nu…(-t) ko įi~koįi, (-t) ko mo~komo, (-t) ko ko(n)~koko(n) for negative speculative polar questions. When the latter interrogative marker įi is not found directly after the first word (or head of a phrase) of the declarative sentence, it can instead be found clause finally as įi (or its variants mo and ko(n)). It is also possible to reverse the order and have kei when positive or kui when negative, especially clause finally. The particles įi can also be replaced by -t di or simply -ddi to indicate a more polite inquiry.

Positive speculative polar questions simply indicate that the speaker is wondering about the outcome, while negative speculative polar questions strongly imply that the speaker is expecting a negative answer, or inversely is framing the question as a negative to prompt an emphatically positive answer. Negative speculative polar questions often have a dubitative verb instead of the indicative mood. Note that (-t) ke/ko and di can be combined as -(t) ken di~kendi~kenni/kon di~kondi~konni, while įi is found as (-t) įi when not preceded by ke/ko.

positive speculative polar questions

na nả-t ke įi na?‘I wonder if it is’
na nả-t di na?‘I wonder if it might’
na tsamma-t keko?‘I wonder if you are’
na tsamma-t ken di?‘I wonder if you might be’
na mi na-t de-t kemo?‘this (I wonder)?’
na mi na-t den di?‘this (I do wonder)?’

na tsƛulla-t ke įi kekvot?

‘I wonder if you’re leaving today’

na tsƛulla(-t) di kekvo-t ke?

‘I wonder if you might be leaving today’

na kekvo-t ke įi (įo) tsƛulvl?

‘I wonder if you’re leaving today

na kekvo-t ke (įo) tsƛulla-t įi?

‘I wonder if you’re leaving today

na tsƛulla-t ke ko kekvot, a tsami-t da?

‘what about you, I wonder if you are leaving today?’

na tsami-t da-t ke, (na) tsƛulla kekvo-t kei?

‘what about you, I wonder if you are leaving today?’

a tsami-t da, na tsƛulla-t ke įi kekvot?

‘what about you, I wonder if you are leaving today?’

negative speculative polar questions

nu į-uġu-t ko įi nủįomi a?‘isn’t it/I wonder whether it isn’t?’
nu į-uġu-t kon ủįomi a-t įi?‘isn’t it/I wonder whether it isn’t’
nu į-uġu-t di tsuttsu?‘might you not be?’
nu mi na-t de-t kui?‘(not) this (I wonder)?’

nu lulla-t ko įi~kon di~nu lulla-t di kekvot nuttsu?

‘aren’t you leaving today?

nu lulla-t ko kekvot nuttsu-t įi?

‘aren’t you leaving today?’

nu tsami-t ko įi (įo) lullat kekvot nuttsu?

‘aren’t you leaving today?’

nu kekvo-t ko (įo) lullat nuttsu-t įi?

‘aren’t you leaving today?

nu lulla-t ko įi kekvot nuttsu, a tsami-t da?

‘what about you, aren’t you leaving today?’

nu tsami-t da-t kui, (nu) lulla-t ko kekvot nuttsu-t įi?

‘what about you, aren’t you leaving today?’

a tsami-t da, nu lullat kekvot nuttsu-t kui?

‘what about you, aren’t you leaving today?’

§12.12.1.4 Other Polar Questions

There are other types of polar questions that make use of different interrogative markers. These include recall, confirmatory and evaluative polar questions.

§12.12.1.4.1 Recall Polar Questions

Recall polar questions use the particles na…(-t) pi and indicates that the speaker is trying to recall information that they have known but can’t remember currently. Recall polar questions can only be positive. The particle pi is an unstressed form of pỉ ‘also, as well’. It can be replaced by (-t) kas, which is considered more polite.

na tsƛulla-t pi kekvot?

‘are you leaving today (again, I forgot)?’

na mi na-t de va-t kas?

‘this (I forget, remind me)?’

§12.12.1.4.2 Confirmatory Polar Questions

Confirmatory polar questions frame the question in such a way that the speaker strongly expects the speaker to confirm a question with a positive answer. This is done by using the interrogative particles na…(-t) gi. Confirmatory polar questions can be negative, although this is not common, in which case the latter negative interrogative (-t) ko(n) is either found before gi (ko-t gi or koggi), or pushed to the end of the clause.

na tsƛulla-t gi kekvot?

‘you’re leaving today, right?’

nu lulla-t ko-t gi~koggi kekvot tsuttsa?

‘you’re not leaving today, right?

nu lulla-t gi kekvot tsuttsa-t ko?

‘you’re not leaving today, right?’

§12.12.1.4.3 Evaluative Polar Questions

Evaluative polar questions use the particles na…(-t) met and emphasise that the speaker is asking about the person’s perception, evaluation or own thoughts on the question. They can be both positive or negative, in which case the latter negative interrogative marker ko(-t) is found before met (ko met or kommet) or pushed to the end of the clause. Like speculative polar questions, the indicative is often replaced by the dubitative in negative evaluative polar questions.

na tsƛulla-t met kekvot?

‘are you leaving today (do you think, do you reckon)?’

nu lulla-t ko met~kommet kekvot nuttsu?

‘are you not leaving tomorrow (do you think)?’

nu lulla-t met kekvot nuttsu-t ko?

‘are you not leaving tomorrow (do you think)?’

na tṡůiva-t met aṡkva?

‘is it cold outside (do you know)?’

na mi na-t de-t met?

‘this (do you reckon)?’

§12.12.1.5 Indirect Polar Questions

Indirect polar questions in Pine can be formulated either using a speculative polar question construction or by using an alternative question construction, usually na…-t ḷu. The indirect polar question is most commonly found in the dubitative. In negative indirect polar question, na is replaced by nu.

na tsipeġummannin ke, na miṡivus hey-t ke kon?

‘did they tell you if they will stay here tonight?’

mittat nukka, na ikkattsamutṇut-t ke ko heiįo įiuįa mi mỉkvoga na

‘I don’t know if I will have enough food to last through the winter’

na tsenegin ke, na haḍnus ḷu boagve gakka ỉƛƛisit ga-t bỉlįit ỉ

‘did you see if there were any berries left on the bushes around the house?’

§12.12.2 Alternative Questions

Alternative questions are those where two or more alternatives are given, and the question is about which of them is the correct one. There are two main alternative interrogative markers, na…-t ḷu or -t ḷu…-t ḷu, or koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt. There is quite a bit of variation as to how such questions are formed, which are described here. Alternative questions can lack an alternative, in which case it is simply implied. For example, na tsƛulla-t ḷu? are you leaving (or not)?’. Alternative questions are not usually negative.

§12.12.2.1 Alternative Questions with -t ḷu

There are multiple ways to frame alternative questions using the particle -t ḷu. The first way is to repeat the sequence na…-t ḷu in both alternatives, in which case the verb may be repeated or a different verb may be used. The second way is to only use -t ḷu in the second alternativebut na…-t ḷu in the first, in which case the verb is usually excluded from the second alternative. Finally, the third way uses na…-t ḷu in the first, and the second is introduced by iḷḷot, il or iḷḷu, which allows for a verb in the second alternative, although it may also be dropped.

na…-t ḷu, na…-t ḷu

na tsṃihet gỉktṡema-t ḷu, na (tsṃihet) ṛeikno-t ḷu?

‘do you want salmon or (do you want) trout?’

na tsƛulla-t ḷu kekvot, na (tsƛulla) skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or (are you leaving) tomorrow?’

na tsƛulla-t ḷu kekvot, na sittsiṡivva-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or are you staying here?’

na tsƛulla-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving (or not)?’

na…-t ḷu, …-t ḷu

na tsṃihet gỉktṡema-t ḷu, ṛeikno-t ḷu?

‘do you want salmon or trout?’

nu miḍḍyt gỉktsema-t ḷu, reikno-t ḷu tsủtset?

‘do you want neither salmon nor trout?’

na tsƛulla kekvot ḷu, skekvot ḷu?

‘are you leaving today or tomorrow?’

na…-t ḷu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu

na tsṃihet gỉktṡema-t ḷu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu (tsṃihet) ṛeikno?

‘do you want salmon or (do you want) trout?’

na tsƛulla kekvot ḷu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu (tsƛulla) skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or (are you leaving) tomorrow?’

na tsƛulla-t ḷu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu tsuttsa?

‘are you leaving or not?’

§12.12.2.2 Alternative Questions with koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu

Alternative questions with koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt or kiṡƛu are more or less identical to alternative questions in na…-t ḷu, but the initiall na…-t ḷu is replaced by koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu. One difference is that voiḷḷot~vaiḷḷůt can be used to introduced the second alternative, and it can appear as vuiḷḷot if the second alternative is negative. The adverb kiṡƛu can also be found as kiḷḷu.

koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu, na…-t ḷu

koiḷḷot~kiṡƛu tsṃihet gỉktṡema, na (tsṃihet) ṛeikno-t ḷu?

‘do you want salmon or (do you want) trout?’

koiḷḷot~kiṡƛu tsƛulla kekvot, na (tsƛulla) skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or (are you leaving) tomorrow?’

koiḷḷot~kiṡƛu tsƛulla kekvot, na sittsiṡivva-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or are you staying here?’

koiḷḷot tsƛulla (nu tsuttsa-t ḷu)?

‘are you leaving (or not)?’

koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu…-t ḷu, …-t ḷu

kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu tsṃihet gỉktṡema-t ḷu, ṛeikno-t ḷu?

‘do you want salmon or trout?’

kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu tsƛulla kekvot ḷu, skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today or tomorrow?’

koiḷḷot~kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu~voiḷḷot~vaiḷḷůt~vuiḷḷot

koiḷḷot~kiṡƛu tsṃihet gỉktṡema iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu~voiḷḷot (tsṃihet) ṛeikno?

‘do you want salmon or (do you want) trout?’

kaiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu tsƛulla kekvot ḷu iḷḷot~il~iḷḷu~vaiḷḷůt (tsƛulla) skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or (are you leaving) tomorrow?’

koiḷḷot~kiṡƛu tsƛulla vuiḷḷot tsuttsa?

‘are you leaving or not?’

Finally, a more colloquial or perhaps slightly more direct (or rude) construction is kiṡƛu…, kiṡ…-t ḷu.

kiṡƛu…, kiṡ…-t ḷu

kiṡƛu tsṃihet gỉktṡema, kiṡ ṛeikno-t ḷu?

‘do you want salmon or (do you want) trout?’

kiṡƛu tsƛulla kekvot, kiṡ skekvo-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving today, or (are you leaving) tomorrow?’

kiṡƛu tsƛulla, kiṡ tsuttsa-t ḷu?

‘are you leaving or not?’

§12.12.3 Table of Interrogative Particles

Below is a table summarising interrogative particles in Pine.

formfunctionexample
na Ø-t ke(n)positivena nả-t ke na?
‘is it’?
nu Ø-t ko(n)negativena uġu-t kon nủįa na?
‘is it not?’
na Ø-t ke įi
na Ø-t ke ko(n)
na Ø-t ke mo
na Ø-t di
speculative positivena nả-t ke įi na?
‘I wonder if it is’
nu Ø-t ko įi
nu Ø-t ko ko(n)
nu Ø-t ko mo
nu Ø-t di
speculative negativenu į-uġu-t ko mo na?
‘I wonder if it isn’t’
na Ø-t pi
na Ø-t kas
recall, politena nả-t kas na?
‘is it (please remind/tell me)?’
na Ø-t giconfirmatoryna nả-t gi na?
‘it is, isn’t it?’
na Ø-t metevaluativena nả-t met na?
‘do you reckon it is?’
na Ø-t ḷualternativena nả-t ḷu na?
‘is it (or not)?’
koiḷḷut~kůiḷḷůt~kiṡƛu…-t ḷuchoice alternativekůiḷḷůt nả na, uġu-t ḷu?
‘is it, or is it not?’

§12.13 Concord

Concord refers to the agreement between grammatical categories of related words. Number, animacy, participant, tense and mood concord can differ from what one might expect in Pine. For example, the third-person obviate has discongruent concord in number depending on the exact function and form of the third-person obviate referent – infrapositional pluralization is possible, but suprapositional pluralization is not. This section describes the main ways in which concord differs from what would be expected.

§12.13.1 Number Concord

Number in Pine is usually quite explicit – plurality is overtly marked on nouns by case endings or the asematic plural marker -gi/-ki, and likewise verbs usually overtly mark plurality of its participants. However, in a number of cases, number concord becomes more complex.

§12.13.1.1 Copular Predicate Number Discongruence

Pluralization of the copular predicate is usually reflected by the copula, even if the subject of the copula is itself singular – though this nearly only ever occurs with demonstrative pronouns as subjects. English does something similar, where both the demonstrative subject and the predicate must agree in number, as in ‘these are trees’ (not *this are trees or *these is trees). Pine on the other hand exhibits copular predicate number discongruence, which means that the subject may be singular but the copula will be plural if its predicate is plural.

nảt tammet ṇuokkogi mi na-t de

‘these are large trees’

nảt aneġongi mi na-t de

‘these are cirrius’

but

nảt aneġongi nỉ kvoḷḷogi-t de

‘these clouds are cirrius’

§12.13.1.2 Obviate Number Discongruence

The third-person obviate has some significant limitations when it comes to pluralization. In monovalent verbs, overt pluralization on the verb is not possible, regardless of the number of any nominal subject. This means that a monovalent verb with a third-person obviate subject will be singular even though the subject is plural, either morphosyntactically or semantically.

In polyvalent verbs, third-person obviate markings can only be pluralised through non-suprapositional pluralizing markers, as the third-person obviate cannot be suprapositional in Pine. One cannot therefore speak of discongruence in this case, as suprapositional pluralization is not possible due to other constraints.

Verb pluralization in this case is totally independent of nominal pluralization. The same is also true of all independent or non-verbal obviate pronouns. The third-person obviate only has singular forms, or rather forms that are not sensitive to pluralization.

Compare these singular-plural and non-obviate and obviate example that illustrate the number discongruence of third-person obviate subjects in monovalent verbs::

lulli mi sakvin įolullit mi sakvingi nỉ
‘the man1 left’‘the men1 left’
lullimin mi sakvin balullimin mi sakvingi ba
‘the man2 left’‘the men2 left’

The verb is singular (lullimin) regardless of the actual pluralization of the subject and so is the independent pronoun nỏ.

In polyvalent verbs, there may be an infrapositionally pluralised third-person obviate with a singular independent pronoun, for example a demonstrative:

neggetin mi au-t de

‘s/he1 saw these2 (ones)’

Here, the infrapositional third-person obviate is clearly pluralised through the suffix -in, yet the independent pronoun which is part of the demonstrative phrase mi au-t de is singular. This is an example of obviate number discongruence.

§12.13.2 Animacy Concord

Animacy in Pine is very loosely defined and especially subjective when compared to other languages with animacy distinctions. Generally, all living animals are animate, as well as living plants, although when talking about plants in general, they tend to be inanimate and all objects are inanimate, but a specific living plant may often be animate. However, animacy may be used to personify inanimate things, for example the sun, a river or a fire. Animacy is therefore both subject and context dependent. Often, non-human living things or personified non-living things, especially non-animals or insects may be more likely have an animate referent pronoun if the verb is agentive, but they may be more likely to be inanimate with unagentive verbs.

When a non-human animate participant is the object of a verb whose subject is human, it will nearly always have an inanimate verb referent, but it will be found with animate pronouns (for example with determiners) inside the noun phrase. This is sometimes referred to as split object animacy.

§12.13.2.1 Split Object Animacy

Animate but non-human objects of verbs with a human subject have an inanimate verb referent but use animate pronouns in determiner phrases or wherever an independent pronoun may arise. This is because the third-person obviate strictly refers to humans, and as a verb cannot have both its subject and object as a third-person animate, Pine must use the third-person inanimate for the object of such verbs:

(259)suonkkakkut daspittat ṇůegvet daġa nin nakkut sủkvan miṡ mįa sauƛen įo, a minda-t da
saa-N-kkakkut t-aspittat n-u--i-gfi-t t-ag-a nin nakkut suukfan mic mja sauTi-n ju-, a mint-a_0 t-a
[ˈsʊu̯ŋːkaʰkʊt ˈdasːpɪʰtat ˈn̥ʏy̯kᶣːɛh ˈdɑːɣɑ nɪːn ˈnaʰkʊt ˈsuːʰkʷan mɪʃ mjɑ ˈsɑu̯t͡ɬɛn jɔː ɑ ˈmɪnːdɑd ͜ dɑ]
suonkka-kkut dasp-iθ-at ṇůegv-et daġa nin na=kkut Ø-sủk-van miṡ mįa sauƛ-en įo a minda-Ø–t da
fish.bat-com hit-mom-dep head-illat pron.3a.acc cop.hyp.prs pron.3i.com 3a.ag.pst-kill.pst-2˚.pst try.and one.det fish-acc pron.3a top girl-act top
‘the girl tried to kill one fish by hitting it on the head with a fish bat’

In the example above, the verb suk- ‘kill’ is found with an inanimate object, sủkvan ‘s/he killed it’ (3a⟫3i), but both the independent pronoun ai in daspihat ai nin nakkut ‘by hitting her/him’ and mįa sauƛen įo ‘one fish’ have animate independent pronouns (ai and įo, although ai may also be understood to be inanimate in this form). With the particle miṡ ‘try and’ and animate referents, the only possible reading is that the fish was not successfully killed and was still alive, but if miṡ was absent and mįa sauƛen a was used instead, then one would have to assume that the killing was successful.

Split animacy may apply to more than only objects of verbs with a human subject, as it can sometimes also affect the choice of pronoun referent in restrictive relative clauses whose head is the object, and may also affect any subsequent referent of the non-human subject, such as when it becomes the subject of a subsequent clause. However, many if not most speakers may find it ungrammatical to accept split animacy in such cases, for example tṡảdnan sƛỏmmen kvaupṃa mi maḍḍi įo ‘the hunter found a sleeping bear’, where tṡadnan ‘s/he found it has an inanimate object but sƛỏmmen ‘that sleeps’ has an animate subject may also be heard as tṡảdnan ḷỏmmemi kvaupṃa mi maḍḍi įo, where ḷỏmmemi has clearly a third-person inanimate subject. However, it appears that the majority of speakers will disfavour split animacy applying to the verb lỏm- in such cases.

Split object animacy can be thought of as a non-human obviation strategy, but the exact reach of split animacy beyond the function of the object is often ambiguous and subject to some deal of variation, both between speakers and utterances, and is very much context and saliency dependent, much like animacy in general when it comes to non-human participants.

§12.13.3 Referent Discongruence

Referent discongruence refers to cases where the verbal participant differs from its nominal or pronominal referent in the phrase, excluding cases related to animacy described in the section above. Referent discongruence mostly concerns the use of a fourth-person verbal participant in reference to a third-person inanimate object. Such is the case with, for example, infinitival clauses, whose head is a third-person pronoun but whose object verbal referent is a fourth person. For example, telkat nẻ na ‘to write, writing’ is headed by the third-person inanimate pronoun na, but it is referred to using a fourth person when it functions as an object, for example: gamiha telkat nin ai ‘I like writing’, where -a in gamiha is a 2˚ prograde marker (therefore 1⟫4).

There are two main cases where referent discongruence occurs: with infinitives and ‘headless’ determiner phrases.

infinitives

Infinitival phrases have a third-person inanimate independent pronoun as their head (na/a) but have a fourth-person object referent. When functioning as subjects, the referent may either be a fourth person or a third person inanimate, but a third-person inanimate subject pronoun is much more common and recommended for standard language.

telkat ảlttit nẻ na‘to write books’
gamiha telkat ảlttit nin ai‘I like writing books’
butmeurrami (abmeurran) telkat ảlttit nẻ na‘writing books is difficult’

determiner phrases

Determiner phrases (mi…Ø) which lack a nominal head have a fourth-person verbal referent despite often having a third-person inanimate independent pronoun at its head. This is especially common in indirect interrogatives and other restrictive relative clauses. In certain cases, namely with mit- restrictive relative pronouns, speakers may or may not use a fourth-person referent with the mit- pronoun. This is the source of some debate with regard to standardization, but it seems most common to have concord between the mit- pronoun and the final independent pronoun (both a third-person inanimate) rather than with the object verb referent.

mittyt mi ṇilįoaġnevagi naįįa niįįas ai nủka

‘I don’t know where my keys are’

(kủka 1⟫4, but mi….ai is 3i)

Here, the verbal object (-a) is a fourth person but the determiner phrase’s head ai is a third-person inanimate. In the example below, the initial mit- restrictive relative pronoun can either be congruent with its head (migits), or less commonly with its verbal referent (muguts).

(260)mittyt migits~muguts tṡảrkken ḷa ṃaktunnemi ai nủka
mitta-t migic // muguc c--aarkki-n La m-aktunni-mi ai nuuka
[ˈmɪʰtʏt ˈmɪːgɪt͡s ~ ˈmʊːgʊt͡s ˈt͡ʃærːkɛn ɬɑ ˈm̥akːtʊnːɛːmɪ æɪ̯ ˈnuːkɑ]
mid-ϕyt m=igi=ts tṡảrkk-en ḷa h-ṃakt=unn-vemi ai nủ=k-a
know-conneg.itr that.3i.ess ~ that.4.ess reindeer.meat-pat foc 3i.unag-taste-3i.hyp.prs pron.3i.acc 1.ag.neg.aux-2˚.prs
‘I don’t know what reindeer meat tastes like’

non-restrictive relative clauses

Discongruence also occurs with the fourth person in certain cases – when a fourth person is the subject of a non-restrictive relative clause, the final pronoun of the relative clause is usually a third person despite agreement being conserved, for example in the alignment of the cocopula, if found:

nả mi ma nakvỉgat nẻ na, namun tsảbbi malkkikinnit a

naa mi ma nakfiigat ni-i- na, namun c-aap-pi malkkikinnit a/

[næː mɪ mɑː ˈnaʰkᶣiːgat neː nɑː ˈnɑːmʊn ˈt͡sæːpːɪ mˈalːkɪkɪnːɪh ɑː]

nả mi ma nakvỉg-at nẻ na nam-un tsảbb-i m-alk-ϕin-kin=nit a

cop.3i.prs det pron.4a.act give.birth-dep cop.hyp.prs pron.3i.act which-pat hope-acc

4-kin-give-1˚.hyp.pst-3˚.ret.io pron.3i

‘giving birth is something that gave her/him hope’

In the example above, the subject of the non-restrictive relative clause is mi ma ‘something’, which is found in the patientive (namun), and clearly referenced in the relative clause (m-Ø-ϕin 43i) and the ditransitive final (-kinnit 4⟫3i⟫⟫3a), yet the referent pronoun a does not agree with this. Some speakers may use ma here, but it is most common for the reference pronoun at the end of a non-restrictive relative clause to only be a third person (animate or inanimate).

§12.13.4 Agentivity & Case Congruence

The relationship between the pronominal affixes of a verb and independent pronouns or nominal referents requires some clarification due to the discongruence in terminology and syntactic roles. The agentivity of a subject is encoded in nominal or pronominal referents through case – unagentive subjects are found in the patientive case while agentive subjects are found in the active case. The agentivity of the verbal participant is exclusively expressed through the form of the suprapositional pronoun. Therefore, an infrapositional unagentive nominal or pronominal subject referent will agree with the form of the object verbal pronoun – such cross congruence can indeed be confusing. The case of the nominal or pronominal referent thus only refers to its morphosyntactic function in the phrase, not whether or not it is supra- or infrapositional. Therefore, a verb may appear with a suprapositional pronoun which bears the agentivity of the infrapositional referent – this type of cross-transfer of agentivity is the cause of much confusion for learners of Pine. The table below outlines the morphosyntactic function and case of the referent as well as the surface form of the verbal pronouns.

verbreferentexample
suprapositionalsubject (prograde)agentiveactiveganegi, a gami-t da
‘me, I see her/him’
unagentivepatientiveṇevỏkki, a gamu-t da
‘me, I’m afraid of her/him’
object (retrograde)agentiveaccusativeganegemi, a ṇiġi-t da
‘me, s/he sees me’
unagentiveṇevỏkkemi, a ṇiġi-t da
‘me, s/he is afraid of me’
infrapositionalsubject (retrograde)agentiveactivetsṇegemat, a gami-t da
‘me, I see you’
unagentivepatientivepivỏkkemat, a gamu-t da
‘me, I am afraid of you’
object (prograde)agentiveaccusativetsṇegat, a ṇiġi-t da
‘me, you see me’
unagentivepivỏkkat, a ṇiġi-t da
‘me, you are afraid of me’

§12.14 Negation

Negation in Pine is asymmetrical, meaning that affirmative phrases and negative phrases differ in a number of ways – unlike English, it is not enough to simply add a negating adverb to a phrase to make it negative in Pine:

nả ƛa deįįa daddas‘but someone is here’
uġun ƛu deįįa nủnan vuoggas‘but no one is here’

Negation is expressed through a negative auxiliary and by a connegative form of the main verb, often in nukk- in informal registers:

ƛekvi gůelgiṡ‘the trout bit’
ƛekvat nukki~tuįįi gůelgiṡ‘the trout didn’t bite’
kinkkutummi nỉpot sỉnttson ‘a stout got caught in the snare’
kinkkutuppat nỉpot nukki~sussi sỉnttson‘a stout didn’t get caught in the snare’

Negation always co-occurs with predicate negation – every affirmative morpheme that has a negative counterpart is made negative in a negative phrase. So instead of saying ‘nobody came’, Pine says minttat nunnin vuoddas, literally ‘nobody did not come’. Words that have a negative form include many conjunctions such as va ‘and’ and vu ‘and (neg)’ or ƛa ‘but’ and ƛu ‘but (neg)’, indefinite pronouns such as daddas ‘someone’ and vuoddas ‘ no one’ or ỏhakiṡki ‘something’ and vuoggas ‘nothing’ or some coordinate conjunctive adverbs such as go-t ke ‘and, but’ and go-t ku ‘and, but (neg)’. Negation can also be expressed through verbal infixes as the medial -uṡṡ- or its corresponding adverbial initial form uṡṡ(a)-, for example in migvivot ‘edible’ and migvuṡṡovot~migvoṡot ‘inedible’ or alkka ‘permission, giving’ and uṡṡalkka ‘refusal’.

Negation can also take the form of a negative adverb, most commonly ủt or oat, which may be found in negative phrases for added emphasis, or in cases where a statement does not contain a verb that can be negative, such as ủt deįįa ‘not here’ or oat įoa ‘not now’.

§12.14.1 Verbal Negation

To render a verb negative, Pine requires the verb to be found in a dependent form called the connegative form. The connegative form depends on the transitivity of the verb, and in the case of intransitive verbs, on the order. Intransitive negative verbs have one autonomous and one hyponomous connegative form, -ϕat and -ϕit respectively, while transitive verbs only have one form for either order, -ϕut/-ϕyt. The archephoneme ϕ causes fortition of the preceding consonant, though there are some exceptions (for example, verbs in -sk-, -sṃ-, -st-, -ṡk-, -ṡt- and others are unaffected by -ϕ) For example, mid- ‘know’ has the intransitive connegative forms mittat and mittit and the transitive connegative form in mittyt, but add- ‘steer’ only has the form attut, despite one verb having the coda -d- and the other -dd-. The copula naġan ‘be’ has an irregular connegative form in uġun (or uġu before hyphenated clitics).

As the connegated verb is an infinitive form (it is not properly conjugated), a negative auxiliary (with a root difficult to abstract as it is highly irregular, but often shown as --) is conjugated instead. Most commonly, the negation of a verb does not affect word order – the connegative verb is in the same position as its affirmative form, but the negative auxiliary appears before the subject phrase:

affirmativenegative
[V] [O] [S] [V.conneg] [O] neg.aux [S]
tṃigvanin mitṇa bỉlįit ỉ mi bįuḷḷu įo‘the boy eats a lot berries’
mikvyt vaḥḥa bỉlįit ỉ tuįįanin mi bįuḷḷu įo‘the boy does not eat any berries’